Basic Operation Configuration and Advanced Operation Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Manual Guide
Volume 1
System Architecture and Installation
Firmware Revisions 21.72/25.72
Orifice / Differential Pressure
Liquid Flow Metering Systems
Volume 2B Basic Operation

Volume 3B Configuration and
Advanced Operation
Volume 4B Modbus Database

Addresses and
Index Numbers
Volume 5
Technical Bulletins
Warranty & Licences
Manual Guide
Effective May 1999

About Our Company
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. is the world’s leading manufacturer and supplier of
panel-mount custody transfer flow computers and controllers. Our mission is to
Measure the Difference! continue to achieve higher levels of customer and user satisfaction by applying
the basic company values: our people, our products and productivity.
Omni flow computers - Our products have become the international flow computing standard. Omni
Our products are currently Flow Computers pursues a policy of product development and continuous
being used world-wide at:
improvement. As a result, our flow computers are considered the “ brain” and
❑ Offshore oil and gas
production facilities
“ cash register” of liquid and gas flow metering systems.
❑ Crude oil, refined Our staff is knowledgeable and professional. They represent the energy,
products, LPG, NGL and intelligence and strength of our company, adding value to our products and
gas transmission lines
services. With the customer and user in mind, we are committed to quality in
❑ Storage, truck and
marine loading/offloading everything we do, devoting our efforts to deliver workmanship of high caliber.
terminals Teamwork with uncompromising integrity is our lifestyle.
❑ Refineries;
petrochemical and
cogeneration plants.
Contacting Our Corporate Headquarters
"
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
10701 Corporate Drive, Suite 300
Stafford, Texas 77477 USA
#
Phone: 281-240-6161
Fax: 281-240-6162
World-wide Web Site:

http://www.omniflow.com
E-mail Addresses:
!$" techsupport@omniflow.com
info@omniflow.com
Getting User Support

Technical and sales support is available world-wide through our corporate or
authorized representative offices. If you require user support, please contact the
location nearest you (see insert) or our corporate offices. Our staff and
representatives will enthusiastically work with you to ensure the sound operation
of your flow computer.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xi
Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Manual Guide
About the Flow Computer Applications

Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 Flow Computers are integrable into the majority of
liquid and gas flow measurement and control systems. The current firmware
revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers are:
❑ 20.71/24.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
❑ 21.71/25.71: Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(US/metric units)
❑ 22.71/26.71: Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (US/metric units)
❑ 23.71/27.71: Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (US/metric units)
About the User Manual

This manual applies to .71+ firmware revisions of Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
Flow Computers. It is structured into 5 volumes and is the principal part of your
flow computer documentation.
Target Audience
As a user’s reference guide, this manual is intended for a sophisticated audience
with knowledge of liquid and gas flow measurement technology. Different user
levels of technical know-how are considered in this manual. You need not be an
expert to operate the flow computer or use certain portions of this manual.
However, some flow computer features require a certain degree of expertise
and/or advanced knowledge of liquid and gas flow instrumentation and electronic
measurement. In general, each volume is directed towards the following users:
❑ Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation
♦ Installers
♦ System/Project Managers
♦ Engineers/Programmers
♦ Advanced Operators
♦ Operators
❑ Volume 2. Basic Operation
♦ All Users
❑ Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
❑ Volume 4. Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers
❑ Volume 5. Technical Bulletins
♦ Users with different levels of expertise.
xii ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Manual Structure
The User Manual comprises 5 volumes; each contained in separate binding for
easy manipulation. You will find a detailed table of contents at the beginning of
each volume.
Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 1 is generic to all applications and considers both US and metric units.
This volume describes:
❑ Basic hardware/software features
❑ Installation practices
❑ Calibration procedures
❑ Flow computer specifications
Volume 2. Basic Operation

User Reference This volume is application specific and is available in four separate versions (one
Documentation - The User for each application revision). It covers the essential and routine tasks and
Manual is structured into procedures that may be performed by the flow computer operator. Both US and
five volumes. Volumes 1
and 5 are generic to all flow metric units are considered.
computer application
revisions. Volumes 2, 3 and
General computer-related features are described, such as:
4 are application specific. ❑ Overview of keypad functions
These have four versions
each, published in separate ❑ Adjusting the display
documents; i.e., one per ❑ Clearing and viewing alarms
application revision per
volume. You will receive the ❑ Computer totalizing
version that corresponds to ❑ Printing and customizing reports
your application revision.
The volumes respective to The application-related topics may include:
each application revision
are: ❑ Batching operations
Revision 20/24.71: ❑ Proving functions
Volume #s 2a, 3a, 4a ❑ PID control functions
Revision 21/25.71:
❑ Audit trail
Volume #s 2b, 3b, 4b
Revision 22/26.71:
❑ Other application specific functions
Volume #s 2c, 3c, 4c Depending on your application, some of these topics may not be included in your
Revision 23/27.71: specific documentation. An index of display variables and corresponding key
Volume #s 2d, 3d, 4d
press sequences that are specific to your application are listed at the end of
For example, if your flow
computer application
each version of this volume.
revision is 20/24.71, you will
be supplied with Volumes
2a, 3a & 4a, along with
Volume 3. Configuration and Advanced Operation
Volumes 1 & 5. Volume 3 is intended for the advanced user. It refers to application specific
topics and is available in four separate versions (one for each application
revision). This volume covers:
❑ Application overview
❑ Flow computer configuration data entry
❑ User-programmable functions
❑ Modbus Protocol implementation
❑ Flow equations and algorithms
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xiii

 Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 4. Modbus
Volume 4 is intended for the system programmer (advanced user). It comprises
a descriptive list of database point assignments in numerical order, within our
firmware. This volume is application specific, for which there is one version per
application revision.
Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Manual Updates and Volume 5 includes technical bulletins that contain important complementary
Technical Bulletins - information about your flow computer hardware and software. Each bulletin
Volume 5 of the User covers a topic that may be generic to all applications or specific to a particular
Manual is a compendium of
Technical Bulletins. They revision. They include product updates, theoretical descriptions, technical
contain updates to the user specifications, procedures, and other information of interest.
manual. You can view and
print updates from our This is the most dynamic and current volume. Technical bulletins may be added
website: to this volume after its publication. You can view and print these bulletins from
http://www.omniflow.com our website.
Conventions Used in this Manual

Typographical Several typographical conventions have been established as standard reference
Conventions - These are to highlight information that may be important to the reader. These will allow you
standard graphical/text to quickly identify distinct types of information.
elements used to denote
types of information. For
your convenience, a few
conventions were
CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION
established in the manual’s
layout design. These Sidebar Notes / InfoTips Sidebar notes or “ InfoTips” consist of concise
highlight important information of interest which is enclosed in a gray-
Example: shaded box placed on the left margin of a page.
information of interest to the
reader and are easily These refer to topics that are either next to them, or
INFO - Sidebar notes are used to
caught by the eye. highlight important information in on the same or facing page. It is highly
a concise manner. recommended that you read them.
Keys / Keypress Keys on the flow computer keypad are denoted with
Sequences brackets and bold face characters (e.g.: the ‘up
arrow’ key is denoted as [%]). The actual function of
Example: the key as it is labeled on the keypad is what
appears between brackets. Keypress sequences
[Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n]
that are executed from the flow computer keypad are
expressed in a series of keys separated by a space
(as shown in the example).
Screen Displays
Sample screens that correspond to the flow
Example: computer display appear surrounded by a dark gray
border with the text in bold face characters and
Use Up/Down Arrows mono-spaced font. The flow computer display is
To Adjust Contrast; actually 4 lines by 20 characters. Screens that are
Left, Right Arrows more than 4 lines must be scrolled to reveal the text
To Adjust Backlight shown in the manual.
xiv ALL.71+ ! 05/99

CONVENTION USED DESCRIPTION
Headings
Sequential heading numbering is used to categorize
Example: topics within each volume of the User Manual. The
highest heading level is a chapter, which is divided
2. Chapter Heading into sections, which are likewise subdivided into
subsections. Among other benefits, this facilitates
2.3. Section Heading
information organization and cross-referencing.
2.3.1. Subsection Heading
Figure Captions Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

Example: appear in each chapter. The first number identifies
the chapter, followed by the sequence number and
Fig. 2-3. Figure No. 3 of title of the illustration.
Chapter 2
Page Numbers Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

chapter and technical bulletin. Page numbers are
Example: preceded by the chapter number followed by a
hyphen. Technical bulletins only indicate the page
2-8
number of that bulletin. Page numbers are located
on the outside margin in the footer of each page.
Application Revision and The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

Effective Publication Date common to all application revisions and are denoted
as All.71. Content of Volumes 2, 3 and 4 are
Examples: application specific and are identified with the
All.71 ! 03/98 application number. These identifiers are included
on every page in the inside margin of the footer,
20/24.71 ! 03/98
opposite the page number. The publication/effective
21/25.71 ! 03/98 date of the manual follows the application
22/26.71 ! 03/98 identification. The date is expressed as month/year
(e.g.: March 1998 is 03/98).
23/27.71 ! 03/98
Trademark References
The following are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.:
❏ Omni 3000
❏ Omni 6000
❏ OmniCom
Other brand, product and company names that appear in this manual are
trademarks of their respective owners.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xv
Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

This manual is copyright protected. All rights reserved. No part of this manual
may be used or reproduced in any form, or stored in any database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford,
Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of this manual for any purpose other than
your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., in conformance with its policy of product
development and improvement, may make any necessary changes to this
document without notice.
Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Product warranty and licenses for use of Omni flow computer firmware and of
!
OmniCom Configuration PC Software are included in the first pages of each
Volume of this manual. We require that you read this information before using
your Omni flow computer and the supplied software and documentation.
If you have not done so already, please complete and return to us the product
registration form included with your flow computer. We need this information for
Important! warranty purposes, to render you technical support and serve you in future
upgrades. Registered users will also receive important updates and information
about their flow computer and metering system.
Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
xvi ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 1
User Manual
System Architecture
and Installation
Effective May 1999

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Contents of Volume 1
1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Operator’s Panel .................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1. LCD Display ..........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers.................................................................................1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs...............................................................................1-2
1.2.4. Active Alarm LED..................................................................................................1-2
1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED.....................................................................................................1-2
1.2.6. Operator Keypad ...................................................................................................1-2
1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board....................................................................... 1-4
1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module............................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations.......................................................................................1-6
1.4.2. Extended Back Panel ............................................................................................1-7
1.5. Central Processor Module................................................................................... 1-8
1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules .................................................................................. 1-9
1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation ........................................................................................ 1-10
1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules.............................................................................................. 1-11
1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules ........................................................................... 1-12
1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules....................................................................... 1-16
1.7. Operating Power ................................................................................................ 1-17
1.8. Firmware and Software...................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU........................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.2. Cycle Time.......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration..................................................................... 1-19
1.8.4. PC Communications Interface ............................................................................. 1-19
1.8.5. OmniComâ Configuration PC Software ............................................................... 1-20
1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance ........................................................................................ 1-20
1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer ........................................................................ 1-21
ii ALL.71+ w 05/99
Volume 1 System Architecture and Installation
2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules....................................................................2-1
2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules........................................................... 2-2
2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers .............................................................. 2-2
2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus Physical I/O Points ...................... 2-2
2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs ........................................................................... 2-3
2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration Charts .............................................. 2-4
2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules ........................................................................2-6
2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or Selectable Address ............................ 2-7
2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module............................................................................. 2-8
2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-10
2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules.........................................................................2-11
2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module ....................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................... 2-12
2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module..........................................................................2-13
2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module .......................................................................2-15
2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module........................................................................2-16
3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1

3.1. Mechanical Installation.........................................................................................3-1
3.1.1. Panel Mounting..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations .................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification............................................................................................ 3-2
3.2. Input Power...........................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1. AC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.2. DC Power ............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3. Safety Considerations ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3. Power Terminals...................................................................................................3-5
3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals ........................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals ................................................................ 3-6
3.4. Power Supply Module Switching Regulator .......................................................3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 iii

4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1

4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo Module) ....................................................... 4-1
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type Combo Modules ...................................... 4-2
4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E Combo Module).......................................... 4-3
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking with E Type Combo Modules ................ 4-4
5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1

5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers.............................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact......................................................................... 5-2
5.3. Wiring RTD Probes .............................................................................................. 5-3
5.4. Wiring Densitometers .......................................................................................... 5-4
5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type Combo Module ................................5-4
5.4.2. Solartronä Densitometers......................................................................................5-4
5.4.3. Sarasotaä Densitometers ......................................................................................5-6
5.4.4. UGCä Densitometers ............................................................................................5-8
5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000 Transmitters .................................................... 5-10
5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters.................................................................. 5-11
5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 Transmitter to A Type or E Type Process
I/O Combination Modules .................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motionä RFT 9739 via RS-485 Serial Communications........... 5-12
5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motionä RFT9739 via Serial RS-232-C to 485 Converter ........ 5-13
6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1

6.1. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs .......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output ......................................................6-2
6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices .................................................................6-4
6.3. Provers ................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches............................................................6-5
6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooksä Compact Prover..............................................................6-5
6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover ............................6-6
iv ALL.71+ w 05/99
7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1

7.1. Serial Port Connection Options...........................................................................7-1
7.2. Connecting to Printers .........................................................................................7-2
7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1) ............................................................ 7-2
7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1) ................................................................ 7-3
7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and Modem ..............................................7-4
7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-drop Modes .......................................7-6
7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ................................................... 7-6
7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications ........................................................ 7-7
7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier in Multi-drop Applications ........... 7-7
7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode ....................................................................... 7-8
7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device...........................................................................7-9
7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an Allen-Bradley KE Module ...............7-10
8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1

8.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................8-1
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode .....................................................................8-2
8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode .............................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode................................................................. 8-3
8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode............................................................................... 8-3
8.3. Calibration Instructions........................................................................................8-4
8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input....................................................... 8-4
8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel......................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output ................................................. 8-7
8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points .................................................... 8-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 v
9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1

9.1. Environmental ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2. Electrical............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3. Microprocessor CPU............................................................................................ 9-1
9.4. Backplane............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules .............................................................. 9-2
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs ....................................................................................... 9-2
9.7. Detector Switch Inputs ........................................................................................ 9-3
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo Module ...................................................... 9-3
9.9. Analog Inputs ....................................................................................................... 9-3
9.10. RTD Inputs............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.11. Analog Outputs .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs ............................................................................ 9-4
9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface ............................................................................... 9-5
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible ...............................................................................................9-5
9.13.2. RS-485..................................................................................................................9-5
9.14. Operator Keypad.................................................................................................. 9-5
9.15. LCD Display .......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.16. Electromechanical Counters............................................................................... 9-6
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs.......................................................................... 9-6
9.18. Security................................................................................................................. 9-6
vi ALL.71+ w 05/99
Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel ................................................................................ 1-3
Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000 ..................................................................... 1-4
Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000 ..................................................................... 1-5
Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000........................................................ 1-6
Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right) .............................................. 1-7
Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings ..................................................................... 1-8
Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations ................................................ 1-9
Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works ............................................................................. 1-10
Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module Model # 6011 - Jumper Settings ......................................................... 1-11
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and LED Indicators .............. 1-12
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats.................................................. 1-13
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 ................................................. 1-14
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings................................................. 1-15
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118........................................................................... 1-18
Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000.............................................................. 2-4
Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000.............................................................. 2-5
Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers ................................................. 2-6
Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address......................................... 2-7
Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3 or Channel 4) ............... 2-8
Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings..................................................... 2-9
Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency Densitometer Setup .................... 2-10
Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings.................................................................... 2-11
Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-12
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings ....................................................................... 2-13
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings..................................................................... 2-15
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model 68-6203 - Jumper
Settings ........................................................................................................................... 2-16
Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower) .................................................. 3-1
Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower) ....................................... 3-5
Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only) ...................................... 3-6
Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118................................................................................ 3-8
ALL.71+ w 05/99 vii

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 User Manual Figures of Volume 1
Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1

Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)..............................................4-2
Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC .....................................................4-3
Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC...............................................4-3
Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking ................................................4-4
Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)...................................................5-1
Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact ...........................................................................................5-2
Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe ..........................................................................5-3
Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module ...5-4
Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartron Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo
Module...............................................................................................................................5-5
Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module....5-6
Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasota Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo
Module...............................................................................................................................5-7
Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGC Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module..........5-8
Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGC Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module .....5-9
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywell Smart Transmitter ...................................................................... 5-10
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter.............. 5-11
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motion RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter Via
Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-6205) .................................... 5-12
Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs.....................................................6-1
Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input .............................................................................6-2
Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output ..........................................................................6-3
Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer ........................................................6-4
Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooks Compact Prover ................................................................................6-5
Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks Compact Prover ........................................6-6
Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer..............................................7-2
Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer...................................................7-3
Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female Connector (Using Port #2 as an
example)............................................................................................................................7-4
Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female Connector .....................................7-5
Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem.........................................................................................7-5
Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer Feature via RS-485
Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop Mode ...................................................................7-6
Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode using RS-232-C
Communications. ...............................................................................................................7-7
viii ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485 Communications in
Four-wire Multi-drop Mode................................................................................................. 7-8
Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem ................................................. 7-9
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradley KE Communications Module.............................. 7-10
Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel............................................................. 8-6
ALL.71+ w 05/99 ix
1. Overview of Hardware and Software

Features
1.1. Introduction
BASIC FEATURES - Omni Omni 3000ä and Omni 6000ä Flow Computers are reliable, easy to use,
flow computers are uniquely versatile measurement instruments. They are factory-programmed for
applicable to liquid and gas
flow measurement, control
single or multiple meter run configurations to measure crude oils, refined
and communication systems, products, NGLs, LPGs, ethylene, propylene, natural gas, and specialty gases.
and custody transfer Measurement of other flowing products can also be provided.
operations. It’s basic features
are: Extensive communications capability enables the Omni 6000 to be used in a
q 32-bit processing with variety of Master/Slave configurations for high-speed data transfer applications,
math co-processor for and as a large communication submaster. The flow computer can also be
fast, multi-tasking hardware configured as a medium-size Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) with
execution
significant digital I/O capability.
q 500 msec calculation
cycle Your Omni Flow Computer connects to various sensors monitoring pipeline flow
q Plug-in, assignable digital, in your transmission, petrochemical or process measurement application. It
serial and combination I/O
modules
calculates, displays and prints data that will be used for operational or billing
q Point-to-point digital
functions.
transmitter interface
The computer is configured to match your piping system requirements. Its non-
q 14-bit A/Ds, temperature
restrictive bus design permits any combination of inputs and outputs to meet
trimmed
q No I/O multiplexers, no
most metering, flow and valve control, and communication requirements.
potentiometers Plug-in modules furnish the input and output channels as needed and provide
q Photo-optical Isolation of an assurance of maximum product life by higher accuracy measurement
each I/O point
technologies such as meter pulse fidelity checking, and Rosemount and
q Meter pulse fidelity
checking Honeywellä digital transmitter interface modules. Up to 4 serial ports in some
q Optional Honeywellä and models are available for printing reports and other communications tasks. All
Rosemount digital I/O modules are quality tested and temperature trimmed to optimize the 14-bit
transmitter interface analog resolution, and burned-in before shipment for field installation.
modules
q Dual LEDs indicate
active/fused digital I/O
q Selectable digital I/O,
individually fused
q Standard, field-proven
firmware ¾no need for
custom programming
q User-configurable control
logic
q Up to 4 flow/pressure
control loops
q User-configurable
variables for displays and
reports
(Continues…)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Overview of Hardware and Software Features
1.2. Operator’s Panel

BASIC FEATURES - The operator’s panel shown (Fig. 1-1) is standard for all applications and is
(Continued) used to display and enter all data. All data can also be accessed via any of the
q Data archive and report serial ports.
storage
q Modbusä peer-to-peer
communications to
38.4kbps for PLC/DCS 1.2.1. LCD Display
q Real-time dial-up for
The 4-line by 20-alpha-numeric character, back-lit Liquid Crystal Display is
diagnostics
updated every 200 ms. It displays all messages and system variables in English
q International testing
q Includes OmniComâ
language engineering units. Backlighting and display viewing angle are
configuration software adjustable from the keypad (press [Setup] then [Display] and follow the
q Three year warranty displayed instructions).
1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers

Three non-resetable, 6-digit electromechanical counters are included on the
front panel for non-volatile backup totalizing. They can be programmed to count
gross, net, mass or energy units at any rate up to 10 counts per second.
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs

These dual-color LEDs indicate when the user is in the Diagnostic Mode
calibrating the I/O modules, or when in the Program Mode changing the
configuration of the computer. The LEDs change from green to red after a valid
password is requested and entered. The computer is in the normal Display
Mode when neither of these LEDs are on.
1.2.4. Active Alarm LED

New unacknowledged alarms cause this LED to glow red. This changes to
green as soon as the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the [Cancel/Ack] key
on the keypad.
1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED

INFO - Pressing the [Alpha This LED glows green to show that the next key only will be shifted. A red LED
Shift] key twice will put the indicates that the shift lock is on.
shift lock on. The shift lock is
canceled by pressing one
more time or automatically
after the [Display/Enter] key 1.2.6. Operator Keypad
is pressed.
Control of the flow computer is via the 34-button alphanumeric membrane
Help System - These
keypad, with tactile domes and audio feedback. Through the keypad you have
computers are equipped with the capability to configure your system, access and modify calibration data on-
a powerful context-sensitive line, and view or print process data. Configuration data can also be entered
help system. Press the remotely by serial port and is stored in battery backed-up CMOS SRAM
[Help] key (bottom right)
memory. Passwords and an internal program inhibit switch provide tamper-
twice to activate the help
displays. Cancel the help proof security.
screens by pressing the
[Prog] key.
1-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

DIAGNOSTIC LED LCD DISPLAY

Glows green when in the Is 4 lines by 20
Diagnostic Mode. Glows characters. Backlight and
red when a valid viewing angle are
password is entered. adjustable via the keypad.
Flowrate BBL/Hr
FT-101 1550.5
PROGRAM LED Cumulative BBLS THREE 6-DIGIT,
Glows green when in the ELECTROMECHANICAL
FT-101 234510 COUNTERS
Program Mode. Glows red
when a valid password is These non-resetable
entered. counters are assigned via
the keypad.
Total A Total B Total C
DIAG/PROG KEY
000682 009456 023975 ACTIVE ALARM LED
Used to access
Diagnostic and Program Glows red when a new
Modes. Diagnostic Active Alarm alarm occurs. Glows
green when an
Program Alpha Shift acknowledged alarm
ARROW KEYS exists.
Used to move the cursor
and scroll displays. Also Diag Alpha
used as software ‘zero’ Prog Shift ALPHA SHIFT LED
and as span control Net Energy
Glows green for a single
Gross Mass SG/API Control
during calibration. character shift. Glows red
A B C D E F when the shift lock is on.
& % 7 8 9 /
OPERATOR KEYPAD Temp Press Density D.P. Orifice Meter

Has 34 keys, domed G H I J K L THREE-FUNCTION KEYS
membrane with tactile # $ 4 5 6 * These activate process
and audio feedback. variable or alpha-numeric
Time Counts Factor Preset Batch Analysis
character functions.
M N O P Q R
: “ 1 2 3 =
SPACE/CLEAR /
CANCEL/ACK KEY Print Prove Status Alarms Product Setup DISPLAY/ENTER / HELP
Used to clear data and S T U V W X KEY
insert spaces in the ; , 0 . - + Used to enter a key press
Program Mode. It is also sequence and to access
Cancel / Ack Input Output Help
used to cancel key press the Help System.
Space Y Z Display
sequences and, in the
Clear ( ) Enter
Display Mode,
acknowledge alarms.
Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board

INFO - Passive backplane Mounted on the passive backplane are DIN standard connectors which are
simply means that no active bussed in two sections. The front section is a high performance, 16-bit bus
circuitry is contained on it.
The active circuitry is
which accepts the Central Processor Module. The Omni 6000 computer has 3
contained on the modules other connectors available in this section to accept memory expansion and
that plug into it. future product enhancements.
The rear 8-bit I/O bus section comprises 10 connectors on the Omni 6000 and 4
on the Omni 3000, which can accept any type of optically isolated I/O module
manufactured by Omni. The rearmost connector on both computers accepts the
system AC/DC power supply module. Dual ribbon cable assemblies (Omni
6000) and a single ribbon cable (Omni 3000) connect the I/O connectors on the
backplane to the back panel terminals. (See Fig. 1-2 below and Fig. 1-3 on
facing page.)
‹ CAUTION! ‹
These units have an integral
cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000
1-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

‹ CAUTION! ‹
cabinet latching mechanism
which first must be
disengaged by lifting the
bezel upwards, before
withdrawing the unit from the
case.
Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-5

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module

The AC receptacle of the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 back panel is a power line
filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is contained on a separate
four-conductor cable which plugs into the power supply. The power supply used
with this version is a Model 68-6118; no physical fuses (see 1.7. Operating
Power).
1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations

The Omni 6000 terminal blocks are identified TB1 through TB10 with terminals
marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 120 circuit paths to the
passive backplane. The DC terminals are on TB11.
The Omni 3000 terminal blocks are identified as TB1 through TB4, with
terminals marked 1 through 12 for each block. These provide 48 circuit paths to
the passive backplane. The DC terminal is on TB5.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp fast-blow
manufactured by Littlefuse,
Model 225.003. All AC fuses
are ½ amp slow-blow
Model 229.500.
Fig. 1-4. Back Panel Terminations Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
1-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.4.2. Extended Back Panel

Several flow computer mounting options are available with the extended back
panel. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and DC power. Extended 64-
conductor ribbon cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length
of 5 feet.
For the Omni 6000 (dimensions: 3” x 18”), this panel incorporates all the
terminal blocks TB1 through TB10, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 through TB8.
The Omni 3000 extended back panel (dimensions: 3” x 8½”) also incorporates
all the terminal blocks TB1 through TB4, with terminals marked 1 through 12. In
addition to the terminal blocks, extra DC (fused), return and shield terminals are
provided for TB1 and TB2.
Extended Back Panel

AC/DC Fuses - All DC fuses
are ¼ amp fast-blow
Model 225.250. The AC fuse
is ½ amp slow-blow
Model 239.500. The fuse for
the back panel’s AC
receptacle is a 5x20mm, ½
amp slow-blow.
Fig. 1-5. Extended Back Panel - Omni 6000 (left); Omni 3000 (right)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module

This module contains the Motorola 16/32-bit microprocessor operating at 16
MHz, a maximum of 512 kbytes of SRAM memory, 1 Mbyte of EPROM
program memory, math coprocessor and time of day clock. Positions U3 and
U4 on the Central Processor Module contain the program EPROMs. The
hardware real-time clock will continue to operate even when power loss to the
computer occurs. Time of power failure is logged and printed when the power is
restored.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ Math
Processor
Central Program Program Archive
POTENTIAL FOR DATA Processor EPROM RAM RAM
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup -
Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully
charged Ni-Cd battery as
RAM power backup. RAM
data, including user
configuration and I/O Backup
calibration data, may be lost Batttery
if the flow computer is
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
Observe caution when
storing the flow computer
without power being applied EPROM Size
for extended periods of time. 1 OR 4 Meg Bit System Watchdog
The RAM back-up battery is Select 4 Meg J3 In = Enabled
rechargeable and will be fully As Shown J3 Out = Disabled
charged after power has J1 J2 (Always Enabled)
been applied for 24 hours. J3
Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings
1-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.6. Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Omni flow computers utilize an I/O bus system. All I/O is modular and plug-in
for easy field maintenance and replacement. I/O circuitry is also photo-optically
isolated from all field wiring which makes it relatively immune to electrical noise
and prevents damage to the electronics.
Your Omni Flow Computer has a combination of 3 types of I/O modules:
o Digital I/O Modules
o Serial I/O Modules
o Process I/O Combo Modules
¨ A and B Type Combo Modules
¨ E and E/D Type Combo Modules
¨ H Type Combo Modules
Almost any combination of I/O mix can be accommodated in the flow computer.
The only limitations are the number of I/O connectors (4 on Omni 3000, 10 on
Omni 6000) and the number of wires connecting them to the back panel field
wiring terminals (48 for Omni 3000, 120 for Omni 6000).
Your Omni Flow Computer has a standard order in which the modules are
plugged-in (Fig. 1-7; also see Fig. 1-2 and Fig. 1-3). This provides a standard
termination layout.
INFO - Mother board
connectors do not have a
specific address. These are
pre-established at the
factory. Each Omni Flow
Computer will be supplied
with a termination diagram
Omni 6000 Omni 3000
indicating these settings. TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2
1 1
Serial I/O 1 & 2
Serial I/O 3 & 4
Serial I/O 1 & 2

Digital I/O 1 - 12
Digital I/O 13-24
Combo I/O # 1
Digital I/O 1-12
12 12
13 13
Combo I/O # 6
Combo I/O # 5
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 2
Combo I/O # 4
Combo I/O # 3
Combo I/O # 1
24 24
TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10 TB3 TB4
Fig. 1-7. Matching the I/O Modules to the Back Panel Terminations
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-9

1.6.1. Photo-Optical Isolation

Photo-Optical Isolation - The microprocessor circuitry is isolated via photo-optical devices from all field
Transducer signals are wiring to prevent accidental damage to the electronics, including that caused by
converted by the LED into
high frequency pulses of
static electricity. Photo-optical isolation also inhibits electrical noise from
light. These are sensed by inducing measurement errors. Independent isolation of each process input
the photo-transistor which provides high common-mode rejection, allowing the user greater freedom when
passes the signal to the flow wiring transmitter loops. Furthermore, it minimizes ground loop effects and
computer. isolates and protects your flow computer from pipeline EMI and transients.
Note that no electrical
connection exists between
the transducers and the
computer circuits.
Pipeline Opto Coupler IC Isolated

Transducer Transducer
Signals That Signals
May Pass On Passed On
Damaging To Sensitive
Transient Computer
LED Photo Circuits
Noise Transistor
Fig. 1-8. Photo-optical Isolation - How It Works
1-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.6.2. Digital I/O Modules

INFO - Some Digital I/O Digital I/O modules provide discrete inputs and outputs to control provers,
modules have 12 samplers, injection pumps, motor operated valves (MOVs) and to provide remote
replaceable fuses; one fuse
totalizing. Each digital module provides 12 digital I/O points with each point able
for each I/O point. Other
modules have electronic to be configured as either an input or output. The Omni 3000 normally has one
fuses that trip when digital I/O module. Whereas, the 6000 can have a maximum of two digital
overloaded and modules, resulting in 24 digital I/O points. The digital I/O module normally
automatically reset when occupies I/O Slots 1 and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni
the fault condition is
removed. 3000.
Address jumpers on the digital I/O module are used to configure the module as
either module D1 or D2. Digital I/Os 1 through 12 are allocated to module D1
and 13 through 24 are allocated to D2.
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger

Interrupt Request (IRQ) JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
Select Jumpers for JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger
Pipe Prover Detector JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger
(Non-Double Chronometry)
NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1 Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
I/O Point LEDs - Each

digital I/O point has 2 LEDs. I/O Point
One LED illuminates green F3 F2 F1 #01
when the I/O point is active Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
and the other illuminates
green or red when a fault F6 F5 F4
condition exists. The fault
LED illuminates green when
F9 F8 F7 Red On = Sourcing
an input over voltage Current
condition exists. An output Green On = Sinking
short circuit causes the fault Current
Individual Fuses F12 F11 F10
LED to illuminate red. for Each I/O Point
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Fig. 1-9. Digital I/O Module # 6011 – Jumper Settings
IRQ, (Interrupt request) jumpers are provided on digital I/O modules for
interfacing to pipe prover detector switches. This feature applies only to liquid
measurement applications.
These jumpers are only used to configure digital I/O point 1 or digital I/O point 2
on module D1. All IRQ jumpers should be removed from D2 if a D2 module is
installed.
ALL.71+ ! 05/99 1-11

1.6.3. Serial Communication Modules
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205

INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205 is capable of handling two communications ports
computers and/or other Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for maximum
compatible serial devices can
be multi-dropped using
common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C signal levels,
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
serial port. Thirty-two Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are
devices may be connected software selectable.
when using the RS-485
mode. Typically, one serial In addition to RS-232, jumper selections have been provided on each port to
I/O module is used on the allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485 ports
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two
are available on each module.
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6205,
the flow computer must also
have an SV Module to
communicate with Address Selection
multivariable transmitters. Jumpers
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when Address S1
used in combination with an Selected
SV Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper is placed
at IRQ 2. The SV Module
can only be used with this
Address S2
serial module (68-6205) and
Selected
is not compatible with the
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see
Technical Bulletin # TB-
980503. LED Indicators
IRQ 2 Selected
Port #2 (4) Port #1 (3)

Jumpers Jumpers
Fig. 1-10. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205 Showing Selection Jumpers and

LED Indicators
1-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

The RS-232/485 Module has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485

communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
blocks JB4, JB5, JB6 for Port #1, and JB1, JB2, JB3 for Port #2 for each
format.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED
RS-485 2-WIRE TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED

JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6 JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
Terminated/Non-
terminated RS-485 - The
RS-232/485
RS-485 devices located at NON-TERMINATED
each extreme end of an RS- RS-485
RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE
485 run should be TERMINATED
terminated. Note that the
device located at an extreme
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer.

RS-232/485
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232 RS-485
RS-232 TERMINATED
Fig. 1-11. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-13

Omni 6000
(Omni 3000)
Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
TB3 (TB2) 2-Wire 4-Wire
1 TX B TX-B
2 TERM ¾ ¾
Note: Users of Micro First
Motionä RFT 9739 devices 3 RX ¾ RX-A
connected the peer-to-peer Serial
port (Port #2) of the Omni, Port 4 GND GND GND
please note that the resistor
5 RTS A TX-A
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485 6 RDY ¾ RX-B
and that Terminal (A) from
the RFT 9739 should be 7 TX B TX-B
wired to Omni 7 and (B) from
the RFT must be wired to 8 TERM ¾ ¾
Terminal 11.
Second 9 RX ¾ RX-A
Serial
Port 10 GND GND GND
11 RTS A TX-A
12 RDY ¾ RX-B
Fig. 1-12. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232/485 Module #68-6205
1-14 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Dual RS-232-Compatible Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

INFO - Up to 12 flow Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-
computers can be multi- 232-C ports. Each serial communication port is individually optically isolated for
dropped to one RS-232C
serial device. Typically, one
maximum common-mode and noise rejection. Although providing RS-232C
serial I/O module is used on signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
the Omni 3000, providing two one RS-232 device. Communication parameters such as baud rate, stop bits
ports. A maximum of two and parity settings are software selectable.
serial modules can be
installed in the Omni 6000,
providing four ports.
Serial Ports 1 & 2

Use the S1 Module
S1
Setting
Serial Ports 3 & 4

Use the S0 Module
S0
Setting
RTS Out
Chan. B
TX Out
RTS Out
Chan. A
TX Out
LED Indicators
RX In
Chan. A
RDY In
RX In
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1-13. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model - Jumper Settings
Serial Port Assignments

The first port can be configured as a Modbus protocol port. It can also be
configured as a printer port. The printer can be shared between multiple flow
computers. Reports can be printed on a daily, batch end, timed interval or on
demand basis. A reprint function provides backup should you experience printer
problems at any time. Customized report templates are input using the
OmniCom Configuration PC Software.
The second, third, and fourth ports are independent Modbus protocol channels.
The complete database of the flow computer is available for upload and
download. The OmniCom configuration program provided by Omni can use any
of these ports.
The fourth RS-232C can also be set up to communicate with Allen-Bradley PLC
devices.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-15

1.6.4. Process I/O Combination Modules

Meter runs utilize plug-in modules which include all necessary analog/digital
(A/D) converters and control circuitry. User selection of process I/O is available
with “combo” cards that can be a mix of meter pulse, frequency densitometer,
4-20 mA, 4-wire 100 ohm RTD inputs, and 4-20 mA outputs.
All process measurements such as temperature, pressure, density, and flow are
input via these process I/O combo modules. Each module will handle 4 inputs
of a variety of signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs
(except the SV Module which has six 4-20 mA outputs).
Seven types of combo I/O modules are available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV and SV.
All modules accept analog and pulse frequency type inputs, except for the H
and HV Modules which interface digitally with Honeywell Smart Transmitters,
and the SV Module which interfaces serially with RS-485 compatible
multivariable transmitters.
The A and B Types use identical I/O boards. Likewise, the E and E/D Modules
are also identical, except for the position of a configuration jumper which
selects the type and address of each module.
INFO - The flow computer Each of the combo modules installed must have a different identity ¾i.e., you
allocates the physical I/O cannot have two or more modules of the same type and address. Valid ID’s are:
point numbers according to
the module ID’s, not the
A1 through A6, B1 through B6, E/D-1 through E/D-6, E1 through E6, H1 through
position occupied on the H6, and SV1 through SV2. Only one HV Module can be installed.
backplane.
Modules are plugged into DIN type connectors on the passive backplane. Each
backplane connector has 12 circuits which connect to the back panel terminal
strips via ribbon cables. Combo I/O modules are plugged into the backplane
starting at I/O Position #5 (Omni 6000) or I/O Position #3 (Omni 3000) and
working towards Position #10 (Omni 6000) or Position #4 (Omni 3000). The
preferred order is lowest number A Type to highest number H Type, them SV
and HV Modules.
The following chapter deals in more detail with process I/O combo modules and
includes illustrations and jumper settings. (See Chapter 2 “Process I/O Combo
Module Setup”.)
1-16 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.7. Operating Power

Operating Power - The Omni flow computers can be AC or DC powered.
indicated power is maximum
and includes the power used When AC powered, 120 VAC 50 Watts is applied to the AC plug. For powering
by transmitter loops, etc. It transmitter loops when AC powered, approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is
will vary depending on the available from the DC terminal block. The flow computer can be special ordered
number of modules installed,
the number of current loops for operation on 220-250 VAC supplies. This requires a modified power supply
and any digital output loads unit and a different cord set. AC power to the unit is fused by a 0.5 Amp (5x20
connected. mm) slow-blow fuse located in the AC power receptacle.
To DC power the flow computer, apply 18 to 30 VDC, 50 Watts to the DC
terminal block. DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is
‹ CAUTION! ‹ fused by a 3 Amp, 2 AG fast-blow fuse located on the back panel next to the
POTENTIAL FOR DATA DC power terminals.
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup - All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-
Omni flow computers leave volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the factory with a fully the rear most connector on the computer backplane. The DC power which
charged Ni-Cd battery as supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from the DC terminals on
the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by rectifying the output of
configuration and I/O the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer. Regulated 5-volt power
calibration data, may be lost is monitored by a 3-4 second shutdown circuit located on the power supply
if the flow computer is module. When power is applied to the computer there will be a delay of 3 to 4
disconnected from external
power for more than 30 days.
seconds before the unit powers up.
Observe caution when A recommended maximum of 500 mA of transducer loop power is available
without power being applied with a fully loaded Omni system of 6 combo I/O modules, 2 digital I/O modules
for extended periods of time. and 2 dual serial I/O modules. The Omni must be DC powered if this 500 mA
The RAM back-up battery is limit is to be exceeded.
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has The maximum system configuration of the Omni is 24 process inputs, 12
been applied for 24 hours. process outputs, 24 digital I/O points, and 4 serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This causes an internal temperature of 15ºF (8.33°C)
over the ambient. The unit should not be mounted in a cabinet or panel where
the ambient inside the cabinet will exceed 110ºF (43.33°C).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-17

‹ CAUTION ‹
The Power Low and +5 v
Adjust are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust.
AC Connector
Fig. 1-14. Power Supply Module Model # 68-6118
1-18 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.8. Firmware and Software

Omni flow computers are supplied with pre-programmed firmware and PC
configuration software which permit a single unit to perform a great diversity of
combined flow measurement tasks, such as:
o Multiple Meter Run Totalizing, Batching, Proving, and Data Archiving
o Flow and Sampler Control
o Direct Interface to Gas Chromatographs and Smart/Multivariable
Transmitters
o Selectable Communications Protocols to Directly Interface to DCS, PLC
and SCADA Host Systems
The flow computer database numbers thousands of data points and provides
the tightest communications coupling yet between SCADA and the metering
system.
1.8.1. Interrupt-Driven CPU

This is a very important aspect to firmware. It provides for a multi-tasking
environment in which priority tasks can be undertaken concurrently with
unrelated activity. This provides for high-speed digital signals to be output at the
same time as measurement computations and serial communications to a
printer or host computer, without degradation in speed or tasking.
All custody transfer measurement programs are stored in EPROM or Flash
Memory. This prevents damage due to electrical noise, or tampering with the
integrity of calculation specifications. SRAM programming can also be
accommodated.
1.8.2. Cycle Time

All time-critical measurement functions are performed by the flow computer
every 500 msec. This provides greater accuracy of measurement calculations
and permits a faster response by pipeline operations in critical control functions,
such as opening or closing valves.
1.8.3. On-line Diagnostics and Calibration

Extensive diagnostic software is built into the system which allows the
technician to locally or remotely debug a possible problem without interrupting
on-line measurement. Calibration of analog signals is performed through the
keypad and software. The system has only two potentiometers, both of which
are on the power supply and are factory set and need no adjustment.
1.8.4. PC Communications Interface

The wide use of PCs and video display units makes it possible to provide
software for off-line/on-line access to measurement, configuration and
calibration data. Collection of historical reports, including alarms, interval
reports of any time sequence, liquid batch and prove reports, and full remote
technical intervention capabilities are also provided.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-19

1.8.5. OmniCom Configuration PC Software

INFO - Full details about the On-line or off-line configuration of your Omni Flow Computer is possible using
OmniComâ configuration an IBM PC compatible running the OmniComâ program supplied with your flow
program are documented in
Appendix C.
computer. This powerful software allows you to copy, modify and save to disk
entire configurations. The program also allows you to print customized reports
by inputting report templates that are uploaded to the flow computer.
1.8.6. Year 2000 Compliance

INFO - The current firmware Omni flow computer firmware has been tested in conformance to Year 2000
has been fully tested and requirements. It will accurately process time- and date-related data after
assured to be in
conformance to Year 2000
December 31st, 1999. Software and hardware designed to be used before,
requirements. For more during and after the calendar year 2000 will operate appropriately relating to
information, please contact date information. All calculating and logic of time-related data will produce the
our technical support staff. expected results for all valid date values within the application.
1-20 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.9. Initializing Your Flow Computer

A processor reset signal is automatically generated when:
‹ CAUTION! ‹
1) Power is applied.
POTENTIAL FOR DATA
LOSS! 2) The processor reset switch at the rear of the front panel is toggled.
RAM Battery Backup - 3) The watchdog timer fails to be reset by firmware every 100 milliseconds.
Omni flow computers leave
the factory with a fully The flow computer will perform a diagnostic check of all program and random-
access memory whenever any of the above events occur.
data, including user The program is stored with a checksum in Non-volatile Read-only Memory. The
configuration and I/O
calibration data, may be lost
program alarms if the calculated checksum differs from the stored checksum.
if the flow computer is The most obvious cause of such a problem would be a bent pin on a program
disconnected from external memory chip. The validity of all data stored in RAM memory is checked next.
power for more than 30 days. This data includes totalizers, configuration data and historical data. Any
problems here will cause the computer to initialize the RAM and display the
without power being applied following message:
for extended periods of time.
The RAM back-up battery is
rechargeable and will be fully RAM Data Invalid
charged after power has Reconfigure System
been applied for 24 hours. Using “OMNI” as
Initial Password
If due to the RAM area in the computer not agreeing with the checksum area,
the computer will display the following message:
RAM & Calibrate Data

Invalid, Reconfigure
& Re-calibrate Using
“OMNI” as Password
Assuming that the EPROM memory and RAM memory are valid, the flow
computer then checks the software configuration against the installed I/O
modules and displays a screen similar to the following:
INFO - For information on
adjusting module Module S-Ware H-Ware
configuration settings, see A-1 Y Y
Volume 3.
B-1 Y N
D-1 Y Y
S-1 N Y
Revision No. 023.70
EPROM Checksum 1B36
A ‘N’ in the hardware column indicates that a module has been removed since
the software was configured. A ‘N’ in the software column indicates that a
module has been added. In either case you should make the columns agree by
adding or removing modules or re-configuring the software.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-21

2. Process Input/Output Combination

Module Setup
INFO - User selection of

process I/O is available with
“combo” cards that can be a
mix of meter pulse, frequency
2.1. Introduction
densitometer, 4-20mA, 4- All process measurement signals are input via the process I/O combination (or
wire 100 ohm RTD inputs,
and fused 4-20mA outputs.
“combo”) modules plugged into the backplane of the computer. There currently
are 7 types of combo modules available: A, B, E, E/D, H, HV, and SV Types.
Combo Module Input
The 7 types of modules are actually manufactured using only 4 types of printed
Features - The input circuit modules. The first can be configured as either an A or B Module; the
characteristics of each second is used for an E or E/D Module; the third printed circuit is used for an H
combo module are as follows or HV Type Module; and the fourth for an SV Module.
(see table on right):
A Type: Each input can be
1-5v; 4-20mA. Inputs #1
and #2 also accept RTD.
Inputs #3 and #4 also
2.2. Features of the I/O Combo Modules
accept flow pulse signals. Each combo module (except the SV Module) will handle 4 inputs of a variety of
B Type: Inputs #1, #2 & #3 signal types and provides one or two 4-20 mA analog outputs. The SV Module
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA.
Inputs #1 and #2 also
has two ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. Only the E Combo Module has
accept RTD. Input #3 also Level A pulse fidelity checking and double chronometry proving capabilities.
accepts flow pulses and The input/output capabilities and some of the features of the combo modules
Input #4 is fixed as a are expressed in the following table.
frequency density input.
E/D Type: Inputs #1 and #2
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4
are frequency density.
INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES OF EACH I/O COMBO MODULE T YPE
E Type: Inputs #1 and #2 DOUBLE
can be 1-5v; 4-20mA and ANALOG LEVEL A CHRONO-
TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4
RTD. Inputs #3 and #4 OUTPUTS FIDELITY METRY
accept flow pulses. PROVING
H Type: All inputs are Two
Honeywellä DE Protocol. A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses No No
4-20mA
HV Type: All inputs are
1-5v; 4-20mA Frequency One
Honeywellä Multivariable B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD No No
Flow Pulse Density 4-20mA
DE Protocol.
SV Type: Each port (#1 and Two
E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency Density No No
#2) is capable of RS-485 4-20mA
multi-drop to various Two
multivariable transmitters. E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow Pulses Yes Yes
4-20mA
Two
H Honeywell DE Protocol No No
4-20mA
Two
HV Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol No No
4-20mA
PORT #1 PORT #2
Six
SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters No No
4-20mA
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup
2.2.1. Setting the Address of the Combo Modules

Jumpers are provided on each combo module which allow the user to select the
address needed to access the module. Changing the software functions of the
module is also done by moving the appropriate jumper; i.e., A or B Type, E or
E/D Type.
2.2.2. Hardware Analog Configuration Jumpers

Other jumpers are provided on each module which select the correct hardware
analog configuration for the type of signal that each input channel will accept.
This allows the same basic hardware module to accept signals such as 4-20
mA, 1-5 VDC, 100 ohm RTD probes and voltage or current pulses from a
turbine, PD meter or digital densitometer.
2.2.3. Process I/O Combo Module Addresses Versus

Physical I/O Points
A flow computer will usually have several combo modules installed depending
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ on the number of flowmeter runs to be measured. If for example, 2 A Type, 2 B
Combo I/O modules are Type, 1 E/D Type and 1 E Type Modules were installed, they would normally be
sorted alphabetically and by numbered A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 and E1. Other address combinations are
low- to-high address. Adding acceptable (e.g.: A2, A3, B1, B4, E/D2 & E2 ) as long as each has a unique
or removing cards may
change the existing sort if the identity. In the above example where 6 modules (A1, A2, B1, B2, E/D1 & E1)
‘Check I/O’ function is are installed, the physical I/O points are mapped as follows. (Note that E/D
executed. modules come before the E modules!)
To standardize, Omni recommends that combo modules should always be
installed starting with the lowest number A Type Module in I/O Slot #5 (Slot #3
in Omni 3000) as shown, with additional modules being installed in ascending
order towards Slot #10 (Slot #4 in Omni 3000).
PROCESS I/O COMBO MODULE ADDRESSES VERSUS PHYSICAL I/O POINTS

M ODULE IDENTITY INPUTS OUTPUTS BACKPLANE POSITION PHYSICAL TERMINALS
A1 1-4 1&2 Slot 5 TB5 1-12
A2 5-8 3&4 Slot 6 TB6 1-12
B1 9-12 5 Slot 7 TB7 1-12
B2 13-16 6 Slot 8 TB8 1-12
E/D1 17-20 7&8 Slot 9 TB9 1-12
E1 21-24 9 & 10 Slot 10 TB10 1-12
2-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.2.4. Assigning Specific Signal Inputs

The Omni factory pre-assigns the physical I/O points of each flow computer
based on information supplied at time of order. This configuration information is
stored in battery backed-up static CMOS RAM. If you wish to change or add to
these assignments, refer to the section ‘Program Setup’ in Volume 3, Chapter
2 “Flow Computer Configuration” and follow these basic rules:
1) Digital densitometer signals can only be assigned to the fourth channel of
each B Type Combo Module, or the third and fourth channel of each E/D
Module.
2) RTD signals can only be assigned to the first or second channel of each
A, B, E/D or E combo module. Whenever possible, avoid using the
second RTD excitation current source of an A Type Combo Module as
this makes the second 4-20 mA output on that module inaccessable.
3) Pulse signals from flowmeters can be assigned only to the 3rd channel of
each combo module and/or the 4th channel of each A Combo Module and
E Combo Module (E/D Combo Modules excepted).
4) Pulse signals to be used for ‘Pulse Fidelity Checking’ must be connected
to the 3rd and 4th channel of an E Combo Module with the third channel
assigned as the flow input.
5) Use the 3rd and 4th input channels of an E Combo Module for double
chronometry proving.
INFO - The message ‘I/O’ 1) Physical I/O points may be assigned to more than one variable (i.e.,
Type Mismatch’ is common temperature or pressure sensors) but variable types cannot be
displayed if you try to assign
the same physical I/O point
mixed (i.e., the same physical point cannot be assigned to temperature
to more than one type of and pressure, for example)
variable.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-3

2.2.5. Sample Omni Flow Computer Configuration

Charts
The charts (below and facing page) are examples of the configuration chart
supplied with your flow computer. It shows the type of combo modules installed,
the assigned process variables, the I/O point numbers and the jumper settings
for each input channel. To avoid confusion, we recommend that you plan any
changes to the physical I/O setup on such a chart before making any changes.
Fig. 2-1. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 3000
2-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

CUSTOMER________________________ P.O.#____________
S.O.#_______
SOFTWARE________________________ COMPUTER
S/N__________________
MODEL #_________________________
TAG#__________________________
Fig. 2-2. Sample Configuration Chart (Blank) - Omni 6000
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-5

2.3. The A and B Combo I/O Modules

All I/O signals of the combo module are converted to the form of high frequency
pulse trains (0 to 25 kHz). These pulse trains are passed through opto-couplers
providing electrical isolation.
All 4 process inputs can accept analog input voltages which are first buffered
with a 1 megohm input buffer and then converted to pulse frequencies using
precision voltage-to-frequency converters. With 2 averaged 500 millisecond
samples, analog conversion resolution is 14 binary bits. Linearity is typically
±0.01% and the temperature coefficient is trimmed to better than ±15
PPM/°F. Current inputs such as 4-20 mA are converted to 1-5 VDC by
jumpering-in a 250 ohm shunt resistor.
The conversion gain of Input Channels 1 and 2 can also be increased by a
factor of 10, allowing low level RTD signals (0.20 - 0.55 VDC) to be accepted.
Input Channels 3 and 4 can also be jumpered to accept pulse signals (0-12
kHz). In this case, the input stage is configured as Schmitt Trigger, whose
threshold is 3.5 VDC and hysteresis ±0.5 VDC. The voltage-to-frequency
converter is bypassed in this mode. Input Channel 4 can also be jumpered for
AC coupling and a 1-volt trigger threshold, making it suitable for interfacing to
Solartron type densitometers.
Analog Outputs #1 and #2 are obtained in the reverse fashion. A software-
controlled pulse train (100 Hz to 5.0 kHz) is passed through opto-couplers and
converted to a current using precision frequency-to-current converters.
Resolution of these outputs is approximately 12 binary bits. The second analog
output is not available when the module is jumpered as a B Type.
Channel #4 Pulse
Input Threshold
AC / DC Coupling
A/B Module Type Channel # 4 Input
Select Jumper
Input Channel #4
Input Channel #3
Input Channel #2
Input Channel #1
Module Address
Jumpers
2nd. RTD Excitation Source
or Input Type Select
2nd Digital-Analog Output Jumpers
Fig. 2-3. The A and B Combo I/O Module - Configuration Jumpers
2-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Two RTD excitation current sources (3.45 mA) are available on the combo
module. The second RTD excitation source will not be available if the second 4-
20 mA analog output is in use (see setting of JP12). This is a function of the
number of circuits available from the back panel terminal to each combo
module. On a B Type module the second analog output is not available,
therefore this second RTD excitation source is always available.
2.3.1. A and B Combo Module Non-Selectable or

Selectable Address
The Combo Type A or B Module can either have a non-selectable address or a
selectable Address.
The non-selectable address type is featured in older versions of the Omni Flow
Computer. The address is programmed into the Programmable Array Logic
(PAL) integrated circuit and is factory set. The module address can only be
changed by replacing the PAL chip.
The selectable type address is featured in current versions of the Omni.
Normally, it is preset at the factory, however it allows the user to change the
address simply by selecting the correct type and address on the selection
jumpers.
Non-Selectable Address
Selectable Address
TYPE B SELECT ONLY
COMBO ADDRESS SELECT

(A0 SHOWN)
Fig. 2-4. A and B Combo Module - Non-Selectable / Selectable Address
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-7

2.3.2. The A Type Combo I/O Module

INFO - The second analog The A Type Module is the most common configuration. It accepts 4 process
output is not available in inputs and provides two 4-20 mA analog outputs. Each module is connected to
cases where JP12 is used to
select the second RTD
the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual
excitation current source. terminal block used depends upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module
You may be able to avoid is plugged into.
using the second RTD
excitation source and save A Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
losing an analog output by
using an unused excitation TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
source on another combo TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Isolated Signal Return)
module. TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 4 Input Channel #2 (Isolated Signal Return)
TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (1-5v, 4-20mA, Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 9 RTD Excitation Current Source #1
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
TB? Terminal 12 Analog Output #2 (4-20mA) or RTD Excitation Current Source #2 (See
JP12 Setting)
Chan 4 Threshold
JP11 JP11 In = 3.5 VDC Out = 1.2 VDC
Select ‘P’
(Pulse Type 4-20mA Jumper Out
Input - Channel (Pulse Type Input)
3 or 4)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
JP12
Module A0 A1 A2
#1 Out Out Out
#2 In Out Out RTD2 D/A2
#3 Out In Out
JP12 In D/A2
#4 In In Out
Position
#5 Out Out In
#6 In Out In JP13 In DC
Coupled Position
Fig. 2-5. A Type Combo Module - Flow Pulse Jumper Settings (Channel 3
or Channel 4)
2-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

JP11
Select ‘A’
(Analog Type)
Input
JP11
4-20 mA Jumper In
(Remove for
1-5VDC Input)
JP13 In DC Coupled
Position for Preamp
Turbine Meter Input Configured for Configured for Configured for
(Channel 4) RTD Input 4-20 mA Input 1-5 VDC Input
Fig. 2-6. A Type Combo Module - Analog Input Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-9

2.3.3. The B Type Combo I/O Module

INFO - You will need either a The B Type Combo Module also handles 4 process inputs but Input Channel 4
B Type Combo Module or is now used to measure the periodic time of a digital densitometer. The module
E/D Type Combo Module
when using digital
always has Input Channel 4 jumpered as a frequency input. Signal coupling can
densitometers connected to be AC or DC with trigger threshold adjustable for 1.5 or 3.5 Vpp sensitivity.
the flow computer. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
With a B Type Combo ribbon cables. The actual terminal block used depends upon which backplane
Module, Analog Output #2 is connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
never available because the
periodic time function uses
the internal timer counter that B Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
is normally used to generate
the second analog output. TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 3 Input Channel #2 (1-5v, 4-20mA, RTD)
TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (1-5v, 4-20mA, DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses)
TB? Terminal 7 Input Channel #4 (AC Coupled Densitometer Frequency)
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return Terminals 9, 11 & 12 (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA)
Channel 4 Threshold
JP11 JP11 Out = 1.2 VDC (Solartron
& Sarasota)
Select ‘P’ JP11 In = 3.5 VDC (UGC)
(Pulse Type
Input)
JP11
Select Module Type

JPB Out = A Type
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown)
JP12
Module A0 A1 A2
#1 Out Out Out
#2 In Out Out RTD2 D/A2
#3 Out In Out
#4 In In Out JP12 In RTD2 Pulse (Frequency) Type
#5 Out Out In Position Densitometer Requires AC
#6 In Out In Coupling - Channel 4
Fig. 2-7. B Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings - Frequency

Densitometer Setup
2-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.4. The E/D and E Combo Modules

The hardware of E/D and E Combo Modules are similar to that of the A and B
Modules (discussed previously) except that these modules provide 2 analog
input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA or 4-
wire RTDs, and 2 pulse input channels which can be used to input flowmeter
pulses or densitometer frequency signals. Two 4-20 mA analog outputs are
always available on these modules. The module hardware can also be
configured by the application software to provide “Level A Pulse Fidelity
Checking” on the two pulse input channels.
2.4.1. The E/D Type Combo I/O Module

The E/D Type Combo Module is simply an E Combo Module with the JPD
jumper in place. Input Channels 1 and 2 are analog input channels which can
be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20 mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels
3 and 4 are always configured to measure periodic time and accept pulse
signals from digital densitometers. Each module is connected to the back panel
terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers
used depend upon which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E/D Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Digital Densitometer Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7 êêêêêêêêêêêêê Not Used êêêêêêêêêêêêê
TB? Terminal 8 RTD Excitation Current Source #2 *
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power return)
TB? Terminal 11 Analog Output #1 (4-20mA) *
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC JP8 THRES JP5 JP6
JP3 JP4
Select Module Type RTD 4-20 RTD 4-20

JPD In = E/D Module INPUT 1 INPUT 1
JP5 JP6
JP8 THRES RTD 4-20

JP1 THRES INPUT 2
JP2 JP7
AC DC AC AC DC AC
INPUT 4 INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown) JP5 JP6
Module A0 A1 A2
JP2 RTD 4-20
#1 Out Out Out
INPUT 2
#2 In Out Out JP7
#3 Out In Out AC DC AC
#4 In In Out INPUT 4 AC DC AC 4-20 mA
AC Coupling INPUT 3 DC Coupling Selected
#5 Out Out In
Select Select
#6 In Out In
Fig. 2-8. E/D Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-11

2.4.2. The E Type Combo I/O Module

The E Type Combo Module is simply an E/D Combo Module with the JPD
jumper out. Double chronometry timers are provided in this module
configuration, allowing either pulse train to be proved. Input Channels 1 and 2
are analog input channels which can be configured by jumpers for 1-5 volt, 4-20
mA, or 4-wire RTDs. Input Channels 3 and 4 are always configured to accept
flowmeter pulses. Both RTD excitation current sources are also always
available. Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12
wires on the ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon
which backplane connector (TB?) the module is plugged into.
E COMBO MODULE BACK PANEL T ERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS

TB? Terminal 5 Input Channel #3 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 6 Input Channel #4 (AC or DC Coupled Flowmeter Pulses) *
TB? Terminal 7 Double Chronometry Detector Switch In (Active Low) *
TB? Terminal 10 Signal Return for signals marked (*) (Internally connected to DC power
return)
Input Threshold Select

JP8 and JP1
In = +3.5 Volt DC / Out = +1.2 Volt DC JP8 THRES JP5 JP6
JP3 JP4
Select Module Type RTD 4-20 RTD 4-20

JPD Out = E Module INPUT 1 INPUT 1
JP5 JP6
JP8 THRES RTD 4-20

JP1 THRES INPUT 2
JP2 JP7
AC DC AC AC DC AC
INPUT 4 INPUT 3
Address Select
(Address #2 Shown) JP5 JP6
Module A0 A1 A2
JP2 RTD 4-20
#1 Out Out Out
INPUT 2
#2 In Out Out JP7
#3 Out In Out AC DC AC
#4 In In Out INPUT 4 AC DC AC 4-20 mA
AC Coupling INPUT 3 DC Coupling Selected
#5 Out Out In
Select Select
#6 In Out In
Fig. 2-9. E Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
2-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.5. The H Type Combo I/O Module

The H Type Combo Module is a special module which is used to communicate
using the Honeywell ‘DE Protocol’ with 4 Honeywell Smart Transmitters. It
operates on a point-to-point basis. Honeywell Model ST3000 temperature,
pressure and differential pressure transmitters can be used. Transmitters
operating in the ‘analog mode’ are automatically given a ‘wake-up pulse’ and
switched into the ‘DE’ Mode, as soon as they are connected and assigned a
meter run function. Two analog outputs are always available on this module.
Each module is connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the
ribbon cables. The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane
connector (?) the module is plugged into.
H Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

TB? Terminal 1 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Positive Terminal)
TB? Terminal 2 Input Channel #1 (Transmitter Negative Terminal)
return)
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-10. H Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-13

Four sets of LED indicators show the status of each transmitter loop. The red
LED flashes when the flow computer is transmitting data to the transmitter, such
as a change of range, etc. The green LED shows that data is being received by
a channel. Note that each communication channel uses 2 wires and operates in
the half duplex/simplex mode which means that the green LED shows the flow
computer’s transmissions also. Each transducer is operated in the 6-byte
broadcast mode. In this mode, the process variable is updated approximately
every 300 msec. The database of the transducer is compared against the flow
computer’s database every 1 or 2 minutes, depending on the type of transducer.
Any changes to the transducer database which will affect the integrity of the
measured variable must be made via the flow computer.
These entries are:
o Transducer Zero (Lower Range Value)
o Transducer Full Scale (Upper Range Value)
o Transducer Damping Code (Filter Time Constant)
o Transducer Tag Name
The flow computer will not allow any other devices to alter these variables.
Should they be altered, by the Honeywell Smart Field Communicator (SFC) for
example, they will be restored to their original value as shown in the flow
computer (transducer tag name excepted).
2-14 ALL.71+ w 05/99

2.6. The HV Type Combo I/O Module

The HV Type Combo Module is simply an H Module with the JP1, JP2 and JP3
address jumpers in the right-most setting (Address 15). The HV Combo Module
is used to communicate with Honeywellä SMV3000 multivariable transmitters
via the DE Protocol. Operation of the LEDs is similar to the normal H Module.
Since only one multivariable transmitter is needed per meter run and since
there are a maximum of four meter runs, there will never be a need for more
then one HV Combo I/O Module.
Two analog outputs are always available on this module. Each module is
connected to the back panel terminal blocks via 12 wires on the ribbon cables.
The actual terminal numbers used depend upon which backplane connector (?)
the module is plugged into.
HV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments

return)
Module Address
Jumpers
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
Fig. 2-11. HV Type Combo Module - Jumper Settings
ALL.71+ w 05/99 2-15

2.7. The SV Type Combo I/O Module

The SV I/O Combo Module has two RS-485 serial ports which are used to
communicate with devices such as Rosemountä 3095 multivariable transmitters
via the Modbus Protocol. Dual LEDs on each port provide status of the
communications. The module also has six 4-20 mA outputs.
SV Modules and Other
Combo Module Types - SV Combo Module Back Panel Terminal Assignments
The flow computer can
handle only two SV Modules TB? Terminal 1 Port #1 B (RS-485)
and three other A, B, E/D, E TB? Terminal 2 Port #1 A (RS-485)
or H I/O Combo Modules. An TB? Terminal 3 Port #2 B (RS-485)
HV module can also be
TB? Terminal 4 Port #2 A (RS-485)
installed in lieu of one of
these I/O combo modules. TB? Terminal 5 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
TB? Terminal 6 Signal Return for D/A Outputs signals marked (*)
Jumper In = 1st MV Module MV Address

Jumper Out = 2 nd MV Module Selection Jumpers
IRQ 2 Always Selected
LED Indicators
PORT 1 (3)
PORT 2 (4)
RTS Always Selected Transmitting (TX)/Ready-to-

Send (RTS) LEDs Red
Receiving LEDs Green
Both Jumpers In = Port Terminated
Both Jumpers Out = Port Unterminated
MV RS-485
Termination Jumpers
Fig. 2-12. Omni Multivariable Interface (SV Type Combo) Module Model
68-6203 - Jumper Settings
2-16 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3. Mounting and Power Options
3.1. Mechanical Installation

Omni offers a variety of enclosure options which can all be customized based
on customer specified requirements:
q Panel Mounting
q NEMA 4/4X
q NEMA 7
3.1.1. Panel Mounting

Panel Mounting - Panels A panel with the correct size cut out as dimensioned below is required. Panels
less than 1/8 inch thick can should be a minimum of 1/8 inch thick. Use the two keyed nuts and clamping
be used but will require that
the rear of the computer be
bars provided to mount the flow computer to the panel.
supported.
‹ CAUTION! ‹
latching mechanism which
first must be disengaged by
lifting the bezel upwards
before withdrawing the unit
from the case.
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹
The maximum length of the
ribbon cable that connects
the keypad to the CPU
module is 18 inches. The
operation of the Central
Processor Module (CPU) will
be significantly affected if
this length is exceeded.
Fig. 3-1. Panel Mounting - Omni 6000 (upper), Omni 3000 (lower)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 Mounting and Power Options
3.1.2. Nema 4 / 4X Configurations

Both the NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X are weather-proof enclosures. The NEMA 4 is
a standard steel enclosure, whereas the NEMA 4X is a stainless steel
enclosure. Both Omni 6000 and Omni 3000 flow computers can be mounted
inside the NEMAs on a sturdy swing frame. The NEMAs also include a 5’ x 3”
viewing window with a ¼” lexan plate to allow easy viewing. Custom enclosures
are available.
NEMA 4 / 4X FOR OMNI 6000 / 3000

Dimensions Weight Compliance
q NEMA 4, -12 & -13

24 in x 24 in x 12 in 80 lbs q UL 50, Type 4
(610 mm x 610 mm x 305 (36 kg) q CSA Enclosure 4
mm) q IEC 529, IP66
3.1.3. Nema 7 Specification

The NEMA 7 is an explosion-proof enclosure which allows switch or pushbutton
options for manipulating the contained flow computer. The viewing window is
sustained by a 3” circular glass ½” thick. Both the Omni 6000 and Omni 3000
flow computers can be mounted in the NEMA 7 with minimal specification
variances. Custom enclosures are available.
NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 6000
120 lbs q NEC

(54 kg) ¨ Division 1 & 2
12 in x 18 in x 9 in ¨ Class I; Groups B, C & D
(305 mm x 457 mm x 203 ¨ Class II; Groups E, F & G
mm) ¨ Class III
q IEC
¨ Zone 0 & 1
¨ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
NEMA 7 FOR OMNI 3000
12 in x 12 in x 8 in 110 lbs q NEC

(305 mm x 305 mm x 203 (50 kg) ¨ Division 1 & 2
mm) ¨ Class I; Groups B, C & D
¨ Class II; Groups E, F & G
¨ Class III
q IEC
¨ Zone 0 & 1
¨ Groups IIC, IIB & IIA
3-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.2. Input Power

INFO - A recommended The Omni Flow Computer can be AC or DC powered.
maximum of 500mA of
transducer loop power is
available with a fully loaded
system of 6 combo I/O
3.2.1. AC Power
modules, 2 digital I/O
modules and 2 dual serial
When AC powered, 120 VAC, 50 Watts is applied to the AC terminal block.
I/O modules. The computer Approximately 500 mA at 24 VDC is always available from the DC terminal
must be DC powered if this block to drive transducer loops, pre-amplifiers, and digital I/O loads when the
500 mA limit is to be unit is powered by AC.
exceeded.
The flow computer can be special ordered for operation on 220-250 VAC
supplies. This requires a modified power supply unit and a different cord set.
‹ CAUTION! ‹
POTENTIAL FOR DATA 3.2.2. DC Power
LOSS!
RAM Battery Backup - When DC powered, 18 to 30 volts at 24 Watts is applied to the DC terminal
Omni flow computers leave block (this wattage figure does not include power sourced from the digital output
the factory with a fully terminals).
configuration and I/O 3.2.3. Safety Considerations
calibration data, may be lost
if the flow computer is To ensure continued protection against fire, the AC fuse must always be
disconnected from external replaced with a 0.5 amp (5x20 mm) slow blow fuse. The DC fuse must be
power for more than 30 days. replaced by a 3 amp, 2 AG fast blow.
storing the flow computer Power should be connected via a suitable power disconnect switch certified as
without power being applied
for extended periods of time.
being safe for the area (for grounding requirements, see sidebar note on facing
The RAM back-up battery is page).
rechargeable and will be fully
charged after power has
been applied for 24 hours.
ENVIRONMENTAL - The
maximum system
configuration of 24 process
inputs, 12 process outputs,
24 digital I/O points and 4
serial I/O channels dissipates
approximately 24 Watts. This
causes an internal
temperature rise of 15ºF over
the ambient. The unit should
not be mounted in a cabinet
or panel where the ambient
inside the cabinet will exceed
110ºF.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-3

3.3. Power Terminals
3.3.1. CE Equipment Power Terminals

In this current version of the Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 back panel the AC
receptacle is a power line filter with a separate AC fuse holder. The AC power is
connected via a separate 4-wire conductor cable which plugs into the power
supply. The DC terminal is on TB 11 (for Omni 6000) and on TB5 (for Omni
3000).
The power supply used with this version is a Model 68-6118; no fuses.
Back Panel Fuses - All DC

fuses are 3 amp, fast-blow
Model 225.003,
manufactured by Littlefuse.
All AC fuses are ½ amp,
slow-blow Model 229.500,
manufactured by Littlefuse
Earth Ground
Requirements -To minimize
the effects of electrical
transients, the outer case of
the flow computer should be
connected to a high quality
earth ground using the
grounding stud located on
the back of the unit (see Fig.
3-2).
Connect the shields of all
wiring to the same grounding
stud. To eliminate earth loop
currents, shields should be
left unconnected and taped
back at the other end.
Fig. 3-2. Input Power Terminals - Omni 3000 (upper), Omni 6000 (lower)
3-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.3.2. Extended Back Panel Power Terminals

Several mounting options are now available with the Omni 6000 flow computer
by requesting the Extended Back Panel Termination option. This panel
incorporates all the terminal blocks of Versions 2 and 3, TB1 through TB10 with
terminals marked 1 through 12. Screw type terminals are provided for AC and
DC power. In addition to TB1 through TB10, extra DC (fused), return and shield
terminals are provided for TB1 through TB8. Extended 64-conductor ribbon
cables and the AC cables are provided with a standard length of 5 feet.
¼ Amp
Extended Back Panel

Fuses - All DC fuses are ¼
amp fast-blow manufactured
by Littlefuse, Model 225.250.
The main DC fuse is 3 amp.
The AC fuse is ½ amp slow-
blow manufactured by
Littlefuse, Model 239.500.
The fuse for the back panel’s
AC receptacle is a 5x20mm,
½ amp slow-blow.
½ amp
3 Amp
Fig. 3-3. Input Power Terminals - Extended Back Panel (Omni 6000 only)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-5

Fig. 3-4. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 6000)
Fig. 3-5. Example of Typical Back Panel Assignments (Omni 3000)
3-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

3.4. Power Supply Module Switching

Regulator
All analog and digital circuits within the flow computer are powered from a 5-
volt switching regulator located on the power supply module. This is located in
the rear most connector on the computer backplane.
The DC power which supplies the switching regulator either comes directly from
the DC terminals on the back panel of the flow computer (18-30 VDC) or by
rectifying the output of the integral 120 VAC (240 VAC) to 20 VAC transformer.
DC power into or out of the back panel DC power terminals is fused by a 3
Amp, 2 AG fuse located on the back panel next to the DC power terminals.
Regulated 5-volt power is monitored by a 3 to 4 second shutdown circuit located
on the power supply module. When power is applied to the computer there will
be a delay of 3 to 4 seconds before the unit powers up.
‹ CAUTION ‹
The Power Low and +5 v
Adjust on the Power Supply
Module are factory
adjustments that require the
use of special equipment.
DO NOT attempt to adjust
Fig. 3-6. Power Supply Module Model 68-6118
ALL.71+ w 05/99 3-7

4. Connecting to Flowmeters
4.1. Turbine Flowmeter (A or B Combo

Module)
Input Channels 3 and 4 can be independently jumpered to accept pulse signals.
Channel 3 on the A and B Combo Modules and Channel 4 on the A Combo
Module can be used to input turbine or positive displacement flowmeters. The
input threshold is 3.5 volts; hysteresis ± 1/2 volt.
Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters
4.2. Wiring Flowmeter Signals to E Type

Combo Modules
Input Channels 3 and 4 of each E Type Combo Module are used to input
signals from turbine or PD flowmeters. Both channels share a common signal
return at the Omni terminals. Input threshold can be jumpered for +1 or +3.5
volt. Input coupling can be AC or DC (see Chapter 2). Hysteresis is
approximately 0.5 volt.
Fig. 4-2. Wiring to Turbine Pre-Amps (E Type Combo Modules Only)
4-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

4.3. Faure Herman Turbine Meters (E

Combo Module)
Faure Hermanä Turbine Meters are used in liquid applications only. For these
flowmeters, high threshold jumpers JP1 and JP8 on the E Type Combo Module
must be installed.
Fig. 4-3. Wiring of Faure Herman Pre-amp Using Omni 24 VDC
Fig. 4-4. Wiring of Faure Hermanä Pre-amp Using External 24 VDC
ALL.71+ w 05/99 4-3

Chapter 4 Connecting to Flowmeters
4.4. Pulse Fidelity and Integrity Checking

with E Type Combo Modules
A flowmeter with dual channel out-of-phase outputs can be connected as
shown. The flow computer can be configured to continuously compare the
signals for frequency and sequence on a pulse-to-pulse basis, and alarm and
log any differences. (See Volume 5, Technical Bulletin TB-970901 for more
information on Pulse Fidelity Checking.)
Fig. 4-5. Connecting Dual Coil Turbines for Pulse Fidelity Checking
4-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5. Connecting to Transducers and

Transmitters
5.1. Wiring the Input Transducers

Because of the high density of connections on the back panel terminal, it is
recommended that wiring to the terminals be made with 18-22 gauge wire
wherever possible. Transducers should be wired using twisted pairs of 18 gauge
shielded wire. The shields should be connected together and grounded at the
flow computer end. To prevent ground loops, shields should be taped back and
insulated at the transducer end.
Each of the 4-20 mA process input channels are individually optically isolated.
The transducer may be connected in series with either the power or return line
of the transducer current loop. The figure shown below shows a transducer
wired in the power leg of the loop.
Fig. 5-1. Wiring the 4-20 mA Inputs (Input Channels 1 & 2 shown)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters
5.2. Wiring of a Dry ‘C’ Type Contact

Certain types of flowmeter photo-pulsers produce a low frequency contact pulse
output (typical 1 pulse per barrel). To accommodate these low frequencies, they
can be wired to any pulse input on A or E Type Combo Modules, as shown
below.
Fig. 5-2. Wiring for Dry C Type Contact
5-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.3. Wiring RTD Probes

INFO - Each A or B Type Channels 1 and 2 of each combo I/O module can be jumpered to accept a
Combo Module always has 1 signal from a 100 ohm RTD probe. The flow computer can be configured for the
RTD excitation current
source available at Terminal
DIN 43-760 curve (a= 0.00385) or the American curve (a=0.00392). The probe
9. A second source is always is wired in a 4-wire configuration as shown below.
available on B Types at
Terminal 12.
TIP - The excitation current

source for an RTD need not
come from the same combo
module from which the signal
is input. You will need to
recalibrate the input channel
if you choose to use an
excitation source from
another combo module.
Fig. 5-3. Wiring a 4-Wire RTD Temperature Probe
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-3

5.4. Wiring Densitometers
5.4.1. Wiring Densitometer Signals to an E/D Type

Combo Module
INFO - Because the density Two independent densitometers with RTD probes can be wired directly to an
pulse signal can be a small E/D type combo module. For example, Solartronä and UGCä densitometers
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
can be wired to the same E/D Type Module.
coupling and low trigger
threshold for the combo
module channel used; i.e.: on 5.4.2. Solartron Densitometers
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and Connecting to a Solartron Digital Densitometer actually involves two devices:
JP11 out; on E/D Combo the densitometer current pulse signal and the densitometer 4-wire RTD probe
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
attached to the vibrating tube. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a
JP8 out. B Type Combo Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2. The
Input impedance will be device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required needs of the application.
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-4. Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’

Type I/O Combo Module
5-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

‹ NOTICE! ‹
Diagrams shown are based
on published manufacturers’,
data. Omni accepts no
responsibility for wiring or
installation of equipment in a
hazardous area. Equipment
must always be installed in
compliance with local and
national safety standards.
Fig. 5-5. Wiring a Solartronä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a

‘B’ Type I/O Combo Module
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-5

5.4.3. Sarasota Densitometers

INFO - Because the density The Sarasotaä Densitometer provides a voltage pulse signal representing
pulse signal can be a small density and also a 4-wire 100 ohm RTD probe monitoring the temperature of
AC signal with a large DC
offset, you must select AC
the device. The pulse signal is connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo
coupling and low trigger Module. The RTD is connected to Channel 1 or Channel 2 of any module. The
threshold for the combo device can be connected with or without safety barriers, depending on the
module channel used; i.e.: on needs of the application.
the B Type Combo Modules,
JP13 in the AC position and
JP11 out; on E/D Combo
Modules, JP2 and JP7 in the
AC positions and JP1 and
JP8 out.
Input impedance will be
10kohms; 1.5Vpp is required
from the densitometer to
reliably trigger the input.
INFO - When configuring the

flow computer, select the
DIN curve for this RTD
temperature point.
Fig. 5-6. Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’

5-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

‹ NOTICE! ‹
Fig. 5-7. Wiring a Sarasotaä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’

ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-7

5.4.4. UGC Densitometers

INFO - Because the density The UGC Densitometer output provides an open collector transistor that
pulse signal is a large DC requires an external pull-up resistor to 24 volts DC. The densitometer provides
pulse signal with little or no
DC offset, you must select
a 24 volt DC pulse output in the range of 1 to 2 kHz. The pulse signal is
DC coupling with normal connected to Channel 4 of a B Type Combo Module and can be connected with
trigger threshold for the or without safety barriers, depending on the application requirements.
combo module channel used;
i.e.: on the B Type Combo
Modules, JP13 in the DC
position and JP11 in; on E/D
Combo Modules, JP2 and
JP7 in the DC positions and
JP1 and JP8 in.
Input impedance will be
1Mohms; <3.0Vfor low level
and >4V.0 for high level is
required from the
densitometer to reliably
trigger the input.
Fig. 5-8. Wiring a UGCä Densitometer with Safety Barriers to a ‘B’ Type
I/O Combo Module
5-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

‹ NOTICE! ‹
Fig. 5-9. Wiring a UGCä Densitometer without Safety Barriers to a ‘B’

ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-9

5.5. Wiring of Honeywell ST3000

Transmitters
Up to four Honeywell Smart Transmitters can be wired to each H Type Combo
I/O Module. Loop power is provided by the combo module. No external power is
required.
Fig. 5-10. Wiring of a Honeywellä Smart Transmitter
5-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.6. Wiring Micro Motion Transmitters
5.6.1. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 Transmitter

to A Type or E Type Process I/O Combination
Modules
The frequency/pulse output that represents the volume flow from the RFT9739
Transmitter can be wired directly into either Frequency Channel 3 or 4 on A
Type or E Type Combo Modules. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-11. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof) Transmitter
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-11

5.6.2. Connecting Micro Motion RFT 9739 via RS-485

Serial Communications
Serial communication via RS-485 can be accomplished using the Peer-to-Peer
Mode via Omni Serial Port #2 of the RS-232-C/485 Serial Module # 68-6205,
with selection jumpers in the RS-485 position. (See Technical Bulletin TB-
980401.)
OMNI BACK PANEL TERMINALS

SERIAL PORT #2 (PEER-TO-PEER)
RS-485 MODE SELECTED
7 (B)
10
11 (A)
Fig. 5-12. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Two-wire RS-485 Communications (Serial I/O Module #68-
6205)
5-12 ALL.71+ w 05/99

5.6.3. Connecting Micro Motion RFT9739 via Serial

RS-232-C to 485 Converter
Serial communication via RS-485 can also be accomplished utilizing the Peer-
to-Peer Mode via RS-232-C. (See Technical Bulletin TB-980401.)
Fig. 5-13. Wiring of a Micro Motionä RFT9739 Field-Mount (Explosion-Proof)

Transmitter Via Serial RS-485 Converter
ALL.71+ w 05/99 5-13

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and

Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.1. Analog Outputs

Analog outputs are available for remote terminal units, flow controllers, and
recording devices. The analog outputs source 4-20 mA into a load wired to the
DC power return. Maximum load resistance is 1000 ohms at 25 VDC. Digital-to-
Analog conversion is accomplished with a 12-bit binary resolution.
Two outputs are available on each A Type Combo Module. One output is
available on each B Type Combo Module.
To calibrate, each of the outputs is set to 4.00 and 20.00 mA and the software
zero and span adjusted while in the Diagnostic Mode (described later). Any
value between 2.5 and 23.0 mA may be output.
Each output is assigned via the keypad or serial link to one of the many
variables available (see Volume 3).
Fig. 6-1. Wiring Devices to the Flow Computer’s Analog Outputs
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-1

Chapter 6 Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers
6.2. Digital Inputs/Outputs
6.2.1. Wiring a Digital Point as an Input or an Output

Digital I/O modules handle 12 digital points. Each point can be independently
configured as either an input or output via the keypad or via a serial port.
The power and returns for all digital I/O signals are common with the DC power
terminals. Digital output loads are connected between the I/O terminal and DC
power return. An approximate total load of 500 mA per module (per 12 points) is
allowed although an individual point can handle 200 mA. Voltages applied to
I/O points used as inputs must not exceed the DC supply voltage at the DC
terminal, or the protective fuse for that point on the digital I/O module may
blow.
Fig. 6-2. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Input
6-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 6-3. Wiring of a Digital I/O Point as an Output
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-3

6.2.2. Connecting Various Digital I/O Devices

On the Omni 6000, Digital I/O Module #1, handling points 1 through 12, is
plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O Module #1’. This in turn is
connected to Terminal Strip TB1-1 through 12. Digital I/O Module #2, handling
points 13 through 24, is plugged into the backplane connector marked ‘I/O
Module #2’ which is connected to Terminal Strip TB2-1 through 12. The Omni
3000 has only one digital I/O module which is connected to Terminal TB1-1
through 12 on the back panel.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring required to interface to other
devices, such as: switches, relays, provers, programmable logic controllers,
among other devices.
Fig. 6-4. Connecting Digital I/O Devices to the Flow Computer
6-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

6.3. Provers
6.3.1. Connecting Pipe Prover Detector Switches

INFO - The prover detector Pipe prover detector switches are the only I/O signal that must be connected to
switch signal activates an a specific I/O point. They must be wired as shown in Fig. 6-4 to Digital I/O
interrupt request into the
computer. Jumpers JP1 and
Point #1, and the point assigned to Boolean 1700 in the software configuration
JP2 on the digital I/O module (see Volume 3). This is because Digital I/O Point #1 is internally jumpered to
(Fig. 1-5) control which edge cause a high priority interrupt of the computer used to start and stop prover
of the signal will cause the counting. Digital I/O Point #1 can still be used as a normal I/O point if pipe
interrupt. Pulse counting
should start when the sphere
proving is not needed.
first activates the detector
switch. Install JP1 in cases
where the detector switch’s 6.3.2. Interfacing to a Brooks Compact Prover
normally opened contacts are
used (Fig. 1-9). Install JP2 in The Omni Flow Computer interfaces to the basic Brooksä Compact Prover Skid
cases where the detector Electronics (the Brooks Control Box is not used). The control interface involves
switch’s normally closed
contacts are used.
one digital output to control the piston launch, a digital input point to monitor the
position of the piston, and a detector switch signal shared between each meter
run to be proved.
Note: When using double
chronometry proving, the Compact provers use the ‘Pulse Interpolation Method’ of measuring the
detector switch input is on flowmeter counts between the detector switches. The interpolation method
Terminal 7 of an E Type requires that the detector switches activate high speed hardware timers on the
Combo I/O Module. Omni’s combo I/O module. The detector switch signals called ‘first and final
pickoff’ by Brooks are connected to the ‘Detector Switch’ input of each E Type
Combo Module installed in the flow computer.
The following diagram shows the complete installation, including 4-20 mA
signals representing the temperature and pressure of the prover tube as well as
the nitrogen plenum chamber. The 12-volt DC power supply is user supplied.
Fig. 6-5. Wiring to a Brooksä Compact Prover
ALL.71+ w 05/99 6-5

6.3.3. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooks

Compact Prover
The plenum chamber pressure is used as a spring to close the poppet valve of
the piston and cause the piston to be moved forward by the flowing liquid. The
pressure required to close the poppet valve varies with pipeline pressure. Too
high a plenum pressure causes the piston to be pushed downstream by this
excess pressure and can lead to inaccurate provings.
The Omni Flow Computer can monitor the plenum pressure and line pressure,
and automatically charge or vent nitrogen from the plenum chamber.
Before commencing a proving run, the Omni Flow Computer checks the
plenum pressure versus the required pressure and activates either the ‘charge’
or ‘vent’ solenoid valve. The pressures will be matched within some user
entered deadband percent. The Omni activates the solenoids via low voltage
relays (not shown).
An additional enhancement shown is a pressure switch signaling low nitrogen
bottle pressure. In this case, the prove attempt would be aborted if it became
impossible to achieve the correct plenum pressure.
Fig. 6-6. Controlling the Plenum Pressure of a Brooksä Compact Prover
6-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7. Connecting to Serial Devices
7.1. Serial Port Connection Options

INFO - Up to 12 flow The total number of serial communication ports depends on the number of dual
computers and/or other port serial I/O modules installed. The Omni 6000 accepts 2 serial I/O modules;
the Omni 3000 accepts 1. Two optional serial communication I/O modules are
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C available with your flow computer (see Chapter 1): the RS-232-C (compatible)
serial port. Thirty-two Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-
devices may be connected 6005 is only capable of RS-232 compatible serial communications. The newer
when using the RS-485
Model #68-6205 is capable of either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a
mode. Typically, one serial
I/O module is used on the selection jumper.
Omni 3000, providing two
ports. A maximum of two When jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module
serial modules can be is identical to that of the older RS-232-C module, providing 2 optically isolated
installed in the Omni 6000, RS-232-C serial ports which can operate from 0.3 to 38.4 kbps. These ports are
providing four ports. used for printers, personal computers, and SCADA devices. Although the output
voltage levels are compatible with the RS-232 standard, the output is actually
RS-485 Communications
tristated when not sending data. This allows the transmit output from multiple
with an RS-232-C Serial I/O flow computers to be bussed. A terminating resistor is provided at the back
Module #68-6005 - When panel connections to pull down the transmitter signal to a mark (-9V). Hence, a
connecting to RS-485 serial short jumper is required in many cases from TX (Out) to Term.
devices using Serial I/O
Module #68-6005, a RS-232- RS-485 communications allows interconnecting multiple flow computers,
to-485 Converter device must programmable logic controllers, multivariable transmitters, and other serial
be used.
devices in either four-wire multi-drop mode or peer-to-peer two-wire multi-drop
mode.
Multivariable Transmitting
Devices - In addition to the
have an SV Module to
communicate with RS-485
compatible multivariable
transmitters. This serial
module must be jumpered to
IRQ 3 when used in
combination with an SV
Module. Without an SV
Module, the jumper must be
placed at IRQ 2. The SV
Module can only be used with
this serial module (68-6205)
and is not compatible with
the Serial I/O Module # 68-
6005. For more information,
see Technical Bulletin # TB-
980303.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-1

Chapter 7 Connecting to Serial Devices
7.2. Connecting to Printers
7.2.1. Connecting to a Dedicated Printer (Port 1)

INFO - The speed that data The following diagram shows the Omni Flow Computer connected to a
can be accepted by the dedicated printer. The hardware handshake wire connected to Pin 20 of the
printer depends on the size
of the input buffer (if any)
DB25 connector is optional, as the computer can be made to insert null
and the print mode (draft or characters after each carriage return to match the computer data transmission
near letter quality). Typical rate to the printer speed.
printers provide about 120
printed characters/second.
TIP - Most printers default to

the draft mode. Leave it there
for maximum performance.
Because of impact printer
limitations, no speed
improvement is obtained by
selecting baud rates over
2.4kbps.
Fig. 7-1. Connecting a Printer to Serial Port #1 of the Flow Computer
7-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.2.2. Connecting to a Shared Printer (Port 1)

Up to 12 Omni flow computers can share a printer. They are connected as
shown. One flow computer is assigned as the master and manages all traffic to
the printer. Each computer monitors the data transmitted to the printer by
having its TX terminal jumpered to its RX terminal. Resident firmware ensures
that only one computer will attempt to access the printer at any one time.
INFO - Note that only 1

terminating pull-down resistor
is jumpered in place.
Fig. 7-2. Connecting Several Flow Computers to a Shared Printer
7.2.3. Print Sharing Problems

Note: Refer to Volume 3, Most problems associated with printer sharing show up as garbled reports or
Chapter 2 for Printer locked up printers. This is usually caused by one or more computers sending
Settings.
data to the printer at the same time. Check your wiring to the figure above and
consult the following checklist if you experience problems:
1) Check that all computers are set to the same baud rate, stop bits, and
parity settings as the printer.
2) All computers must have the ‘Transmitter Key Delay’ set to ‘zero’ (0).
3) One and only one computer must have its ‘Printer Priority Number’ set to
‘1’. All computers must have a different priority number.
4) Some printers provide jumpers or switches which set the polarity of the
‘Printer Ready’ signal on Pin 20. This signal must be positive when the
printer is ready.
5) When not using the ‘Printer Ready’ signal (Pin 20), ensure that you have
entered enough NULs to prevent overrunning the printer buffer.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-3

7.3. Connecting to a Personal Computer and

Modem
Note: Ports #1 and #2 (Ports #3 and #4* of an Omni 6000) can provide access to the
* Depending upon whether computer’s database using a Modbus protocol interface. This port is usually
a printer or Allen-Bradley connected to a PC running the OmniCom configuration software. Up to 12
PLC is used.
Omni flow computers can be connected to 1 PC. The Modbus protocol includes
an address field which ensures that only 1 unit will transmit at a time.

Fig. 7-3. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB25 Female

Connector (Using Port #2 as an example)
7-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99


Fig. 7-4. Direct Connect to a Personal Computer - DB9 Female

Connector
Fig. 7-5. Connecting Port #2 to a Modem
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-5

7.4. Peer-to-Peer Communications and Multi-

drop Modes
Peer-to-Peer Serial Port #2 can also be configured by the application software to act as a
Communications - The peer-to-peer Modbus master port. This is a half duplex/simplex link which
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multi-
allows any Omni Flow Computer to communicate with any other flow computer
drop up to 32 flow computers or Modbus slave device. That data link can operate at up to 38.4 kbps and uses
and other devices in RS-485 a proprietary token passing scheme. Interconnecting multiple flow computers
serial communications mode, and or multiple serial devices can be accomplished via RS-232-Compatible or
and up to 12 using RS-232-C RS-485 communications.
communications.
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy 7.4.1. Peer-to-Peer RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop Mode

Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
uninterrupted measurement more flow computers via RS-485 in two-wire mode. This option is available only
and control functionality by with the Omni Serial I/O Module #68-6205. (See Technical Bulletin #TB-
interconnecting two
identically equipped and
980401.)
configured flow computers
(see Technical Bulletin TB-
980402).
®
OmniCom and Peer-to-
UP TO 32 FLOW COMPUTERS
Peer - The OmniCom
Configuration PC Software
package supplied with your
Omni Flow Computer cannot B
be used on Serial Port #2
when it is being used as a
peer-to-peer link.
GND
RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE RS-485 TWO-WIRE

TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED NON-TERMINATED
Fig. 7-6. Wiring of Several Flow Computers using the Peer-to-Peer

Feature via RS-485 Communications in Two-wire Multi-drop
Mode
7-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.4.2. Peer-to-Peer via RS-232-C Communications

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers in RS-232 C (compatible) mode. When multi-dropping two
or more flow computers with other serial devices via the RS-232-C mode, an
RS-232-to-RS-485 standard converter may be required. (See Technical
Bulletin #TB-980401.)
Fig. 7-7. Wiring of Several Flow Computers in the Peer-to-Peer Mode

using RS-232-C Communications.
7.4.3. Keying the Modem or Radio Transmitter Carrier

in Multi-drop Applications
Note: Refer to Volume 3, Use the RTS signal to key the modem or radio transmitter carrier in a multi-drop
Chapter 2 “Flow Computer application. A delay between activating the RTS signal and actually sending
Configuration”.
data is provided to allow for carrier acquisition at the remote end. This delay
can be selected as 0.0 msec, 50 msec, 100 msec, or 150 msec.
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-7

7.4.4. RS-485 Four-wire Multi-drop Mode

The diagram below shows the wiring requirements for multi-dropping two or
more flow computers via RS-485 in four-wire mode to a third party PLC type
device. Note that in the wiring example shown below, the PLC acts as a master
and can communicate with either flow computer. A four-wire wiring system does
not allow communications between slaves; i.e., data can only be transferred
between master and slaves. The RS-485 option is available only with the Omni
Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
UP TO 32 RS-485 DEVICES
SLAVE SLAVE
MASTER
TX-B PLC DEVICE
RX
RX-A
TX
TX-A
RX-B RS-485
RS-485 FOUR-WIRE RS-485 FOUR-WIRE
Fig. 7-8. Wiring of Multiple Flow Computers to a PLC Device Via RS-485
Communications in Four-wire Multi-drop Mode
7-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

7.5. Connecting to a SCADA Device

When using an Omni 6000 with 2 serial I/O modules installed, a second
Modbus port (Physical Port #3 used as an example) can provide access to the
computer’s database. This port can also be connected to a PC or any SCADA
device either directly, via modem, or via radio link.
Fig. 7-9. Typical Wiring of Port #3 to a SCADA Device via Modem
ALL.71+ w 05/99 7-9

7.6. Interfacing the Fourth Serial Port to an

Allen-Bradley KE Module
Port #4 is available on Omni flow computers with the second serial module
fitted. This port can be selected to communicate with Allen-Bradleyä devices
using DF1 full duplex or half duplex protocol, or set up for Modbus devices. The
example below assumes that the Allen-Bradley Protocol has been selected.
Fig. 7-10. Wiring Serial Port #4 to Allen-Bradleyä KE Communications

Module
7-10 ALL.71+ w 05/99

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features
8.1. Introduction
In the diagnostic mode you can verify that the I/O modules and transducers are
working and are calibrated to specification.
The actual process transducers used may provide a variety of signal types,
ranging from voltage or current pulses of various levels, to linear analog signals
such as 4-20 mA., 1-5V, 0-1V or RTD elements. In the case of pulse inputs, the
input module provides amplification and/or level shifting, Schmitt triggering and
opto-isolation.
When analog signals are used the input module provides all signal conditioning,
opto-isolation, and converts the analog signal to a high frequency pulse train, in
the range of 0 - 20 kHz. By using a precision voltage to frequency converter,
typical linearity of +/-0.01 % is obtained.
Certain diagnostic displays are always available while in the Display Mode. For
example pressing [Input] then [Display] will display the raw frequency input
from each process input point. The up/down arrow keys can be used to scroll
through all inputs. A typical display shows:
INFO - When viewing an
analog input point, the Input % Freq/Period
frequency displayed #1 2530
approximates 1000Hz/mA.
When viewing a turbine or Input % /Freq/Period
photo pulsar signal, the #2 3021
display is the actual input
frequency.
Pressing [Output] [Status] [Display] shows the current percentage output for
each of the digital to analog 4-20 mA outputs.
INFO - 0.0% corresponds to
4mA. 100.0% corresponds to Analog Output %
20mA. #1 55.79
Analog Output %
#2 34.10
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-1

Chapter 8 Diagnostic and Calibration Features
Important timing information is available by pressing [Time] then [Display] and

then scrolling down using the down arrow. The displays are as follows:
Power Applied
Time: 09:10:30
Date: 01/21/91
Power Last Lost

Time: 10:25:21
Date: 01/20/91
The previous two displays of power lost and power applied allow the user to
estimate the amount of product flow which may be unaccounted for in the event
of a power failure.
Scrolling down further displays:
Main Task Timing-Sec

20 mS Task 00.00
50 mS Task 00.00
100mS Task 00.01
500mS Task 00.04
Background 00.02
This timing information refers to various main application tasks that run within
the computer. The information may be useful to Omni in the event of a
problem.
8.2. Calibrating in the Diagnostic Mode

INFO - The Diagnostic LED In the Diagnostic Mode the user selects a specific process variable to calibrate
glows red after a valid or view. The display shows the input channel and combo module used for the
password has been asked for
and entered.
variable. Calibration override values can be input and the input signals can be
viewed simultaneously as engineering values % span, input voltage and
current. Analog outputs and digital I/O points can also be viewed and
manipulated.
8.2.1. Entering The Diagnostic Mode

To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows press the [Alpha Shift] key,
then the [Diag] key.
INFO - The ‘Select The front panel diagnostic LED will glow green and the following will be
Input/Output’ screen must displayed on the first three lines of the LCD Display:
be displayed when making a
new selection while in the
Diagnostic Mode. Return to Select Input/Output
this screen by pressing the
[Diag] key once.
to Calibrate,
Press "Diag" to Exit
8-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

The fourth line of the display is used to show the user’s selection. The user can
choose to calibrate or view any analog input or output, or manipulate any set of
digital I/O points.
8.2.2. Display Groups in the Diagnostic Mode

INFO - Each input channel of To display an input or output variable to calibrate, select from the following
each combo module has had display groups and associated key presses or select the I/O number if known,
its temperature coefficient
trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To
(usually supplied on a separate sheet).
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal
temperature of the computer
DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES
to stabilize before making
your final calibration
All of the following key presses are valid in the Diagnostic Mode. To enter
adjustments. the Diagnostic Mode, these key presses must be preceded by the [Alpha
Shift] [Diag] keys.
Input Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Input] or [Input] [n]
Meter Temperature (n = 1 through 4) [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density (n = 1 through 4) [Density] or [Dens] [Meter] [n]
Meter Density Temp (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Temp] or [Density][Temp][Meter][n]
Meter Dens Pressure (n = 1 through 4) [Density][Press] or [Density][Press][Meter][n]
Prover Temperature (Left, Right) [Prove} [Temp]
Prover Pressure (Left, Right) [Prove} [Temp]
Output Channels (n = 1 through 24) [Output] [n]
Digital I/O (n = 1 or 2) [Status] [n]
8.2.3. Leaving The Diagnostic Mode

Once you are done viewing and/or modifying the calibration settings, press
[Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Select Input/Output
to Calibrate,
Press the [Diag] key again to return to the Display Mode (Diagnostic LED will
turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-3

8.3. Calibration Instructions
8.3.1. Calibrating A Voltage or Current Analog Input

Note: You can also calibrate While the above display is shown select the input variable to calibrate. For
the input and output of your example to calibrate Meter Run #1 Temperature, press [Meter] [1] [Temp] (or
choice by entering the
number of that input or
the input # if known). The display shows:
output; e.g.: Press [Input]
[1] [Enter]; press [Output]
[4] [Enter]. With this method
Select Input/Output
you can calibrate the inputs to Calibrate,
and outputs to the computer Press "Diag" to Exit
without having them Meter 1 Temp
assigned to any I/O point
numbers.
Other key press combinations work. [Temp] [Meter] [1] means the same to the
computer as [Meter] [1] [Temp]. Pressing [Temp] without a meter number
allows all of the temperatures to be scrolled through and calibrated.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Temperature #1
Input# & Module 1-a1
Override 60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
INFO - Unless previously The display shows the process variable name, the input channel number and
entered, a request for a valid combo module used. This example shows Temperature Meter Run #1
password is made at this
point.
connected to Channel 1 of Combo Module A1.
The calibrate override value Before calibrating an input the user should enter a Cal Override value to be
entered will be substituted for used in all calculations in place of the live value.
all process variables
assigned to this physical I/O Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?' question and the following is displayed:
point when the user answers
[Y] to ‘Calibrate Input ?’. It is
automatically removed when Meter 1 27.5
the user presses the [Diag]
key to exit or make a new % Value 50.00
selection. Input Volts 3.000
mA Value 12.00
8-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

To calibrate the input channel follow these instructions:

INFO - Each input channel of 1) Disconnect the transducer signal and replace it with a stable current or
each combo module has had voltage source capable of inputting 4.000 to 20.000 mA or 1.000 to
trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To
5.000 V signal.
avoid temperature gradient 2) Set the input signal to 4.000 mA or 1.000 V as applicable.
effects and for best results,
always allow the internal 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
to stabilize before making
4.000 mA / 1.000 V.
your final calibration 4) Set the input signal to 20.000 mA or 5.000 V as applicable.
adjustments.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
20.000 mA / 5.000 V.
INFO - The [ß ]/[à ] keys are
used as a software ‘Zero’ 6) Recheck step 2) No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is
potentiometer.
adjusted at exactly 4.0 mA.
Adjustments made when the
Shift LED is on are 7) Disconnect the calibrator signal and reconnect the transducer signal.
approximately ten times more
sensitive. 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
Holding the arrow keys
longer than two seconds
speeds up the rate of Select Input/Output
adjustment. to Calibrate,
TIP - The Span adjustment
has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
8.3.2. Calibrating an RTD Input Channel
Leaving the Diagnostic While the above screen is being displayed select a process variable which is
Mode - In the ‘Select
Input/Output’ screen, press
assigned as an RTD probe input. For example, assuming a pulse type
the [Diag] key to return to the densitometer is installed, pressing [Meter] [1] [Density] [Temp] (or the input #
Display Mode (Diagnostic if known), selects the input channel used to process Meter Run #1's
LED will turn off). Densitometer integral RTD. Other key press combinations will work, and
[Density] [Meter] [1] [Temp] all mean the same. Pressing [Density] [Temp]
allows the user to scroll through all density temperature channels.
Now enter the selection by pressing [Display] and the following is displayed:
Dens #1 Temperature
Input# & Module 2-B1
Cal Overide 60.0
Calibrate Input ? _
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-5

Enter the Calibrate Override value and answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Input ?'
question and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Dens#1 Deg.F 65.0

% Value 60.00
Resistance Value
Ohms 100.00
To Calibrate an RTD input channel proceed as follows :

INFO - Each input channel of 1) Disconnect the RTD probe and connect precision decade resistance box.
each combo module has had capable of inputting 25.00 to 150.00 Ohms as shown below.
trimmed to ±10 ppm/°F. To 2) Set the decade box to 25.00 Ohms.
avoid temperature gradient
effects and for best results, 3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
always allow the internal 25.00 Ohms.
to stabilize before making 4) Set the decade box to 150.00 Ohms.
your final calibration
adjustments. 5) Using the Left/Right arrow keys adjust the displayed value so it reads
150.00 Ohms.
INFO - Installing the decade 6) Recheck step 2). No further adjustment is normally needed if the Zero is
box at the actual RTD probe adjusted at exactly 25 Ohms.
location provides maximum
accuracy, but can be 7) Disconnect the decade box and reconnect the RTD probe.
inconvenient. The errors
introduced by installing the 8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
decade box at the back panel
terminals of the flow
computer are approximately Select Input/Output
0.01% per 100 ohms of field to Calibrate,
wiring resistance.
TIP - The Span adjustment

has no effect at 4mA or 1v.
Always adjust the ‘Zero’ first
at exactly 4mA or 1v.
Leaving the Diagnostic

Mode - In the ‘Select
Input/Output’ screen, press
the [Diag] key to return to the
Display Mode (Diagnostic
LED will turn off).
Fig. 8-1. Figure Showing Calibration of RTD Input Channel
8-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

8.3.3. Calibrating a 4 to 20 mA Digital to Analog Output

Each of the analog outputs can be calibrated by monitoring the loop current with
an accurate milliamp meter and setting the output current to 4.00 mA and 20.00
mA. For example to calibrate Analog Output #1 proceed as follows:
While the 'Select Input/Output' screen is displayed, press [Output] [1]
[Display]. The display shows:
Analog Output #1
0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
Override % 0.00
Calibrate Output ? _
Answer [Y] to the 'Calibrate Output ?' question and the display shows:
‹ CAUTION! ‹
At this point, the analog
output reflects the value of
Analog Output #1
the currently displayed 0%=4mA, 100%=20mA
override, not the assigned Override % 0.00
variable. The user must Override Now Active
ensure that any equipment
using the output signal will
not cause an unsafe
condition to arise or cause To calibrate the output channel follow these steps:
erroneous results to be
generated.
1) Connect an accurate milliamp meter in series with the load.
2) Input 0.00 % (4.00 mA) as the output override.
3) Using the Up/Down arrow keys adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 4.00 mA.
4) Input 100.00 % (20.00 mA) as the output override.
5) Using the Left/Right arrow key adjust the output current until the milliamp
meter indicates 20.00 mA.
6) Repeat steps 2) through 5) until no further improvement can be obtained.
7) Remove the milliamp meter and reconnect the load.
8) Press the [Diag] key to return to the selection screen.
Mode - In the ‘Select Select Input/Output
Input/Output’ screen, press to Calibrate,
'Display Mode' (Diagnostic Press "Diag" to Exit
LED will turn off).
ALL.71+ w 05/99 8-7

8.3.4. Verifying the Operation of the Digital I/O Points

The digital I/O points can be manipulated as a group by pressing [Status] [1]
for digital points 1 through 12 or [Status] [2] for digital points 13 through 24.
Pressing [Status] will allow the user to scroll to either group. Press [Display]
and a screen similar to the following is displayed:
Digital#1 I/O Points

Input 001011001011
Overide 101010101010
Force To Output ? _
The second line shows the status of the I/O points frozen at the time that the
‹ CAUTION! ‹ screen was displayed. The points are numbered left to right (1 to 12) with a '0'
After answering [Y], the indicating that a point is off and a '1' indicating that a point is on. The third line
digital outputs will reflect the shows the override bit values that will be forced to the output port when the user
value of the currently
answers [Y] to the 'Force To Output ?' question. A screen similar to the
displayed override, not the
assigned variable. The user following is displayed:
must ensure that any
equipment using the output
signal will not cause an Digital#1 I/O Points
unsafe condition to arise or Input 101110001101
cause erroneous results to Overide 101010101010
be generated.
Override Now Active
INFO - To avoid a hardware The override '1's and '0's can be changed at any time while the 'Override Now
conflict, only points that have Active' line is displayed. The input status displayed on the second line should
been assigned as outputs will
accept an override of ‘1’; i.e.,
always agree with the green LEDs on the edge of the digital I/O module. Red
entering a ‘1’ at an input LEDs lit indicate blown fuses on the digital I/O module.
position will be ignored and
displayed as a ‘0’. Outputs on this I/O module that are assigned as totalizer outputs will stop
counting while the 'Override Now Active' line is displayed. Pulses to be output
are accumulated and are output at the maximum allowed rate as soon as the
[Diag] key is pressed.
Press [Diag] to return to the selection screen below:
Mode - In the ‘Select Select Input/Output
Input/Output’ screen, press to Calibrate,
Display Mode (Diagnostic Press "Diag" to Exit
LED will turn off).
8-8 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9. Flow Computer Specifications
9.1. Environmental
Operating Temperature : q -15°C to +65°C
‹ NOTICE! ‹ Storage Temperature : q -20°C to +75°C
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Relative Humidity : q 80% non-condensing maximum
pursuant to a policy of
product development and
improvement, may make any
necessary changes to these
specifications without notice.
9.2. Electrical
Supply Voltage : q 120 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-30 VDC, 10-20
Watts (excluding transducer loops)
q Optional: 220-250 VAC, 50-500 Hz; or 18-
30 VDC, 10-20 Watts (excluding transducer
loops)
Transducer Output Power : q 24 VDC at 400 mA+ for most
configurations (when AC powered)
Isolation : q All analog inputs and outputs are optically
isolated from computer logic supply
q Maximum common mode voltage on any
input or output is ± 250 VDC to chassis
ground.
9.3. Microprocessor CPU

Type : q Motorola MC68HC000FN16
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz, 0 wait state;
Throughput 4,000,000 instructions/sec
Coprocessor : q Motorola MC68HC881/82FN16B
q Clock Speed: 16 MHz; Throughput 50,000
floating point operations/sec
EPROM Memory : q 1 Mbyte. expandable to 2 Mbytes max.
RAM Memory : q 512 bytes standard; Expandable to 1
Mbytes max.
Real Time Clock : q Battery backed-up, time of day;
programmable interval down to 1 msec
q Maintains time during power loss
q Reports downtime on power-up
Logic Voltage : q 5 VDC
Over-voltage Protection : q Crowbar on power supply fires at 6.25 VDC
approx.
Transient Protection : q Transorbs on power supply module
RAM Memory Battery Backup : q 3.6 VDC Ni-Cad; rechargeable
Typical Memory Backup Period : q 30-60 days (with power removed)
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-1

Chapter 9 Flow Computer Specifications
9.4. Backplane
Type : q Passive; configured with plug-in DIN
‹ NOTICE! ‹ connectors
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Number of I/O Module Slots : q Omni 3000: 4 slots
pursuant to a policy of q Omni 6000: 10 slots
specifications without notice. 9.5. Process Input/Output Combo Modules
ANALOG ADDITIONAL
TYPE INPUT #1 INPUT #2 INPUT #3 INPUT #4
OUTPUTS FEATURES
Two
A 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD 1-5v; 4-20mA; Flow Pulses · Pipe Proving
4-20mA
1-5v; 4-20mA Frequency One

B 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD · Pipe Proving
Flow Pulse Density 4-20mA
Two
E/D 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Frequency Density
4-20mA
· Pipe Proving
Two
E 1-5v; 4-20mA; RTD Flow Pulses · Double Chron. Proving
4-20mA · Level A Pulse Fidelity
Two
H Honeywell DE Protocol
4-20mA
Two
HV Honeywell Multivariable DE Protocol
4-20mA
PORT #1 PORT #2
Six
SV RS-485 Multi-drop to Various Multivariable Transmitters
4-20mA
9.6. Flowmeter Pulse Inputs

Input Frequency : q DC to 15 kHz.
Positive Going Trigger Threshold : q +4.0 Volts
Negative Going Trigger Threshold : q +2.0 Volts
Input impedance : q 1 M Ohm
Configuration : q Differential input (E module inputs are
single ended referenced to DC ret.)
Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 VDC to chassis ground
Pulse Fidelity Check : q Channels are continuously compared for
frequency and sequence.
E Module Only : q Complete failure of either A or B channel
will not effect totalizing
q Simultaneous noise pulses are rejected
with 85% certainty
9-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9.7. Detector Switch Inputs

‹ NOTICE! ‹ Input Type : q Voltage
Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
Gating Transition : q Application of voltage starts and stops
product development and proves.
improvement, may make any Minimum Time Pulse High : q 1 msec
specifications without notice. Minimum Time Pulse Low : q 2 seconds
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms
Input On Voltage : q >10 V On, <4 VDC+ Off (referenced to DC
Power Return)
Debounce : q 2 sec in Software
9.8. Detector Switch Inputs of E Combo

Module
(Double Chronometry)
q Driven by open collector transistor or Normally Open

switch.
q Debounce capacitor may be needed with switch type
detectors.
9.9. Analog Inputs

Input Type : q 4 - 20 mA or 1-5 V
Input Impedance : q 1 MegOhm (250 Ohms) (4-20 mA range
selected by installing shunt resistor)
Resolution : q 14 Binary Bits, w/ 500 msec sample
Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit
Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/OF
9.10. RTD Inputs

RTD Configuration : q 4-wire Bridge
RTD Resistance : q 100 Ohm @ 32°F
Excitation Current : q 3.45 mA Nominal
Maximum Field Wiring Resistance : q 1k Ohm per wire
Resolution : q 0.008 Ohms
Temperature Drift : q Less than ±15 ppm/°F
Linearity : q ±0.020% F.S. typical ± 1 Digit
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-3

9.11. Analog Outputs

Resolution : q 12 Binary Bits
‹ NOTICE! ‹ Output : q Current source 4-20 mA (referenced to
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., transducer power return terminal)
pursuant to a policy of Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground
improvement, may make any Max./Min. Working Loop Voltage : q 30 VDC to 18 VDC
necessary changes to these Loop Resistance : q 900 Ohm with 24 VDC Power
q 1.2 k Ohm with 30 VDC Power
Update Rate : q Each 500 milliseconds
9.12. Control Outputs/Status Inputs

(12 per module)
Configuration : q Open emitter Darlington transistor source
(Referenced to transducer power return
terminal)
Current Capacity : q 100 mA max., 500 mA per module
Output Voltage : q +DC - 1 V Nominal
Common Mode : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground
Input Impedance : q 4.7 k Ohms in series with 2 LEDs
Input Voltage : q Input voltages > 8 to < DC voltage at back
panel DC terminal block, typically 24 VDC,
will be recognized as on
q Input voltages < +2 V will be recognized as
off
LEDs : q Operating and Fuse Indicators on each
channel
Scan Rate : q Outputs may be pulsed at 50Hz Maximum
9-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

9.13. Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface
9.13.1. RS-232 Compatible

(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q ±7.5 Volts typical
Recommended Load Impedance : q 1.5 k Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 10 mA limited
Input Low Threshold : q Vl = -3.0 Volts
Input High Threshold : q Vh = +3.0 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.13.2. RS-485
(2 per Module)
Serial Data Output Voltage : q 5 Volts differential driver
Recommended Load Impedance : q 120 Ohm
Short Circuit Current : q 20 mA
Input Low Threshold : q 0.8 Volts
Baud Rate : q Software selectable
q Range 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 k bps
Common Mode Voltage : q ±250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDs : q Indicator LEDs for each channel input,
output and handshaking signals
9.14. Operator Keypad

Keypad Characteristics : q 34-key, domed membrane, with tactile and
audio feedback
Material : q Autotex 2 Hard coat Polyester Film
Data Entry Lockout : q Internal switch and software passwords
Key Debounce : q Software controlled
9.15. LCD Display

Display : q 4 lines of 20 Characters
q 5 x 8 Dot Matrix
Character Height : q 4.75 mm
Display Data : q Alphanumeric, 80 characters
Backlight : q Green/Yellow LED
q Viewing angle, contrast and backlight
controlled from keypad
ALL.71+ w 05/99 9-5

9.16. Electromechanical Counters

Quantity : q Three, with programmable function
‹ NOTICE! ‹ Display : q 6-digit, non-resetable
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Character Height : q 5 mm
product development and Maximum Count Rate : q 10 counts per second
9.17. Operating Mode Indicator LEDs
Quantity : q Four
Dual Color : q Red/Green
Indication : q Active Alarm LED
¨ Green: to indicate acknowledged existing
alarm
¨ Red: to indicate new, unacknowledged,
existing alarm
q Diagnostic LED
¨ Green: to indicate Diagnostic or
Calibration Mode is active
¨ Red: to indicate password is active
q Program LED
¨ Green: to indicate Program or
Configuration Mode is active
¨ Red: to indicate password is active
q Alpha Shift LED
¨ Green: to indicate Alpha Shift Lock
Mode is active
¨ Red: to indicate alpha shift next key only
9.18. Security
Hardware : q Optional lock on housing and internal
keyboard program lockout
Software : q Multi-level password control
9-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Volume 2B
User Manual
Basic Operation

Effective May 1999

1. Basic Operating Features ...................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions..................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Operating Modes.................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1. Display Mode ........................................................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode..........................................................................................1-2
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode ...........................................................................1-2
1.2.4. Field Entry Mode ...................................................................................................1-2
1.3. Special Keys......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key .......................................................................................1-4
1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [á]/[â] .................................................................................1-4
1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ß]/[à]................................................................................1-4
1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED .......................................................................................1-4
1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag] .....................................................................1-5
1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key ..............................................................................1-5
1.4. Adjusting the Display........................................................................................... 1-5
1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms .............................................................................. 1-6
1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms ..........................................................................1-6
1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms.....................................................................1-6
1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges .....................................................1-6
1.6. Computer Totalizing............................................................................................. 1-6
2. PID Control Functions............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions..................................................................... 2-1
2.2. PID Control Displays ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating Mode........................................................ 2-3
2.3.1. Manual Valve Control ............................................................................................2-3
2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control........................................................................................2-3
2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select.............................................................................................2-4
2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select.........................................................................................2-4
2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint............................................................2-4
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint .............................................................................. 2-4
2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown Ramping Functions ............................... 2-5
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum Output Percent................................ 2-5
2.7. PID Control Tuning .............................................................................................. 2-6
2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For Each Process Loop .........................2-6
2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine Tuning The Gain ...............................2-7
ii 21/25.72+ w 05/99
Volume 2b Basic Operation
3. Computer Batching Operations............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................3-1
3.2. Batch Status .........................................................................................................3-1
3.3. Batch Schedule Stack..........................................................................................3-2
3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks .............................................................................. 3-2
3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack .......................................................... 3-2
3.4. Ending a Batch .....................................................................................................3-3
3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a Batch ............................................... 3-3
3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad............................................................ 3-3
3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous Batch Ticket..............................................3-4
3.6. Batch Preset Counters.........................................................................................3-5
3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags................................................................................................ 3-5
3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags ............................................................................................ 3-5
3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch ..............................................................................3-5
3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on Product Interface Detection ...................3-6
4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change.............................................................. 4-1

4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag.........................................4-1
4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change Alarm Flag ..........................4-1
4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change Limits .................................................4-2
5. Printed Reports ....................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1. Fixed Format Reports...........................................................................................5-1
5.2. Default Report Templates and Custom Reports.................................................5-2
5.3. Printing Reports ...................................................................................................5-2
5.4. Audit Trail..............................................................................................................5-3
5.4.1. Audit Trail Report.................................................................................................. 5-3
5.4.2. Modbusä Port Passwords and the Audit Trail Report............................................. 5-3
6. Index of Display Variables ..................................................................................... 6-1
21/25.72+ w 05/99 iii

Figures of Volume 2
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad .....................................................................................1-1
Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes ......................................................1-3
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop.......................................................................2-1
iv 21/25.72+ w 05/99
1. Basic Operating Features
1.1. Overview of the Keypad Functions

INFO - Within the document Thirty-four keys are available. Eight special function keys and twenty-six
the following convention is dedicated to the alphanumeric characters A through Z, 0 through 9 and various
used to describe various key
press sequences: Individual
punctuation and math symbols.
keys are shown in bold The [Display/Enter] key, located at the bottom right, deserves special mention.
enclosed in brackets and
separated by a space. This key is always used to execute a sequence of key presses. It is not unlike
Although not always that the ‘Enter’ key of a personal computer. Except when entering numbers in a
indicated, it is assumed for field, the maximum number of keys that can be used in a key press sequence is
the rest of this document that four (not counting the [Display/Enter] key).
the [Display/Enter] key is
used at the end of every key
press sequence to enter a
command.
Fig. 1-1. Flow Computer Front Panel Keypad
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Basic Operating Features
Key words such as ‘Density’, ‘Mass’ and ‘Temp’ appear over each of the
alphanumeric keys. These key words indicate what data will be accessed when
included in a key press sequence. Pressing [Net] [Meter] [1] for instance will
display net flow rates and total accumulations for Meter Run #1. Pressing the
[Net] key causes net flow rates and total accumulations for all active meter runs
to be displayed. In many instances, the computer attempts to recognize similar
key press sequences as meaning the same thing; i.e., [Net] [1], [Meter] [1]
[Net] and [Net] [Meter] [1] all cause the net volume data for Meter Run #1 to
be displayed. In most cases, more data is available on a subject than can be
displayed on four lines. The [á ]/[â ] (up/down) arrow keys allow you to scroll
through multiple screens.
1.2. Operating Modes

Keyboard operation and data displayed in the LCD display depends on which of
the 3 major display and entry modes are selected.
1.2.1. Display Mode

This is the normal mode of operation. Live meter run data is displayed and
updated every 200 msec. Data cannot be changed while in this mode.
1.2.2. Keypad Program Mode

Configuration data needed by the flow computer can be viewed and changed
via the keypad while in this mode. When the Program Mode is entered by
pressing the [Prog] key, the Program LED glows green. This changes to red
when a valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.3. Diagnostic and Calibration Mode

The diagnostic and calibration features of the computer are accessed by
pressing the [Alpha Shift] [Diag] keys. This mode allows you to check and
adjust the calibration of each input and output point. The Diagnostic LED
glows green until a valid password is requested and entered.
1.2.4. Field Entry Mode

You are in this mode whenever the data entry cursor is visible, which is anytime
the user is entering a number or password while in the Program Mode or
Diagnostic Mode.
1-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Fig. 1-2. Block Diagram Showing the Keypad and Display Modes
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Special Keys
1.3.1. Display/Enter (Help) Key

This key is located bottom-right on the keypad. Pressing once while in the Field
Entry Mode will store the data entered in the field to memory. Pressing twice
within one second will cause the context-sensitive Help to be displayed. The
Help displays contain useful information regarding available variable
assignments and selections. When in other modes, use it at the end of a key
press sequence to enter the command.
1.3.2. Up/Down Arrow Keys [á ]/[â ]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad.
When in the Display Mode, the [á ]/[â ] keys are used to scroll through data
relevant to a particular selection.
When in the Program Mode, they are used to scroll through data and position
the cursor on data to be viewed or changed.
In the Diagnostic Mode, The up/down arrow keys are initially used to position
the cursor within the field of data being changed. Once you select an input or
output to calibrate or adjust, the up/down arrow keys are used as a software
‘zero’ potentiometer.
1.3.3. Left/Right Arrow Keys [ß ]/[à ]

These keys are located top-center on the keypad; to the left and right
respectively of the Up/Down Arrow Keys.
The [ß ]/[à ] keys have no effect while in the Display Mode. When in Program
Mode, they are used to position the cursor within a data field.
In the Diagnostic Mode, they are initially used to position the cursor within the
field of data to be changed. Once you select an input or output to calibrate or
adjust, the left/right arrow keys are used as software ‘span’ potentiometer.
1.3.4. Alpha Shift Key and LED

This key is located top-right on the keypad.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key while in the Field Entry Mode causes the Alpha
Shift LED above the key to glow green, indicating that the next valid key press
will be interpreted as its shifted value. The Alpha Shift LED is then turned off
automatically when the next valid key is pressed.
Pressing the [Alpha Shift] key twice causes the Alpha Shift LED to glow red
and the shift lock to be active. All valid keys are interpreted as their shifted
value until the [Alpha Shift] key is pressed or the [Display/Enter] key is
pressed.
When in the Calibrate Mode, zero and span adjustments made via the arrow
keys are approximately ten times more sensitive when the Alpha Shift LED is
on.
1-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1.3.5. Program/Diagnostic Key [Prog/Diag]

This key is located top-left on the keypad.
While in the Display Mode, pressing this key changes the operating mode to
either the Program or Diagnostic Mode, depending on whether the Alpha Shift
LED is on. When in other modes, it cancels the current entry and goes back one
menu level, eventually returning to the Display Mode.
1.3.6. Space/Clear (Cancel/Ack) Key

This key is located bottom-left on the keypad.
Static Discharges - It has Pressing this key while in the Display Mode acknowledges any new alarms that
been found that applications occur. The Active Alarm LED will also change from red to green indicating an
of electrostatic discharges
may cause the Active Alarm
alarm condition exists but has been acknowledged.
LED to glow red. Pressing When in the Field Entry Mode, unshifted, it causes the current variable field
the [Space/Clear] key will
acknowledge the alarm and being changed to be cleared, leaving the cursor at the beginning of the field
turn off the red alarm light. awaiting new data to be entered. With the Alpha Shift LED illuminated, it causes
the key to be interpreted as a space or blank.
When in all other modes, it cancels the current key press sequence by flushing
the key input buffer.
1.4. Adjusting the Display

Once the computer is mounted in its panel you may need to adjust the viewing
angle and backlight intensity of the LCD display for optimum performance. You
may need to re-adjust the brightness setting of the display should the computer
be subjected to transient electrical interference.
While in the Display Mode (Program LED and Diagnostic LED off), press
[Setup] [Display] and follow the displayed instructions:
Use Up/Down Arrows

To Adjust Contrast;
Left, Right Arrows
To Adjust Backlight
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-5

1.5. Clearing and Viewing Alarms

TIP - Alarm flags are latched
while the red LED is on. To
avoid missing intermittent 1.5.1. Acknowledging (Clearing) Alarms
alarms, always press
[Alarms] [Display] to view New alarms cause the Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the
alarms before pressing [Cancel/Ack] key (bottom left), or setting Boolean Point 1712 via a digital I/O
[Cancel/Ack]. point or via a Modbus command, will acknowledge the alarm and cause the
Active Alarm LED to change to green. The LED will go off when the alarm
condition clears.
1.5.2. Viewing Active and Historical Alarms

To view all active alarms, press [Alarms] [Display] and use the [á ]/[â ] arrow
keys to scroll through all active alarms.
Active Alarms
Temperature #1 Hi Hi
Pressure #2 Low
The last 500 time-tagged alarms that have occurred are always available for
printing (see Historical Alarm ¾Snapshot¾ Report in this chapter).
1.5.3. Alarm Conditions Caused by Static Discharges

It has been found that applications of electrostatic discharges may cause the
Active Alarm LED to glow red. Pressing the [Space/Clear] key will acknowledge
the alarm and turn off the red alarm light.
1.6. Computer Totalizing

Two types of totalizers are provided: 1) Three front panel electromechanical
and non-resetable; and 2) Software totalizers maintained in computer memory.
The electromechanical totalizers can be programmed to count in any units via
the Miscellaneous Setup Menu (Volume 3). The software totalizers provide
batch and daily based totals, and are automatically printed, saved and reset at
the end of each batch or the beginning of each contract day. Daily flow or time
weighted averages are also printed, saved and reset at the end of each day.
Batch flow weighted averages are also available in liquid application flow
computers. Software cumulative totalizers are also provided and can only be
reset via the Password Maintenance Menu (Volume 3). View the software
totalizers by pressing [Gross], [Net] or [Mass]. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Gross],
[Net] or [Mass] will display the software for Meter Run ‘n’.
1-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2. PID Control Functions
2.1. Overview of PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are available. Each loop is capable of
controlling a primary variable (usually flow rate) with a secondary override
variable (usually meter back pressure or delivery pressure).
The primary and secondary set points can be adjusted locally via the keypad
and remotely via a communication link. In addition, the primary set point can be
adjusted via an analog input to the computer.
Contact closures can be used to initiate the startup and shutdown ramp function
which limits the control output slew rate during startup and shutdown conditions.
A high or low 'error select' function causes automatic override control by the
secondary variable in cases where it is necessary either to maintain a minimum
secondary process value or limit the secondary process maximum value.
Local manual control of the control output and bumpless transfer between
automatic and manual control is incorporated.
Fig. 2-1. Typical PID Control Application - Single Loop
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 PID Control Functions
2.2. PID Control Displays

INFO - Select PID Loop 1 While in the Display Mode press [Control] [n] [Display]. Press the down arrow
through 4 by entering ‘n’ as key to display the following screens:
1, 2, 3 or 4.
Screen #1
PID #1 VALVE STATUS

Open 50.00
Indicates which parameter is Auto/Manual Auto
being controlled; primary or Primary Controlling
secondary
Screen #2
PID #1 PRIMARY
Measured 20.00
Shows actual primary set
point being used in Setpoint 20.00
engineering units
Screen #3
PID #1 SECONDARY
Measured 20.00
Shows actual secondary set
point being used in Setpoint 20.00
engineering units
Screen #4
INFO - Data such as set
points or operating mode
cannot be changed while in PID #1 SET POINT
the Display Mode. Source is Remote
Remote S.P. Input
Value is 20.00
2-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.3. Changing the PID Control Operating

Mode
INFO - Select PID Loop 1 Press [Prog] [Control] [n] to display the following screen:
through 4 by entering ‘n’ as
1, 2, 3 or 4.
To access the next two
screens you must enter the
PID#1 OPERATING MODE
[Y] to select Manual Valve or Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Setpoint even if a ‘Y’ is Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
already displayed. Sec Set.Pt 750.0
To cancel the Manual Mode
or Local Setpoint Mode, enter
[N].
2.3.1. Manual Valve Control

To change to manual valve control enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Manual
Valve (Y/N)' prompt and the following screen is displayed:
Primary Variable
(Measurement in engineering PID #1 MANUAL VALVE
units) Up/Down Arrow to Adj
Measure 20.00
Valve Control Open % 50.00
The switch from Auto to Manual is bumpless. Use the [á ] key to open the valve
or the [â ] key to close it. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous screen.
Notice you are now in Manual

PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Valve Control Manual Valve (Y/N) Y
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) N
Sec Set.Pt 750.0
2.3.2. Automatic Valve Control

To change from manual to automatic valve control, enter [N] at the 'Manual
Valve (Y/N)' prompt. The switch to automatic is bumpless if local setpoint is
selected.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-3

2.3.3. Local Setpoint Select

Enter [Alpha Shift] [Y] at the 'Local Set. Pt. (Y/N)' prompt and the following
screen is displayed:
PID#1 LOCAL SETPOINT

Primary Variable Up/Down Arrow to Adj
(Measurement in engineering Measured 20.00
units) Setpoint 20.00
The switch from Remote to Local is bumpless. Use the Up/Down arrow keys to
increase or decrease the setpoint. Press [Prog] once to return to the previous
screen.
Notice you are now in

Automatic with Local Valve PID#1 OPERATING MODE
Control Manual Valve(Y/N) N
Local Set.Pt(Y/N) Y
Change the setpoint of the
Sec Set.Pt 750.0
secondary variable here
2.3.4. Remote Setpoint Select

To change from local setpoint to remote setpoint, enter [Alpha Shift] [N] at the
'Local Set. Pt(Y/N)' prompt. The switch to remote setpoint may not be
bumpless, depending upon the remote set point source.
2.3.5. Changing the Secondary Variable Setpoint

Move the cursor to the bottom line of the above display, press [Clear] and then
enter the new setpoint.
2.4. PID Control Remote Setpoint

As described above, the PID control loop can be configured to accept either a
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ local setpoint or a remote setpoint value for the primary variable. The remote
You must assign a remote setpoint is derived from an analog input (usually 4-20 mA). This input is scaled
setpoint input even if one will in engineering units and would usually come from another device such as an
not be used. The 4-20mA RTU. High/Low limits are applied to the remote setpoint signal to eliminate
scaling of this input
determines the scaling of the possible problems of over or under speeding a turbine meter (see Volume 1,
primary controlled variable. Chapter 8 for more details).
2-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5. Using the PID Startup and Shutdown

Ramping Functions
These functions are enabled when a startup and/or shutdown ramp rate
between 0 and 99 percent is entered (see section ‘PID Setup’ in Volume 3).
Commands are provided to ‘Start’ the valve ramping open, ‘Shutdown’ to the
minimum percent open valve or ‘Stop’ the flow by closing the valve
immediately once it has been ramped to the minimum percent open.
These commands are accessed using the keypad by pressing [Prog] [Batch]
[Meter] [n], which will display the following:
Mtr1 Batch Start Y ?

Shutdown to Min% ?
Batch Stop ?
Print & Reset ?
2.6. Startup Ramp/Shutdown Ramp/Minimum

Output Percent
Inputs are provided for startup/shutdown ramp rates and minimum output %
settings. When these startup/shutdown ramp rates are applied the control
output, movements will be limited to the stated % movement per ½ second (see
Volume 3). On receipt of a shutdown signal, the output will ramp to the
minimum output % for topoff purposes.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-5

2.7. PID Control Tuning

Individual control of gain and integral action are provided for both the primary
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ and secondary control loops. Tune the primary variable loop first by setting the
PID Control Tuning - The secondary setpoint high or low enough to stop the secondary control loop from
primary variable must be taking control. Adjust the primary gain and integral repeats per minutes for
tuned first. When tuning the stable control. Reset the primary and secondary set points to allow control on
primary variable loop, you
must set the secondary the secondary variable without interference from the primary variable. Adjust
setpoint high or low enough the secondary gain and integral repeats per minute for stable control of the
to the point where it will not secondary variable.
take control. Otherwise, the
PID loop will become very
unstable and virtually
impossible to tune. Adjust the 2.7.1. Estimating The Required Controller Gain For
primary gain and integral Each Process Loop
repeats per minute until you
achieve stable control. Each process loop will exhibit a gain function. A change in control valve output
Likewise, when tuning the
secondary setpoint, the
will produce a corresponding change in each of the process variables. The ratio
primary must be set so it of these changes represents the gain of the loop (For example: If a 10 %
cannot interfere. Once you change in control output causes a 10% change in the process variable, the loop
have achieved stable control gain is 1.0. If a 10 % change in control output causes a 20 % change in process
of both loops, you can then
variable, the loop gain is 2.0). To provide stable control the gain of each loop
enter the setpoints
established for each loop at with the controller included must be less than 1.0. In practice the controller gain
normal operating conditions. is usually adjusted so that the total loop gain is between 0.6 and 0.9.
Unfortunately the gain of each loop can vary with operating conditions. For
example: A butterfly control valve may have a higher gain when almost closed
to when it is almost fully open. This means that in many cases the controller
gain must be set low so that stable control is achieved over the required range
of control.
To estimate the gain of each loop proceed as follows for the required range of
operating conditions:
(1) In manual, adjust the control output for required flowing conditions and
note process variable values.
(2) Make a known percentage step change of output (i.e., from 20% to 22%
equals a 10% change).
(3) Note the percentage change of each process variable (i.e., 100 m3/hr to
110 m3/hr equals a 10% change).
INFO - The primary gain (1) Primary Gain Estimate = 0.75 / (Primary Loop Gain).
interacts with the secondary
gain. The actual secondary (2) Secondary Gain = 0.75 / (Secondary Loop Gain x Primary Gain
gain factor is the product of Estimate).
the primary gain and
secondary gain factors.
2-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.7.2. Estimating The Repeats / Minutes And Fine

Tuning The Gain
(1) Set the 'repeats / minute' to 40 for both primary and secondary loops.
(2) Adjust set points so that only the primary (sec) loop is trying to control.
(3) While controlling the primary (sec) variable, increase the primary (sec)
gain until some controlled oscillation is observed.
(4) Set the primary (sec) 'repeats/minute' to equal 0.75 / (Period of the
oscillation in minutes).
(5) Set the primary (sec) gain to 75% of the value needed to make the loop
oscillate.
(6) Repeat (2) through (5) for the secondary variable loop.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-7

3. Computer Batching Operations
3.1. Introduction
A complete set of software batch totalizers and flow weighted averages are also
provided in addition to the daily and cumulative totalizers. These totalizers and
averages can be printed, saved and reset automatically, based on the number
of barrels or cubic meters delivered, change of product or on demand. The
Omni flow computer can keep track of 4 independent meter runs running any
combination of 16 different products. Flowmeter runs can be combined and
treated as a station. The batch totalizers and batch flow weighted averages are
printed, saved and reset at the end of each batch. The next batch starts
automatically when the pulses from the flowmeter exceed the meter active
threshold frequency. Pulses received up to that point which do not exceed the
threshold frequency are still included in the new batch, but the batch start time
and date are not captured until the threshold is exceeded.
3.2. Batch Status

The batch status appears on the Status Report and is defined as either:
o In Progress ------- Batch is in progress with the meter active.
o Suspended ------- Batch is in progress with the meter not active.
o Batch Ended ----- Batch End has been received, meter not active.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 Computer Batching Operations
3.3. Batch Schedule Stack

When running independent products on each meter run, each flowmeter run has
a batch schedule stack which stores the setup information for up to 5 future
batches. The setup information is popped off the appropriate stack by the
computer at the beginning of each batch. When all meter runs are running the
same product, the individual meter run batch schedule stacks are combined and
organized to store up to the next 23 future station batches.
3.3.1. Empty Batch Schedule Stacks

TIP - When ending a batch The flow computer will use the batch setup data for the batch last completed if
with flow occurring, the meters batch schedule stack is empty at the beginning of a new next batch.
remember that the next batch
will start immediately after
you end the current one. You
should check that the batch 3.3.2. Manually Editing the Batch Schedule Stack
schedule contains the correct
setup information for that Pressing [Prog] [Batch] [Setup] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]
batch. displays the screen similar to that shown below. The screen shows information
regarding the current running batch. The 16 character batch ID number appears
on all reports and can be edited at any time during a batch. The starting size of
the batch in net barrels is used to determine the value of the batch preset
counter. It can be changed at any time during a batch and the batch preset
counter will be adjusted accordingly.
MTR #1 CURRENT BATCH

ID: Butane 5010
Running Product 1
Size BBl 100
By using the [á ]/[â ] keys you can scroll through and modify any one of the 6
batch setups (in Independent Batch Stack) and 24 (in Common Batch Stack) in
the Batch Schedule Stack.
M1:1 I=Ins D=Del ?

ID: EP-001-021-BUT
Product to Run? 0
Size BBl 0
The number on the left on Line 1 is the flowmeter run number and stack
position; i.e., M2:1 will be the next batch setup run for Meter #2, M2:2 the next
and so on. Batch setups can be inserted before the displayed position or the
displayed setup by entering ‘I’ and can be deleted by entering ‘D” on Line 1.
Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
3-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.4. Ending a Batch

A batch in progress is ended by setting the appropriate “End Batch Flag’ in the
computer’s database. This can be done manually from the keypad, on a timed
basis, through a digital I/O point or via a ModbusÔ command.
3.4.1. Using the Product Change Strobes to End a

Batch
Batches can be ended and products changed by using the ‘Product Change
Strobes’ (Boolean 1707 for Station and 1747 through 1750 for Meter Runs 1
through 4). Setting any of these Boolean commands, either through a digital
input or writing it through a ModbusÔ port, will cause the flow computer to:
(1) Determine what the next product to run will be by decoding the binary
coded ’Product Select Input’ flags (Booleans 1743 through 1746).
(2) Write the number of the selected product into the next batch stack
position.
(3) End the batch in progress and print a batch report.
(4) Pop the batch setup off the stack and start a new batch.
3.4.2. Manually Ending a Batch from the Keypad

Press the [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] or [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Batch] keys and a
screen similar to the following will be displayed:
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Pressing [Prog] [Batch] and [Enter] (i.e., not specifying a meter run) will
display the following:
STATION BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Enter [Y] to the ’Print & Reset ?’ question and enter your password when
requested. The batch will be ended immediately and a Batch Report printed out.
The above displays will vary if the PID ramping functions are enabled (see the
following section).
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-3

3.5. Recalculate and Reprint a Previous

Batch Ticket
Recalculating a Previous To recalculate and reprint a previous batch, you must do the following:
Batch - For more information
on this topic, see Technical
Bulletin TB-980202 (1) Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number).
“Recalculating a Previous The Omni LCD screen will display:
Batch within the Flow
Computer” included in
Volume 5.
METER #1 BATCH
Print & Reset ?
Select Prev# Batch 1
Enter API60 .0
Enter SG60 .0000
Enter %S&W .00
Recalculate&Print?
(2) Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores
the last 4 completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed

to
4 = oldest batch completed.
(3) Press [¯ ] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a number
between 1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated. The
flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previous
batch’ data points within the database (see explanation in Technical
Bulletin TB-980202)
(4) Enter Password when requested. Scroll to either “Enter API60” or
“Enter SG60” or “Enter %S&W”. Type in a valid value and press
[Enter].
(5) Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory.
The default batch report shows the batch number as XXXXXX-XX where the
number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number and the number after the ‘-’ is the
number of times that the batch has been recalculated.
3-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.6. Batch Preset Counters

INFO - In order to activate Independent batch preset counters are provided for each meter run when in the
the batch preset counter you Independent Batch Stack Mode. Each batch preset counter is pre-loaded with
must have entered a batch
size other than zero before
the batch size taken from the appropriate batch schedule stack. The counter is
the batch started (i.e., automatically reduced by the meter runs net flow. Press [Batch] [Preset]
starting with a batch size of [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset] to see the current value of the
zero disables the preset counter for a particular meter run:
counter feature). Batch
presets can be selected for
gross, net or mass units (see
Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring Meter#1 Batch Preset
the Meter Station). barrels 49978
Mtr#1 Preset Warning
barrels 100
3.6.1. Batch Preset Flags

The batch preset flags are Boolean variables within the database which are
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter reaches zero.
They are available for use in programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O
functions.
3.6.2. Batch Warning Flags

The batch warning flags are Boolean variables within the database which is
automatically set whenever the appropriate batch preset counter is equal or less
than the programmed batch warning value. It is available for use in
programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
3.7. Adjusting the Size of a Batch

INFO - The batch preset The size of a running batch may change several times during the progress of
counter can be selected for the batch. This is usually due to product take-off or injection upstream of the
gross, net or mass units (see
Volume 3; 2.7. Configuring
metering station. While in the Display Mode, press [Prog] and then [Batch]
the Meter Station). [Preset] [Meter] [n] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]. This will show the
following screen.
ADJUST #1 BATCH SIZE

Enter Amount to
Adjust 0
Size Now 100000
Press [Clear] and enter the number of barrels/cubic meters (lbs or kgs) that you
wish to add to the size of the batch. Enter a minus number to reduce the size of
the batch.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-5

3.8. Automatic Batch Changes Based on

Product Interface Detection
Automatic batch changes can be made by the computer by monitoring the rate
of change of the product’s specific gravity/density during the final moments of a
batch. For example, a Boolean point can be programmed to be active whenever
the specific gravity rate of change flag is set and the batch warning flag is set.
A digital output can then be assigned to this ‘interface detected’ Boolean flag
and can be used to cause a ‘batch end’ command. Specific gravity disturbances
which may occur during the batch will be alarmed but will not be used to end a
batch unless the batch warning flag has been reached.
3-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

4. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change
4.1. Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change

Alarm Flag
D SG & D Dens - Delta The specific gravity/density rate of change alarm flag is a flag within the
Specific Gravity (DSG) refers database which is set whenever the rate of change of the station gravity/density
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
with respect to flow (DSG or DDens ¾see sidebar) exceeds the preset limit. It is
Density (DDens) refers to used to detect a change in flowing product and is available for use in
metric units and is measured programmable Boolean equations and digital I/O functions.
in kilograms per cubic meter.
The DSG (or DDens) function
is the smallest difference in
specific gravity (or density) 4.2. Delayed Specific Gravity/Density Rate of
between two products that
will form the product Change Alarm Flag
interface.
In many cases the densitometer or gravitometer used to detect the product
interface is mounted many Bbls (m3 or liter3) ahead of the valve manifold used
to cut the product and end the batch. A second gravity/density rate of change
flag which is delayed by the amount of line pack Bbls or m3 provides an
accurate indication of when the interface reaches the actual valve manifold.
Next Interface Due

Barrels 156
The 'Next Interface Due' counter shows the number of Bbls or m3 of line pack
remaining before the leading edge of the product interface reaches the valve
manifold. A minus number indicates that the leading edge has passed. Up to
three interfaces can be tracked between the interface detector and the valve
manifold.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Specific Gravity/Density Rate of Change
4.3. Determining the Gravity Rate of Change

Limits
D SG & D Dens - Delta To accurately detect the product interface it is important to set the ‘gravity’ rate
Specific Gravity (DSG) refers of change limits correctly. This limit is expressed as change in Specific Gravity
to U.S. customary units and
is measured per barrel. Delta
per Net Bbl or m3 (DSG/Bbl or DDens/m3 ¾see sidebar) and as such is flow rate
Density (DDens) refers to independent. Too small a limit will cause minor disturbances to be detected and
metric units and is measured too large will cause the interface to be missed.
per cubic meter. The DSG (or
DDens) function is the For example: A pipeline runs ISO-Butane (0.565), N-Butane (0.585) and
smallest difference in Propane (0.507). The smallest DSG in this case is 0.585 minus 0.565, which
specific gravity (or density) equals 0.020 SG units. It was observed that once an interface was detected, 33
between two products that
will form the product
Bbls passed before the specific gravity stabilized at the new gravity. The actual
interface. gravity rate of change limit for this example is calculated as:
0.20 / 33 = 0.0006 (D SG/Bbl)
To ensure that we reliably detect the gravity rate of change, we set the rate of
change limits to one third of the actual expected rate of change (i.e., 0.0006/2)
which is 0.0002. To enter this value, press [Prog] [Meter] [Enter]. Scroll down
to 'Grav Change' and enter 0.0006.
Meter Station
Grav Change .0006
Line Pack 250
4-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

5. Printed Reports
5.1. Fixed Format Reports

Several reports use a ‘fixed format’ (i.e., cannot be changed by the user). These
are described below:
q Status Report Shows general information on current active
flowmeters, batch status (In progress /
Suspended / Ended), current running
products, batch ID string, current alarms and
future batch information.
q Historical Alarm Report Date and time tags of the last 500 alarms,
when they occurred and are cleared. Meter
run specific alarms also snapshot the gross
volume and mass totalizers. Meter factor
changes are also recorded here.
q Audit Trail Report Date and time tags of up to the last 150
changes to the flow computer database made
via the local keypad. Changes made via
either Modbus port will also be recorded if the
password feature is being used on that port.
q Product File Report Shows information related to the product
setup of the flow computer. For turbine/PD
liquid flow computers, this data includes
product name, meter factors, override
gravities/densities and the equation or
standard to be used for each product. Gas
flow computers print product name, fluid type,
calculations standard, component analysis,
viscosity and isentropic overrides, SG and
heating value overrides for each product.
q Config Data Report Lists most configuration settings currently in
the flow computer.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Printed Reports
5.2. Default Report Templates and Custom

Reports
The following reports are user-configurable via the OmniCom configuration
program.
❑ Snapshot Report
❑ Batch Report
❑ Daily Report
5.3. Printing Reports

INFO - Entering a number A Snapshot Report can be printed by pressing [Print] [Enter] and can also be
between 1 and 500 at the printed automatically on timed intervals (see “ Print Setup” in Volume 3).
‘Hist Alarm ?’ line will
cause many previous Other printed reports are accessed from the Program Mode. Press [Prog]
alarms to be printed. When
requesting reports, such as
[Print] [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
previous daily, batch or
prover reports, you must
enter a number between 1 *PRINT REPORT MENU*
and 8; 1 refers to the last
Snapshot Report ?
report generated and 8
refers to the oldest report. Previous Snapshot?
Up to 150 previous data Status Report ?(Y)
entry changes can be Prev. Batch (1-8)
printed when the ‘Audit Prev. Daily (1-8)
Trail’ is requested.
Hist Alarm ?
Audit Trail ? (Y)
Arch Starts
# of Arc Days
Product File ?(Y)
Config Report ?(Y)
Move the cursor to the report required and enter [Y] or the number of the
historical report you wish to print ([1] refers to the latest, [2] refers to the next to
latest etc). Press [Prog] twice to return to the Display Mode.
5-2 21/25.72+ ! 05/99

5.4. Audit Trail
5.4.1. Audit Trail Report

A fixed format report provides an audit trail of changes made to the flow
computer database. The number of changes that can be reported depends on
the type of changes made. The last 150 items are recorded. Each record
consists of a unique event number, time & date tag, database index number for
the variable changed and the new and old value of the variable, The starting
index number and the number of points changed is recorded when changes are
made remotely via a Modbus port, using OmniCom for instance.
Note1: Password entries are PIPELINE COMPANY NAME

recorded in this field. A three-
digit code signifies the Audit Trail Report Page: 1
password source and level of Date: xx/xx/xx Time: xx:xx:xx Computer ID: REV2271
the password entered. These
codes are as follows: Event Time Date Index Old Value/ New Value/
No. Number1 # of Points Serial Port
xxx xx:xx:xx xx/xx/xx xxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx x.xxxxxxxxxxx
5.4.2. Modbusä Port Passwords and the Audit Trail

Report
The Audit Trail Report is stored within the flow computer and is used to
document and time and date stamp changes made to the flow computer
database, either via the local keypad or via password protected serial port
access. The report is formatted in columns as shown above:
PASSWORD CODES
Privileged Level Password entered at the Level A Password entered via Serial Port
100 300
keypad #3
Level 1 Password entered at local keypad Level B Password entered via Serial Port
101 301
#3
Level 2 Password entered at local keypad Level C Password entered via Serial Port
102 302
#3
Serial Port #2 Level A Password entered Level A Password entered via Serial Port
103 400
at local keypad #4
Serial Port #3 Level A Password entered Level B Password entered via Serial Port
104 401
at local keypad #4
Serial Port #4 Level A Password entered Level C Password entered via Serial Port
105 402
at local keypad #4
Level 1A Password entered at local Level A Password entered via Serial Port
108 500
keypad #1
Level A Password entered via Serial Port Level B Password entered via Serial Port
200 501
#2 #1
Level B Password entered via Serial Port Level C Password entered via Serial Port
201 502
#2 #1
Level C Password entered via Serial Port Serial Port #1 Level A Password entered
202 503
#2 at local keypad
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-3

6. Index of Display Variables
Index of Display Variables DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES

-These lists contain variable
groups and corresponding
key press sequences needed
Flow Rates and Totalizers
to display them. In most Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
cases, the sequence can be shown below:
reversed (i.e.: [Temp]
[Meter] [n] is the same as Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Gross [Gross] or [Gross] [Meter] [n]
[Meter] [n] [Temp]). In all Batch Uncorrected Gross [Batch] [Gross] or [Batch] [Gross] [Meter] [n]
cases, the [Display/Enter]
key (keypad bottom right) Daily & Cumulative Uncorrected Net [Net] or [Net] [Meter] [n]
must be pressed to enter the
command. Some variables Batch Corrected Net [Batch] [Net] or [Batch] [Net] [Meter] [n]
may not be displayed based
on the application or the Daily & Cumulative Mass [Mass] or [Mass] [Meter] [n]
physical I/O assignments. Batch Mass [Batch] [Mass] or [Batch] [Mass] [Meter] [n]
Current Instantaneous Values

Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
shown below:
Meter Temperatures [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Meter Pressures [Press] or [Press] [Meter] [n]
Density [Density] or [Density] [Meter] [n]
Unfactored Density [Density] [Meter] [n]
API Gravity & API @ Reference

Specific Gravity & SG @ Reference [SG/API] or [SG/API] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Temperatures [Density] [Temp] or [Density] [Temp] [Meter] [n]
Densitometer Pressures [Density] [Press] or [Density] [Press] [Meter] [n]
Orifice Differential Pressures [D.P.] or [D.P.] [Meter] [n]
Orifice & Pipe Diameter [Orifice] or [Orifice] [Meter] [n]
Auxiliary Inputs 1-4 [Analysis] [Input]
Calculation Factors
Batch Totalizers are displayed by including the [Batch] key before the key presses
shown below.
Compressibility Factors (Fpv)
Volume Correction Factor (VCF) [Temp] [Factor] or [Temp] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Pressure Correction Factors (Cpl) [Press] [Factor] or [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Batch FWA Meter Factors [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Factor]
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-1

Chapter 6 Index of Display Variables
DISPLAY VARIABLES VALID KEY PRESSES
Other Factors and Intermediate Calculation factors

Orifice Coefficients, Expansion & Velocity
Approach Factors, Coefficient Iteration Loop
Counters [Orifice] [Factor] or [Orifice] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Solartron / Sarasota / UGC Factors [Density] [Factor] or [Density][Factor] [Meter] [n]
Equilibrium Pressure / A, B & F Factors [Press] [Factor] [Meter] [n]
Alarm Information
Active Alarms [Alarms]
Transducer High/Low Alarm Limits [Meter] or [Meter] [n]
Product Information
Running Product [Product]
Product Number and Name

Override API & Specific Gravity Note: n = 1-16
Density @ Reference Conditions
Calculation Mode [Product] [n] or [Analysis] [Product] [n]
Batch Schedule Stack & Presets

Batch ID Character String
Running Product Number [Batch] [Setup] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Setup]
Batch Preset Counters &

Interface Due Line Pack Counter [Batch] [Preset] or [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Preset]
Miscellaneous Displays
Current Time & Date
Power Last Applied Time & Date
Power Last Lost Time & Date
Task Timing Display [Time]
Display of Raw Input Signals [Input]
Display of Raw Output Signals [Output]
Hardware Inventory / Software Version [Status]
Multivariable Module Status [Input] [Status]
PID Control Displays

Primary Setpoint Source Local/Remote
Remote Setpoint Value
Primary Measurement & Setpoint
Secondary Measurement & Setpoint
Valve Open % & Auto/Manual Status [Control] [n]
User Displays
Up to eight additional displays can be programmed by the user (See Volume 3 for
more details).
6-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Volume 3B
User Manual
Configuration and
Advanced Operation

Effective May 1999

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 21/25.72............................................................ 1-1

1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of Flowmeters..................................................... 1-1
1.2. Product Configuration ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run ................................................................. 1-2
1.4. Temperature, Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmitters....................... 1-2
1.5. Densitometers ...................................................................................................... 1-2
1.6. Multivariable Flow Transmitters .......................................................................... 1-2
1.7. Station Capability ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.8. Auxiliary Inputs .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.9. Number of Products - Information Stored per Product ..................................... 1-3
1.10. Orifice Flow Calculation Standards .................................................................... 1-3
1.11. Type of Products Measured ................................................................................ 1-3
1.12. Batching and Interface Detection ....................................................................... 1-3
1.13. PID Control Functions ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.14. Flow Weighted Averages ..................................................................................... 1-4
1.15. User-Programmable Digital I/O............................................................................ 1-4
1.16. User-Programmable Logic Functions................................................................. 1-4
1.17. User-Programmable Alarm Functions ................................................................ 1-4
1.18. User-Programmable Variables ............................................................................ 1-4
1.19. User Display Setups............................................................................................. 1-4
1.20. User Report Templates ........................................................................................ 1-5
1.21. Serial Communication Links ............................................................................... 1-5
1.22. Peer-to-Peer Communications ............................................................................ 1-5
1.23. Archive Data ......................................................................................................... 1-5
1.24. OmniComä Software Communications Package............................................... 1-5
1.25. OmniViewä Software Communications Package .............................................. 1-5
ii 21/25.72+ w 05/99
Volume 3b Configuration and Advanced Operation
2. Flow Computer Configuration ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................2-1
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program Mode .................................................2-1
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode .................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.2. Changing Data...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.3. Menu Selection Method ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.4. Random Access Method ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.5. Passwords ............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3. Getting Help ..........................................................................................................2-4
2.4. Program Inhibit Switch.........................................................................................2-4
2.5. Configuring the Physical Inputs / Outputs.........................................................2-5
2.5.1. Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup Menu) ............................................ 2-5
2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for Configuration ............................................... 2-6
2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings............................................................................ 2-6
2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password ...................................................... 2-7
2.5.5. I/O Module Settings .............................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.6. Meter Station I/O Assignments.............................................................................. 2-9
2.5.7. Meter Run I/O Assignments ................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.8. PID Control I/O Assignments .............................................................................. 2-14
2.5.9. Analog Output Assignments................................................................................ 2-16
2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings .............................................................................. 2-17
2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements.................................................................... 2-18
2.5.12. Programmable Variable Statements.................................................................... 2-20
2.5.13. User Display Settings.......................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings..................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings ............................................................................. 2-26
2.5.16. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings .............................................................. 2-28
2.5.17. Custom Modbusä Data Packet Settings .............................................................. 2-33
2.5.18. Programmable Logic Controller Setup ................................................................ 2-34
2.5.19. Archive File Setup .............................................................................................. 2-34
2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date ............................................................................2-35
2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu .......................................................... 2-35
2.6.2. Time and Date Settings ...................................................................................... 2-35
21/25.72+ w 05/99 iii

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station ........................................................................... 2-36

2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu ................................................................ 2-36
2.7.2. Meter Station Settings ......................................................................................... 2-36
2.8. Configuring Meter Runs..................................................................................... 2-40
2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu........................................................... 2-40
2.8.2. Meter Run Settings.............................................................................................. 2-40
2.9. Configuring Meter Temperature........................................................................ 2-43
2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu ....................................................... 2-43
2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings ................................................................................ 2-43
2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings ................................................................... 2-45
2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure .............................................................................. 2-46
2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu ............................................................. 2-46
2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings ...................................................................................... 2-46
2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings.......................................................................... 2-48
2.11. Configuring Meter Relative Density (Specific Gravity) / Density..................... 2-49
2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu ................................................... 2-49
2.11.2. Meter Relative Density / Density Settings ............................................................ 2-49
2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs ...................................................................... 2-53
2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu......................................................... 2-53
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings ................................................................................ 2-53
2.13. Configuring Differential Pressure ..................................................................... 2-56
2.13.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup Submenu ........................................... 2-56
2.13.2. Meter Differential Pressure Settings .................................................................... 2-56
2.14. Configuring Products ........................................................................................ 2-59
2.14.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup Submenu.......................................... 2-59
2.14.2. Product Settings .................................................................................................. 2-59
2.15. Configuring Batches .......................................................................................... 2-66
2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors .................................................................. 2-67
2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu ................................................................. 2-67
2.16.2. Factor Settings .................................................................................................... 2-67
2.17. Configuring Printers .......................................................................................... 2-69
2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu................................................................. 2-69
2.17.2. Printer Settings.................................................................................................... 2-69
iv 21/25.72+ w 05/99
3. User-Programmable Functions.............................................................................. 3-1

3.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................3-1
3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and Statements .........................................3-1
3.2.1. What is a Boolean?............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables (5001 ® 8999) ................................ 3-3
3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions....................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured................................................... 3-8
3.3. User Programmable Variables and Statements................................................3-10
3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators Allowed ................................. 3-10
3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements................................................. 3-12
3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables ................................................. 3-13
3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt......................................................... 3-13
3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a User Variable........................ 3-13
3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions ............................................................. 3-14
3.4. User Configurable Display Screens ..................................................................3-15
4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for US Customary Units (Revision 21.72+).... 4-1
4.1. Flow Rate for Liquid Orifice Metering .................................................................4-1
4.1.1. Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions.................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2. Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (Bbl/hr) ............................ 4-1
4.1.3. Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (Bbl/hr) .................................... 4-1
4.1.4. Nomenclature ....................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5. Diameters and Diameter Correlations ................................................................... 4-3
4.1.6. Velocity of Approach Factor ‘Ev’ ............................................................................ 4-5
4.1.7. Discharge Coefficients ‘Cd’.................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.8. Fluid Expansion Factor ‘Y’ .................................................................................... 4-8
4.2. Densities and Other Properties of Liquids..........................................................4-9
4.2.1. Flowing Density ‘rf’ for Crude Oil and Refined Products ........................................ 4-9
4.2.2. Density Calculated from Digital Densitometer Output Frequency ........................ 4-11
21/25.72+ w 05/99 v
4.3. Equations for Propylene, Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes, and Ethylene ............ 4-15
4.3.1. Propylene Calculations........................................................................................ 4-15
4.3.2. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes ................................................................ 4-15
4.3.3. Physical Properties of Ethylene ........................................................................... 4-15
4.4. PID Control ......................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.1. Primary Variable error % ‘ep’ ............................................................................... 4-16
4.4.2. Secondary Variable error % ‘es’ ........................................................................... 4-16
4.4.3. Control Output % ‘C0’ (Before Startup Limit Function).......................................... 4-16
4.4.4. Integral Error ‘åe’ ................................................................................................ 4-16
5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for SI (Metric) Units (Revision 25.72+)........... 5-1
5.1. Flow Rate for Liquid Differential Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi) ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1. Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ..................................................................5-1
5.1.2. Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions ‘Qv’ (m3/hr).............................5-1
5.1.3. Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’ (m3/hr).....................................5-1
5.1.4. Nomenclature........................................................................................................5-2
5.1.5. Diameters and Diameter Correlations....................................................................5-3
5.1.6. Coefficient of Discharge ‘C’ ...................................................................................5-5
5.1.7. Fluid Expansion Factor ‘e’ ......................................................................................5-8
5.2. Densities Calculated from Digital Densitometer Output Frequency................. 5-9
5.2.1. Solartronä Density (Kg/m3)....................................................................................5-9
3
5.2.2. Sarasota Density (Kg/m ) .................................................................................... 5-11
3
5.2.3. UGC Density (Kg/m ) .......................................................................................... 5-12
5.3. PID Control ......................................................................................................... 5-13
5.3.1. Primary Variable error % ‘ep’ ............................................................................... 5-13
5.3.2. Secondary Variable error % ‘es’ ........................................................................... 5-13
5.3.3. Control Output % ‘C0’ (Before Startup Limit Function).......................................... 5-13
5.3.4. Integral Error ‘åe’................................................................................................. 5-13
vi 21/25.72+ w 05/99
Figures of Volume 3
Fig. 1-1. Typical Gas Flow Metering Configuration Using Turbine and Orifice Flowmeters ................. 1-1
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch................................................................................ 2-4
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds.............................................. 3-6
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching ................................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys..................................................................................... 3-16
21/25.72+ w 05/99 vii

1. Overview of Firmware Revisions 21/25.72

1.1. Number of Meter Runs - Type of

Flowmeters
Minimum 1 run, maximum 4 runs - orifice meters (stacked or unstacked).
PID
P D T DP
T DP SP
STREAM #1
PID
P D T DP
T DP SP
STREAM #2
PID
P D T DP
T DP SP
STREAM #3
PID
P D T DP
T DP SP
STREAM #4
P D A A A A
T
PRODUCT INTERFACE DETECT AUXILIARY INPUTS
Fig. 1-1. Typical Liquid Flow Metering Configuration Using Orifice

Flowmeters
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 21.72
1.2. Product Configuration

Parallel runs measuring the same product or independent runs with different
products.
1.3. Configurable Sensors per Meter Run

Differential pressure, meter temperature and pressure, meter density,
densitometer temperature and pressure.
1.4. Temperature, Pressure and Differential

Pressure Transmitters
All transmitters can be either 4-20mA, 1-5V or Honeywell DE digital protocol
types. In addition, temperature sensors can be directly connected as four wire
DIN or American curve RTD probes connected directly.
1.5. Densitometers
Can be configured for any combination or mix of individual or shared
densitometers of any type (analog specific gravity, analog API density, analog
density (grs/cc), digital Solartron pulse, digital Sarasota pulse or digital UGC
pulse); the maximum number that can be connected is five. Each densitometer
can be specified at either flowing or reference conditions.
1.6. Multivariable Flow Transmitters

These special type of smart digital instrumentation devices (e.g.: Coriolis and
ultrasonic liquid and gas flowmeters) incorporate multiple sensors that can be
accessed by one or more flow computers. Up to four multivariable transmitters
(one per meter run) can be connected to the Omni flow computer. These
devices use serial data communication links to transfer data to and from the
flow computer, requiring an ‘SV’ type combination module. Honeywell
multivariable transmitters require an ‘HV’ combo module. Point-to-point
configurations and direct pulse trains are also acceptable connectivity options.
1.7. Station Capability

Meter runs may be combined or subtracted in any mode to provide station flow
rates and totalizers. These can be used in 'Check/Pay' meter systems to
monitor flows and alarms, if deviations exceed a preset limit.
1-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1.8. Auxiliary Inputs

Four auxiliary inputs are provided for miscellaneous sensors (e.g.: BS&W,
viscosity monitors, etc.), and can be individually selected to be 4-20mA or
4-wire RTD probe.
1.9. Number of Products - Information Stored

per Product
Information for sixteen different products can be stored. Product setup
information includes: name, type of product, meter factors for each flowmeter,
gravity/density override, and calculation algorithm to be used when running the
product.
1.10. Orifice Flow Calculation Standards

Orifice flow is calculated in conformance with AGA 3.
1.11. Type of Products Measured

The products that can be measured are:
q Crude oil and refined products
q NGLs using API 2540
q LPGs using GPA TP16
q Propylene using API 11.3.3.2
q Ethylene using IUPAC/NIST 1045 or API 2565/API 11.3.2
q Ethane-propane and C3+ mixes (SG: 0.350 - 0.660) using calculations
based on GPA TP1 and TP2.
Inferred mass calculation mode densitometers and volume flowmeters is also
standard.
1.12. Batching and Interface Detection

Six batch setups per meter run can be programmed with alphanumeric batch ID
tag, product number to run, and expected size of batch.
Individual meter run batch preset down counters provide 'batch end warning'
and 'batch end reached' alarms.
Batches can be ended manually or automatically on size of batch, change of
product, beginning of new day, day of the week or day of the month.
Product interface detection is achieved using a meter run densitometer or a
separate station interface detector densitometer mounted ahead of the meter
runs. Line pack count down counters allow up to three product interfaces to be
tracked between the interface detector gravitometer and the valve manifold,
allowing pre-emptive product cuts.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-3

Chapter 1 Overview of Firmware Revision 21.72
1.13. PID Control Functions

Four independent control loops are provided for control of a primary variable
with either high or low override control by a secondary variable. Contact closure
inputs are activated to provide a startup and shutdown ramp function for each
control loop, if needed. Primary setpoint can be adjusted via an analog input, a
keypad entry, or communication link. Control loops are not dedicated and may
be cascaded. Data is processed every 500 msec.
1.14. Flow Weighted Averages

Flow weighted averages are calculated for all input variables and correction
factors based on daily totals and running batch totals.
1.15. User-Programmable Digital I/O

Each I/O point is individually configurable as either an input or output with
variable 'delay on' and 'delay off'. Pulse widths are adjustable when used as
auxiliary totalizer outputs or sampler outputs.
1.16. User-Programmable Logic Functions

Sixty-four logic statements can be user-programmed to control meter run
switching and provide user auxiliary control functions.
1.17. User-Programmable Alarm Functions

Sixteen of the programmable logic statements described above can be used to
contain custom text messages which can be displayed, logged and printed.
1.18. User-Programmable Variables

Sixty-four user variables can be programmed to manipulate data for display and
printing or remote access via a communication port. Typical uses include,
special units conversions, customer averaging algorithms for leak detection,
special limit checking and control functions. The programmable variable
statements can also be used to type cast data of one type to another (i.e.,
change a floating point variable to an integer type so that a PLC or DCS system
can make use of it).
1.19. User Display Setups

The user may specify eight key press combinations which recall display
screens. Each user display screen can show four variables each with a
descriptive tag defined by the user.
1-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1.20. User Report Templates

Using OmniCom the user can generate custom report templates or edit existing
templates. These are uploaded into the flow computer. Custom templates for
the snapshot, batch end, daily and prove reports can be defined.
1.21. Serial Communication Links

Up to four serial data links are available for communications with other devices
such as printers, SCADA systems, PLC’s and other Omni flow computers. Ports
communicate using a superset of the Modbusä protocol (ASCII or RTU). Printer
data is ASCII data. Baud rate is up to 38.4 Kbps.
1.22. Peer-to-Peer Communications

Omni flow computers can be user configured to communicate with each other
as equal peers. Groups of data variables can be exchanged or broadcast
between other flow computers. Multiple flow computers can share resources
such as a PLC.
1.23. Archive Data

Two types of data archiving are possible in the flow computer: (1) Formatted
ASCII text using custom report templates, (2) Raw data using archive records
and files.
1.24. OmniComä Software Communications

Package
OmniComä software is provided with each flow computer, and allows the user
to configure the computer on-line or off-line using a personal computer.
1.25. OmniViewä Software Communications

Package
A Man-Machine Interface package for the Omni Flow Computer is also
available as an option.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-5

2. Flow Computer Configuration
2.1. Introduction
Configuration data is stored in the computer's battery backed-up RAM memory
which will retain its data for at least 1 to 2 months with no power applied.
Configuration data can be entered using one of three methods:
1) Configure off-line using the OmniComâ PC configuration program and

then uploading all data at once.
2) Configure on-line using the OmniCom PC configuration program which
uploads each change as it is entered.
3) Enter configuration data via the front panel keypad using the Program
Mode.
Methods 1) and 2) require an IBM compatible PC running the OmniCom

Configuration Software and are described in a Technical Bulletin on OmniCom
(Volume 5) and in OmniCom Help. Method 3) is described here.
2.2. Configuring with the Keypad in Program

Mode
2.2.1. Entering the Program Mode

INFO - Key presses are While in the Display Mode press the [Prog] key. The front panel Program LED
denoted in bold face between above the key will glow green and the following selection menu will be
brackets; e.g.: the enter key
appears in this manual as
displayed on the first three lines of the LCD display.
[Enter].
Press Keys to Select

Group Entry, or
th
The 4 line of the display is Press “Prog” to Exit
used to show the user key
presses.
2.2.2. Changing Data

Data can be accessed using a sequential list of menu prompts or in a random
access manner by going directly to a specific group of entries.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 Flow Computer Configuration
2.2.3. Menu Selection Method

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’
refer to key presses. *** SETUP MENU ***
Misc Configuration _
TIP - It is best to use the Time/Date Setup
menu selection method when
programming an application
Station Setup
for the first time as every Meter Run Setup
possible option and variable Temperature Setup
will be prompted. Once a Pressure Setup
computer is in operation and
you become familiar with the Grav/Density Setup
application you can decide to PID Control Setup
use the faster Random DP Inches of Water
Access Method.
Product Setup
To use the menu selection
method, while in the Program
Batch Preset Setup
Mode (program LED on) Batch Sequence
press [Setup] [Enter]. A Factor Setup
Setup Menu similar to the Printer Setup
one on the right will be
displayed.
Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to the appropriate
entry and press [Enter] to access a particular submenu. The first menu, 'Misc
Configuration', should always be completed first as these entries specify the
number and type of input and output devices connected to the flow computer;
i.e., the menu items following the 'Misc Configuration' menu do not ask for
configuration data unless a transducer has been defined.
2.2.4. Random Access Method

In addition to the Setup Menu, the data is also presented in related groups such
as Temperature, Pressure, Meter, etc. You press the group key of your choice
to get to a data area. By specifying a meter run before or after a group you go
directly to the data for that group and that group only.
Once a group is selected use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to step to a specific data
entry within the group. You can view data and, assuming a valid password has
been entered, change its value as required. If an error is made, press [Clear],
re-enter the correct data and press [Enter] to enter the new value. The cursor
will automatically step to the next data item in that group unless that would
cause a total change of screen (i.e., you can always verify your entry). A list of
data groups and associated key presses is listed later in this chapter.
Example:
Pressing [Temp] will allow you access to temperature data for all meter runs.
Pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] or [Temp] [Meter] [1] will allow access to only
Meter Run #1 temperature data. For example, pressing [Meter] [1] [Temp] will
display the following until the [Enter] key is pressed.
Press Keys to Select

Group Entry, or
th
The 4 line of the display is Press “Prog” to Exit
used to show the user key Meter 1 Temp
presses.
2-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Pressing the [Enter] key will display a screen similar to this:
TEMPERATURE #1 Deg.F
Low Limit 30.0
High Limit 125.0
Override 60.0
2.2.5. Passwords
INFO - Most entry groups Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
occupy multiple screens so asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
be sure to use the [á ]/[â ] to
scroll and see all data. The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
o Local Keypad Access / Modbus Port #1 (selectable)
(Physical Serial Port #1)
o Modbus Port #2 - (Physical Serial Port #2)
Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
q Privileged Level Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords 1, 1A and 2
below. The initial privileged password for each
Modbus port is selected via this password level.
q Level 1 This level allows technician access to most entries
within the flow computer with the exception of I/O
Points assignments, programmable variables and
Boolean statements.
q Level 1A This level allows technician access to the following
entries only:
¨ Densitometer Correction Factors (Pycnometer
Factor)
q Level 2 Allows access to the operator type entries. These
entries include:
¨ Transducer Manual Overrides
¨ Product Gravity Overrides
¨ Batching Operations
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-3

Changing Passwords at the Keypad

INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’ 1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter].
refer to key presses.
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration', press [Enter].
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Maint?', press [Enter].
4) Enter the Privileged Level Password (up to 6 Characters) and press
[Enter].
5) The Level 1, 1A and Level 2 passwords can now be viewed and changed
if required.
INFO - See Technical 1) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
Bulletin TB-960701 in passwords. These are labeled ‘Serial 1 Passwd’ (if Modbus Protocol is
Volume 5 for setting Level B
and Level C passwords using
selected), 'Serial 2 Passwd', Serial 3 Passwd', and 'Serial 4 Passwd’
OmniCom. corresponding to the physical port numbering for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3
and 4.
Note: Serial PortLevel B and

Level C passwords for each
Modbus port cannot be 2.3. Getting Help
viewed or changed from the
keypad. Context sensitive help is available for most data entries. Help is summoned by
pressing the [Display/Enter/Help] key twice, within one second, with the cursor
on the data field in question. Help screens are frequently more than 1 full
INFO - The Help System is
not limited to just the
screen so always use the [á ]/[â ] keys to scroll in case there is more. Press
Program Mode. Context [Prog] or [Enter] once to exit the help system and return to your original
sensitive help is available in screen.
all modes of operation.
2.4. Program Inhibit Switch

A 'Program Inhibit Switch' mounted behind the front panel prevents
unauthorized changing of data when in the 'Inhibit' position. Most data can be
viewed while the switch is in the program inhibit position, but any attempt to
alter data will be ignored and cause 'PROGRAM LOCKOUT' to be displayed on
the bottom line of the LCD display.
The inner enclosure of the flow computer can be locked or sealed within the
outer enclosure blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch'.
‹ CAUTION! ‹
first must be disengaged by
from the case.
Fig. 2-1. Figure Showing Program Inhibit Switch
2-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5. Configuring the Physical

Inputs / Outputs
Tip - It is best to use the The Omni Flow Computer can accept many I/O modules and be configured to
Menu Selection Method (see match just about any combination of measurement transmitters. Configuring the
2.2.3, this chapter) when
programming an application
physical I/O means setting up the number of meter runs, what types of
for the first time as every transducers are to be used and to which physical I/O points they are connected.
possible option and variable
will be prompted. Once a
computer is in operation and 2.5.1. Miscellaneous I/O Configuration (Misc. Setup
you become familiar with the
application you can decide to Menu)
use the faster Random
Access Method (see 2.2.4, The physical I/O configuration of the flow computer is changed by entering the
this chapter). ‘Misc. Setup’ menu while the 'Select Group Entry' screen is displayed (see
2.2.1. “Entering the Program Mode”).
INFO - Characters in ‘[ ]’
refer to key presses. Press Keys to Select
Group Entry, or
INFO - The first menu item, Press "Prog" to Exit
'Misc Configuration', should Setup
always be completed first as
these entries specify the
number and type of input and Press [Setup] then [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
output devices connected to
the flow computer. You are
advise to complete all entries *** SETUP MENU ***
under this menu before
proceeding. Only
transducers that have been Time/Date Setup
assigned to physical I/O Station Setup
points will be available for
further configuration (i.e., the
menu items following the The cursor automatically appears at the ‘Misc Configuration’ option. Press
'Misc Configuration' menu do
not ask for or accept [Enter] and the following selection menu will be displayed:
configuration data unless a
transducer has been
defined). (See 2.5.2, this *** Misc. Setup ***
chapter) Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter “n”
Config PID ? “n”
Config D/A Out“n”
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? “n”
Config Digital“n”
Serial I/O “n”
Peer/Peer Comm(Y)?
Custom Packet “n”
Archive File “n”
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-5

2.5.2. Physical I/O Points not Available for

Configuration
Configuration parameter groups are only prompted as needed. Meter runs and
transducers which are not assigned to a physical I/O point will not be available
for configuration. In these cases the following message will be displayed:
Variable Selected is
If this message is displayed Not Assigned to a
check the I/O point
assignment for the variable.
Physical I/O Point
2.5.3. Password Maintenance Settings

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ Enter [Y] at ‘Password Maint ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
refer to password levels. following entries:
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key
presses.
{PL} Privileged _______________
Enter the privileged password to allow you to view and change all configuration data including
TIP - Use the blank lines
other passwords.
provided next to each
configuration option to write
down the corresponding {PL} Level 1 _______________
settings you entered in the Enter the Level 1 password to allow entry of all configuration data except entries which determine
flow computer. the physical I/O personality of the computer.
Some of these entries may
not appear on the display or {PL} Level 1A _______________
in OmniCom. Depending on
Enter the Level 1A password to allow entry of Density Correction Factors only.
the various configuration
settings of your specific
metering system, only those {PL} Level 2 _______________
configuration options which Enter the Level 2 password which is required for operator type entries such as gravity overrides
are applicable will be and meter factors.
displayed.
{PL} Serial Port #1 Password _______________
Enter the Serial Port password. All data in the Modbus database except passwords can be read
Note: In the privileged
via the serial ports. These passwords allow writes to the Modbus database. Password protection
password area all passwords
can be disabled by entering a blank field as a password.
are visible upon entering the
correct privileged password. {PL} Lockout Switch Active? N _______________
In all other cases when
requested for a password, Enter [N] for the lockout switch to be inactive for this serial port.
upon entering the password, Enter [Y] for the lockout switch to be active for this serial port.
the Omni will display all
entered characters as {PL} Serial Port #2 Password _______________
asterisk. Enter the Serial Port #2 Password.
{PL} Lockout Switch Active? N _______________

2-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5.4. Entries Requiring a Valid Privileged Password

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ The following entries display only when a Valid Privileged Password is entered:
refer to password levels.
presses. {PL} Model # (0=3000, 1=6000) _______________
This entry is used by the OmniCom configuration software to determine the maximum I/O
TIP - Use the blank lines capability of the computer. Enter [0] to select Omni 3000 or [1] to select Omni 6000.
configuration option to write {PL} Disable Download? _______________
down the corresponding Enter [Y] to disable OmniCom from downloading the configuration file to the Omni flow computer.
settings you entered in the
flow computer.
{PL} Reconfigure Archive _______________
not appear on the display or Enter [Y] to reconfigure archive records definition. Enter [N] when finished.
the various configuration {PL} Archive Run (Y/N) _______________
settings of your specific Enter [Y] to start the archive running.
metering system, only those
configuration options which
are applicable will be
{PL} Reset All Totalizers ? (Y/N) _______________
displayed. Reset All RAM and Reset Totalizers will only display after the privileged password has been
entered. It will clear to zero all internal totalizers. You can change totalizer decimal place settings
after entering [Y]. The three electromechanical totalizers on the front of the computer cannot be
zeroed.
‹ CAUTION! ‹
{PL} Reset All RAM ? (Y/N) _______________
If you change the number or
type of installed I/O modules, Resetting all RAM will clear all configuration data, calibration data and totalizers. This means that
you must perform the ‘Check all configuration data will have to be re-entered.
Modules’ Function to inform
the computer that you wish to {PL} Input Calibrate Default ? _______________
use the new hardware
Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog input calibration constants used to scale zero and span
configuration.
settings to the default value. This will require you to re calibrate all the inputs. You can also do
this on a channel by channel basis by entering the input channel number.
{PL} D/A Calibrate Default ? _______________

Entering a [Y] here will set all the analog output calibration constants used to scale zero and span
settings to the default value. This will require you to re-calibrate all the outputs. You can also do
this on a channel by channel basis by entering the output channel number.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-7

2.5.5. I/O Module Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Check Modules ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu and a screen similar
to the following will display:
MODULE S-WARE H-WARE

A-1 Y Y
B-1 Y Y
E/D-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
H-1 Y Y
D-2 Y Y
S-2 Y Y
Update S-Ware ?
{PL} Update S-Ware ? (Y) _______________

A table is displayed showing all of the physically installed I/O modules versus the I/O modules
recognized by the software (see display example above). You must answer the 'Update Software'
question entering [Y] whenever you change the number or type of installed modules. The available
I/O point numbers are allocated to each module at this time according to the type and number of
each module (see Volume 1 for more information).
2-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5.6. Meter Station I/O Assignments

INFO - The number of Enter [Y] at ‘Config Station ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following
process variable I/O points entries:
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in {PL} Station Configured As: _______________
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers Station Totals and Flows Defined As: Define which meter runs will be included in the station flow
range from 01 through 24. rates and totalizers. Meter data can be added or subtracted.
Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the Example: Entering [1] [+] [2] [-] [3] [-] [4] defines the station flows and totals as the result of
assigning of a variable. Meter Runs #1 and #2 added together, subtracted by the flows of Meters #3 and #4.
Enter [0] for no station totalizers.
I/O Type Mismatch - The
computer will not let you {PL} Density I/O Point # _______________
assign the same I/O point # Enter the I/O point number that corresponds to the station density or gravity input used as the
to incompatible transducer product interface detector. Digital densitometers can be corrected for temperature and pressure
types; i.e., an I/O point effects using the station pressure and temperature points. Digital pulse densitometers can only be
th
cannot be assigned as a assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4 input channel of a B Type Combo Module, or
temperature input for Meter Channels 3 or 4 of an E/D Type Combo Module.
Run #1 and a pressure input
for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O Density Tag _______________
Type Mismatch’ message is
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
displayed, recheck the I/O.
Enter Density Type _______________
Shared Transducers - Enter the densitometer type:
Enter the same I/O point to 0 = No density type selected
share transducers between 1 = 4-20mA output signal linear with API gravity units (many API devices are actually designed
meter runs. to drive non-linear API chart recorders; they are usually linear with relative density units)
2 = 4-20mA output signal linear with relative density (SG) units
Correcting a Mistake - 3 = 4-20mA output signal linear with grs/cc density
Enter an I/O point # of [0] to 4 = Solartron digital pulse, 5=Sarasota digital pulse, 6=UGC digital pulse.
cancel an incorrectly entered
I/O point #, then enter the {PL} Temperature I/O Point # _______________
correct number.
Enter the I/O point number to which the temperature sensor used to compensate the station
densitometer is connected.
Assigning I/O Point #99 - When a digital densitometer is used as the station transducer, it can be corrected for temperature
This indicates that the effects by assigning a temperature I/O point.
associated variable will be
For the station product interface densitometer, enter a meter run temperature sensor in cases
available for display and be
where a separate temperature transmitter is not available.
used in all calculations, but st
will not be obtained via a live RTD probes should be assigned to the 1 channel on A, B, E/D or E type combo modules. RTD
nd
input. The variable value is probes can also be assigned to the 2 channel of these combo modules.
usually downloaded into the
flow computer database via a Temperature Transducer Tag _______________
communication port or via a Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
user variable statement.
Temp Type (0=DIN,1=AM,2=4-20) _______________
Enter the densitometer temperature transmitter type:
0 = RTD Probes that follow a DIN curve and a = 0.0385
1 = RTD Probes that follow an American curve and a = 0. 0392
2 = Honeywell smart transmitter connected to an ‘H’ combo module or a transducer with a 4-
20mA linear output.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-9

{PL} Pressure I/O Point # _______________

Enter the I/O point number to which the pressure transmitter used to compensate the station
INFO - Characters in ’{ }’
digital densitometers is connected.
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key When a digital densitometer is used as the product interface detector, it can be corrected for
presses. pressure effects by assigning a station pressure point.
If a separate pressure transmitter is not available, enter a meter pressure transmitter I/O point.
Pressure Transducer Tag _______________
configuration option to write Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
down the corresponding
flow computer.
not appear on the display or
Auxiliary Input Assignment
the various configuration {PL} Auxiliary Input #1 I/O Point # _______________
metering system, only those Enter the physical I/O point number to which this auxiliary input is connected. Auxiliary Inputs can
configuration options which be used to enter miscellaneous variables.
displayed.
Auxiliary Input #1 Tag _______________
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
Auxiliary Input Type _______________

Enter the Auxiliary Input Type:
1 = RTD Probes that follow an American curve and a = 0. 0392
20mA linear output.
{PL} Auxiliary Input #2 I/O Point # _______________



2-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5.7. Meter Run I/O Assignments

Config Meter Runs - Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config Meter "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open
Physical I/O information for the following entries:
up to 4 meter runs can be
entered. Transducers that
are not assigned an I/O point
{PL} Select Device Type _______________
will not be available for Each meter run may use either differential pressure (orifice) or multivariable transmitter. Enter one
display or further of the following to select your device type:
configuration. 0 = differential pressure (orifice) flowmeter
1 = Rosemountä 3095FB multivariable transmitter connected to an ‘SV’ combo module (see
TB-980501 “Rosemountä 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Issues”)
INFO - The number of 2 = Honeywellä SMV3000 multivariable transmitter connected to an ‘HV’ combo module (see
process variable I/O points TB-980502 “Communicating with Honeywellä SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters”)
available depends on the
number of combo modules
installed (see Chapter 2 in Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Volume 1 for more
information). Point numbers {PL} SV Module Port # _______ _______ _______ _______
range from 01 through 24.
This entry only appears when the device type selected is a Rosemountä 3095FB multivariable
Assign [0] to ‘invalidate the
transmitter. Enter the port number of the SV combo module that is connected to this Rosemount
assigning of a variable.
3095FB multivariable transmitter. Port numbers 1 and 2 are on the SV-1 combo module. Port
numbers 3 and 4 are on the SV-2 combo module. SV ports can be connected to multiple 3095FB
I/O Type Mismatch - The multivariables as long as each 3095FB has its own unique Modbus ID.
computer will not let you
assign the same I/O point # {PL} SV Modbus ID _______ _______ _______ _______
to incompatible transducer This entry only appears when the device type selected is a Rosemountä 3095FB multivariable
types; i.e., an I/O point transmitter. Each Rosemount 3095FB multivariable transmitter connected to a SV combo module
cannot be assigned as a port must have a unique Modbus ID. Enter the unique Modbus ID of the 3095FB transmitter which
temperature input for Meter will be providing differential pressure, temperature and pressure for each corresponding meter
Run #1 and a pressure input run.
for Meter Run #2. If the ‘I/O
Type Mismatch’ message is
displayed, recheck the I/O.
{PL} DP (Low Range) I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the I/O point used to input the signal from the differential pressure or multivariable sensor for
each applicable meter run, according to the following:
Shared Transducers -
Enter the same I/O point to q In the case of stacked DP installations, enter the I/O point to be used for the low range cell.
share transducers between q When the device type is a Honeywell SMV3000 transmitter, entering an I/O point in this field
meter runs. will cause the Omni to automatically assign I/O points for the meter run temperature and
pressure variables. The assigned I/O points cannot be changed by the user.
q When Rosemount 3095FB multivariable transmitters are used no entry is needed as the flow
Correcting a Mistake -
computer automatically assigns these I/O points.
Enter an I/O point # of [0] to
cancel an incorrectly entered Duplicate I/O assignments can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs. (e.g.:
I/O point #, then enter the forward and reverse flow).
correct number.
DP (Low Range) Tag _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
Assigning I/O Point #99 -
This indicates that the
associated variable will be {PL} DP High Range I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
available for display and be This entry applies only when device type ‘0’ is selected. Enter the I/O point used to input the signal
used in all calculations, but from the high range differential pressure (DP) signal for this meter run. Duplicate I/O assignments
will not be obtained via a live can be made when a transducer is shared between meter runs. (e.g.: forward and reverse flow).
input. The variable value is Enter [0] if stacked DP transmitters are not used.
usually downloaded into the
flow computer database via a DP High Range Tag _______ _______ _______ _______
communication port or via a
user variable statement. Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this transducer on the LCD display.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-11

Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {PL} Temperature I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Enter the I/O point number used to input the temperature signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
presses. assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
When Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters are used, this I/O point is automatically
TIP - Use the blank lines assigned by the flow computer when the DP I/O point is assigned. It cannot be changed by the
provided next to each user.
configuration option to write When 3095FB multivariable transmitters are used, this I/O point is automatically assigned by the
down the corresponding flow computer and need not be entered by the user.
flow computer. Temperature Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______
Some of these entries may Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this temperature transducer on the LCD display.
in OmniCom. Depending on Temp Transducer Type _______ _______ _______ _______
settings of your specific Enter the Temperature Transmitter Type:
metering system, only those 0 = RTD Probes that follow a DIN curve and a = 0.0385
configuration options which 1 = RTD Probes that follow an American curve and a = 0. 0392
are applicable will be 2 = Honeywell smart transmitter connected to an ‘H’ combo module or a transducer with a 4-
displayed. 20mA linear output.
{PL} Pressure I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the pressure signal for each meter run. Duplicate I/O
assignments are allowed when a sensor is shared by more than one meter run.
When Honeywell SMV3000 multivariable transmitters are used, this I/O point is automatically
assigned by the flow computer when the DP I/O point is assigned. It cannot be changed by the
user.
When 3095FB multivariable transmitters are used, this I/O point is automatically assigned by the
flow computer and need not be entered by the user.
Pressure Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this pressure transducer on the LCD display.
{PL} Density I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the density signal for each corresponding meter run.
Duplicate I/O assignments are allowed when a densitometer is shared by more than one meter
th
run. Digital pulse densitometers can only be assigned I/O point numbers corresponding to the 4
rd th
input channel of a B type Combo Module or the 3 and 4 input channels of an E/D combo
module.
Density Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density transducer on the LCD display.
Densitometer Type _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the densitometer type:
0 = No density type selected
1 = 4-20mA output signal linear with API gravity units (many API devices are actually designed
to drive non-linear API chart recorders; they are usually linear with relative density units)
2 = 4-20mA output signal linear with relative density (SG) units
3 = 4-20mA output signal linear with grs/cc density
4 = Solartron digital pulse
5 = Sarasota digital pulse
6 = UGC digital pulse.
2-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

{PL} Dens Temperature I/O Point #_______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for temperature effects
at the densitometer for each meter run. If the densitometer has no temperature sensor fitted, enter
the same I/O point assignment as the meter run temperature sensor.
Dens Temp Transmitter Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density temperature transducer on the LCD
display.
Dens Temp Transmitter Type _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the Densitometer Temperature Transmitter Type:
1 = RTD Probes that follow an American curve and a = 0.0392
20mA linear output.
{PL} Dens Pressure I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the I/O point number used to input the signal applied to compensate for pressure effects at
the densitometer for each meter run.
If the densitometer has no pressure sensor fitted, enter the same I/O point assignment as the
meter run pressure sensor.
Dens Press Transducer Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the 8-character tag name used to identify this density pressure transducer on the LCD
display.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-13

2.5.8. PID Control I/O Assignments

Proportional Integral Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Config PID ? "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open
Derivative (PID) -- For the following entries:
practical reasons we refer to
PID Control Loops in this Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4
manual. However, your flow
computer actually performs {PL} Assign Primary Variable _______ _______ _______ _______
the Proportional Integral (PI) Enter the database index number of the primary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
function and does not apply
the derivative term. The Remark ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
addition of the derivative term Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
would greatly complicate variable assignment.
tuning of the control loop and
besides is not normally
applicable to the types of flow Action (Forward/Reverse) _______ _______ _______ _______
and pressure control used in Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
pipelines. increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller
output % increases.
Valid Assignments for {PL} Remote Setpoint I/O Point # _______ _______ _______ _______
Primary and Secondary Enter the I/O point number that the remote set point analog input signal is connected to (01-24).
Variables - Any integer or Assign this point to 99 in cases where the set point will be downloaded via a communication port.
floating point variable within Enter [0] if you will not be using a remote setpoint.
the database can be
assigned to be the primary or
secondary controlled variable {PL} Assign Secondary Variable _______ _______ _______ _______
(see Volume 4 for a Enter the database index number of the secondary variable in the PID loop (see the sidebar).
complete listing of database
addresses and index Remark ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________
numbers). Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
variable assignment.
Action (Forward/Reverse) _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter [F] (forward action) if the value of the primary variable increases as the controller output %
increases. Enter [R] (reverse action) if the value of the primary variable decreases as the controller
output % increases.
2-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4

{PL} Error Select (Low/High) _______ _______ _______ _______
This entry is used to determine under what circumstances the primary or secondary variable is to
be controlled. There are two modes of low/high error select:
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Mode #1: The controller will attempt to control the primary variable but will switch to controlling
presses. the secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable
ABOVE its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate
(primary) while not exceeding a MAXIMUM delivery pressure (secondary).
provided next to each Mode #2: The controller will attempt to control primary variable but will switch to controlling the
configuration option to write secondary variable, should the controller be trying to drive the secondary variable
down the corresponding BELOW its setpoint. An example of this mode would be controlling flow rate
settings you entered in the (primary) while not dropping below a MINIMUM pressure value (secondary).
flow computer. Considering these modes, select your entry according to the following flow diagram.
not appear on the display or M ODE #1 M ODE #2
the various configuration Are both primary and Are both primary and
settings of your specific secondary actions secondary actions
metering system, only those forward? forward?
are applicable will be ÷ yes no ø ÷ yes no ø
displayed. Enter [L] yes Is secondary Enter [H] yes Is secondary
action forward? action forward?
(Low Error
Select)
ï (High Error
Select)
ï
ò no ò no
Enter [H] Enter [L]
(High Error (Low Error
Select) Select)
{PL} Startup Mode (Last/Manual) _______ _______ _______ _______

This entry determines how the computer handles a system reset such as a momentary loss of
power. Enter [L] (Last) to cause the PID loop to stay in the operating mode it was last in before the
system reset. Enter [M] (Manual) to cause the PID loop to startup with the PID loop in manual
control mode and with the valve open % as it was before the system reset.
{PL} PID Control Output Tag _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the PID controller output % signal on the LCD
display.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-15

2.5.9. Analog Output Assignments

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ Press [n] [Enter] at ‘Config D/A Out "n"’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
refer to password levels. following entries (n = D/A Output #):
presses. Assign at 4mA at 20mA
TIP - Use the blank lines {L1} Analog Output #1 __________ __________ __________
provided next to each Under ‘Assign’, enter the database index number of the variable that will be assigned to the
configuration option to write digital-to-analog output points. Under ‘at 4mA’ and ‘at 20mA’, enter the required scaling
down the corresponding parameters in engineering units at 4mA and 20mA (e.g.: For Meter #1 Net Flow Rate assign 7102.
settings you entered in the Typical scaling might be 4mA=0.0 Bbls/hr and 20mA=1000.0 Bbls/hr).
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Remark _______________
not appear on the display or Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each
in OmniCom. Depending on digital-to-analog output.
{L1} Analog Output #2 __________ __________ __________
configuration options which Remark _______________
displayed.
{L1} Analog Output #3 __________ __________ __________
Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #4 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #5 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #6 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #7 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #8 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #9 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #10 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #11 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #12 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #13 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
2-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Assign at 4mA at 20mA
{L1} Analog Output #14 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #15 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #16 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #17 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
{L1} Analog Output #18 __________ __________ __________

Remark _______________
2.5.10. Front Panel Counter Settings

Enter [Y] at ‘Front Pnl Counters’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
following entries:
Counter A Counter B Counter C
{L1} Assign Front Panel Counter__________ __________ __________
Enter the database index number of the accumulator variable that will be output to this
electromechanical counter.
3
The unit of measure is the same as that shown on the LCD for the totalizer (i.e., barrels, klbs, m ,
etc.) The maximum count rate is limited to 10 counts per second. Count rates higher than 10
pulses per second will cause the computer to remember how many counts did not get output and
continue to output after the flow stops until all buffered counts are output.
Remark ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a remark in this 16-character field which identifies and documents the function of each front
panel counter.
Pulses/Unit __________ __________ __________

Enter the number of pulses per unit (volume, mass).
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-17

2.5.11. Programmable Boolean Statements

Program Booleans - These Enter [Y] at ‘Program Booleans ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
64 Boolean statements are following entries:
evaluated every 100 msec
starting at Point 1025 Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark
continuing through 1088.
Each statement can contain 25: _______________________ _______________________
up to 3 Boolean variables,
optionally preceded by the 26: _______________________ _______________________
slash (/) denoting the NOT
Function and separated by a 27: _______________________ _______________________
valid Boolean operator:
Operator Symbol 28: _______________________ _______________________
NOT /
AND &
29: _______________________ _______________________
OR + 30: _______________________ _______________________
EXOR *
EQUAL = 31: _______________________ _______________________
IF )
GOTO G 32: _______________________ _______________________
MOVE :
COMPARE %
33: _______________________ _______________________
Example: 34: _______________________ _______________________
1025:1002&/1003
Boolean 1025 is true when 35: _______________________ _______________________
point 1002 is true AND point
1003 is NOT true. 36: _______________________ _______________________
Note: Points 1002 and 1003
in this example reflect the
37: _______________________ _______________________
status of Physical I/O Points
38: _______________________ _______________________
2 and 3.
There are no limitations as to 39: _______________________ _______________________
what Boolean points can be
used in a statement. 40: _______________________ _______________________
Statements can contain the
results from other 41: _______________________ _______________________
statements.
Example: 42: _______________________ _______________________
1026: /1025+1105
43: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1026 is true when
Boolean 1025 is NOT true 44: _______________________ _______________________
OR Point 1105 is true.
Using the ‘=’ operator, the 45: _______________________ _______________________
result of a statement can
initiate a command. 46: _______________________ _______________________
Example:
1027: 1719=1026
47: _______________________ _______________________
Request a ‘Snapshot Report’ 48: _______________________ _______________________
when Boolean 1026 is true.
49: _______________________ _______________________
Note: See Volume 4 for
detailed list of Booleans and 50: _______________________ _______________________
Status Commands.
51: _______________________ _______________________
52: _______________________ _______________________
53: _______________________ _______________________
54: _______________________ _______________________
55: _______________________ _______________________
2-18 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Boolean Point 10xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines 56: _______________________ _______________________
configuration option to write 57: _______________________ _______________________
settings you entered in the 58: _______________________ _______________________
flow computer.
59: _______________________ _______________________
Program Booleans - These 60: _______________________ _______________________
64 Boolean statements are
evaluated every 100 msec 61: _______________________ _______________________
starting at Point 1025
continuing through 1088. 62: _______________________ _______________________
Each statement can contain
up to 3 Boolean variables, 63: _______________________ _______________________
optionally preceded by the
slash (/) denoting the NOT 64: _______________________ _______________________
Function and separated by a
valid Boolean operator: 65: _______________________ _______________________
Operator Symbol
NOT / 66: _______________________ _______________________
AND &
67: _______________________ _______________________
OR +
EXOR * 68: _______________________ _______________________
EQUAL =
IF ) 69: _______________________ _______________________
GOTO G
MOVE : 70: _______________________ _______________________
COMPARE %
71: _______________________ _______________________
Example:
1025:1002&/1003 72: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1025 is true when
point 1002 is true AND point 73: _______________________ _______________________
1003 is NOT true.
Note: Points 1002 and 1003
74: _______________________ _______________________
in this example reflect the
status of Physical I/O Points
75: _______________________ _______________________
2 and 3.
76: _______________________ _______________________
There are no limitations as to
what Boolean points can be 77: _______________________ _______________________
used in a statement.
Statements can contain the 78: _______________________ _______________________
results from other
statements. 79: _______________________ _______________________
Example:
1026: /1025+1105
80: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1026 is true when 81: _______________________ _______________________
Boolean 1025 is NOT true
OR Point 1105 is true. 82: _______________________ _______________________
Using the ‘=’ operator, the
result of a statement can 83: _______________________ _______________________
initiate a command.
Example: 84: _______________________ _______________________
1027: 1719=1026
85: _______________________ _______________________
Request a ‘Snapshot Report’
when Boolean 1026 is true. 86: _______________________ _______________________
87: _______________________ _______________________
88: _______________________ _______________________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-19

2.5.12. Programmable Variable Statements

Programmable Variables - Enter [Y] at ‘Program Variables ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
These 64 variable statements following entries:
are evaluated every 500
msec starting at the
statement that determines Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark
the value of Points 7025
through 7088. Each 25: _______________________ _______________________
statement can contain up to 3
variables or constants. 26: _______________________ _______________________
Variables can be optionally
preceded by the ‘$’ symbol 27: _______________________ _______________________
denoting the ABSOLUTE
value of the variable is to be 28: _______________________ _______________________
used. Constants are
identified by placing a ’#’ 29: _______________________ _______________________
symbol ahead of the number.
These and other operators 30: _______________________ _______________________
are:
Operator Symbol 31: _______________________ _______________________
ABSOLUTE $ 32: _______________________ _______________________
CONSTANT #
POWER & 33: _______________________ _______________________
MULTIPLY *
34: _______________________ _______________________
DIVIDE /
ADD + 35: _______________________ _______________________
SUBTRACT -
EQUAL = 36: _______________________ _______________________
IF )
37: _______________________ _______________________
GOTO G
MOVE : 38: _______________________ _______________________
COMPARE %
INDIRECT “
39: _______________________ _______________________
The order of precedence is: 40: _______________________ _______________________
1) ABSOLUTE
2) POWER 41: _______________________ _______________________
3) MULTIPLY/DIVIDE
42: _______________________ _______________________
4) ADD/SUBTRACT
In cases where operators 43: _______________________ _______________________
have the same precedence,
statements are evaluated left 44: _______________________ _______________________
to right.
E.g.: The value of floating 45: _______________________ _______________________
point variable 7035 is defined
as: 46: _______________________ _______________________
7035:7027&#0.5*7026
The power operator is
47: _______________________ _______________________
evaluated first (the value of
Point 7035 is set equal to the
48: _______________________ _______________________
square root of the number
contained in Point 7027) and
49: _______________________ _______________________
the result is multiplied by the 50: _______________________ _______________________
number stored in variable
7026. Note that statements 51: _______________________ _______________________
can contain the results of
other statements. (See 52: _______________________ _______________________
OmniCom Help for more
information by pressing [F1] 53: _______________________ _______________________
on your PC keyboard in the
“Configure Variable 54: _______________________ _______________________
Statement’ menu.)
55: _______________________ _______________________
2-20 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Prog Variable 70xx Equation or Statement Comment or Remark

TIP - Use the blank lines 56: _______________________ _______________________
configuration option to write 57: _______________________ _______________________
settings you enter in the flow 58: _______________________ _______________________
computer.
59: _______________________ _______________________
Note: See Volume 4 for 60: _______________________ _______________________

detailed list of Booleans and
Status Commands 61: _______________________ _______________________
62: _______________________ _______________________
Valid Numeric Variables - 63: _______________________ _______________________
These are any long integer or
floating point number within 64: _______________________ _______________________
the database (Points 5000-
8999), including Boolean 65: _______________________ _______________________
variables. For the purpose
of evaluation, Boolean 66: _______________________ _______________________
variables have the value of
1.0 if they are True and 0.0 if 67: _______________________ _______________________
they are False.
68: _______________________ _______________________
69: _______________________ _______________________
70: _______________________ _______________________
71: _______________________ _______________________
72: _______________________ _______________________
73: _______________________ _______________________
74: _______________________ _______________________
75: _______________________ _______________________
76: _______________________ _______________________
77: _______________________ _______________________
78: _______________________ _______________________
79: _______________________ _______________________
80: _______________________ _______________________
81: _______________________ _______________________
82: _______________________ _______________________
83: _______________________ _______________________
84: _______________________ _______________________
85: _______________________ _______________________
86: _______________________ _______________________
87: _______________________ _______________________
88: _______________________ _______________________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-21

2.5.13. User Display Settings

Valid Index Number Enter 1 through 8 for the selected user display at ‘User Display ? “n”’ of the
Assignments - Any 32-bit ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:
integer or floating point
variable within the database
can be assigned to be viewed User Display #1
via a user display (see
Volume 4 for a complete
listing). Key Press Sequence _______________
Using the keys marked A through Z, enter the sequence of key presses needed to recall the
selected user display (see the side bar for details). A maximum of 4 keys are allowed. User key
Valid Key Press
press sequences take priority over any existing resident key press sequences.
Sequences - You may select
a sequence of up to 4 key
presses to recall each Variable #1 Tag _______________
display. This does not count Enter an 8-character tag name used to identify the display variable on the LCD display.
the [Display/Enter] key
press which must be used to Variable #1 Index # _______________
signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is Enter the database index number of the variable that you want to appear on the LCD display. Each
identified by the red A variable within the flow computer database is assigned an index number or address. Any Boolean
through Z character on each integer or floating point variable within the database can be displayed.
valid key.
Valid keys are listed below Variable #1 Decimal Places _______________
[A] - also labeled [Gross] Enter the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the variable. Valid entries are 0
[B] - also labeled [Net] through 7. The computer will display each variable using the display resolution that you have
[C] - also labeled [Mass] selected, except in cases where the number is too large or too small. In either case, the flow
[D] - also labeled [Energy] computer will adjust the decimal position or default to scientific display mode.
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API] Tag Index # Decimals
[F] - also labeled [Control]
[G] - also labeled [Temp] Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
[H] - also labeled [Press]
Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.] Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter]
[M] - also labeled [Time] User Display #2
[N] - also labeled [Counts]
[O] - also labeled [Factor] Key Press Sequence _______________
[P] - also labeled [Preset] Tag Index # Decimals
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
[R] - also labeled [Analysis] Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
[S] - also labeled [Print]
Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
[T] - also labeled [Prove]
[U] - also labeled [Status] Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product] Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input]
[Z] - also labeled [Output] User Display #3
The [- ]/[¯ ]/[¬ ]/[® ] (Up/ Key Press Sequence _______________
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key
Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
press sequence.
Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
2-22 21/25.72+ w 05/99

User Display #4
Valid Index Number Key Press Sequence _______________
Assignments - Any 32-bit
integer or floating point Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
variable within the database Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
can be assigned to be viewed
via a user display (see Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
Volume 4 for a complete
listing). Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
Valid Key Press

Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
Sequences - You may select
a sequence of up to 4 key
presses to recall each
User Display #5
display. This does not count
the [Display/Enter] key
Key Press Sequence _______________
press which must be used to Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
signal the end of the
sequence. Each key is Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
identified by the red A
through Z character on each Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
valid key.
Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
Valid keys are listed below
[A] - also labeled [Gross] Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
[B] - also labeled [Net]
[C] - also labeled [Mass]
[D] - also labeled [Energy] User Display #6
[E] - also labeled [S.G./API]
[F] - also labeled [Control] Key Press Sequence _______________
[G] - also labeled [Temp] Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
[H] - also labeled [Press]
Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
[I] - also labeled [Density]
[J] - also labeled [D.P.] Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
[K] - also labeled [Orifice]
[L] - also labeled [Meter] Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
[M] - also labeled [Time]
[N] - also labeled [Counts] Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
[O] - also labeled [Factor]
[P] - also labeled [Preset]
[Q] - also labeled [Batch]
User Display #7
[R] - also labeled [Analysis] Key Press Sequence _______________
[S] - also labeled [Print]
[T] - also labeled [Prove] Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
[U] - also labeled [Status] Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
[V] - also labeled [Alarms]
[W] - also labeled [Product] Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
[X] - also labeled [Setup]
[Y] - also labeled [Input] Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
[Z] - also labeled [Output]
Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
The [- ]/[¯ ]/[¬ ]/[® ] (Up/
Down/Left/Right arrow) keys
and the [Prog], [Alpha User Display #8
Shift] and [Clear] keys
cannot be used in a key Key Press Sequence _______________
press sequence.
Tag Index # Decimal Pos.
Variable #1 ____________ ________ ____________
Variable #2 ____________ ________ ____________
Variable #3 ____________ ________ ____________
Variable #4 ____________ ________ ____________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-23

2.5.14. Digital I/O Point Settings

TIP - Use the blank lines Enter 1 through 24 for the selected digital I/O Point at ‘Config Digital “n”’ of
provided next to each the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the following entries:
settings you entered in the Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Digital I/O #1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
in OmniCom. Depending on Remark _______________
settings of your specific Digital I/O #2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
configuration options which Remark _______________
displayed. Digital I/O #3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
Config Digital ”n” - Assign
each physical I/O point to a Digital I/O #4 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Modbus address of a
Boolean variable. There are Remark _______________
no limitations as to what
Boolean points can be
assigned to physical I/O
Digital I/O #5 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
points. Enter [0] (zero) for
Remark _______________
Modbus control.
Digital I/O #6 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Assigning as Pulse
Outputs - Meter and Station Remark _______________
Accumulators may be output
in the form of pulses. Digital I/O #7 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pulse Width - Pulse width is Remark _______________
measured using 10msec
ticks; i.e., 100 = 1 second. Digital I/O #8 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Pulses per Unit - Pulses per Remark _______________

unit entry can be used to
provide unit conversion (e.g.: Digital I/O #9 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
entering 4.2 pulses per barrel
will give 1 pulse every 10 Remark _______________
gallons as there are 42
gallons in a barrel). The units Digital I/O #10 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
of volume, mass and energy
flow are the same as is Remark _______________
displayed on the LCD.
Digital I/O #11 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Assigning as Control
Output - Any internal alarm Remark _______________
or Boolean can be output.
Digital I/O #12 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
2-24 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Assign Pulse Width Pulse/Unit or Delay On Delay Off

Delay On/Off - Used to delay Digital I/O #13 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
or stretch a control output.
The delay is measured using Remark _______________
100msec ticks; i.e., 10 = 1
second.
Digital I/O #14 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Assigning as Status or Remark _______________
Command Inputs -
Switches, etc., can be used Digital I/O #15 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
to trigger events within the
flow computer, such as end a Remark _______________
batch or start a prove
sequence (see the facing
page for more details).
Digital I/O #16 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
1700 Dummy Boolean -
Assign all physical I/O points Digital I/O #17 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
which will be used only in
Boolean statements for Remark _______________
sequencing or control to
1700. This sets up the points Digital I/O #18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
as an input only.
Remark _______________
Note: See Volume 4 for
valid assignments. Digital I/O #19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Remark _______________
Digital I/O #20 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #21 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #22 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #23 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
Digital I/O #24 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Remark _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-25

2.5.15. Serial Input / Output Settings

Baud Rates Available - Enter [1], [2], [3] or [4] at ‘Serial I/O “n”’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, following entries:
9600, 19200, 38400.
Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4
Data Bits - 7 or 8 - 7 for
ASCII Modbus, 8 for RTU {L1} Baud Rate _______ _______ _______ _______
Modbus.
{L1} Number of Stop Bits _______ _______ _______ _______
Stop Bits - 0, 1 or 2.
{L1} Number of Data Bits _______ _______ _______ _______
Parity Bit - Odd, Even,
None. {L1} Parity Bit (Even/Odd/None) _______ _______ _______ _______
Transmitter Carrier Key {L1} Transmit Carrier Key Delay _______ _______ _______ _______
Delay - Delays indicated in
selection options are Enter one of the following options:
approximate only. 0 = 0msec delay 2 = 100msec delay
1 = 50msec delay 3 = 150msec delay
Modbus Type - Select the You must enter [0] for Transmitter Carrier Key Delay for any port that will be used with a shared
protocol type which matches printer.
the Modbus master device. If
the master can support either {L1} Serial Port Type _______
ASCII or RTU, choose RTU This entry corresponds to Serial Port #1 only. Enter one of the following options:
protocol as it is approximately
0 = Printer
twice as efficient as the
ASCII protocol. Serial Ports 1 = Modbus RTU
#3 and #4 have additional
protocol options. {L1} Modbus Protocol Type _______ _______ _______
This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1 when a printer is selected as the port type. Enter the
Modiconä Compatible - type of protocol to be used on this port:
OmniCom will not operate if 0 = Modbus RTU
downloading configuration 1 = Modbus ASCII
with this entry set to ‘Y’. 2 = Modbus RTU (modem)
Serial Port #4 has the following additional options:
3 = Allen Bradley Full Duplex
4 = Allen Bradley Half Duplex
Mixed protocols are not allowed on a communication link. All devices must use the same protocol
type. The RTU protocol is preferred as it is twice the speed of the ASCII. Selecting 'Modbus RTU
Modem' provides RTU protocol with relaxed timing which is usually needed when communicating
via smart modems. These modems have been found to insert inter-character delays which cause
a premature end of message to be detected by the flow computer.
IMPORTANT: You must select either 'Modbus RTU' or 'Modbus RTU Modem' protocol for the
port that will be used to communicate with OmniCom PC configuration software.
{L1} Modbus ID _______ _______ _______
This entry does not apply to Serial Port #1 when a printer is selected as the port type. Enter the
Modbus slave ID number that this serial port will respond to (1 through 247 acceptable). This entry
will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
2-26 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Port #1 Port #2 Port #3 Port #4

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Modicon Compatible (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter [Y] to configure these Modbus ports to be compatible with Modicon PLC equipment (e.g.:
984 series) and DCS systems (e.g.: Honeywell TDC3000 systems using the Advanced Process
presses.
Manager APM-SI). This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port
type.
TIP - Use the blank lines In this mode the point number indexes requested and transmitted while using the Modbus RTU
provided next to each modes are actually one less than the index number documented in this manual. ASCII mode
configuration option to write transmissions use the address documented in this manual. Data is counted in numbers of 16 bit
down the corresponding registers rather than points. i.e., To request two 4 byte IEEE floating point variables, index
settings you entered in the numbers 7101 and 7102, would require the host to ask for 4 registers starting at index 7100. IEEE
flow computer. Floating Point data bytes are transmitted in swapped format:
not appear on the display or NORMAL IEEE FLOAT FORMAT ORDER TRANSMITTED
Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4 Byte #1 Byte #2 Byte #3 Byte #4
settings of your specific Biased MS LS LS Biased MS
Mantissa Mantissa
metering system, only those Exponent Mantissa Mantissa Mantissa Exponent Mantissa
displayed. {L1} CRC Enabled _______ _______ _______ _______
Many protocols use either a CRC, LRC or BCC error check to ensure that data received is not
corrupted. The flow computer can be configured to ignore the error checking on incoming
Skip CRC/LCR Check - If messages. This allows software developers an easy means of debugging communications
you have disabled the error software. Error checking should only be disabled temporarily when debugging the master
checking on incoming slave communication link. The computer expects dummy characters in place of the CRC, LRC
messages, you must or BCC.
substitute dummy bytes in Enter [Y] to perform error checking on incoming messages. For maximum data integrity always
the message string. enter [Y] during normal running conditions. Enter [N] to disable error checking on incoming
Outgoing messages will messages. This entry will be disabled for Serial Port #1 if a printer is selected as the port type.
always include the error
checking bytes.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-27

2.5.16. Peer-to-Peer Communications Settings

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ Serial Port #2 of the flow computer can be configured to act as a simple
refer to password levels. Modbus slave port or as a peer-to-peer communication link. Using the peer-to-
presses.
peer link allows multiple flow computers to be interconnected and share data.
Enter [Y] at ‘Peer / Peer Comm (Y) ?’ of the ‘Misc Setup’ menu to open the
TIP - Use the blank lines following submenu:
configuration option to write {L1} Activate Redundancy Mode _______________
settings you entered in the The active redundancy mode feature allows two flow computers to operate as a pair. Each flow
flow computer. computer receives the same process signals and performs the same calculations; i.e., in
Some of these entries may “redundancy”. This mode is typically used in critical applications where failure of a flow computer
not appear on the display or cannot be tolerated.
in OmniCom. Depending on Enter [Y] to allow both flow computers to manage the peer-to-peer link between them and
the various configuration automatically switch between being the master or slave computer. Important data such as meter
settings of your specific factors and PID control settings can be continually exchanged between flow computers ensuring
metering system, only those that at any time, should a failure occur to one, the other unit would be able to assume control of the
configuration options which PID and ticketing functions.
are applicable will be The redundancy mode requires that four digital I/O ports be cross-connected to sense watchdog
displayed. failure modes using the following points 2714=Input master status, 2864=Output Master status,
2713 Input watchdog status, 2863 = Output of watchdog status. (See Technical Bulletin TB-
980402 in Volume 5.)
TIP - For maximum
efficiency, always start {L1} Next Master in Sequence _______________
Modbus ID numbers from 1.
This entry does not appear if the Active Redundancy Mode is active. Enter the Modbus ID number
of the next flow computer in sequence in the peer-to-peer communication sequence to pass over
control. After the flow computer completes all of it's transactions it will attempt to pass over master
control of the Modbus link to this Modbus ID. For maximum efficiency, always start Modbus ID
definitions from 1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer, if there are no other peers to become masters in
sequence on the communication link.
Enter [0] to disable the peer-to-peer feature and use Serial Port #2 as a standard Modbus
slave port.
{L1} Last Master in Sequence ID # _______________

This entry does not appear if the Active Redundancy Mode is active. Enter the Modbus ID number
of the last Omni (the highest Modbus ID number) to become master in the peer-to-peer
communication sequence. This is required for error recovery. Should this flow computer be unable
to hand over control to the 'next master in sequence' (see previous entry), it will attempt to
establish communications with a Modbus slave with a higher Modbus ID. It will keep trying until
the ID number exceeds this entry. At that point the flow computer will start at Modbus ID #1.
Enter the Modbus ID of this flow computer if it is the only master on the link.
{L1} Retry Timer _______________

Should any slave device fail to respond to a communication request, the master device will retry to
establish communications several times. Enter the number of 50 millisecond ticks that the flow
computer should wait for a response from the slave device. To ensure fast recovery from
communication failures, set this entry to as low a number as possible. Enter [3] for peer-to-peer
links involving only Omni flow computers. Other Modbus devices may require more time to
respond.
2-28 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Transaction #1
{L1} Target Slave ID # _______________
Each transfer of data is called a transaction. Enter the Modbus ID # of the other slave involved in
the transaction. Modbus ID ‘0’ can be used to broadcast write to all Modbus slave devices
connected to the peer-to-peer link. Other valid IDs range from 1-247.
presses. Read/Write ? _______________
Enter [R] if data will be read from the slave. Enter [W] if data will be written to the slave.
INFO - The Omni Flow Source Index # _______________
Computer determines what
Modbus function code and Enter the database index number or address of the Modbus point where the data is to be obtained,
what data type is involved by corresponding to the first data point of the transaction. This is the slave’s database index number
the Modbus index number of when the transaction is a ‘read’, and the master’s database index number when the transaction is
the data within the Omni’s a ‘write’. Refer to Volume 4 for a list of available database addresses or index numbers.
database. Number of Consecutive Points _______________
Function codes used are:
Enter the number of contiguous points to transfer. Each transaction can transfer multiple data
01=Read Multiple Booleans
points that can be any valid data type recognized by the Omni. The maximum number of points
15=Write Multiple Booleans
that can be transferred depends on the type of data:
03=Read Multiple Variables
16=Write Multiple Variables q IEEE floats (4bytes each) ® 62 maximum
q 32-bit Integers (4 bytes each) ® 62 maximum
q 16-bit integers (2 bytes each) ® 125 maximum
q Packed coils or status (8 to a byte) ® 2000 maximum
The Omni automatically knows what Modbus function to use and what data types are involved by
the Modbus index number of the data within the flow computer database. The destination index
number determines the data type when the transactions is a ‘read’. The source index number
determines the data type when the transaction is a ‘write’.
Destination Index # _______________

Enter the database index number or address of where the data is to be stored (destination index or
address). If the transaction is a ‘read’, this will be the index number within the master Omni’s
database. If the transaction is a ‘write’, this will be the register number within the remote slave’s
database.
Transaction #2
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Number of Consecutive Points _______________
Transaction #3
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-29

Transaction #4
TIP - Use the blank lines {L1} Slave ID # _______________
configuration option to write Read/Write ? _______________
settings you entered in the Source Index # _______________
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Number of Consecutive Points _______________
Transaction #5
are applicable will be {L1} Slave ID # _______________
displayed.
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #6
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #7
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #8
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
2-30 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Transaction #9
INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Slave ID # _______________
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Read/Write ? _______________
presses.
Source Index # _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines Number of Consecutive Points _______________
configuration option to write Destination Index # _______________
flow computer. Transaction #10
not appear on the display or {L1} Slave ID # _______________
the various configuration Read/Write ? _______________
metering system, only those Source Index # _______________
are applicable will be Number of Consecutive Points _______________
displayed.
INFO - The Omni Flow Transaction #11

Computer determines what
Modbus function code and
what data type is involved by {L1} Slave ID # _______________
the Modbus index number of
the data within the Omni’s
Read/Write ? _______________
database. Source Index # _______________
Function codes used are:
01=Read Multiple Booleans Number of Consecutive Points _______________
15=Write Multiple Booleans
03=Read Multiple Variables Destination Index # _______________
16=Write Multiple Variables
Transaction #12
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #13
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-31

Transaction #14
TIP - Use the blank lines {L1} Slave ID # _______________
configuration option to write Read/Write ? _______________
settings you entered in the Source Index # _______________
flow computer.
Some of these entries may Number of Consecutive Points _______________
Transaction #15
are applicable will be {L1} Slave ID # _______________
displayed.
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
Transaction #16
{L1} Slave ID # _______________
Read/Write ? _______________
Source Index # _______________
2-32 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.5.17. Custom Modbusä Data Packet Settings

INFO - Packets defined are Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
usually read-only and must needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
always be retrieved as a
packet. When Modicon 984
database. Groups of data points of any type of data can be concatenated into
is selected these packet one packet by entering each data group starting index numbers 001, 201 and
setup entries are used to 401. The number of data bytes in a custom packet in non-Modicon compatible
define a logical array of mode cannot exceed 250 (RTU mode) or 500 (ASCII mode). When Modicon
variables which can be read compatible is selected, the number of data bytes in a custom packet cannot
or written in any grouping.
exceed 400 (RTU mode) or 800 (ASCII mode).
The number of data points is
always input in terms of Enter [1], [2] or [3] to select a data packet at ‘Custom Packet “n”’ of the ‘Misc
Omni “logical” elements; i.e.,
an IEEE floating point Setup’ menu to open the entries below. Under Index #, enter the database
number comprises two 16-bit address or Modbus index number for each start data point of each group. Under
words but is considered one Points, enter the number of consecutive data points to include in each data
logical element. group.
INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ Custom Modbus Data Packet #1 (Addressed at 001)

Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
presses.
#1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
configuration option to write #9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____
settings you entered in the #13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
flow computer.
Some of these entries may #17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____
the various configuration Custom Modbus Data Packet #2 (Addressed at 201)
metering system, only those Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
are applicable will be #1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
displayed.
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
Custom Modbus Data Packet #3 (Addressed at 401)

Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points Index # | Points
#1_______|_____ #2_______|_____ #3_______|_____ #4_______|_____
#5_______|_____ #6_______|_____ #7_______|_____ #8_______|_____
#9_______|_____ #10_______|_____ #11_______|_____ #12_______|_____
#13_______|_____ #14_______|_____ #15_______|_____ #16_______|_____
#17_______|_____ #18_______|_____ #19_______|_____ #20_______|_____
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-33

2.5.18. Programmable Logic Controller Setup

Note: See Technical Bulletin TB-960702 “Communicating with Allen-
Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers” in Volume 5 for
information on the ‘PLC Group “n”’ submenu.
2.5.19. Archive File Setup

Note: See Technical Bulletin on “Storing Archive Data within the Flow
Computer” in Volume 5 for information on the ‘Archive File “n”’
submenu.
2-34 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.6. Setting Up the Time and Date

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc
Configuration', should always
be completed first as these 2.6.1. Accessing the Time/Date Setup Submenu
entries specify the number
and type of input and output Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’
devices connected to the flow screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
computer; i.e., the menus following will be displayed:
following the 'Misc
Configuration' menu do not
ask for configuration data *** SETUP MENU ***
unless a transducer has
been defined.
Misc Configuration
Time/Date Setup _
Flow Computer
Station Setup
Configuration via the
Menu Selection Method - It
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Time/Date Setup’
when programming an and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
application for the first time
as every possible option and
variable will be prompted.
Once a computer is in 2.6.2. Time and Date Settings
operation and you become
familiar with the application {L1} Omni Time ____:____:____
you can decide to use the
Enter Current Time using the correct method 'hh:mm:ss'. To change only the hour, minutes or
faster Random Access
seconds, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
Method described below.
Once you have finished {L1} Omni Date ____/____/____
entering data in a setup
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter Current Date using the correct method 'mm/dd/yy' or ’dd/mm/yy’. To change only the month,
key to return to the ‘Select day or year, move cursor to the respective position and enter the new setting.
Group Entry’ screen.
Proceed as described in this {L1} Select Date Format Type _____________
manual for each setup Select date format required by entering [Y] or [N]: Y= month/day/year, N=day/month/year).
option.
Time and Date Setup via

the Random Access
Method - Setup entries
require that you be in the
Program Mode. In the
Display Mode press the
[Prog] key. The Program
LED will glow green and the
‘Select Group Entry’ screen
will appear. Then press
[Time] [Enter] and use [á ] /
[â ] keys to scroll.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-35

2.7. Configuring the Meter Station

be completed first as these 2.7.1. Accessing the Station Setup Submenu
computer; i.e., the menu following will be displayed:
items following the 'Misc
been defined.
Misc Configuration
Time/Date Setup
Meter Station Setup via Station Setup _
the Random Access
require that you be in the Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Station Setup’
Program Mode. In the and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
LED will glow green and
‘Select Group Entry’ screen 2.7.2. Meter Station Settings
[Meter] [Enter] and use [á ] {L1} Station ID _______________
/ [â ] keys to scroll.
Enter 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. This string variable usually appears in user custom
reports (Modbus database point 4815).
Meter Station Run
Switching Flow Rate Flow Low Alarm Limit _______________
Thresholds - The Omni
flow computer has 3 Boolean Enter the flow rate below which the Station Low Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
flags which are set or reset 1810). Flow rates 5% below this value activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point 1809).
depending on the station flow
rate: Flow High Alarm Limit _______________
q Run Switching Flag #1 at Enter the flow rate above which the Station High Flow Alarm activates (Modbus database point
Modbus database point 1811). Flow rates 5% above this value activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database point
1824. 1812).
q Run Switching Flag #2 at
Modbus database point {L1} Gross Flow Rate Full Scale _______________
1825.
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. Sixteen-bit integer variables
q Run Switching Flag #3 at
representing station gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3802 and 3804. These
Modbus database point
variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of
1826.
0.1% (i.e., 0 to 999 = 0% to 99.9%)
Each of these flags has a low
threshold and high threshold
flow rate. Each flag is set
{L1} Mass Flow Rate Full Scale _______________
when the station flow rate Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for the meter station. A 16-bit integer variable representing
exceeds the corresponding station mass flow rate is included in the database at 3806. This variable is scaled using this entry
high threshold value. These and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
flags reset when the station
flow rate falls below the Flag #1 Flag #2 Flag #3
respective low threshold limit.
{L1} Run Switching Threshold Low _________ _________ _________
See Chapter 3 for more
information on how to include Enter the flow rate Low Threshold value which resets each Station Run Switching Flag when the
these flags in Boolean station gross flow rate falls below this limit (see sidebar).
statements to automatically
switch meter runs depending {L1} Run Switching Threshold High _________ _________ _________
on flow rates. Enter the flow rate High Threshold value which sets each Station Run Switching Flag when the
station gross flow rate exceeds this limit (see sidebar).
2-36 21/25.72+ w 05/99

{L1} Run Switching Operating Mode _______________

In multi-meter run systems the flow computer can be configured to automatically open and close
meter run block valves depending upon orifice differential pressure. Enter [Y] to select ‘Automatic’
mode if you have a multi-run system and wish to have the flow computer control the MOV block
valves. Enter [N] to select 'Manual' mode if you wish to operate the valves via the keypad of the
presses.
flow computer manually or via a Modbus link. Ignore this entry if you do not have MOVs which are
controlled by the flow computer.
provided next to each {L1} Run Switching Delay Timer _______________
down the corresponding Enter the amount of time in seconds that you want the flow computer to allow for each meter run
settings you entered in the block valve to open and flow rate to be established. If, after this amount of time differential
flow computer. pressure or flow rate has not been detected, the meter run block valve will be given the 'close'
command and the meter run alarmed as being out of service. The flow computer will not attempt to
Some of these entries may open a meter run which is out of service until it is placed back in service, either via the flow
not appear on the display or computer keypad or via a Modbus command.
settings of your specific {L1} Run Switching Threshold Low DP% _______________
metering system, only those A meter run will be closed when the differential pressure across the orifice falls below this
configuration options which threshold percentage of its maximum range. Orifice runs are closed starting from the highest
are applicable will be meter run number to the lowest. The last meter run is always left open but may be closed via
displayed. manual command.
{L1} Run Switching Threshold High DP% _______________

INFO - See the previous A meter run will be opened when the differential pressure across the orifice of the last run opened
chapter for a description of exceeds this percentage of its maximum range. Meter runs are opened in order from lowest to
batching features of the highest skipping any meter runs which may not be in service. Runs placed back in service will
Omni flow computer. automatically be utilized when the flow computer 'wraps around' (i.e., opens the highest numbered
meter run and then starts looking for any runs that may have been out of service previously).
{L2} Use Common Batch Stack? _______________

Enter [Y] to set up the flow computer to use a common product on all four meter runs; i.e., to run
the same product at the same time on all 4 meter runs. Enter [N] to run different products at the
same time on each meter run. (See Volume 2b on Batching Operations.)
{L2} Batch Preset Warning _______________

Enter the quantity of Batch Preset Counter Units for the Batch Preset Warning. This entry
displays only when Common Batch Stack is selected. The Batch preset counters are activated
when a non-zero number is entered for batch size on the batch sequence stack (see Volume 2b
on Batching Operations). The batch preset reached flag (database point 1819) will be activated
whenever the batch preset counter counts down to zero. The batch warning flag (database point
1818) will be activated when the batch preset counter is equal or less than this entry.
{PL} Batch Preset Units _______________

Enter the selected Batch Preset Counter Units:
0 = Net (standard) volume units (GSV)
1 = Gross (actual) volume units (IV)
2 = Mass units.
{L1} Relative Density /Density Rate of Change _______________

This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used to detect
product changes in the pipeline (product interface).
Enter the Gravity (US units) or Density (metric units) Rate of Change in relative density units per
barrel for this limit. The Relative Density/Density Rate of Change Flag (database point 1813) is
activated if the flowing gravity/density measured by the station densitometer exceeds this preset
rate of change per net barrel or cubic meter.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-37

{L1} Line Pack Delay _______________

This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. In many cases, the
station densitometer that detects the product interfaces is installed many net barrels in advance of
the metering skid to provide prior warning of a product change.
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key 3
presses. Enter the Line Pack Delay as the quantity of net barrels or net m between the product interface
detector densitometer or gravitometer and the valve manifold used to end the batch. A Delayed
3
Gravity Rate of Change Flag (database point 1814) is set when this number of barrels or m has
TIP - Use the blank lines been measured after the Product Interface Flag (database point 1813) is activated; i.e., a line pack
provided next to each delay is counted down to zero when a product interface is detected.
{L1} Relative Density / Density Sample Time _______________
flow computer. This entry displays only when a Station Density I/O Point has been assigned. It is used with the
Some of these entries may previous entry to determine the relative density/density rate of change.
not appear on the display or Estimate the minimum amount of time in seconds it takes for a product change to be complete and
in OmniCom. Depending on set this timer by entering approximately 1/4 to 1/3 of that time. False triggering of the product
the various configuration interface detection flag can be eliminated by ensuring that any density change must exist for at
settings of your specific least this many seconds.
displayed.
Auxiliary Input Setup via

the Random Access
LED will glow green and
[Analysis] [Input] [Enter] or
[Analysis] [Input] [n]
[Enter] (n = Auxiliary Input #
1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [á ] / [â ]
keys to scroll.
Note:
* Not Valid when a RTD
Probe is specified.
2-38 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Auxiliary Inputs
Auxiliary Input Setup via Input #1 Input #2 Input #3 Input#4
the Random Access
Method - Setup entries Low Alarm Limit _______ _______ _______ _______
Program Mode. In the Enter the auxiliary input signal value below which the Low Alarm activates.
[Prog] key. The Program High Alarm Limit _______ _______ _______ _______
LED will glow green and Enter the auxiliary input signal value above which the High Alarm activates.
will appear. Then press {L2} Override Value _______ _______ _______ _______
[Analysis] [Input] [Enter] or
[Analysis] [Input] [n] Enter the value (in engineering units) which will be substituted for the transducer value, depending
[Enter] (n = Auxiliary Input # on the override code selected. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override
1, 2, 3 or 4). Use [á ] / [â ] value is substituted.
keys to scroll.
{L2} Override Code _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding each auxiliary input
Note: override value:
* Not Valid when a RTD 0 = Never use override value
Probe is specified. 1 = Always use override value
2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
{L1} Value at 4mA* _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the value in engineering units that produces a transducer output of 4mA or 1 volt, or the
‘lower range limit’ (LRV) of Honeywellä Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Value at 20mA* _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the value in engineering units that produces a transducer output of 20mA or 5 volts, or
‘upper range limit’ (URV) of Honeywellä Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code _______ _______ _______ _______

This entry only applies to Honeywell digital transmitters connected to an ‘H’ type combo module.
The process variable (I.e., temperature/pressure) is filtered by the transmitter before being sent to
the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Pressure Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
1 = 0.16 seconds 6 = 4 seconds
For Temperature Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
0 = 0 seconds 5 = 6.3 seconds
1 = 0.3 seconds 6 = 12.7 seconds
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-39

2.8. Configuring Meter Runs

be completed first as these 2.8.1. Accessing the Meter Run Setup Submenu
been defined.
Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
Flow Computer
Meter Run Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Meter Run Setup’
Once a computer is in 2.8.2. Meter Run Settings
familiar with the application Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access {L1} Meter ID ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the ID of the flowmeter (up to 8 alphanumeric characters) for each meter run. This ID
Once you have finished usually appears on reports.
submenu, press the [Prog]
key to return to the ‘Select
Flow Low Limit ________ ________ ________ ________
Group Entry’ screen. Enter the flow rate for each meter run below which the Flow Low Alarm (database point 1n21)
Proceed as described in this activates. Flow rates 5% below this value will activate the Low Low Alarm (Modbus database point
manual for each setup 1n20).
option.
Flow High Limit ________ ________ ________ ________
Meter Run Setup via the Enter the flow rate for each meter run above which the Flow High Alarm (database point 1n22)
Random Access Method - activates. Flow rates 5% above this value will activate the High High Alarm (Modbus database
Setup entries require that you point 1n23).
be in the Program Mode. In
the Display Mode press the Gross Flow at Full Scale ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the gross flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. Sixteen-bit integer variables representing
meter run gross and net flow rate are included in the database at 3n42 and 3n40 respectively.
These variables are scaled using this entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution
of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to 100.0%)
[Meter] [n] [Enter] (n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Use [á ] / [â ] keys to scroll.
Mass Flow at Full Scale ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the mass flow rate at full-scale for each meter run. A 16-bit integer variable representing
meter run mass flow rate is included in the database at 3n44. This variable is scaled using this
Alternate Access to Meter
entry and stored as percentage of full scale with a resolution of 0.1% (i.e., 0 to 1000 = 0% to
Run Settings from Meter
100.0%)
Station Setup - After
entering the Meter Station
Settings, without exiting, {L1} Low Flow Cutoff ________ ________ ________ ________
press the [â ] key and you Differential pressure signals lower than the value entered here will not be totalized. Differential
will scroll down through each pressure is expressed as 'inches of water'.
Meter Run setup entry.
{L1} Orifice Measured Diameter ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the diameter in inches or millimeters of the orifice bore at the orifice plate reference
temperature. The actual diameter of the orifice bore is calculated continuously based on the
flowing temperature of the fluid.
2-40 21/25.72+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Orifice Reference Temp ________ ________ ________ ________
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Enter the temperature in °F or °C that corresponds to the temperature of the orifice plate when the
presses. bore was measured.

{L1} Orifice Expansion Coefficient________ ________ ________ ________
provided next to each Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the orifice plate (see table below). The
configuration option to write orifice bore diameter will expand and contract depending upon the temperature and thermal
down the corresponding expansion coefficient for the type of plate material. The orifice equations require the linear
settings you entered in the coefficient of expansion.
flow computer. US Units Metric Units
Some of these entries may -6 -5
Mild Steel Plate: -100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e
not appear on the display or -6 -5
in OmniCom. Depending on 304/316 Stainless Steel: -100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e
-6 -5
the various configuration Monel: -7 to 154 °F = 7.95 x e -21.6 to 67.8 °C = 1.430 x e
metering system, only those {L1} Pipe Measured Diameter ________ ________ ________ ________
are applicable will be Enter the diameter in inches or millimeters of the meter tube pipe at the reference temperature.
displayed. The actual diameter of the meter tube used in the equations is calculated continuously based on
the flowing temperature of the fluid.
Meter Run Setup via the {L1} Pipe Reference Temperature ________ ________ ________ ________
Random Access Method -
Setup entries require that you Enter the temperature in °F or °C that corresponds to the temperature of the metering tube when
be in the Program Mode. In the orifice diameter was measured.
the Display Mode press the
[Prog] key. The Program {L1} Pipe Expansion Coefficient ________ ________ ________ ________
LED will glow green and the Enter the expansion coefficient for the type of material of the pipe. The meter tube diameter will
‘Select Group Entry’ screen expand and contract depending upon the temperature and thermal expansion coefficient for the
will appear. Then press type of pipe material. The orifice equations require the linear coefficient of expansion.
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4). US Units Metric Units
-6 -5
Use [á ] / [â ] keys to scroll. Mild Steel Plate: -100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e
-6 -5
304/316 Stainless Steel: -100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e
-6 -5
Monel: -7 to 154 °F = 7.95 x e -21.6 to 67.8 °C = 1.430 x e
{L1} Use Downstream Pressure ? ________ ________ ________ ________

Static pressure of the flowing fluid can be obtained from either the upstream or downstream
pressure tap. Enter [Y] if downstream pressure is used. Enter [N] if upstream pressure is used.
{L1} Type of DP Taps ________ ________ ________ ________

The flow computer must be informed as to where the differential pressure taps are located on the
orifice metering tube. Enter the type of orifice plate tap locations or type of differential head device:
For Revision 21.72+ (US units), enter the type of orifice plate tap locations:
0 = Orifice flange taps 1 = Orifice pipe taps
For Revision 25.72+ (metric units), enter the type of orifice plate tap locations or type of differential
head device:
0 = Orifice corner taps 5 = Venturi tube; Discharge Coefficient = 0.984
1 = Orifice D and D/2 taps 6 = Venturi tube; Discharge Coefficient = 0.995
2 = Orifice flange taps 7 = Venturi tube; Discharge Coefficient = 0.985
3 = ISA 1932 nozzle 8 = Venturi nozzle
4 = Long radius nozzle
{L1} Viscosity ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the viscosity of the measured fluid in centipoise (US units) or Pascals per second (metric) at
flowing temperature and pressure.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-41


INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Isentropic Exponent ________ ________ ________ ________
Characters in ‘[ ]’ refer to key Enter the isentropic exponent of the fluid at flowing temperature and pressure. Enter [0] to set the
presses. Y factor to 1.0. This exponent is a ratio and has no units of measure (dimensionless).

{L1} %S&W Input Select ________ ________ ________ ________
provided next to each Select which Auxiliary Input is to be used to input BS&W% (%S&W) for this meter run. The flow
configuration option to write computer will use this input to determine net standard volume (BS&W corrected volume). Select
down the corresponding 'none' if no correction is required. Enter the auxiliary input used for %S&W:
settings you entered in the 0 = None 3 = Use Auxiliary Input #3
flow computer. 1 = Use Auxiliary Input #1 4 = Use Auxiliary Input #4
Some of these entries may 2 = Use Auxiliary Input #2 5 = Use Modbus
displayed.
Meter Run Setup via the

Setup entries require that you
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
2-42 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.9. Configuring Meter Temperature

be completed first as these 2.9.1. Accessing the Temperature Setup Submenu
been defined.
Station Setup
Meter Run Setup
Flow Computer
Temperature Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Temperature
when programming an Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.9.2. Meter Temperature Settings
familiar with the application Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the temperature at or below which the flowmeter temperature low alarm activates.
Once you have finished
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
key to return to the ‘Select Enter the temperature above which the flowmeter temperature high alarm activates.
Proceed as described in this {L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
manual for each setup Enter the flowmeter temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending
option. on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted.
Meter Temperature Setup
via the Random Access {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the temperature for each
meter run override value:
Display Mode press the 0 = Never use override value
[Prog] key. The Program 1 = Always use override value
LED will glow green and the 2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
‘Select Group Entry’ screen 3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
[Temp] [Enter], or [Temp] {L1} Value at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or
Enter the flowmeter temperature in engineering units at 4mA or 1volt. In the case of a smart
[Meter] [n] [Temp] [Enter]
transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'lower range value’ (LRV) of the transmitter.
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or
Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä
4). Use [á ] / [â ] keys to 3095FB device, this entry is for information only; it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be
scroll. changed by the user.
{L1} Value at 20mA*________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Note:
Enter the flowmeter temperature in engineering units at 20mA or 5 Volts. In the case of a smart
* Not Valid when a RTD transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'upper range value’ (URV) of the transmitter.
Probe is specified. Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä
3095FB device, this entry is for information only; it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be
changed by the user.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-43

Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
This entry only applies when using smart transmitters connected in the digital mode to an 'H’, ‘HV'
or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., temperature) is filtered by the transmitter
TIP - Use the blank lines before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this selection.
configuration option to write For Honeywellä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
down the corresponding 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 6.3 seconds
settings you entered in the 1 = 0.3 seconds 6 = 12.7 seconds
flow computer. 2 = 0.7 seconds 7 = 25.5 seconds
Some of these entries may 3 = 1.5 seconds 8 = 51.1 seconds
not appear on the display or 4 = 3.1 seconds 9 = 102.3 seconds
For Rosemountä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
settings of your specific 0 = 0.108 seconds 5 = 3.456 seconds
metering system, only those 1 = 0.216 seconds 6 = 6.912 seconds
configuration options which 2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
are applicable will be 3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
displayed. 4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
2-44 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.9.3. Meter Density Temperature Settings

INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
be completed first as these
Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
and type of input and output Enter the temperature at or below which the densitometer temperature low alarm activates.
devices connected to the flow
computer; i.e., the menus High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
following the 'Misc
Enter the temperature at or above which the densitometer temperature high alarm activates.
ask for configuration data
unless a transducer has {L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
been defined. Enter the density temperature value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on
the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
Flow Computer substituted.
Menu Selection Method - It {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
is best to use this method Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the density temperature for
when programming an each meter run override value:
0 = Never use override value
variable will be prompted. 1 = Always use override value
Once a computer is in 2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
operation and you become 3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
familiar with the application
you can decide to use the {L1} Value at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
faster Random Access Enter the density temperature in engineering units at 4mA or 1volt. In the case of a smart
Method described below. transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'lower range value' (LRV) of the transmitter.
Once you have finished Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä
entering data in a setup 3095FB device, this entry is for information only; it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be
submenu, press the [Prog] changed by the user.
Group Entry’ screen. {L1} Value at 20mA*________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Proceed as described in this Enter the density temperature in engineering units at 20mA or 5volt. In the case of a smart
manual for each setup transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'upper range value' (URV) of the transmitter.
option. Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä
Meter Density changed by the user.
Temperature Setup via the
Random Access Method - {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
To access these settings, in
the Program Mode press
or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., density temperature) is filtered by the
[Density] [Temp] [Enter].
transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
For Honeywellä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
INFO - The Density
Temperature sensor is used 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 6.3 seconds
to compensate for 1 = 0.3 seconds 6 = 12.7 seconds
temperature expansion 2 = 0.7 seconds 7 = 25.5 seconds
effects which effect the 3 = 1.5 seconds 8 = 51.1 seconds
periodic time of oscillation of 4 = 3.1 seconds 9 = 102.3 seconds
the densitometer. For Rosemountä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-45

2.10. Configuring Meter Pressure

be completed first as these 2.10.1. Accessing the Pressure Setup Submenu
been defined.
Meter Run Setup
Temperature Setup
Flow Computer
Pressure Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Pressure Setup’
Once a computer is in 2.10.2. Meter Pressure Settings
familiar with the application Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
faster Random Access Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure at or below which the pressure low alarm activates.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
key to return to the ‘Select Enter the pressure at or above which the pressure high alarm activates.
Proceed as described in this {L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
manual for each setup Enter the flowmeter pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on
option. the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
substituted.
Meter Pressure Setup via
the Random Access {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the flowmeter pressure for
each meter run override value:
Display Mode press the 0 = Never use override value
[Prog] key. The Program 1 = Always use override value
LED will glow green and the 2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
‘Select Group Entry’ screen 3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
[Press] [Enter], or [Press] {L1} Value at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the flowmeter pressure in engineering units at 4mA or 1 volt. In the case of a smart
[Meter] [n] [Press] [Enter]
transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'lower range value' (LRV) of the transmitter.
(n = Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or
4). Use [á ] / [â ] keys to 3095FB device, this entry is for information only; it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be
scroll. changed by the user.
{L1} Value at 20mA*________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the flowmeter pressure in engineering units at 20mA or 5 volts. In the case of a smart
transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'upper range value' (URV) of the transmitter.
changed by the user.
2-46 21/25.72+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., pressure) is filtered by the transmitter
TIP - Use the blank lines before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
configuration option to write For Honeywellä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
down the corresponding 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
settings you entered in the 1 = 0.16 seconds 6 = 4 seconds
flow computer. 2 = 0.32 seconds 7 = 8 seconds
Some of these entries may 3 = 0.48 seconds 8 = 16 seconds
not appear on the display or 4 = 1 seconds 9 = 32 seconds
settings of your specific 0 = 0.108 seconds 5 = 3.456 seconds
metering system, only those 1 = 0.216 seconds 6 = 6.912 seconds
configuration options which 2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
are applicable will be 3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
displayed. 4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-47

2.10.3. Meter Density Pressure Settings

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the pressure at or below which the densitometer low alarm activates.
down the corresponding High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
settings you entered in the Enter the pressure at or above which the densitometer high alarm activates.
flow computer.
Some of these entries may {L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
not appear on the display or Enter the density pressure value that is substituted for the live transducer value, depending on the
in OmniCom. Depending on override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override value is
the various configuration substituted.
configuration options which {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
are applicable will be Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the density pressure for
displayed. each meter run override value:
1 = Always use override value
Meter Density Pressure 2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
Setup via the Random
3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
Access Method - To access
these settings, in the {L1} Value at 4mA* ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Program Mode press
[Density] [Press] [Enter]. Enter the density pressure in engineering units at 4mA or 1 volt. In the case of a smart transmitter
being used in the digital mode, this is the 'lower range value' (LRV) of the transmitter. Honeywellä
SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry.
INFO - The Density Pressure
sensor is used to
compensate for pressure
{L1} Value at 20mA*________ ________ ________ ________ ________
effects which effect the Enter the density pressure in engineering units at 20mA or 5 volt. In the case of a smart
periodic time of oscillation of transmitter being used in the digital mode, this is the 'upper range value' (URV) of the transmitter.
the densitometer. Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can be reconfigured via this entry.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Note: This entry only applies when using smart transmitters connected in the digital mode to an 'H’, ‘HV'
* Not Valid when a RTD or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., density pressure) is filtered by the
Probe is specified. transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
2-48 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.11. Configuring Meter Relative Density

(Specific Gravity) / Density
be completed first as these 2.11.1. Accessing the Gravity/Density Setup Submenu
been defined.
Temperature Setup
Pressure Setup
Flow Computer
Grav/Density Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Grav/Density
when programming an Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.11.2. Meter Relative Density / Density Settings
you can decide to use the Relative Density / Density Data
Method described below. Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
entering data in a setup Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the API gravity/relative density/density below which the densitometer low alarm activates.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Proceed as described in this
manual for each setup Enter the gravity/density above which the densitometer high alarm activates.
option.
{L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the API gravity/relative density/density value that is substituted for the live transducer value,
depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of the value indicates that the override
value is substituted. Each product setup can specify a gravity override to be used when ever that
product is run. The override gravity in the product setup area overrides any transducer override.
{L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the relative density/density
for each meter run override value:
1 = Always use override value
2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average
4 = On transmitter failure, use station transducer value
5 = On transmitter failure, use absolute value of override relative density (gravity)/density of the
running product.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-49


Meter Specific {L1} Value at 4 mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Gravity/Density Setup via
the Random Access These entries only apply if an analog densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in
Method - Setup entries 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 4mA or 1volt, or ‘lower range limit’
require that you be in the (LRV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
Display Mode press the {L1} Value at 20 mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Prog] key. The Program These entries only apply if an analog gravitometer or densitometer is specified during the 'Config
LED will glow green and the Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. Engineering units that the transmitter outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts, or
‘Select Group Entry’ screen ‘upper range limit’ (URV) of Honeywell Smart Transmitters.
will appear. Then enter the
key press sequence that
corresponds to the options
{L1A} Factor A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
you want to configure: The ‘Factor A’ and Factor B’ entries only apply if an analog (4-20mA density linear) or a digital
Specific Gravity: densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. It is not available when
using specific gravity gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to
To access these settings,
1.2). (Usually very close to 1.0000).
press [S.G.] [Enter] or
[S.G.] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or The densitometer factor is used to correct for minor calibration shifts of the densitometer. This
[Meter] [n] [S.G./API] factor is determined by checking the density reading versus the actual density measured using a
[Enter]. pycnometer. You may enter an 'A' and 'B' correction factor for each densitometer. The actual
Density: factor used depends on a selection in the product setup area.
press [Density] [Enter] or {L1A} Factor B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Density] [Meter] [n] The ‘Factor A’ and Factor B’ entries only apply if an analog (4-20mA density linear) or a digital
[Enter] or [Meter] [n] densitometer is specified during the 'Config Meter Run' in 'Misc. Setup'. It is not available when
[Density] [Enter]. using specific gravity gravitometers. Enter the Pycnometer Density correction factor (Limit: 0.8 to
Digital Densitometers: 1.2). (Usually very close to 1.0000).
To access these settings, The densitometer factor is used to correct for minor calibration shifts of the densitometer. This
press [Factor] [Density] factor is determined by checking the density reading versus the actual density measured using a
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or pycnometer. You may enter an 'A' and 'B' correction factor for each densitometer. The actual
[Density] [Factor] [Meter] factor used depends on a selection in the product setup area.
[n] [Enter].
(“n” represents the meter run
# 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Note: Digital densitometers
can only be configured via
the Random Access Method.
INFO - Densitometer
constants are usually on a
calibration certificate
supplied by the densitometer
manufacturer. Usually they
are based on SI or metric
units. For US customary
applications you must ensure
that the constants entered
are based on grs/cc, °F and
PSIg. Constants are always
displayed using scientific
notation; e.g.:
K0=-1.490205E+00 (grs/cc)
To enter K0, press [Clear]
and press [-1.490205]
[Alpha Shift] [E] [+00]
[Enter].
2-50 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Digital Densitometer Factors

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ The following additional entries are required if a digital densitometer is specified
refer to password levels. during the 'Config Meter Run' in the 'Misc. Setup' menu. There are three
selections which refer to digital densitometers: 4 = Solartron, 5 = Sarasota, 6 =
TIP - Use the blank lines UGC. ({L1} Password Level required.)
flow computer. Solartron Constants:
not appear on the display or Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
the various configuration K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
metering system, only those K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
are applicable will be K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
displayed.
K18 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc K19 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
be completed first as these K20A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
and type of input and output K20B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
computer; i.e., the menu K21A ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Configuration' menu do not K21B ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
unless a transducer has KR ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
been defined.
KJ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Flow Computer
is best to use this method Sarasota Constants:
when programming an
application for the first time Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
variable will be prompted. D0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Once a computer is in
operation and you become T0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
you can decide to use the T coef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Method described below. T cal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
entering data in a setup Pcoef ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
key to return to the ‘Select Pcal ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
manual for each setup
option.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-51

UGC Constants:
Meter Specific Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4

Gravity/Density Setup via
the Random Access K0 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
require that you be in the K1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Display Mode press the K2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
LED will glow green and the TC ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
will appear. Then enter the
Kt1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
key press sequence that
corresponds to the options
Kt2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
you want to configure:
Kt3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Specific Gravity:
To access these settings, Pc ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
press [S.G.] [Enter] or
[S.G.] [Meter] [n] [Enter] or Kp1 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
[Meter] [n] [S.G./API]
[Enter]. Kp2 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Density:
Kp3 ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
press [Density] [Enter] or
[Density] [Meter] [n]
[Enter] or [Meter] [n]
[Density] [Enter].
Digital Densitometers:
press [Factor] [Density]
[Density] [Factor] [Meter]
[n] [Enter].
(“n” represents the meter run
# 1, 2, 3 or 4).
Note: Digital densitometers
can only be configured via
the Random Access Method.
INFO - Densitometer
constants are usually on a
calibration certificate
supplied by the densitometer
manufacturer. Usually they
are based on SI or metric
units. For US customary
applications you must ensure
that the constants entered
are based on grs/cc, °F and
PSIg. Constants are always
displayed using scientific
notation; e.g.:
K0=-1.490205E+00 (grs/cc)
To enter K0, press [Clear]
and press [-1.490205]
[Alpha Shift] [E] [+00]
[Enter].
2-52 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.12. Configuring PID Control Outputs

2.12.1. Accessing the PID Control Setup Submenu
TIP - Use the blank lines Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
down the corresponding following will be displayed:
flow computer.
*** SETUP MENU ***
not appear on the display or Pressure Setup
in OmniCom. Depending on Grav/Density Setup
the various configuration PID Control Setup _
are applicable will be Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘PID Control
displayed. Setup’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Flow Computer
2.12.2. PID Control Output Settings
is best to use this method
Loop #1 Loop #2 Loop #3 Loop #4
when programming an
application for the first time Operating Mode
Manual Valve Open (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
operation and you become Enter [Y] to adjust the valve open % and adjust using the [á ]/[â ] keys. Enter [N] to change to
familiar with the application AUTO mode.
faster Random Access Local Setpoint (Y/N) _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter [Y] to use a local set point and adjust using the [á ]/[â ] keys. Enter [N] for Remote Set
Once you have finished Point Mode.
Secondary Setpoint Value _______ _______ _______ _______
Group Entry’ screen. Enter the value in engineering units for the set point of the secondary variable. The primary
Proceed as described in this variable will be the controlled variable until the secondary variable reaches this set point. The
manual for each setup secondary variable will not be allowed to drop below or rise above this set point, depending on the
option. "Error Select" entry in the ‘Config PID’ menu.
PID Control Output Setup

via the Random Access
[Control] [n] [Enter] (n =
PID Control Loop # 1, 2, 3 or
4). Use [á ] / [â ] keys to
scroll.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-53

Tuning Adjustments
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc {L1} Primary Gain Factor _______ _______ _______ _______
be completed first as these Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Primary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
and type of input and output {L1} Primary Repeats per Minute _______ _______ _______ _______
devices connected to the flow Enter a value between 0.0 and 40.00 for the Primary Repeats per Minute Factor (the reciprocal of
computer; i.e., the menus the reset period).
following the 'Misc
{L1} Secondary Gain Factor _______ _______ _______ _______
unless a transducer has Enter a value between 0.01 to 99.99 for the Secondary Gain Factor (Gain=1/Proportional Band).
been defined. The actual controller gain factor used when controlling the secondary variable is the product of
this entry and the 'Primary Gain Factor'. Tune the primary control variable first and then use this
entry to adjust for stable control of the secondary variable.
PID Startup, Stop and
Shutdown Ramp {L1} Secondary Repeats per Minute_______ _______ _______ _______
Command Points - These
have been added to eliminate Enter a value between 0 and 40.00 for the Secondary Repeats per Minute Factor (the reciprocal of
the need to manipulate the the reset period).
PID permissives directly.
Using these command points {L1} Deadband % _______ _______ _______ _______
greatly simplifies operation of Enter the dead band percent range. PID Control will only compensate for setpoint deviations out of
the PID ramping functions. this range. The control output will not change as long as the process input and the setpoint error
(See database points 1727- (deviation) is within this dead band percentage limit range.
1730, 1788-1791, 1792-1795
respectively.)
{L1} Startup Ramp % _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at start-up.
st
The control output is clamped at 0% until the 1 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points
1722-1725) is set true. The control output % is then allowed to increase at the start-up ramp rate.
{L1} Shutdown Ramp % _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the maximum percentage to which the valve movement is limited per 500 msec at shutdown.
st
When the 1 PID Permissive is lost, the control output will ramp-down towards 0% at the
shutdown ramp rate.
nd
During the ramp-down phase, a 2 PID Permissive (PID #1-#4 ð database points 1752-1755) is
nd
used to provide a “ramp hold” function. If this 2 permissive is true, 100 msec before entering the
ramp-down phase, the control output % will ramp-down and be held at the minimum ramp-down
limit % (see the following entry) until it goes false. The control output will then immediately go to
0% (see sidebar).
{L1} Minimum Ramp to % _______ _______ _______ _______

Enter the minimum percentage that the control output will be allowed to ramp down to. In many
cases, it is important to deliver a precise amount of product. This requires that the control output
be ramped to some minimum % and held there until the required delivery is complete. The control
output is then immediately set to 0%.
2-54 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Primary Controlled (Setpoint) Variable

INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Low Limit _______ _______ _______ _______
Enter the engineering unit value below which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to drop
while in the remote setpoint mode.
{L1} High Limit _______ _______ _______ _______
down the corresponding Enter the engineering unit value above which the primary setpoint variable is not allowed to rise
settings you entered in the while in the remote setpoint mode.
flow computer.
Some of these entries may {L1} Zero Value (at 4mA) _______ _______ _______ _______
not appear on the display or Enter the minimum scale value in engineering units of the remote setpoint at 4mA (1 volt) input.
in OmniCom. Depending on This entry is ALWAYS required even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint input for the
the various configuration PID controller. The PID algorithm uses this value to determine the zero value for the primary
settings of your specific controlled variable.
{L1} Full Scale Value (at 20mA) _______ _______ _______ _______
displayed. Enter the maximum scale value in engineering units of the remote setpoint at 20mA (5 volt) input.
This entry is ALWAYS required even if you do not intend to use a remote setpoint input for the
PID controller. The PID algorithm uses this value to determine the maximum (full) scale value for
Flow Computer the primary controlled variable, which is usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.
is best to use this method Secondary Controlled (Setpoint) Variable
when programming an
application for the first time {L1} Zero Value _______ _______ _______ _______
as every possible option and If a secondary controlled variable is used, enter the value in engineering units of the variable which
variable will be prompted. will represent zero.
{L1} Full Scale Value _______ _______ _______ _______
you can decide to use the Enter the value in engineering units of the secondary variable at controller full scale, which is
faster Random Access usually 2 times the normal operating setpoint setting.
option.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-55

2.13. Configuring Differential Pressure

be completed first as these 2.13.1. Accessing the Differential Pressure Setup
and type of input and output
Submenu
devices connected to the flow Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’
computer; i.e., the menus
following the 'Misc screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
Configuration' menu do not following will be displayed:
been defined. *** SETUP MENU ***
Grav/Density Setup
Flow Computer PID Control Setup
DP Inches of Water _
when programming an
application for the first time Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘DP Inches of
as every possible option and Water’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
familiar with the application 2.13.2. Meter Differential Pressure Settings
faster Random Access Station Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Once you have finished Low Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
entering data in a setup Enter the flowing differential pressure in inches of water (US units), or kPa or mBar (metric), at the
submenu, press the [Prog] orifice below which the differential pressure low alarm digital point activates.
High Alarm Limit ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
manual for each setup Enter the flowing differential pressure in inches of water (US units), or kPa or mBar (metric), at the
option. orifice above which the differential pressure high alarm digital point activates.
Meter Differential Pressure {L2} Override Value________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Setup via the Random Enter the differential pressure value in inches of water (US units), or kPa or mBar (metric), that will
Access Method - Setup substitute the live transducer value, depending on the override code. An ‘*’ displayed along side of
entries require that you be in the value indicates that the override value is substituted.
the Program Mode. In the
Display Mode press the {L2} Override Code ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
LED will glow green and the Enter the Override Code which represents the strategy used regarding the differential pressure for
‘Select Group Entry’ screen each meter run override value:
will appear. Then press 0 = Never use override value
[D.P.] [Enter], or [D.P.] 1 = Always use override value
[Meter] [n] [Enter] or 2 = On transmitter failure, use override value
[Meter] [n] [D.P.] [Enter] (n 3 = On transmitter failure, use last hour's average.
= Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
2-56 21/25.72+ w 05/99


INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Low DP @4mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Enter the differential pressure (DP) in inches of water (US units), or kPa or mBar (metric), that
the transducer outputs at 4mA or 1volt. In the case of a smart transmitter being used in the digital
TIP - Use the blank lines mode, this is the 'lower range value' (LRV) of the transmitter. Honeywellä SMV3000 devices can
provided next to each be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä 3095FB device, this entry is for
configuration option to write information only, it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be changed by the user.
flow computer.
{L1} Low DP @20mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________
Some of these entries may Enter the differential pressure (DP) in inches of water (US units), or kPa or mBar (metric), that
not appear on the display or the transducer outputs at 20mA or 5 Volts. In the case of a smart transmitter being used in the
in OmniCom. Depending on digital mode, this is the 'upper range value' (URV) of the transmitter. Honeywellä SMV3000
the various configuration devices can be reconfigured via this entry. For the Fisher Rosemountä 3095FB device, this entry
settings of your specific is for information only, it comes from the 3095FB and cannot be changed by the user.
configuration options which {L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
are applicable will be This entry only applies when using smart transmitters connected in the digital mode to an 'H’, ‘HV'
displayed. or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., differential pressure) is filtered by the
transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
Note: Differential pressure is
expressed as “inches of 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
water”. 1 = 0.16 seconds 6 = 4 seconds
2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-57


INFO - The first menu, 'Misc {L1} Hi DP at 4mA ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
be completed first as these Enter the differential pressure in engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at
entries specify the number 4mA or 1volt, or ‘lower range limit’ (LRV) of Honeywellä ST3000 Smart Transmitters.
devices connected to the flow {L1} Hi DP at 20mA________ ________ ________ ________ ________
computer; i.e., the menu Enter the differential pressure in engineering units that the high range DP transmitter outputs at
items following the 'Misc 20mA or 5 Volts, or ’upper range limit’ (URV) of Honeywellä ST3000 Smart Transmitters.
{L1} Damping Code________ ________ ________ ________ ________
been defined. This entry only applies when using smart transmitters connected in the digital mode to an 'H’, ‘HV'
or 'SV' type combo module. The process variable (i.e., differential pressure) is filtered by the
Flow Computer transmitter before being sent to the flow computer. The time constant used depends on this entry.
Configuration via the For Honeywellä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
Menu Selection Method - It 0 = 0 seconds 5 = 2 seconds
when programming an
application for the first time 2 = 0.32 seconds 7 = 8 seconds
as every possible option and 3 = 0.48 seconds 8 = 16 seconds
variable will be prompted. 4 = 1 seconds 9 = 32 seconds
Once a computer is in For Rosemountä Transmitters, enter the selected Damping Code:
faster Random Access 2 = 0.432 seconds 7 = 13.824 seconds
Method described below. 3 = 0.864 seconds 8 = 27.648 seconds
Once you have finished 4 = 1.728 seconds 9 = N/A
submenu, press the [Prog] High DP Select % ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
key to return to the ‘Select The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the high range DP transmitter
Group Entry’ screen. when the signal from the low range transmitter exceeds this percent of its range. The switch over
Proceed as described in this will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.
option. Low DP Select % ________ ________ ________ ________ ________
The flow computer will automatically switch over to the signal from the low range DP transmitter
Meter Differential Pressure when the signal from the high range transmitter falls below this percent of its range. The switch
Setup via the Random over will not occur if the high range transmitter has failed or is not installed.
Access Method - Setup
entries require that you be in
the Program Mode. In the
[D.P.] [Enter], or [D.P.]
[Meter] [n] [D.P.] [Enter] (n
= Meter Run # 1, 2, 3 or 4).
2-58 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.14. Configuring Products

be completed first as these 2.14.1. Accessing the Fluid Data & Analysis Setup
Submenu
devices connected to the flow Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’
computer; i.e., the menu
items following the 'Misc screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
Configuration' menu do not following will be displayed:
been defined. *** SETUP MENU ***
PID Control Setup
Flow Computer DP Inches of H2O
Configuration via the Product Setup _
when programming an
Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Fluid Data &
as every possible option and Analysis’ and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
2.14.2. Product Settings
Product #1
{L1} Product Name _______________
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter the name of the product (up to 8 alphanumeric characters), right justified.
Group Entry’ screen. {L1} Table Select _______________
Proceed as described in this Enter the number that corresponds to the API or GPA table to use for the product:
option. 0 = API 2540 Table 24A 8 = Ethylene IUPAC
1 = API 2540 Table 24B 9 = Ethylene NIST 1045
2 = Table 24C 10 = Ethylene API 2565/11.3.2
Product Setup via the
3 = GPA TP16 11 = Carbon Dioxide CO2PAC
Setup entries require that you 4 = Mass Calculation 12 = Table 24 - 1952 Edition
be in the Program Mode. In 5 = Propylene API MPMS 11.3.3.2 9 13 = ASTM D1550/1551
the Display Mode press the 6 = E/P Mix 14 = ASTM D1555
[Prog] key. The Program 7 = P/P Mix 15 = GPA TP25 Table 23E/24E
‘Select Group Entry’ screen {L2} API Relative Density / Reference Density Override _______________
This entry will appear depending on which table is selected above. Enter the API Gravity/Density
[Product] [Enter] or
at reference conditions. It is used to calculate the Volume Correction Factor (VCF) and the
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n =
Pressure Correction Factor (CPL). A positive override value causes the flow computer to use the
Product # 1 through 16). Use
gravity/density value in the API algorithms and calculate VCF and CPL. The override gravity can
[á ] / [â ] keys to scroll. also be entered as specific gravity (see next entry).
To use the live measured density or gravity value (obtained from a densitometer/gravitometer) in
the equations, enter any minus number representative of the API products. The flow computer will
then correct the signal from the densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be at
flowing or reference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration). By selecting an override
code of ‘5’, the flow computer can be instructed to use the ‘absolute’ value of this entry as gravity
at reference temperature.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-59

{L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________

This entry will appear depending on which table is selected above. You may enter an override
gravity as either API or SG units when measuring crude oil or generalized refined products. The
Computer will accept any positive override value and use it in the calculations.
TIP - Use the blank lines the equations, enter any minus number representative of SG products. The flow computer will
provided next to each then correct the signal form the densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be
configuration option to write flowing at flowing or reference conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration By selecting an
down the corresponding override code of ‘5’, the flow computer can be instructed to use the ‘absolute’ value of this entry as
settings you entered in the gravity at reference temperature.
flow computer.
{L2} Override SG _______________
INFO - The following data,
This entry applies only when propylene is the table selected. It will appear depending on which
rounded to 4 digits, is from
table is selected above. You may enter an override gravity as either API or SG units when
GPA 2145-92 and TP16:
measuring crude oil or generalized refined products. The Computer will accept any positive
Product S.G. override value and use it in the calculations.
Ethane .3562
Propane .5070
HD5 .5010 the equations, enter any minus number. The flow computer will then correct the signal form the
.5050 densitometer or gravitometer to 60°F, if required (this may be flowing at flowing or reference
.5100 conditions - see Meter Run I/O Point Configuration).
Propylene* .5228 Should the gravitometer fail, the flow computer can be made to use the absolute value of the API
Iso-Butane .5629 Gravity Override. If the override code in Grav/Density Setup is set to ‘5=On transmitter failure’, use
.5650 absolute value of override SG/API for this product.
n-Butane .5840
.5850 {L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
Iso-Pentane .6247
n-Pentane .6311 This entry applies only when propylene is the table selected. Enter the fraction of pure propylene.
n-Hexane .6638 Enter from [0.00] for 0% pure propylene to [1.00] for 100% pure propylene. For example, entering
Natural Gasolines .6650 0.96 represents 96% pure propylene.
n-Heptane .6882
n-Octane .7070 {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
n-Nonane .7219
This entry only applies to API 2540, Table 24C. These equations require you enter a value for
n-Decane .7342
'alpha'. This alpha value is used to calculate the volume correction factor 'VCF'. Enter the thermal
* Propylene figures are expansion coefficient at reference temperature as 0.000xxxx.
derived from API 11.3.3.2.
{L2} F Factor Override _______________
INFO - API 2540; Tables
This entry only applies to API 2540, Table 24C.. Enter ‘0.0’ if you wish the flow computer to use
23A or 23B are also
API 11.2.1 or 11.2.2 to calculate the compressibility factor 'F' used in the CPL equation. Enter the
automatically used when
compressibility factor 'F' value if you wish to override the API calculated value.
applicable.
Table 24A applies to {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
Generalized Crude Oils (SG
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens This entry applies only when GPA TP16 is entered for table select. The GPA TP16 standard
range: 1075-610.4). specifies that the equilibrium pressure of the flowing fluid be calculated according to GPA TP15.
Table 24B applies to Two equations are specified. The first designed for mainly pure products such as propanes,
Generalized Products (SG butanes and natural gasolines requires no input data other than the temperature at flowing
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens conditions and the specific gravity at reference conditions. The second improved correlation is
range: 1075-652.8). suitable for use with more varied NGL mixes where different product mixes could have the same
specific gravity but different equilibrium pressures. If you wish to use the improved second method
GPA TP16 applies to enter the absolute vapor pressure in PSIa at 100°F. Enter a minus number to use the normal
LPG/NGL Products (SG TP15 method for propanes, butanes and natural gasolines.
range: .637-.495.
These calculation methods {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
use API Chapter 11.2.1 or
11.2.2 to calculate the The calibration of some densitometer devices varies with the product. Enter [0] to select Density
pressure correction factor Factor A to correct the densitometer. Enter [1] to select Density Factor B to correct the
CPL. densitometer.
2-60 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Product #2
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc {L1} Product Name _______________
be completed first as these {L1} Table Select _______________
and type of input and output {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
items following the 'Misc {L2} Override SG _______________
ask for configuration data {L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
been defined. {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
Flow Computer
Configuration via the {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
Menu Selection Method - It {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
when programming an
application for the first time Product #3
Once a computer is in {L1} Product Name _______________
operation and you become {L1} Table Select _______________
you can decide to use the {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
Method described below. {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
Once you have finished {L2} Override SG _______________
submenu, press the [Prog] {L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
Group Entry’ screen. {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
Proceed as described in this {L2} F Factor Override _______________
option. {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
{L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
Setup entries require that you Product #4
{L1} Product Name _______________
LED will glow green and the {L1} Table Select _______________
will appear. Then press {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
[Product] [n] [Enter] (n = {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
Product # 1 through 16). Use {L2} Override SG _______________
[á ] / [â ] keys to scroll.
{L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
{L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
{L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-61

Product #5
INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Product Name _______________
{L1} Table Select _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
configuration option to write {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
settings you entered in the {L2} Override SG _______________
flow computer.
INFO - The following data, {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
rounded to 4 digits, is from {L2} F Factor Override _______________
GPA 2145-92 and TP16:
Product S.G. {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
Ethane .3562
Propane .5070 {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
HD5 .5010
.5050
.5100 Product #6
Propylene* .5228
Iso Butane .5629 {L1} Product Name _______________
.5650
n-Butane .5840 {L1} Table Select _______________
.5850
Iso Pentane .6247 {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
n-Pentane .6311
n-Hexane .6638
Natural Gasolines .6650 {L2} Override SG _______________
n-Heptane .6882
n-Octane .7070 {L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
n-Nonane .7219
n-Decane .7342 {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
* Propylene figures are {L2} F Factor Override _______________
INFO - API 2540; Tables {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
23A or 23B are also
applicable. Product #7
Table 24A applies to
Generalized Crude Oils (SG {L1} Product Name _______________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
range: 1075-610.4). {L1} Table Select _______________
Table 24B applies to
Generalized Products (SG
{L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
range: 1075-652.8).
GPA TP16 applies to {L2} Override SG _______________
LPG/NGL Products (SG
range: .637-.495.
These calculation methods {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
11.2.2 to calculate the {L2} F Factor Override _______________
pressure correction factor {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
CPL.
2-62 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Product #8
Flow Computer
when programming an
{L1} Product Name _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-63

Product #11
INFO - Characters in ’{ }’ {L1} Product Name _______________
{L1} Table Select _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
configuration option to write {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
settings you entered in the {L2} Override SG _______________
flow computer.
INFO - The following data, {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
rounded to 4 digits, is from {L2} F Factor Override _______________
GPA 2145-92 and TP16:
Product S.G. {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
Ethane .3562
Propane .5070 {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
HD5 .5010
.5050
.5100 Product #12
Propylene* .5228
Iso Butane .5629 {L1} Product Name _______________
.5650
n-Butane .5840 {L1} Table Select _______________
.5850
Iso Pentane .6247 {L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
n-Pentane .6311
n-Hexane .6638
Natural Gasolines .6650 {L2} Override SG _______________
n-Heptane .6882
n-Octane .7070 {L2} Mole Fraction of Propylene _______________
n-Nonane .7219
n-Decane .7342 {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
* Propylene figures are {L2} F Factor Override _______________
INFO - API 2540; Tables {L2} Density Correction Factor A/B _______________
23A or 23B are also
applicable. Product #13
Table 24A applies to
Generalized Crude Oils (SG {L1} Product Name _______________
range: 1.076-.6110; Dens
range: 1075-610.4). {L1} Table Select _______________
Table 24B applies to
Generalized Products (SG
{L2} API Relative Density (Gravity) Override _______________
range: 1.076-.6535; Dens {L2} Relative Density (Specific Gravity) Override _______________
range: 1075-652.8).
GPA TP16 applies to {L2} Override SG _______________
LPG/NGL Products (SG
range: .637-.495.
These calculation methods {L2} Alpha Coefficient _______________
11.2.2 to calculate the {L2} F Factor Override _______________
pressure correction factor {L2} Vapor Pressure _______________
CPL.
2-64 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Product #14
Flow Computer
when programming an
{L1} Product Name _______________
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-65

2.15. Configuring Batches

Applying the Menu Selection Method, in the ‘Select Group Entry’ screen
(Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the following will
be displayed:
*** SETUP MENU ***

Product Setup
Batch Preset Setup
Batch Sequence _
Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Batch Preset
Setup’ and ‘Batch Sequence’, then press [Enter] to access these submenus.
Note: See Chapter 3 “Computer Batching Operations” in Volume 2 for

information on configuring your flow computer for batches.
2-66 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.16. Configuring Miscellaneous Factors

be completed first as these 2.16.1. Accessing the Factor Setup Submenu
been defined.
Batch Preset Setup
Batch Sequence
Flow Computer
Factor Setup _
is best to use this method Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Factor Setup’ and
when programming an press [Enter] to access the submenu.
Once a computer is in 2.16.2. Factor Settings
familiar with the application {L1} Weight of Water (Absolute Density of Water _______________
Enter the weight of one barrel of water at 60°F and 14.696 PSIa (US units) or 1 cubic meter at
15°C and 101.325 kPaa (metric). This entry is used to convert from relative density (SG) and API
Method described below. 3
gravity units to mass or density (Kg/m ). (From GPA 2145-92: 8.3372 Lbs/Gal. = 350.162
Once you have finished Lbs/BBL. This is the true weight of water, NOT the conversion factor used to convert grs/cc to
entering data in a setup 3
lbs/bbl, sometimes given as 350.507.) The default metric setting is 999.1Kgs/m (GPA 2145-94).
key to return to the ‘Select {L1} Cubic Feet to Barrels Conversion Factor _______________
Proceed as described in this AGA-3 equations provide flowing volume in actual and standard cubic feet. For liquid applications
manual for each setup the flow computer displays volumes using gross and net barrels. Enter the conversion factor
option. needed to convert cubic feet to barrels (default is 5.6145).
{L1} Grams/Cubic Centimeter to Pounds/Cubic Foot _______________

Factor Setup via the
Random Access Method - Flowing density measured by an online densitometer provides grams per cubic centimeter (grs/cc)
Setup entries require that you density units while the AGA-3 equations requires that density be measured in pounds per cubic
be in the Program Mode. In foot (lbs/CF). Enter the conversion factor needed to convert grams/cc to lbs/CF (default is
the Display Mode press the 62.428).
LED will glow green and the {L1} Alarm Deadband % _______________
‘Select Group Entry’ screen Nuisance alarms can occur when input variables spend any amount of time near the high or low
will appear. Then press alarm set points. These nuisance alarms can swamp the alarm log with useless alarms leaving no
[[Factor] [Enter], or room for real alarms. This entry sets a percentage limit based on the 'high alarm' entry. A variable
[Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter], must return within the high/low alarm limits by more than this amount before the alarm is cleared.
or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n =
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4). Example: High limit is 100°F, Low limit is 20°F, Alarm deadband is set to 2%. A transducer input
which exceeded 100°F will set the 'high alarm'. The transducer signal must drop 2 percent below
the high alarm setpoint (98°F) before the alarm will clear.
{L1} Atmospheric Pressure _______________

Enter the Atmospheric Pressure in PSIa (US units) or kPaa or mBara (metric units). This is used
to convert flowing (gauge) pressure readings in PSIg to PSIa (US units) or kPa or mBar to kPaa or
mBara (metric units).
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-67

Totalizer Rollover and Decimal Place Resolution

The following are read-only entries that cannot be changed via OmniCom. To
change totalizer resolution you must first 'Reset All Totals' in the 'Password
Maintenance' menu from the front panel keypad of the flow computer. You will
then be given the opportunity to set the totalizing resolution. Valid decimal
place settings are: XX; X.X; X.XX; and X.XXX.
Roll All Totalizers (# Digits) _______________

This entry is read-only from OmniCom and can only be changed at the keypad of the flow
computer after resetting all totalizers. Totalizers within the computer can be rolled at 8 or 9
significant digits.
presses.
Volume (Gross & Net) Totalizer Decimal Places _______________
TIP - Use the blank lines This entry is read-only from OmniCom and can only be changed at the keypad of the flow
provided next to each computer after resetting all totalizers. This setting represents the number of decimal places for
configuration option to write gross and net totalizer resolution.
settings you entered in the Mass Totalizer Decimal Places _______________
flow computer. This entry is read-only from OmniCom and can only be changed at the keypad of the flow
Some of these entries may computer after resetting all totalizers. This setting represents the number of decimal places for
not appear on the display or mass totalizer resolution.
settings of your specific More Factors and System Constants
configuration options which {PL} Decimal Places Correction Factor _______________
are applicable will be This entry determines the resolution (number of decimal places) for correction factors CTL, CPL
displayed. and CCF which appear on the Batch, Daily and Snapshot reports. Enter the number of decimal
places required for these factors:
Factor Setup via the 4 = Meter factors, densitometer pycnometer factors and for strict adherence to API standard
Random Access Method - MPMS 12.2 (default)
Setup entries require that you 5 = Normal API internal rounding and truncating rules with the exception of the last round
be in the Program Mode. In which is to 5 places
the Display Mode press the 6 = No internal rounding and truncating and round the final result to 6 places
{PL} Select Averaging Method _______________
[[Factor] [Enter], or Two averaging methods are available: “Flow Weighted” and “Time Weighted”. BOTH methods do
[Factor] [Meter] [n] [Enter], not modify the averaged variable if there is no flow taking place. Enter [Y] to select flow weighted
or [Meter] [n] [Factor](n = averaging, or [N] to select time weighted averaging.
Meter Run # 1, 2, 3, or 4).
Flow Weighted Averages (FWA) are:
å [(SampleValues taken every 500msec) ´ (Flow Increment)]
FWA =
Total Flow
Time Weighted Averages (TWA) are:
å All Sample Values taken every 500msec
TWA =
Total Number of 500 msec Samples
2-68 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.17. Configuring Printers

2.17.1. Accessing the Printer Setup Submenu
INFO - The first menu, 'Misc Applying the Menu Selection Method (see sidebar), in the ‘Select Group Entry’
be completed first as these
screen (Program Mode) press [Setup] [Enter] and a menu similar to the
entries specify the number following will be displayed:
computer; i.e., the menu *** SETUP MENU ***
items following the 'Misc Batch Sequence
Configuration' menu do not Factor Setup
Printer Setup _
been defined.
Use the [á ]/[â ] (up/down arrow) keys to move the cursor to ‘Printer Setup’
Flow Computer
Configuration via the and press [Enter] to access the submenu.
when programming an 2.17.2. Printer Settings
{L1} Computer ID _______________
Once a computer is in Appears on all reports. Enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify the flow computer.
familiar with the application {L1} Print Interval in Minutes _______________
Enter the number of minutes between each interval report. Entering [0] will disable interval reports.
The maximum allowed is 1440 minutes which will provide one interval report per 24-hour period.
{L1} Print Interval Start Time _______________
submenu, press the [Prog] Enter the start time from which the interval report timer is based (e.g.: entering ‘01:00’ with a Print
key to return to the ‘Select Interval of 120 minutes will provide an interval report every odd hour only).
Proceed as described in this {L1} Daily Report Time _______________
manual for each setup Enter the hour at which the daily report will print at the beginning of the contract day (e.g.: 07:00).
option.
{L1} Disable Daily Report ? _______________
Printer Setup via the Enter [Y] to disable the Daily Report (default is 'N'). This simply blocks the report from printing.
Random Access Method - Data will still be sent to the historical buffers (last 8) and archive if archive is setup.
Setup entries require that you
the Display Mode press the {L1} Daylight Savings Start _______________
[Prog] key. The Program Enter the day/month/year that daylight savings time begins.
‘Select Group Entry’ screen {L1} Daylight Savings End _______________
Enter the day/month/year that daylight savings time ends.
[Print] [Setup] [Enter] and
use [á ] / [â ] keys to scroll.
{L1} Clear Daily Totals at Batch End _______________
Enter [N] to provide 24 hour totals of all flow through the flowmeter regardless of what product is
run. Select [Y] to clear the totalizers at the end of each batch. This would mean that the daily
totalizers would not necessarily represent 24 hours of flow but the amount of flow since the last
batch end or the daily report
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-69

{L1} Auto Hourly Batch Select _______________

Enter [Y] to automatically cause a batch end every hour on the hour. If customized reports are
selected a batch end report will be printed. If default reports are selected no batch end report will
be printed.
settings you entered in the {L1} Auto Weekly Batch Select _______________
flow computer. Enter a number 1 through 7 to automatically print a batch end report in addition to a daily report on
Some of these entries may a specific day of the week (0=No batch end, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, etc.).
in OmniCom. Depending on {L1} Auto Month Batch Select _______________
Enter a number 1 through 31 to automatically print a batch end report in place of a daily report on a
specific day of the month (0=No batch end).
are applicable will be {L1} Print Priority _______________
displayed. Enter [0] when the computer is connected to a dedicated printer. If several computers are sharing
a common printer, one computer must be designated as the master and must be assigned the
number 1. The remaining computers must each be assigned a different Print Priority number
between 2 and 12.
{L1} Number of Nulls _______________

For slow printers without an input buffer, a number of null characters can be sent after each
carriage return or line feed. A number between 0-255 will be accepted. Set this to ‘0’ if your printer
supports hardware handshaking and you have connected pin 20 of the printer connector to
terminal 6 of the flow computer (see 7.2.1 in Volume 1).
{L1} Use Default Report Templates ? _______________

Entering [Y] instructs the flow computer to use the default report formats for Daily Batch End,
Snapshot and Prover Reports. Enter [N] if you have downloaded your own custom report
templates using the OmniCom program.
Common Printer Control {L1} Printer Condensed Mode Control String _______________
Codes -
Certain default report templates exceed 80 columns when the computer is configured for 4 meter
Epson, IBM & Compatible:
runs and a station. Enter the hexadecimal character string which will put the printer into the
Condensed Mode= OF condensed print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5). Maximum 5 control
Cancel Condensed= 12 characters.
OKI Data Models:
Condensed Mode= ID {L1} Printer Normal Mode Control String _______________
Cancel Condensed= IE Enter the hexadecimal character string which when sent to the printer will cancel the condensed
HP Laser Jet II & print mode. Data must be in sets of 2 characters (i.e., 05 not 5) Maximum 5 control characters
Compatible:
Condensed= 1B266B3253 {L1} Company Name _______________
Cancel Cond= 1B266B3053 Two lines of the display allow entry of the Company Name. On each line enter a maximum of 19
characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all reports.
{L1} Location _______________

Two lines of the display allow entry of the location of the flow computer. On each line enter a
maximum of 19 characters and press [Enter]. Both lines are concatenated and appear on all
reports.
2-70 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3. User-Programmable Functions
3.1. Introduction
The computer performs many functions, displays and prints large amounts of
data, but there are always some application-specific control functions,
calculations or displays that cannot be anticipated.
The Omni Flow Computer incorporates several programmable features that
enable the user to easily customize the computer to fit a specific application.
o User-programmable Boolean Flags and Statements
o User-programmable Variables and Statements
o User-configurable Display Screens
o User-customized Report Templates
The first three Items are explained here. The last item requires the use of the
OmniCom PC configuration software that comes with the flow computer.
3.2. User-Programmable Boolean Flags and

Statements
3.2.1. What is a Boolean?

A Boolean point is simply a single bit register within the computer (sometimes
called a flag) which has only two states, On or Off (True or False, 1 or 0). These
Boolean flags or points are controlled and/or monitored by the flow computer
and represent alarms, commands and status points. Each Boolean point is
given an identifying number within the data base of the computer allowing the
state (On or Off) to be monitored or modified by assigning that Boolean point to
a physical digital I/O point or accessing it via a communication port. A
maximum of 24 physical digital I/O points are available for monitoring limit
switches, status signals or controlling relays or lamps.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 User-Programmable Functions
Boolean points are numbered as follows:

INFO - The 4-digit ‘point’ 1001 through 1024 Physical Digital I/O Points 1 through 24
numbers referred to in this 1025 through 1088 Programmable Boolean Points (64 total)
chapter are Modbus index
numbers used to identify 1089 through 1099 Programmable Pulse outputs (11 total)
each variable (Boolean or 1100 through 1199 Meter Run #1 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
other) within the Modbus
database. A complete listing 1200 through 1299 Meter Run #2 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
and descriptions of database 1300 through 1399 Meter Run #3 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
points is included in Volume
4. 1400 through 1499 Meter Run #4 Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
1500 through 1699 Scratchpad Storage for Results of Boolean Statements
1700 through 1799 Command or Status Inputs
1800 through 1899 Station Boolean Flags (Alarms, Status etc.)
2100 through 2199 Meter Run #1 Totalizer Roll-over Flags
2600 through 2623 Miscellaneous Station Boolean Points (Alarms, Status etc.)
2700 through 2759 Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
2800 through 2876 Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags
2877 through 2899 More Miscellaneous Boolean Command and Status Points
Physical Digital I/O Points (1001 ® 1024)

Each of the physical digital I/O points is assigned to a valid Boolean point
number as detailed above. Points 1700 through 1799 are command inputs
which are described later, all other point assignments indicate that the I/O point
is to be set up as an output point. Output points which are dedicated as flow
accumulator outputs can be set up for pulse widths ranging from 10 msec to
100 sec in 10 msec increments. All other output point assignments have
associated 'time ON delay' and 'time OFF delay' timers which are adjustable
from 0.0 to 1000 sec in 100 msec increments.
Programmable Boolean Points (1025 ® 1088)

There are 64 user flags or Boolean points are available and are controlled by 64
Boolean statements or equations. These are provided to perform sequencing
and control functions. Each statement or equation is evaluated every 100 msec.
starting at point 1025 and ending at point 1088. The results of these Boolean
statements can then assigned to physical digital I/O points. There are no
restrictions as to what Boolean points can be used in a Boolean statement
including the results of other Boolean statements or the status of physical I/O
points.
Programmable Accumulator Points (1089 ® 1099)

There are 11 Programmable points that are used with Variable Points 7089
through 7099 for programming pulse outputs for Digital I/O or Front Panel
Counters.
3-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

One-Shot Boolean Points (1501 ® 1649)

The 149 Boolean flags located between 1501 and 1650 are used to store
temporary data that has been received via the Modbus link or put there by a
Boolean statement. These Boolean variables can be sent to a digital output or
used in the Boolean statements described above.
Scratch Pad Boolean Points (1650 ® 1699)

The 50 Boolean flags located between 1650 and 1699 can be use as
momentary commands. When set true they remain on for two seconds.
3.2.2. Sign (+, -) of Analog or Calculated Variables

(5001 ® 8999)
The sign of analog or calculated variables can also be used in a Boolean
statements by simply specifying the point number. The Boolean value of the
variable is 'true ' if it is positive and 'false' if it has a negative value.
3.2.3. Boolean Statements and Functions

Each Boolean statement consists of up to 3 variables optionally preceded by
the Boolean 'NOT' function and separated by one of the Boolean functions
'AND', 'OR', 'Exclusive OR' or 'EQUAL' . The following symbols are used to
represent the functions:
Function Symbol
NOT /
AND &
OR +
EX OR *
EQUAL =
IF )
GOTO 'G'
MOVE :
COMPARE %
The '=' function allows a statement to be used to change the state of the
Boolean point on the left of the equal sign (usually a command point).
Evaluation precedence is left to right.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-3

To program the Boolean points proceed as follows:

From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out "n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ? _
Program Variables ?
User Display ? "n"
Scroll down to 'Set Boolean ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no Booleans
are as yet programmed, the display shows:
Boolean Point #10xx

25: _
Rmk
26:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25: At this point enter the Boolean
equation that will cause Boolean point 1025 to be ON (True) / OFF (False).
INFO - Points 1005 and 1006 For example, to turn Boolean 1025 ON whenever Boolean 1005 is OFF, OR
reflect the current status of whenever 1006 is ON, enter [/1005+1006] (note the use of the '/' to indicate the
physical I/O Points 05 and 06
which could be inputs 'NOT' function).
connected to the outside
world or outputs controlling
relays, etc. Boolean Point #10XX
25: /1005+1006
Rmk
26: _
Boolean 1025 could then be used in the statement following which defines
Boolean 1026. For example, by including Boolean 1205 which indicates that
Meter #2 is active and flowing (see following page), Boolean 1026 will be ON
whenever 'Meter 2 is active and flowing' AND (1005 is NOT ON OR 1006 is
ON).
TIP - Leave plenty of empty
statements between Boolean Point #10xx
programmed ones. This will 25: /1005+1006
allow you to modify the
execution order of your Rmk
program if you need to later. 26: 1205&1025
Use the 'Up/Down' arrow keys to scroll though all 64 programmable Boolean
points.
3-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Remember that the Boolean statements are evaluated in order starting from
1025 proceeding to 1088 . For maximum speed always ensure that statements
used in other statements are evaluated ahead of time by placing them in the
correct order.
Example 1: Meter Failure Alarm for Two-Meter Run Application

INFO - Use the Exclusive OR Object: Using signals from 'flow sensing switches' inserted into the pipeline,
function ‘*’ to compare 2 provide an alarm output which activates whenever the signals from the flow
points. The result of an
Exclusive OR of 2 points is
switches and flow meter signals differ, also provide a snapshot report by setting
true only if both points are command point 1719.
different states.
How the hardware is configured:
INFO - Booleans 1025, 1026
and 1027 are only used as an Physical I/O points 02 and 03 are setup as inputs by assigning them to 1700
example here. Any unused (see the Command and Status Booleans on a later page). They are connected
programmable Booleans can
be used for this function.
to flow sensing switches on meter runs 1 and 2 respectively. The switches
activate with flow.
Physical I/O point 04 is connected to a 'meter fail alarm bell'. The output is
assigned to Programmable Boolean 1027. A 'delay ON' of 5 seconds is selected
to eliminate spurious alarms which would occur during startup and shutdown. A
'delay OFF' of 5 seconds is selected to ensures that the alarm bell remains on
for at least 5 seconds.
The Booleans are programmed as follows:
True if Meter #1 fails.

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
True if Meter #2 fails.
25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
Request snapshot if either 27: 1719=1025+1026
meter fails. 28:
Notes:
q Boolean Point 1025 is true
(Meter 1 failed) whenever
'Meter 1 Active' (Point
1105) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 1
(Point 02).
(Meter 2 failed) whenever
'Meter 2 Active' (Point
1205) differs from 'Flow
Detected' Flow Switch 2
(Point 03).
(Meter 1 OR 2 failed)
whenever point 1025 OR
0126 are true. The
Boolean Command Bit
1719 is set when Boolean
Point 1027 is true.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-5

Example 2: Automatic Run Switching for 4-Meter Run Application

Object: To improve metering accuracy by automatically selecting the correct
flow meter run to be active in a multi run application. Small turbines need to be
protected from over-speeding while for best accuracy larger turbines should be
valved off when the flow drops below their minimum rate. In the example
shown, except when switching from one flow meter to the other, only one flow
meter run is active at one time. This is one example only. The number of runs
open for a given application at any flow rate obviously depends on the size of
the flow meters used.
Fig. 3-1. Figure Showing Automatic Four-Meter Flow Zone Thresholds
Switching is based on the station flow gross flow rate which is compared to
preset switching thresholds entered by the user (See 'Meter Station Settings'
in Chapter 2). Threshold Flags 1, 2 and 3 are set and reset according to the
actual station flow rate.
The first task is identify the 4 zones and assign programmable Boolean points
to them. This allows us to include them in further Boolean statements.
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag3
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3
3-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

As each statement can have only 3 terms in it we must pre-process some part
of the equations. The term 'NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3' appears in Zone 1
and 2 equations.
Now we assign valid point numbers to our statements and rewrite them the way
they will be input.
First one term needs to be pre-processed to simplify:
1025 = NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 25: /1825&/1826
Next the flow Zones are defined:
Zone 1 = NOT Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 26: /1824&1025
Zone 2 = Flag 1 AND NOT Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 27: 1824&1025
Zone 3 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND NOT Flag 3 28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 4 = Flag 1 AND Flag 2 AND Flag 3 29: 1824&1825&1826
The program thus far looks like:
/ Flag 2 & / Flag 3

BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
Zone 1 25: 1105*1002
26: 1205*1003
Zone 2 27: 1719=1025+1026
28: 1824&1825&/1826
Zone 3 29: 1824&1825&1826
Zone 4
In our example each meter run valve (V1, V2, V3 and V4) fails closed,
energizes to open. A limit switch mounted on each valve indicates the fully
open position (SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4).
Fig. 3-2. Figure Showing Four-Meter Run Valve Switching
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-7

3.2.4. How the Digital I/O Assignments are Configured

We will use Physical I/O Points 11, 12, 13 and 14 to connect to valve limit
switches SW1, SW2, SW3 and SW4 respectively. The switches activate when
the appropriate valve is fully open. The points are designated as inputs by
assigning them to the dummy input Boolean Point 1700 (see the Command and
Status Booleans on a later page). Their data base point numbers are simply
their I/O point number preceded by 10 (e.g.: I/O Point 11 = 1011).
Physical I/O points 15, 16, 17 and 18 are wired so as to open the meter run
valves V1, V2, V3 and V4. They will be assigned to the Boolean Flags 32 (Point
1032) through 35 (Point 1035) which represent the required state of V1 through
V4 as explained below.
The Boolean equations are as follows:
V1 = (NOT SW2 AND NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1
Valve #1 is opened when the flow is in Zone 1 and will remain open until at least
1 of the other 3 valves is fully open.
Valves V2, V3 and V4 are programmed in a similar fashion.
To simplify we pre-process the common terms. The term 'NOT SW3 AND NOT
SW4' is used to determine V1 and V2. The term 'NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2' is
used to determine V3 and V4.
Assigning the next valid point numbers to our statements and re-write them the
way they will be input.
1030 = NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4 30: /1013&/1014
1031 = NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2 31: /1011&/1012
The final Equations to determined the state of V1, V2, V3 and V4 are as follows:
V1= NOT SW2 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 1 32: /1012&1030+1026
V2 =NOT SW1 AND (NOT SW3 AND NOT SW4) OR Zone 2 33: /1011&1030+1027
V3= (NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW4 OR Zone 3 34: 1031&/1014+1028
V4 =(NOT SW1 AND NOT SW2) AND NOT SW3 OR Zone 4 35: 1031&/1013+1029
The computer evaluates each expression from left to right, so the order of the
variables in the above statements is critical. The logic requires that the OR
variable comes last.
3-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

The final program consists of 11 statements:
Zone 1
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

Zone 2
25: /1825&/1826
Zone 3 26: /1824&1025
27: 1824&1025
Zone 4 28: 1824&1825&/1826
29: 1824&1825&1826
30: /1013&/1014
31: /1011&/1012
32: /1012&1030+1026
V1 33: /1011&1030+1027
34: 1031&/1014+1028
V2
35: 1031&/1013+1029
V3
V4
The only thing left to do now is assign Booleans 1032, 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
the appropriate digital I/O points which control V1, V2, V3 and V4. Here is a
summary of all of the digital I/O as assigned:
PHYSICAL I/O ASSIGNED TO

WIRED T O SYMBOL
POINT BOOLEAN
11 1700 Valve 1 Fully Open Switch SW1
15 1032 Valve 1 Actuator V1
INFO - A list of Modbus
database addresses and
index numbers is included in
Volume 4 of the Omni User
Any pulse signal can be latched by using a small program similar to the
Manual. following:
BOOLEAN POINT #10xx

1026 is set by 1834 and 25: /1834&/1026
cleared by 1835. 26: /1835&/1025
27:
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-9

3.3. User Programmable Variables and

Statements
There are 64 user-programmable floating point variables within the flow
computer numbered 7025 through 7088. The value stored in each of these
variables depends on an associated equation or statement. These statements
are evaluated every 500 msec and the resultant variable values can be
displayed on the LCD display, printed on a report, output to a D-A output, or
accessed via one of the communication ports. Typical uses for the variables
and statements include providing measurement units conversions, special
averaging functions, limit checking and comparisons.
3.3.1. Variable Statements and Mathematical Operators

Allowed
Each statement can contain up to 3 variables or constants. The following
symbols are used to represent the functions:
Operator Symbol Description

TIP - The order of ADD + Add the two variables or constants
precedence is: ABSOLUTE, SUBTRACT - Subtract the RH variable or constant from LH
POWER, MULTIPLY &
DIVIDE, ADD & MULTIPLY * Multiply the two variables or constants
SUBTRACT. Where DIVIDE / Divide the two variables or constants
operators have the same
precedence the order is left CONSTANT # The number following is interpreted as a
to right. constant
POWER & Raise the LH variable to the power of the RH
ABSOLUTE $ Use the abs. unsigned value of variable following
EQUAL = Make the variable on left equal to the expression
IF STATEMENT ) Compares the variable to another (What if?)
GOTO STATEMENT G Go to a different variable
MOVE : Move statement or result to another variable.
COMPARE % Compare a value with or equal to
To program the user variables proceed as follows: From the Display Mode
press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables? _
3-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Scroll down to 'Program Variables ? (Y)' and enter [Y]. Assuming that no
variables are as yet programmed, the display shows:
PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: _
26:
27:
Note that the cursor is on the line labeled 25:. At this point enter the variable
equation that will calculate the value of variable 7025.
Example 1:
To provide a variable (7025) which represents Meter Run #1 gross flow rate in
‘MCF per day' in place of the usual MCF per hour, multiply the 'MCF per hour'
variable (7101) by the constant 24.

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day 25: 7101*#24
26:
27:
Example 2:
To provide a variable that represents 'gallons per minute' (7026) we can convert
the 'barrels per hour' variable (7101) to gallons by multiplying by 0.7 (0.7 =
42/60 which is the number of gallons in a barrel / divided by the number of
minutes in an hour).

bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
25: 7101*#24
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min 26: 7101*#.7_
27:
Example 3:
To provide a variable (7028) that represents meter run #1 temperature in
'degrees Celsius' we subtract 32 from the 'degrees Fahrenheit' variable (7105)
and divide the result (7027) by 1.8.
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: 7101*#24
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min
26: 7101*#.7_
°F - 32.0 27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-11

Example 4:
Gross barrels within the flow computer are simply flow meter counts divided by
the flow meter 'K-Factor' (pulses per barrel); i.e., gross barrels are not meter
factored. To provide a variable (7029) which represents Meter Run #1 gross
meter factored barrels, multiply the batch gross barrel totalizer (5101) by the
batch flow weighted average meter factor (5114).
bbls/hr x 24 = bbls/day
bbls/hr x 0.7 = gal/min 25: 7101*#24
26: 7101*#.7_
°F - 32.0 27: 7105-#32
28: 7027/#1.8
(°F - 32.0) / 1.8 = °C 29: 5101*5114
Gross bbls x Mtr Factor
3.3.2. Using Boolean Variables in Variable Statements

Boolean points used in a programmable variable statement are assigned the
value 1.0 when the Boolean value is TRUE and 0.0 when the Boolean value is
FALSE. By multiplying by a Boolean the user can set a variable to 0.0 when the
Boolean point has a value FALSE.
Example:
Provide a variable (7025) which functions as a 'Report Number'. The report
number which will appear on each 'batch end report' must increment
automatically after each batch and reset to zero at the contract day start hour
on January 1 of each year.
Add 1.0 at Batch End PROG. VARIABLE #70xx

25: 7025+1835
Clear batch report number
on Jan 1 Contract Hour 26: 1834)7025=#0
27:
Boolean 1835 is true one calculation cycle at the end of a batch. Boolean point
1834 is equal to 1.0 for one calculation cycle on the contract day start hour on
January 1. If statement 1834 is true we reset counter 7025.
3-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.3.3. Entering Values Directly into the User Variables

In some cases it may be necessary to enter data directly into a user variable
(not the expression, just the variable). For example, to preset the 'Report
Number' Variable 7025 in the example above we proceed as follows. While in
the Display Mode press [Prog] [Input] [Enter], the following will display:
Current value (can be USER VARIABLE #7025

changed by the user). Value 1234
7025+1835
Expression for this
variable (cannot be
changed from this entry).
3.3.4. Using the Variable Expression as a Prompt

Entering plain text into the expression associated with the variable causes the
computer no problems. It ignores the text and leaves the variable unchanged.
For example:
USER VARIABLE 7025

Value ? .00018
Enter Lbs to SCF ?
3.3.5. Password Level Needed to Change the Value of a

User Variable
The first four variables, 7025, 7026, 7027 and 7028 require ‘Level 2’ password.
the remaining variables require ‘Level 1’.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-13

3.3.6. Using Variables in Boolean Expressions

Note: See the beginning of In some cases it is also necessary to trigger some type of an event based on
this chapter on how to the value of a calculated variable. Boolean variables used in the Boolean
program a Boolean
expression if necessary:
expressions and described in the previous text can have only one of two values,
ON or OFF (TRUE or FALSE). How can the floating point numbers described in
this chapter be used in a Boolean expression? Simply using the fact that a
variable can be either positive (TRUE) or negative (FALSE). Any variable or
floating point can be used in a Boolean expression.
Example:
Provide an alarm and snapshot report which will occur when the absolute
difference in net flow rate between Meter Runs #1 and #2 exceeds 10 bbls/hr,
but only when Meter Run #1 flow rate is greater than 1000 bbls/hr.
Result can be positive or

negative.
30: 7102-7202
Absolute flow difference
minus 10. 31: $7030-#10
32: 7102-#1000
Positive if flow rate is
greater than 1000.
Variable 7031 will be positive (TRUE) if Meter Runs #1 and #2 flow rates differ
by more than 10 bbls/hr. Variable 7032 will be positive (TRUE) when Meter Run
#1 flow rate exceeds 1000 bbls/hr .
User variables 7031 and 7032 shown above must both be positive for the alarm
to be set. In addition, we will require that the condition must exist for 5 minutes
to minimize spurious alarms. The alarm will be activated by Physical I/O Point
#02 and we will use Boolean statements 1025 and 1026.
Enter the following Boolean statements (1025 and 1026 used as example only):
True when both are

positive. BOOLEAN POINT #10xx
25: 7031&7032
26: 1719=1002
Snapshot report when 27:
alarm active.
To complete the example we assign Digital I/O Point #02 (Point # 1002) to 1025
and select a 'delay on' of 3000 to provide a 5 minute delay on activate (3000
ticks = 3000 x 100 msec = 300 seconds). Set the ‘delay off’ to 0.
3-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.4. User Configurable Display Screens

The user can specify up to eight display screen setups. Each display screen can
be programmed to show four variables, each with a descriptive tag. Any
variable within the data base can be selected for display.
Steps needed to configure a display screen are:
INFO - The computer checks 1) Specify a sequence of up to four key presses that will be used to recall
for the user display key the display. Key presses are identified by the A through Z character on
presses first so you may
override an existing display
each key. For each variable (four maximum):
screen by selecting the same 2) Specify the eight character string to be used to identify the variable. Any
key press sequence.
valid characters on the keypad can be used.
3) Specify the database index or point number.
4) Specify the display resolution of the variable (i.e., how many digits to the
right of the decimal point).
Should the number exceed the display capacity, the decimal will be
automatically shifted right to counter the overflow. The computer will shift to
scientific display mode if the integer part of the number exceeds +/- 9,999,999.
To configure the user display screens proceed as follows:
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following
menu will be displayed:
*** Misc. Setup ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Config Meter "n"
Config PID ? "n"
Config D/A Out"n"
Front Pnl Counters
Program Booleans ?
Program Variables?
User Display ? "n" _
Scroll down to 'User Display ? "n"’ and enter 1 through 8 to specify which
screen you wish to configure.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-15

The screen for Display #1 shows:
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press _
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Var #2 Tag
Var #2 Index
Var #2 Dec.
Var #3 Tag
Var #3 Index
Var #3 Dec.
Var #4 Tag
Var #4 Index
Var #4 Dec.
Use the 'UP/DOWN' arrows to scroll through the screen. For 'Key Press' enter
the key press sequence (up to 4 keys) that will be used to recall this display.
The keys are identified by the letters A through Z.
Fig. 3-3. Keypad Layout - A through Z Keys
3-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Example:
You wish to recall 'User Display #1' by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1], select the
key sequence [A] [L] [O] as shown below.
USER DISPLAY #1
Key Press A L O
Var #1 Tag
Var #1 Index
Var #1 Dec.
Continue configuring User Display #1 by entering the description tag, index

number and decimal position required for each variable.
Press [Gross] [Meter]

[1]
Description Tag
Index # for Meter #1 Flow

Rate
Display XXXX.XX USER DISPLAY #1

Key Press A L O
Description Tag
Var #1 Tag M1 MSCF
Var #1 Index 7101
Index # for Meter #1 Batch
Barrels Var #1 Dec. 2
Var #2 Tag M1 MMSCF
Display XXXX.XX Var #2 Index 5101
Var #2 Dec. 0
Description Tag Var #3 Tag M1 PRSET
Var #3 Index 5116
Index # for Meter #1
Preset Count
Var #3 Dec. 0
Var #4 Tag M1 MFACT
Var #4 Index 5114
Display XXXX.XX
Var #4 Dec. 4
Description Tag Var #4 Tag _
Index # for Meter #1 Batch

F.W.A. M/F
Display XXXX.XX
Description Tag
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-17

In the preceding example, User Display #1 is used to display Meter Run #1:
Variable #1 Flow rate in MSCF per Hour
Variable #2 Accumulated Batch MSCF
Variable #3 Meter Factor for the Batch
Variable #4 Not Used
The screen is recalled by pressing [Gross] [Meter] [1] [Enter] and displays:
USER DISPLAY # 1
M1 MSCF 1234.56
M1 MMSCF 123456789
M1 MFACT 1.0000
3-18 21/25.72+ w 05/99

4. Flow Equations and Algorithms for

US Customary Units (Revision 21.72+)
4.1. Flow Rate for Liquid Orifice Metering

The practical flow equations expressed in this section are based on the
following standards:
q American Gas Association (AGA 3). American Petroleum Institute (API
14.3) and Gas Processors Association (GPA 8185-92): Orifice Metering of
Natural Gas and other Related Hydrocarbon Fluids, Part 4: Background,
Development, Implementation Procedure, and Subroutine Documentation
for Empirical Flange-Tapped Discharge Coefficient Equation.
4.1.1. Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions
’qm’ (lbm/sec)
qm = N1 C d E V Y d 2 r f ´ DR
’Qm’ (Klbm/hr)
3600
Q m = qm ´
1000
4.1.2. Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing

Conditions ‘Qv’ (Bbl/hr)
æQ ö
Q v = çç m ÷
÷
NCF - Bbl
è rf ø
4.1.3. Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’

(Bbl/hr)
æQ ö
Q b = çç m ÷
÷
NCF - Bbl
è rb ø
21.72+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 Flow Equations and Algorithms for US Customary Units (Revision 21.72+)
4.1.4. Nomenclature
The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these
require further elaboration or calculation, which can be found in the indicated
standards.
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for liquid orifice

flowmeters, in pounds mass per second (lbm/sec)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for liquid orifice

flowmeters, in thousands of pounds mass per hour (Klbm/hr)
Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for liquid

orifice flowmeters, in barrels per hour (Bbl/hr)
Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions

for liquid orifice flowmeters, in barrels per hour (Bbl/hr)
N1 = factor of combined numerical constants and unit conversions

= 0.0997424
Cd = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless ¾see 5.1.7 this chapter)
EV = velocity of approach factor (dimensionless ¾see 5.1.6 this

chapter)
Y = fluid expansion factor (1.0 for incompressible fluids;

dimensionless¾see 5.1.8 this chapter)
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in inches (see

5.1.5 this chapter)
ρf = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and

pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF)
DR = differential pressure, in inches of water at 60°F, which is the

static pressure difference measured between the upstream and
downstream flange tap holes
ρb = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature

and pressure), in pounds mass per cubic foot (lbm/CF)
NCF-Bbl = constant conversion factor from cubic foot to barrel (user

entered; default = 5.614555)
4-2 21.72+ w 05/99

4.1.5. Diameters and Diameter Correlations

The various orifice meter flow equations require calculating the diameters of the
orifice plate bore or meter tube (internally), and the beta ratio. These calculated
diameters are also used to calculate the pipe Reynolds number, which is used
in calculating discharge coefficients.
Orifice Plate Bore ‘d’ (inches)

The calculated diameter (in inches) of the orifice plate bore at flowing
temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate flow rates and the pipe
Reynolds number. It is the internal diameter of the orifice plate measuring
aperture (bore) computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as follows:
(
d = dr é1 + a 1 Tf - Tr
ëê 1 ûú)ù
Where:
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in inches
dr = reference orifice plate bore diameter at reference temperature,

in inches
a1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate

material, in/in×°F
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °F
Tr1 = reference temperature for the orifice plate bore diameter, in °F
Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter ‘D’ (inches)

The calculated internal meter tube diameter (in inches) at flowing temperature
is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the pipe
Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the meter
tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as follows:
[
D = D r 1 + a 2 ( Tf - Tr2 ) ]
Where:
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter at flowing temperature, in
inches
Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference

temperature, in inches
a2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube

material, in in/in×°F
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °F
Tr = reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in °F

2
21.72+ w 05/99 4-3

Diameter (Beta) Ratio ‘b ’

Dimensionless Values - The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore
Both the diameter (beta) ratio diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal diameter:
and pipe Reynolds number
are dimensionless; however,
consistent units must be b = dD
used.
Where:
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in inches
D = upstream meter tube (pipe) internal diameter at flowing
Pipe Reynolds Number ‘RD’ and ‘Rd’

The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient
of discharge for orifice flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter used to
represent the change in the orifice plate coefficient of discharge with reference
to either the meter tube diameter (RD) or the bore diameter (Rd), and the fluid
mass flow rate (its velocity through the orifice), the fluid density, and the fluid
viscosity.
Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Meter Tube Diameter ‘RD’

The following equation applies to orifice, nozzle and Venturi differential
pressure flow metering devices, except for pipe-tapped orifice flowmeters.
4 qm
RD =
p mD
Where:
RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal

meter tube diameter (dimensionless)
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential

pressure flowmeters, in lbm/sec
π = universal constant
= 3.14159
µ = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in
lbm/ft×sec
D = upstream internal meter tube diameter at flowing temperature, in
inches
4-4 21.72+ w 05/99

Pipe Reynolds Number Referenced to the Bore Diameter ‘Rd’

The following equation applies only to pipe-tapped orifice meters.
4 qm
Rd =
p m d
Where:
Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the orifice plate bore or

nozzle/Venturi throat diameter

pressure flowmeters, lbm/sec
π = Pi, universal constant
= 3.14159
µ = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in
lbm/ft×sec
d = orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi throat diameter at flowing
4.1.6. Velocity of Approach Factor ‘Ev’

Dimensionless Values - The velocity of approach factor is used in the orifice flowmeter equations to
The calculated velocity of calculate the flow rate. It relates the velocity of the flowing fluid in the flowmeter
approach factor is
dimensionless; however,
approach section (upstream meter tube) to the fluid velocity in the orifice plate.
consistent units must be The velocity of approach factor is defined by the following expression:
used.
1
Ev =
1 - b4
Where:
Ev = velocity of approach factor
b = diameter (beta) ratio (see 5.1.5 this chapter)
21.72+ w 05/99 4-5

4.1.7. Discharge Coefficients ‘Cd’

Dimensionless Values - The equations for the coefficient of discharge (Cd) have been determined from
The calculated coefficient of test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (b), the meter tube
discharge is dimensionless;
however, consistent units
diameter (D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate
must be used. equations.
Orifice Flowmeters with Flange Taps (RG Equation) ‘Cd(FT)’

The Reader-Harris/Gallager (RG) equation for concentric, square-edged,
flange-tapped orifice flowmeter coefficient of discharge [Cd(FT)] is a function of
the orifice geometry and of a specified pipe Reynolds number, and is defined as
follows:
ì 0.7 ü
æ 6 ö
ï C (FT ) + 0.000511 ç 10 b ÷ ï
ï i ç R ÷ ï
ï è D ø ï
C d (FT) = í 0.35 ý
é 0.8 ù æ 10 ö
6
ï æ 19000 b ö ï
ê ú ´b4 ç ÷
ï + 0.0210 + 0.0049 çç ÷
÷ ç ÷ ï
ê è RD ø ú R
ïî ë û è D ø ïþ
Where:
Cd(FT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
flange-tapped orifice flowmeters
Ci(FT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds number for

flange-tapped orifice flowmeters
= Ci(CT) + Tap Term
Where:
Ci(CT) = coefficient of discharge at an infinite pipe Reynolds
number for corner-tapped orifice flowmeters
ì 0.5961 + 0.0291 b 2 - 0.2290 b 8 ü

ï ï
= í é æ D ö ù ý
ï
+ 0.003 (1 - b ) ê max çç 2.8 - r , 0.0 ÷
÷ ú ï
î êë è N4 ø úû þ
Tap Term = Upstrm + Dnstrm
ì
ï [0.0433 + 0.0712 e
-8.5L1
- 0.1145 e-6.0L1 ] üï
ï ï
Upstrm = í é æ 19000 b ö
0 .8 ù æ b4 ö ý
ï ´ ê 1 - 0.23 ç ÷ ú ´ çç ÷
4÷ ï
ï ê è RD ø ú è 1- b ø ï
î ë û þ
ì é æ . ù
13 ü
ï - 0.0116 ê ç 2 L2 ö æ 2 L2 ö ú ï
÷ - 0.52 ç ÷
ï ê è 1- b ø è 1- b ø ú ï
ï ë û ï
Dnstrm = í ý
é 0.8 ù
ï . ê æ 19000 b ö ï
11 ú
ï ´ b 1 - 0.14 ç ÷ ï
ê è RD ø ú
ïî ë û ïþ
4-6 21.72+ w 05/99

Where:
N4 = 1.0 when ‘D’ is in inches
e = Napierian constant
= 2.71828
L1 = dimensionless correction for upstream tap
location
= N4/D
= L2
L2 = dimensionless correction for downstream tap
location
Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at
reference temperature, in inches
RD = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the upstream internal

meter tube diameter (see 5.1.5 this chapter)
Orifice Flowmeters with Pipe Taps ‘Cd(PT)’
é æ E öù
C d (PT) = K 0 ê1 + çç ÷ú
÷
ëê è R d ø ûú
Where:
Cd(PT) = coefficient of discharge at a specified pipe Reynolds number for
orifice flowmeters with pipe taps
K0 = coefficient when the orifice Reynolds number ‘Rd’ is infinitely
large
Ke
=
15 E
1+
( )
d 10 6
Where:
Ke = flow coefficient when the orifice Reynolds number ‘Rd’ is
equal to [d(106)/15]
ì 0.0182 æ 0.06 ö 2 ü
ï 0.5925 + + ç 0.44 - ÷ b ï
D è D ø
ï ï
ï æ 0.225 ö 5 ï
= í + ç 0.935 + ÷ b + 1.35 b 14 ý
è D ø
ï ï
ï æ 1.43 ö 5 ï
ï + ç 0.5 ÷ ´ ( 0.25 - b )
2
ï
î è D ø þ
Where:
D = meter tube diameter, in inches (see 5.1.5 this
chapter)
d = orifice plate bore diameter, in inches (see 5.1.5 this
chapter)
21.72+ w 05/99 4-7

E = (
d 830 - 5000 b + 9000 b 2 - 4200 b 3 + B )
Rd = pipe Reynolds number referenced to the diameter of the orifice
plate bore (see 5.1.5 this chapter)
4.1.8. Fluid Expansion Factor ‘Y’
(
Y = 1 - 0.41 + 0.35 b 4 ) xk1
Where:
Y = fluid expansion factor

x1 = ratio of differential pressure to absolute static pressure
measured at the upstream tap
When the upstream static pressure is measured:
DP
X1 =
N 3 Pf
1
When the downstream static pressure is measured:
DP
X1 =
N 3 Pf + D P
2
Where:
DP = orifice differential pressure
N3 = unit conversion factor
Pf1 = absolute static pressure at the upstream pressure tap
Pf2 = absolute static pressure at the downstream pressure tap
x1
= acoustic ratio
k
k = isentropic exponent
4-8 21.72+ w 05/99

4.2. Densities and Other Properties of

Liquids
4.2.1. Flowing Density ‘ρf’ for Crude Oil and Refined

Products
rf = r b ´ VCF ´ CPL
Where:
ρf = fluid density at flowing conditions, in pounds mass per cubic foot

(lbm/CF)
r (gr cc ) ´ WH2O
=
0.999012
Where:
W H2O = the weight in pounds of one cubic foot water at 60°F and
14,696 pounds per square inch absolute (PSIa)
ρb = fluid density at reference conditions, in pounds mass per cubic

foot (lbm/CF)
= relative density at 60°F and equilibrium pressure multiplied by
the weight in pounds of one cubic foot water ‘WH2O’ at 60°F and
14,696 pounds per square inch absolute (PSIa)
VCF = volume correction factor (ASTM D1250)
CPL = correction factor for pressure on liquid
Volume Correction Factor ‘VCF’
VCF = Exp ( - a Ô ´ Ä Ô ´ [ 1 + ( 0.8 ´ aÔ ´ ÄÔ ) ] )
Where:
VCF = volume correction factor
aT = correction for expansion at reference temperature

K 0 + ( K 1 ´ RHO T )
=
(RHOÔ )2
21.72+ w 05/99 4-9

Where:
K0 & K1 = physical constants derived from mathematical data
published in the API MPMS, as follows:
Product Type Crude Oil Fuel Oil Jet Group Gasoline

API Tables 6A, 23A 6B, 23B 6B, 23B 6B, 23B
API Gravity 0 to 100 0 to 37 37.1 to 47.9 52.1 to 85
0.6110 0.8400 0.7890 0.6535
Relative Density to to to to
1.0760 1.0760 0.8395 0.7705
K0 341.0957 103.8720 330.3010 192.4571
K1 0.0 0.2701 0.0 0.2438
RHOT = product density at reference temperature

141.5 ´ r H2 0
=
API + 131.5
Where:
ρH20 = density of water
API = API gravity
When product is between jet group and gasoline:

B
aT = A+
(RHO T )2
Where:
A & B are numerical constants obtained from API Standards as
follows:
Between Jet & Gasoline
API Tables 6B, 23B
API Gravity 48.0 to 52.0
Relative Density 0.7710 to 0.7885
A -0.0018684
B 1489.067
Correction Factor for Pressure on Liquid ‘CPL’
1
C PL =
1 - ( P - Pe ) ´ F
Where:
P = flowing pressure in pounds per square inch gauge (PSIg)
Pe = equilibrium vapor pressure calculated from the correlations

developed by Dr. R. W. Hankinson, et al., of Phillips Petroleum
Company for members of the GPA, and published as GPA
O
Technical Publication N 15.
F = Compressibility factor for hydrocarbons; using API MPMS 11.2.1

for liquids 0 to 90 API relative density; and using API MPMS
11.2.2 for hydrocarbons ranging 0.35 to 0.637 relative density
and -50°F to 140°F.
4-10 21.72+ w 05/99

4.2.2. Density Calculated from Digital Densitometer

Output Frequency
Density and Relative The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to
Density Values Determined determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
from Densitometer and
Gravitometer Frequency
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Signals - The equations q Solartronä
used to determine the density
and relative density via q Sarasotaä
density transducers are
provided by the respective
q UGCä
manufacturers.
Solartronä Density (gm/cc)
Solartronä density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
UNCOMPENSATED DENSITY:
D = K 0 + (K 1 ´ t) + K 2 ´ t 2( )
Where:
D = uncompensated density, in gm/cc
K0 ü
ï
K 1 ý = calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 2 ïþ
t = densitometer oscillation time period, in microseconds (msec)
T EMPERATURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
DT = D ´ [1 + K 18 ( Tf - 68) ] + [ K 19 ( Tf - 68) ]
Where:
DT = temperature corrected density, in gm/cc
D = uncompensated density, in gm/cc
K 18 ü
ý = calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 19 þ
Tf = Temperature in °F
21.72+ w 05/99 4-11

T EMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATED DENSITY:
D PT = D T ´ [1 + (K 20 ´ P) + (K 21 ´ Pf ) ]
Where:
DPT = temperature and pressure compensated density, in gm/cc
DT = temperature compensated density, in gm/cc
K20 = K 20A + (K 20B ´ P)
K21 = K 21A + (K 21B ´ P)
Densitometer Calibration K 20A ü
Constants - In many cases
the densitometer constants
K 20B ïï
supplied by the K 21A ï
manufacturers are based on
SI or Metric units. You must K 21B ïþ
ensure that the constants
entered are based on gr/cc, Pf = flowing pressure in PSIg
degrees Fahrenheit and
PSIg. Contact the
densitometer manufacture or Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartronä Only)
Omni if you require
assistance. For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 gr/cc the following term can be
applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.
3
Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)
Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartronä to
obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.
(Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5)
User not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.
4-12 21.72+ w 05/99

Sarasota Density (gm/cc)

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below:
D c = DCF ´
[ d0 ' ( t - t 0 ' ) ]
é
t 0' ê
2 + K ( t - t 0 ' ) ùú
ê
ë t0' ú
û
Where:
Dc = corrected density, in gm/cc

DCF = density correction factor
Note: d0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*
* D0’ must be expressed in t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (msec)
the units of gm/cc.
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0

where:
Tf = flowing temperature, in °F
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in msec/°F
Pf = flowing pressure, in PSIg
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in msec/PSIg
Pcal = calibration pressure, in PSIg
K = spool calibration constant
21.72+ w 05/99 4-13

UGC Density (gm/cc)

Density and Relative UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
Density Values Determined densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
Signals - The equations
and relative density via UNCORRECTED DENSITY:
( )
manufacturers. D = K 0 + (K 1 ´ t) + K 2 ´ t 2
Where:
D = uncorrected density, in gm/cc
K0 ü
ï
K 1 ý = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad
K 2 ïþ
CORRECTED DENSITY:
ì
ï [ ( K D 2 + K D + K ) ´ (R f - Rc ) ]
R3 R2 R1
ü
ï
D c = DCF ´ í
+ [ ( K t D + K t D + K t ) ´ (Tf - Tc ) ] + density ïþ
ý
2
ï
î 3 2 1
Where:
Dc = corrected density, in gm/cc
D = uncorrected density, in gm/cc
Densitometer Calibration K R1 ü
Constants - In many cases ï
the densitometer constants K R2 ý = pressure constants
supplied by the K R 3 ïþ
SI or Metric units. You must
ensure that the constants Rf = flowing pressure, in PSIg
entered are based on gr/cc,
degrees Fahrenheit and Rc = calibration pressure, in PSIg
PSIg. Contact the
densitometer manufacture or K t1 ü
Omni if you require ï
assistance. K t2 ý = temperature constants
K t 3 ïþ
Tf = flowing temperature, in °F
Tc = calibration temperature, in °F
4-14 21.72+ w 05/99

4.3. Equations for Propylene,

Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes, and
Ethylene
4.3.1. Propylene Calculations
Net Flow Rate = Gross Flow Rate x CCF x

MF
Mass Flow Rate = Gross Flow Rate x MF x SGf x W H2O
Where:
MF = meter factor
CCF = ratio of calculated flowing density ‘ρf’ to density at 60°F and
saturation pressure
rf = calculated density at flowing temperature and pressure using
API MPMS 11.3.3.2, in pounds per cubic foot (lbs/CF)
rf ´ 0.0161846
SGf =
0.999012
W H2O = the weight in pounds of one cubic foot water at 60°F and 14,696
pounds per square inch absolute (PSIa)
4.3.2. Density of Ethane/Propane C3+ Mixes

Density at Flowing Temperature and Pressure is calculated based on a
computer algorithm developed by Phillips Petroleum Aug. 1992. The algorithm
was based on data points published in GPA TP1, TP2 and TP15 publications.
4.3.3. Physical Properties of Ethylene

The density of ethylene is calculated based on the following standards:
q Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry Ethylene Tables (IUPAC)
q NIST 1045 (formerly NBS 1045)
q API MPMS 11.3.2.1 (formerly API 2565). This is the unmodified original
standard.
21.72+ w 05/99 4-15

4.4. PID Control
4.4.1. Primary Variable error % ‘ep’
Forward Action
ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span
Reverse Action
ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span
4.4.2. Secondary Variable error % ‘es’
Forward Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span)
Reverse Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span)
4.4.3. Control Output % ‘C0’ (Before Startup Limit

Function)
Controlling on Primary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain x (ep + åe)
Controlling on Secondary Variable
C0 = Primary Gain x (es + åe)
4.4.4. Integral Error ‘å e’
åe = (Rpts/minp x Sample period x ep) + åe n-1
åe = (Rpts/mins x Sample period x es) + åe n-1
4-16 21.72+ w 05/99

5. Flow Equations and Algorithms for

SI (Metric) Units (Revision 25.72+)
5.1. Flow Rate for Liquid Differential

Pressure Devices (Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi)
The practical flow equations expressed below are based on the International
Standard ISO 5167-1: Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Pressure
Differential Devices, Part 1: Orifice Plates, Nozzles and Venturi Tubes Inserted
in Circular Cross-section Conduits Running Full.
5.1.1. Mass Flow Rate at Flowing Conditions
‘qm’ (Kg/sec)
C p
qm = e2 d2 2 D r l1
1- b 4 4
‘Qm’ (tonne/hr)
3600
Q m = qm ´
1000
5.1.2. Volumetric Gross Flow Rate at Flowing

Conditions ‘Qv’ (m3/hr)
Qm
Qv = ´ 1000
l
5.1.3. Volumetric Net Flow Rate at Base Conditions ‘Qb’

(m3/hr)
Qm
Qb = ´ 1000
lb
25.72+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 5 Flow Equations and Algorithms for S.I. (Metric) Units (Revision 25.72+)
5.1.4. Nomenclature
The following symbols are used in the flow rate equations. Some of these
require further elaboration or calculation, which can be found on the following
pages in this chapter and in the indicated standards.
pressure flowmeters, in kilograms per second (Kg/sec)
Qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for differential
pressure flowmeters, in tonne per hour (tonne/hr)
Qv = volume (gross) flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions for
differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)
Qb = volume (net) flow rate at base (standard/reference) conditions
for differential pressure flowmeters, in cubic meters per hour
(m3/hr)
C = coefficient of discharge (dimensionless ¾see 6.1.6 this chapter)
b = diameter (beta) ratio (dimensionless ¾see 6.1.5 this chapter)
e1 = fluid expansion factor (dimensionless ¾see 6.1.7 this chapter)
p = Pi (universal constant)
= 3.14159
d = orifice plate bore (throat) diameter at flowing temperature
conditions, in meters (see 6.1.5 this chapter)
DR = differential pressure, in Pascals (Pa), which is the static pressure
difference measured between the upstream and downstream tap
holes (or in the throat of a Venturi tube).
l = fluid density at flowing conditions (actual temperature and
pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
l b = fluid density at base conditions (standard/reference temperature
and pressure), in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
5-2 25.72+ w 05/99

5.1.5. Diameters and Diameter Correlations

The various flow equations require calculating the diameters of the orifice plate
bore or nozzle/Venturi throat, the meter tube or pipe (internally), and the
diameter (beta) ratio. These calculated diameters are also used to calculate the
pipe Reynolds number, which is used in calculating discharge coefficients.
Orifice Plate Bore or Nozzle / Venturi Throat Diameter ‘d’ (mm)

The calculated diameter (in millimeters) of the orifice plate bore or of the throat
of the nozzle or Venturi tube at flowing temperature is used in the flow
equations to calculate flow rates and the pipe Reynolds number. It is the
internal diameter of the orifice plate measuring aperture (bore), or the throat of
the nozzle or the Venturi tube, computed at flowing temperature. It is defined as
follows:
[
d = dr 1 + a 1( T f - Tr 1 ) ]
Where:
d = orifice plate bore (or nozzle/Venturi throat) diameter at flowing
temperature, in mm
dr = reference orifice plate bore diameter or throat at reference
temperature, in mm
a1 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the orifice plate or
nozzle/Venturi throat material, in mm/mm×°C
T¦ = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °C
Tr1 = reference temperature for the orifice plate bore or nozzle/Venturi
throat diameter, in °C
Meter Tube (Pipe) Internal Diameter ‘D’ (mm)

The calculated internal diameter of the meter tube (in millimeters) at flowing
temperature is used in the flow equations to calculate the diameter ratio and the
pipe Reynolds number. It is the inside diameter of the upstream section of the
meter tube computed at flowing temperature, and is defined as:
D = D r [1 + a 2 ( Tf - Tr2 )]
Where:
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm
Dr = reference meter tube internal diameter at reference
temperature, in mm
a2 = linear coefficient of thermal expansion of the meter tube
material, in mm/mm×°C
Tf = temperature of the fluid at flowing conditions, in °C
Tr2 = reference temperature for the meter tube internal diameter, in °C
25.72+ w 05/99 5-3

Diameter (Beta) Ratio ‘b ’

Dimensionless Values - The diameter ratio (or beta ratio) is defined as the calculated orifice plate bore
Both the diameter (beta) diameter divided by the calculated meter tube internal diameter:
ratio and the pipe Reynolds
number are dimensionless;
however, consistent units b = dD
must be used.
Where:
d = orifice plate bore diameter at flowing temperature, in mm
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in mm
Pipe Reynolds Number ‘RD’

The pipe Reynolds number is used in the equation for calculating the coefficient
of discharge for differential pressure flowmeters. It is a correlating parameter
used to represent the change in the device’s coefficient of discharge with
reference to the meter tube diameter, the fluid mass flow rate (its inertia or
velocity through the device), the fluid density, and the fluid viscosity, It is a
parameter that expresses the ratio between the inertia and viscous forces, and
is calculated using the following equation:
4 qm
RD =
p ´ m ´ D
Where:
RD = pipe Reynolds number (see 6.1.5 this chapter)
qm = mass flow rate at flowing (actual) conditions, in kg/sec

p = universal constant
= 3.14159
m = absolute (dynamic) viscosity of fluid at flowing conditions, in
Pascals×second
D = meter tube internal diameter at flowing temperature, in meters
5-4 25.72+ w 05/99

5.1.6. Coefficient of Discharge ‘C’

INFO - The coefficient of The equations for the coefficient of discharge (C) have been determined from
discharge, as defined for and test data and correlated as a function of the diameter ratio (b), the pipe diameter
incompressible fluid flow,
relates the actual flow rate (at
(D), and the pipe Reynolds number (RD). It is used in the flow rate equations
flowing conditions) to the and is defined by the following equations:
theoretical (reference) flow
rate through a device.
Calibration of standard Coefficient of Discharge for Orifice Plates ’C(OP)’
primary devices by means of
incompressible fluids The discharge coefficient for orifice plates is given by the Stolz equation:
(liquids) shows that the
discharge coefficient is 0.75
dependent only on the pipe æ 6 ö
10 ÷
Reynolds number (RD) for a C (OP) = 0.5959 + 0.0312 b 2.1 - 0.184 b 8 + 0.0029 b 2.5 ç
ç R ÷
given primary device in a è D ø
given installation. The
numerical value of the
coefficient of discharge (C) is
(
+ 0.09 L1 b 4 1 - b 4 ) 1 - 0.0337 L'2 b 3
-
the same for different

installation whenever such
installations are geometrically
Where:
similar and the flows are
characterized by identical C(OP) = discharge coefficient for orifice plate
pipe Reynolds numbers.
(ISO 5167-1: 1991; page 3.) b = diameter (beta) ratio (see 6.1.5 this chapter)

Note: For pipelines with:
D £ 58.62mm L1 = relative upstream pressure tapping spacing
and
L1 ³ 0.4333 = l1/D
use Where:
4 4 -1
0.039 = b (1-b )
l1 = distance of the upstream tapping from the upstream
in the discharge coefficient orifice plate face
equation for orifice plates.
D = pipe diameter
Dimensionless Values - L’2 = relative downstream pressure tapping spacing

The discharge coefficient is
= l’2/D
consistent units must be Where:
used. l’2 = distance of the downstream tapping from the
downstream orifice plate face
D = pipe diameter
FOR CORNER T APPINGS:

L1 = L’2 = 0
FOR D AND D/2 TAPPINGS:

L1 = 1
L’2 = 0.47
FOR FLANGE T APPINGS:

25.4
L1 = L’2 =
D
25.72+ w 05/99 5-5

Coefficient of Discharge for ISA 1932 Nozzles ‘C(IN)’
1.15
æ 10 6 ö
C (IN) = 0.99 - 0.2262 b 4.1
(
- 0.00175 b 2
- 0.0033 b 4.15 ç
ç R
) ÷
÷
è D ø
Where:
C(IN) = discharge coefficient for ISA 1932 nozzle
Coefficient of Discharge for Long Radius Nozzles ‘C(LN)’
0.5
æ 10 6 ö
C (LN) = 0.9965 - 0.00653 b 0.5 ç ÷
ç R ÷
è D ø
Where:
C(LN) = discharge coefficient for long radius nozzle
Coefficient of Discharge for Classical Venturi Tubes
Venturi Tube with a Rough Cast / Fabricated Convergent Section

‘C(VTR/F)’
C(VTR/F) = 0.984
When:
100 mm £ D £ 800 mm
0.3 £ b £ 0.75
5 6
2 x 10 £ RD £ 2 x 10
Where:
C(VTR/F) = discharge coefficient for classical Venturi tube with an “as cast”
convergent section
5-6 25.72+ w 05/99

Venturi Tube with a Machined Convergent Section ‘C(VTM)’
C(VTM) = 0.995
When:
50 mm £ D £ 250 mm
0.4 £ b £ 0.75
5 6
2 x 10 £ RD £ 1 x 10
Where:
C(VTM) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a
machined convergent section
Venturi Tube with a Rough-welded Sheet-iron Convergent Section

‘C(VTRS)’
C(VTRS) = 0.985
When:
200 mm £ D £ 1200 mm
0.4 £ b £ 0.7
5 6
2 x 10 £ RD £ 2 x 10
Where:
C(VTRS) = discharge coefficient for a classical Venturi tube with a rough-
welded sheet-iron convergent section
Coefficient of Discharge for Venturi Nozzles ‘C(VN)’
C( VN) = 0.9858 - 0.196 b 4.5
Where:
C = discharge coefficient for Venturi nozzle
25.72+ w 05/99 5-7

5.1.7. Fluid Expansion Factor ‘e’

Dimensionless Values - The fluid expansion factor (e) is used to take into account the compressibility of
The fluid expansion factor is the fluid in calculating the flow rate. This coefficient is determined from
consistent units must be
correlating the diameter ratio (b), the differential pressure (DR), the flowing
used. isentropic exponent (k), and the absolute static pressure (R) at upstream (e1) or
downstream (e2) conditions. In addition to these variables, the pressure ratio is
also correlated for fluids flowing through nozzle type and Venturi type devices.
Expansion Factor at Upstream Conditions ‘e 1’

The fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions is given by the
following expressions:
Orifice Plates
( )
DR
e1 = 1 - 0.41 + 0.35b 4
k R1
Where:
e1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions
DR = differential pressure
R1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid
Nozzles, Long Radius Nozzles, Venturi Tubes and Venturi Nozzles
æ k t 2/k ö æ 1 - b4 ö æ1 - t ( k -1)/ k ö
e1 = ç ÷ ´ ç ÷ ´ ç ÷
ç k - 1÷ ç 4 2/ k ÷ ç 1 - t ÷
è ø è1 - b t ø è ø
Where:
e1 = fluid expansion factor at upstream (pressure) conditions
t = pressure ratio
R1
=
R2
R1 = absolute upstream static pressure of the fluid

R2 = absolute downstream static pressure of the fluid
5-8 25.72+ w 05/99

5.2. Densities Calculated from Digital

Densitometer Output Frequency
Density and Specific The calculations expressed in this section are performed by the Omni to
Gravity Values Determined determine the density from frequency signals received from the following third
party densitometers and gravitometers:
Signals - The equations q Solartronä
and specific gravity via gas q Sarasotaä
density and specific gravity
transducers are provided by
q UGCä
the respective
manufacturers.
5.2.1. Solartronä Density (Kg/m3)
Solartronä density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Solartron frequency densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure
corrections as detailed below.
Uncompensated Density
(
D = K 0 + (K 1 ´ t) + K 2 ´ t 2 )
Where:
3
D = uncompensated density, in Kg/m
K0 ü
ï
K 1 ý = calibration constants supplied by Solartron
K 2 ïþ
Temperature Compensated Density
D T = D ´ [ 1 + K 18 (Tf - 20 ) ] + [ K 19 (Tf - 20 ) ]
Where:
3
DT = temperature corrected density, Kg/m
3
D = uncompensated density, in Kg/m
K 18 ü
K 19 þ
Tf = Temperature in °C
25.72+ w 05/99 5-9

Temperature and Pressure Compensated Density
D PT = D T ´ [1 + (K 20 ´ P) + (K 21 ´ Pf ) ]
Where:
3
DPT = temperature and pressure compensated density, in Kg/m
3
DT = temperature compensated density, in Kg/m
K20 = K 20A + (K 20B ´ P)
K21 = K 21A + (K 21B ´ P)
Solartron Calibration K 20A ü
Constants - These
calibration constants are
K 20B ïï
usually based on Bar K 21A ï
pressure units. They must
be converted to kPa based K 21B ïþ
pressure units.
Pf = flowing pressure in kPa.g
Additional Equation for Velocity of Sound Effects (Solartronä Only)

Densitometer Calibration For LPG Products in the range of 0.350 - 0.550 gr/cc the following term can be
Constants - In many cases applied to the temperature and pressure compensated density Dtp.
the densitometer constants
supplied by the
manufacturers are based on 3
Dvos = Dpt + Kr (Dpt - Kj)
ensure that the constants
3
entered are based on kg/m , Users wishing to implement the above term are advised to contact Solartronä to
degrees Celsius and obtain a reworked calibration sheet containing the coefficients 'Kr' and 'Kj'.
kPa×gauge. Contact the
densitometer manufacture or (Typically, Kr = 1.1 and Kj = 0.5)
Omni if you require
assistance. User not wishing to implement the above term should enter 0.0 for Kr.
5-10 25.72+ w 05/99

5.2.2. Sarasota Density (Kg/m3)

Sarasota density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a
Sarasota densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as
shown below:
D c = DCF ´
[ d0 ' ( t - t 0 ' ) ]
é
t 0' ê
2 + K ( t - t 0 ' ) ùú
ê
ë t0' ú
û
Where:
3
Dc = corrected density, in Kg/m
Note: d0 = calibration constant, in mass/volume*
* D0’ must be expressed in t = densitometer oscillation period in microseconds (msec)
3
the units of Kg/m .
t0 = calibration constant, in microseconds
t0' = Tcoef x (Tf - Tcal) + Pcoef x (Pf - Pcal) + t0

where:
Tf = flowing temperature, in °C
Tcoef = temperature coefficient, in msec/°C
Pf = flowing pressure, in kPa.g
Pcoef = pressure coefficient, in msec/ kPa.g
Pcal = calibration pressure, in kPa.g
K = spool calibration constant
25.72+ w 05/99 5-11

5.2.3. UGC Density (Kg/m3)

Density and Relative UGC density is calculated using the frequency signal produced by a UGC
Density Values Determined densitometer, and applying temperature and pressure corrections as shown
below:
Signals - The equations
and relative density via
Uncorrected Density
manufacturers. D = K 0 + (K 1 ´ t) + K 2 ´ t 2 ( )
Where:
3
D = uncorrected density, in Kg/m
K0 ü
ï
K 1 ý = calibration constants of density probe, entered via the keypad
K 2 ïþ
Corrected Density
ì
ï [ ( K D 2 + K D + K ) ´ (R f - Rc ) ]
R3 R2 R1
ü
ï
D c = DCF ´ í
ï + [ ( K t D + K t D + K t ) ´ (Tf - Tc ) ] + density ï
ý
2
î 3 2 1 þ
Where:
3
Dc = corrected density, in Kg/m
3
D = uncorrected density, in Kg/m
Densitometer Calibration K R1 ü
Constants - In many cases ï
the densitometer constants K R2 ý = pressure constants
supplied by the K R 3 ïþ
ensure that the constants Rf = flowing pressure, in kPa.g
3
entered are based on kg/m ,
degrees Celsius and Rc = calibration pressure, in kPa.g
kPa×gauge. Contact the
densitometer manufacture or K t1 ü
Omni if you require ï
K t2 ý = temperature constants
assistance.
K t 3 ïþ
Tf = flowing temperature, in °C
Tc = calibration temperature, in °C
5-12 25.72+ w 05/99

5.3. PID Control
5.3.1. Primary Variable error % ‘ep’
Forward Action
ep = Primary Setpoint % Span - Primary Variable % Span
Reverse Action
ep = Primary Variable % Span - Primary Setpoint % Span
5.3.2. Secondary Variable error % ‘es’
Forward Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Setpoint % Span - Sec Variable % Span)
Reverse Action
es = Sec Gain * (Sec Variable % Span - Sec Setpoint % Span)
5.3.3. Control Output % ‘C0’ (Before Startup Limit

Function)
C0 = Primary Gain x (ep + åe)
C0 = Primary Gain x (es + åe)
5.3.4. Integral Error ‘å e’
åe = (Rpts/minp x Sample period x ep) + åe n-1
åe = (Rpts/mins x Sample period x es) + åe n-1
25.72+ w 05/99 5-13

Volume 4B
User Manual
Modbus Database
Addresses and
Index Numbers

Effective May 1999

1. Modbusä Protocol Implementation ...................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Modes of Transmission ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format.....................................................................1-2
1.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and Message Format .................................1-2
1.3. Message Fields..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1. Address Field ........................................................................................................1-2
1.3.2. Function Code Field ..............................................................................................1-3
1.3.3. Data Field..............................................................................................................1-3
1.3.4. Error Check Field ..................................................................................................1-3
1.4. Exception Response............................................................................................ 1-4
1.5. Function Codes.................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1. Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status).................................................1-4
1.5.2. Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register Sets) .........................................1-6
1.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean).............................................................1-7
1.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer).....................................................1-8
1.5.5. Function Code 07 (Read Diagnostic Status) ..........................................................1-9
1.5.6. Function Code 08 (Loopback Test) ..................................................................... 1-10
1.5.7. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean ) ........................................................ 1-11
1.5.8. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets) ................................................... 1-12
1.5.9. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)........................................................ 1-14
1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)........................................................ 1-14
1.6. Custom Data Packets ........................................................................................ 1-15
1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbusä Link................................................................... 1-16
1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration Required ..................................................... 1-16
1.9. Active Master...................................................................................................... 1-16
1.10. Error Recovery ................................................................................................... 1-16
ii 21/25.72+ w 05/99
Volume 4b Modbusä Database Addresses and Index Numbers
2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999) ..................................... 2-1

2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51 Compatible Register Arrays ............2-1
2.2. Archive Control Flags...........................................................................................2-1
2.3. Status / Command Data .......................................................................................2-2
2.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O......................................................... 2-2
2.3.2. Programmable Booleans....................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points....................................................................... 2-2
2.3.4. Meter Run Alarm and Status Points ...................................................................... 2-3
2.3.5. Fisher Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Transmitter Alarm and Status Points ..... 2-5
2.3.6. User Scratch Pad Boolean Points ......................................................................... 2-6
2.3.7. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points ......................................................... 2-6
2.3.8. Command Boolean Points/Variables ..................................................................... 2-7
2.3.9. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points................................................................ 2-10
2.3.10. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags ........................................................................... 2-14
2.3.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run Status Points .............................................................. 2-15
2.3.12. Miscellaneous Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitter Alarm and Status
Points ................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status Points......................................... 2-16
2.3.14. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets to be Transmitted Without a
Poll ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant Flow Computer System .......... 2-17
2.3.16. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube Switching........................................ 2-18
2.3.17. Archive Trigger Commands ................................................................................ 2-18
2.3.18. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags ......................................................................... 2-19
2.3.19. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ......................................................... 2-20
2.3.20. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow Computer Systems ....................... 2-20
2.3.21. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags ................................................ 2-21
2.3.22. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points Used For Meter Tube Switching.. 2-21
21/25.72+ w 05/99 iii

3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999) ........................................................................... 3-1

3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1.........................................................................................3-1
3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................................................... 3-2
3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................................. 3-2
3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................................... 3-4
3.5. User Display Definition Variables........................................................................ 3-4
3.5.1. User Display Number 1..........................................................................................3-4
3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data Archive Records........................................ 3-7
3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ............................................................. 3-9
3.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................................................... 3-10
3.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product Numbers to Run ........................................... 3-12
3.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence ................................................................................... 3-12
3.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables ......................................................... 3-14
3.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data ........................................................... 3-14
iv 21/25.72+ w 05/99
4. 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999) ........................................................ 4-1

4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data................................................................................4-1
4.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data ............................................................................4-2
4.3. User Display Definition String Variables .............................................................4-2
4.4. String Variables Associated with the Station Auxiliary Inputs ..........................4-3
4.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String Data ......................................................4-3
4.6. Meter Run Batch Identification Data ...................................................................4-5
4.6.1. Meter #1 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-5
4.6.2. Meter #2 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-5
4.6.3. Meter #3 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-5
4.6.4. Meter #4 Batch ID................................................................................................. 4-6
5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999)............................................................................ 5-1

5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data..............................................................................5-1
5.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data ..........................................................................5-4
5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data..................................................................................5-5
5.4. Meter Run Batch Size Data ..................................................................................5-6
5.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.3. Meter #3 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.4. Meter #4 Batch Size.............................................................................................. 5-6
5.5. Miscellaneous 32-Bit Integer Data.......................................................................5-7
6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001 - 8999) ..................................................... 6-1

6.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data................................6-1
6.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data..................................................6-1
6.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Variables ...................6-2
6.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.........................................................6-2
6.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data .....................................................6-6
6.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data.......................................................6-6
6.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................6-7
21/25.72+ w 05/99 v
6.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................. 6-9
6.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ................................................. 6-11
6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ............................. 6-15
6.10.1. Previous Batch Average...................................................................................... 6-15
6.10.2. Previous Hour’s Average..................................................................................... 6-16
6.10.3. Previous Day’s Average ...................................................................................... 6-16
6.10.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of Transducer Inputs.................................. 6-17
6.10.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages ................................................................... 6-17
6.10.6. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages .......................................................... 6-18
6.10.7. Previous Batch Quantities ................................................................................... 6-18
6.10.8. Station Previous Average Data............................................................................ 6-19
7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)................................................................... 7-1

7.1. Custom Report Templates................................................................................... 7-1
7.2. Previous Batch Reports....................................................................................... 7-1
7.3. Previous Daily Reports ........................................................................................ 7-2
7.4. Last Snapshot Report.......................................................................................... 7-2
7.5. Miscellaneous Report Buffer............................................................................... 7-2
8. Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001 - 18999)........................................... 8-1

8.1. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data............................................ 8-1
8.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data ...............................................................................8-1
8.1.2. General Flow Computer Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data ...................................8-3
8.1.3. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data .........................................................8-3
8.1.4. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data................8-5
8.1.5. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data........................8-6
8.1.6. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data .....................................................8-8
8.1.7. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data......................................................... 8-12
8.2. Flow Computer Configuration 16-Character ASCII String Data ..................... 8-16
8.3. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit Long Integer Data ................................ 8-19
8.4. Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data ..................... 8-26
8.5. More Flow Computer Configuration 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data............ 8-30
vi 21/25.72+ w 05/99
1. Modbusä Protocol Implementation
1.1. Introduction
Omni Flow Computers implement a superset of the Gould Modbusä Protocol on
Serial Ports #1 (selectable), #2, #3 and #4 (selectable), thus allowing
simultaneous communications with two totally independent Modbus systems.
Maximum transmission baud rate is 38.4 kbps with an average answer
response time of 70 msec plus any modem warm-up time.
The Modbusä Protocol specifies one master and up to 247 slaves on a common
communication line. Each slave is assigned a fixed unique device address in
the range of 1 to 247. The Master always initiates the transaction. Transactions
are either a query/response type (only one slave is accessed at a time) or a
broadcast / no response type (all slaves are accessed at the same time). A
transaction comprises a single query and single response frame or a single
broadcast frame.
1.2. Modes of Transmission

Two basic modes of transmission are available: ASCII or Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU). The mode selected depends on the equipment being used.
AVAILABLE T RANSMISSION MODES

T RANSMISSION MODE
ASCII RTU
Coding System Hexadecimal 8-bit binary
NUMBER OF BITS:
Start Bits 1 1
Data Bits 7 8
Parity (Optional) Odd, Even, None (1 or Odd, Even, None (1 or
0) 0)
Stop Bits 1 or 2 1 or 2
Error Checking LRC CRC
Baud Rate 300 bps to 38.4 kbps 300 bps to 38.4 kbps
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-1

Chapter 1 Modbusä Protocol Implementation
1.2.1. ASCII Framing and Message Format

Framing in ASCII Transmission Mode is accomplished by the use of the colon
(:) character indicating the beginning of a frame and a carriage return (CR) line
feed (LF) to delineate end of frame. The line feed character also serves as a
synchronizing character which indicates that the transmitting station is ready to
receive an immediate reply.
ASCII MESSAGE FORMAT

BEGINNING END READY TO
FUNCTION ERROR
OF ADDRESS DATA OF RECEIVE
CODE CHECK
FRAME FRAME RESPONSE
: 2 Char 2 Char N x 2 Char 2 Char CR LF

Assuming 7 bits per
transmitted character. 7 Bits 14 Bits 14Bits N x 14 Bits 14 Bits 7 Bits 7 Bits
1.2.2. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Framing and

Message Format
Frame synchronization can be maintained in RTU Transmission Mode only by
simulating a synchronous message. The 'OMNI' monitors the elapsed time
between receipt of characters. If 3.5 character times elapse without a new
character or completion of the frame, then the frame is reset and the next bytes
will be processed looking for a valid address.
RTU MESSAGE FORMAT

ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA ERROR CHECK
8 Bits 8 Bits N x 8 Bits 16 Bits
1.3. Message Fields
1.3.1. Address Field

The address field immediately follows the beginning of the frame and consists
of 2 characters (ASCII) or 8 bits (RTU). These bits indicate the user assigned
address of the slave device that is to receive the message sent by the master.
Each slave must be assigned a unique address and only the addressed slave
will respond to a query that contains its address. When the slave sends a
response, the slave address informs the master which slave is communicating.
In broadcast mode, an address of zero (0) is used. All slaves interpret this as an
instruction to read and take action, but do not issue a response message.
1-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Volume 4b ä Database Addresses and Index Numbers
Modbusä
1.3.2. Function Code Field

Note: See 4.5 for The function code field tells the addressed slave what function to perform. The
descriptions and examples of high order bit of the function code field is set by the slave device to indicate that
these function codes. See other than a normal response is being transmitted to the Master device. This bit
4.4 for a description of
exception responses.
remains 0 if the message is a query or a normal response message.
FUNCTION CODE ACTION

01/02 READ MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
03/04 READ STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
05 WRITE SINGLE BOOLEAN POINT
06 WRITE SINGLE 16 BIT INTEGER
07 READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS
08 LOOPBACK TEST
15 WRITE MULTIPLE BOOLEAN POINTS
16 WRITE STRINGS OR MULTIPLE 16 OR 32 BIT VARIABLES
65 READ ASCII TEXT BUFFER
66 WRITE ASCII TEXT BUFFER
1.3.3. Data Field

The data field contains the information needed by the slave to perform the
specific function or it contains data collected by the slave in response to a
query. This information may be text strings, values, exception code or text
buffers.
1.3.4. Error Check Field

This field allows the master and slave devices to check a message for errors in
transmission. A transmitted message may be altered slightly due to electrical
noise or other interference while it is on its way from one unit to another. The
error checking assures that the master and the slave do not react to messages
that have been changed during transmission. The error check field uses a
longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) in the ASCII Mode and a CRC-16 check in
the RTU Mode. The bytes checked include the slave address and all bytes up to
the error checking bytes. Checking is done with the data in the binary mode or
RTU mode.
The LRC Mode

The error check is an 8-bit binary number represented and transmitted as two
ASCII hexadecimal (hex) characters. The error check is produced by first
stripping the Colon, CR and LF and then converting the hex ASCII characters to
binary. Add the binary bytes (including slave address) discarding any carries,
and then two's complement the result. At the received end the LRC is
recalculated and compared to the LRC as sent. The colon, CR, LF, and any
imbedded non ASCII hex characters are ignored in calculating the LRC (see
page 1-7 of the Gould Modbusä ä Reference Guide for more details).
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-3

Chapter 1 ä Protocol Implementation
Modbusä
The CRC Mode

The message is considered as one continuous binary number whose most
significant bit (MSB) is transmitted first. The message is pre-multiplied by x 16
(shifted left 16-bits), then divided by (x16+x15+x2+1) expressed as the binary
number (11000000000000101).The integer quotient digits are ignored and the
16-bit remainder (initialized to all ones at the start to avoid the case of all zeros
being an accepted message) is appended to the message (MSB first) as the two
CRC check bytes. The resulting message including CRC, when divided by the
same polynomial (x16 + x15 + x2 + 1) at the receiver will give a zero remainder
if no errors have occurred (see pages1-4 through 1-6 of the Gould Modbusä
Reference Guide for more details).
1.4. Exception Response

Programming or operation errors are those involving illegal data in a message,
no response or difficulty in communicating with a slave. These errors result in
an exception response from the slave, depending on the type of error. When
such a message is received from the master the slave sends a response to the
master echoing the slave address, function code (with high bit set), exception
code and error check fields. To indicate that the response is a notification of an
error, the high order bit of the function code is set to 1.
EXCEPTION CODE DESCRIPTION

01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
04 DATA CANNOT BE WRITTEN
05 PASSWORD NEEDED
1.5. Function Codes
1.5.1. Function Codes 01 and 02 (Read Boolean Status)

Note: These functions allow the user to obtain the ‘on/off’ status of Booleans used to
Function Code 02 is identical control discrete outputs from the addressed slaves only. Broadcast mode is not
to Function Code 01. It can supported with this function code. In addition to the slave address and function
be used by communication
devices that do not support
field, the message requires that the information field contain the initial point
Function Code 01. number to be read (starting point) and the number of points that will be read to
obtain the Boolean data.
Boolean points are numbered as from 1001; (Boolean number 1= 1001). The
data is packed one bit for each Boolean flag variable. The response includes
the slave address, function code, quantity of data characters, the data
characters, and error checking. Data will be packed with one bit for each
Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The low order bit of the first character contains
the addressed flag and the remainder follows. For Boolean quantities that are
not even multiples of eight, the last characters will be filled-in with zeros at high
order end.
1-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Example: Read Booleans 1120 to 1131 from Slave Device #01.
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : ASCII TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO 8-BIT
: 3031 3031 3034 3630 3030 3043 3845 CR LF
POLL MASTER-TO-SLAVE : RTU TRANSMISSION MODE

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # NUMBER OF POINTS CRC CHECK
01 01 04 60 00 0C ‘nn’ ‘nn’
SLAVE RESPONSE : ASCII Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT
: 3031 3031 3032 3038 3030 4634 CR LF
SLAVE RESPONSE : RTU Transmission Mode

FUNCTION BYTE DATA LCR CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO 8-BIT
01 01 02 08 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The status of Booleans 1120 through 1127 is shown as 08 (hex) = 0000 1000
(binary). Reading right to left, this shows that status 1123 is ‘on’. The other data
flags are decoded similarly. Due to the quantity of Boolean status requested,
the last data field, which is shown as 00 (hex) = 0000 0000 (binary), contains
the status of only four flags. The four left most bits are provided as zeros to fill
the 8-bit format.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-5

1.5.2. Function Codes 03 and 04 (Read 16-Bit Register

Sets)
Note: Function Codes 03 and 04 allow the master to obtain the binary contents of
Function Code 04 is identical holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
to Function Code 03. It can 125 16-bit registers to be obtained at each request. Broadcast mode is not
be used by communication
devices that do not support
allowed for functions 03 and 04.
Function Code 03. These 16-bit registers are also grouped in sets of registers and accessed as one
variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type and
indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
Register Groups for Long
Integer Variable Type -
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES
Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
POINT # VARIABLE 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
Revision 23 for US
customary units. RANGE TYPE POINT POINT M ESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125

4XXX 8-Char. ASCII String 4 Registers 8 Bytes 31
6XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
17XXX or 18XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned followed by the actual data bytes. The data is
returned in multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The
data is sent MS Byte first.
Example: Read Short Integer Message 3012 through 3013 from Slave #2.

FUNCTION DATA STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK
02 03 0B C4 00 02 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

FUNCTION BYTE DATA DATA CRC CHECK
ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO HI LO 16-BIT
02 03 04 1F 40 1F 3E ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The slave responds with its address and the function code, byte count of the
data field followed by the actual data field. In the example above, the data field
contains 4 bytes representing the value of the requested data.
1-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1.5.3. Function Code 05 (Write Single Boolean)

This message forces a single Boolean variable either ‘on’ or ‘off’. Boolean
variables are points numbered 1XXX or 2XXX. Writing the 16-bit value 65,280
(FF00 HEX) will set the Boolean ‘on’. Writing the value zero will turn it ‘off’. All
other values are illegal and will not effect the Boolean. Using a slave address
‘00’ (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify the desired Boolean.
Example: Turn Single Boolean Point 1711 ‘on’ - Slave #2.
FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRC

ADDRESS CODE HI LO HI LO CHECK
02 05 06 AF FF 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
FUNCTION BOOLEAN POINT # DATA CRC

02 05 06 AF FF 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The normal response to the command request is to retransmit the message as

received after the Boolean state has been altered.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-7

1.5.4. Function Code 06 (Write Single 16-Bit Integer)

Any numeric variable that has been defined on the 16-bit integer index table
can have its contents changed by this message. The 16-bit integer points are
numbered from 3XXX or 13XXX.
When used with slave address zero (Broadcast Mode) all slaves will load the
specified points with the contents specified. The following example sets one
16-bit integer at address 3106 (0C22 HEX) of Slave #2 (i.e., load address 3106
with data 0003).
Example: Set Single 16-Bit Integer Slave #2.
FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRC

02 06 0C 22 00 03 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
FUNCTION POINT # DATA CRC

02 06 0C 22 00 03 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The normal response to a Function 06 query is to retransmit the message as

received after the 16-bit integer has been altered.
1-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
1.5.5. Function Code 07 (Read Diagnostic Status)

This function allows the user to obtain basic diagnostic data and determines the
Omni communication port number (serial port number) being used to
communicate. This diagnostic data is hard programmed and cannot be
reconfigured. Following are the five status values reported:
q EPROM Checksum error flag
q Unit in Program mode
q Unit in Diagnostic mode
q Redundant Master status
q Power failed flag
Example: Request to Modbus ID # 13 (Address HEX: 0D) to respond with

event status and communication port number.

FUNCTION CRC CHECK
ADDRESS
CODE 8-Bit
0D 07 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

FUNCTION CRC CHECK
ADDRESS DATA
CODE 8-Bit
0D 07 4C ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The slave responds with the Modbus slave address (0D), the function code, and
the data, followed by the CRC check. The data field contains 1 byte
representing the value of the requested data. Following is the conversion of
hexadecimal data to binary, to determine the diagnostic status and
communication port number.
Hex 4C = 0100 1100 (Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5, Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0)
Bit 7, Bit 6, Bit 5 represent the communication port:
Omni Port # Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 7

1 0 0 1
2 0 1 0
3 0 1 1
4 1 0 0
Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1, Bit 0 represent the following event status:
Bit 4 à Power failed flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 1829
Bit 3 à Master status (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database address = 2864
Bit 2 à In diagnostic mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
Bit 1 à In program mode (1=Yes, 0=No)
Bit 0 à Invalid EPROM Checksum error flag (1=Yes, 0=No); Modbus database
address = 1837
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-9

Modbusä
1.5.6. Function Code 08 (Loopback Test)

Function Code 08 sends diagnostics test message to slave, to evaluate
communications processing. The purpose is to test the communication system
only; it does not perform any write function. The system (slave) responds with
an echo.
Example: Loopback Test – Simple return of query message sent to Slave

Address Identification # 13.

DATA DIAGNOSTICS DATA DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTION CODE CODE CRC
ADDRESS
CODE CHECK
HI LO HI LO
0D 08 00 00 A5 37 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

DATA DIAGNOSTICS DATA DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTION CODE CODE CRC
ADDRESS
CODE CHECK
HI LO HI LO
0D 08 00 00 A5 37 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The slave responds with an echo; i.e., identical Modbus ID (address), function
code, and data.
1-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
1.5.7. Function Code 15 (Write Multiple Boolean )

Function Code 0FHEX (15) writes to each Boolean variable in a consecutive
block of Boolean variables to a desired ‘on’ or ‘off’ state. Each Boolean is
packed in the data field, one bit for each Boolean flag (1 = on, 0 = off). The data
field consists of increments of 2 bytes and can be up to 250 bytes (2000 points).
Boolean points are packed right-to-left, 8 to a byte with unused bits set to '0'.
The use of slave address ‘00’ (Broadcast Mode) will force all slaves to modify
the desired Boolean bits. The following example writes to 14 Boolean variables
starting at address 1703. The data field value 05, 1703 through 1710, and data
field value 20 represents the status of points 1711 through 1716. These data
values are transmitted as 0000 0101 and 0010 0000, indicating that Booleans
points 1703, 1705, 1716 are to be forced ‘on’ and 1704 and 1706 through 1715
are to be forced ‘off’ (the two most significant positions of the second byte are
unused and set to ‘0’).
Example: Turn on Boolean points 1703, 1705, 1716 ON Slave #3.
FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA CRC

ADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS COUNT HI LO CHECK
03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 02 05 20 ‘nn’ ‘nn’

FUNCTION STARTING QUANTITY CRC
ADDRESS CODE ADDRESS OF POINTS CHECK
03 0F 06 A7 00 0E 'nn' 'nn'
The normal response to a Function 15 query is to echo the slave address,

function code, starting address, and quantity of points written.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-11

Modbusä
1.5.8. Function Code 16 (Write 16-Bit Register Sets)

Function Code 10HEX (16) allows the master to change the binary contents of
holding registers in the addressed slave. The protocol allows for a maximum of
125 16-bit registers to be changed at each download. Using a slave address of
zero (00) allows the master to change registers in all slaves simultaneously
(Broadcast Mode).
These 16-bit registers are also grouped as sets of registers and accessed as
one variable. The numeric range of the point number defines the variable type
and indicates how many 16-bit registers make up that variable.
Register Groups for Long
Integer Variable Type -
REGISTER GROUPS FOR T YPES OF VARIABLES
Points 6XXX or 15XXX long
integers apply only to
POINT # VARIABLE 16-BIT REGS. / NO OF BYTES / M AX POINTS /
Revision 23 for US
customary units. RANGE TYPE POINT POINT M ESSAGE
3XXX or 13XXX Short Integer 1 Register 2 Bytes 125
6XXX or 15XXX Long Integer 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
7XXX or 17XXX IEEE Floating Point 2 Registers 4 Bytes 62
The addressed slave responds with its address and the function code, followed
by the information field. The information field contains a single byte indicating
the number of data bytes returned and the actual data bytes. The data is sent
as multiples of two bytes, with the binary content right justified. The data is sent
MS Byte first.
Example: Write Short Integers 3012 through 3013 to Slave #2.

Byte Count: The Byte Count
will be increments of 2, 4, 8
or 16 bytes depending on the
address range of the points
FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRC
downloaded.
ADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK
02 10 0B C4 00 02 04 1F 40 1F 3E ‘nn’ ‘nn’

02 10 0B C4 00 02 'nn' 'nn'
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
1-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
Example: Write a Long Integer 5101 to Slave #4
FUNC STARTING QUANTITY BYTE DATA DATA CRC

ADDR CODE POINT # OF POINTS COUNT HI LO HI LO CHECK
04 10 13 ED 00 01 04 00 4F 20 4E ‘nn’ ‘nn’

04 10 13 ED 00 01 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
The slave responds with its address and the function code, starting point
number and quantity of points.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-13

Modbusä
1.5.9. Function Code 65 (Read ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 41HEX (65) allows the master to read the contents of an ASCII
text buffer within an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in
packets containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The
size of the text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer
will contain a HEX 1A (end of file character). The last buffer will contain an
ASCII ^Z (end of file character).
Example: Read 2nd packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9001 from Slave # 5.
FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRC

05 41 23 29 00 01 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA ………… Data CRC

ADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo BYTE 0 ………… BYTE 128 CHECK
05 41 23 29 00 01 30 ………… 41 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
1.5.10. Function Code 66 (Write ASCII Text Buffer)

Function Code 42HEX (66) is used by the master to download an ASCII text
buffer to an addressed slave. Data is always sent and received in packets
containing 128 characters. Packets are numbered from 0 to 255. The size of the
text buffer is always an exact multiple of 128 bytes. The last buffer will contain
a HEX 1A (end of file character).
Example: Write 1st packet of an ASCII Text Buffer Point 9002 to Slave # 2.
FUNC POINT # PACKET # DATA ………… DATA CRC

ADDR CODE HI LO HI Lo BYTE 0 ………… BYTE 128 CHECK
02 42 23 2A 00 00 39 ………… 2F ‘nn’ ‘nn’
FUNCTION POINT # PACKET # CRC

02 42 23 2A 00 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
1-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
1.6. Custom Data Packets

Many point numbers were left unused when numbering the variables within the
database. This allows for future growth and different application data. Without
custom data packets many polls would be required to retrieve data distributed
throughout the database. The custom data packets allows you to concatenate or
join different groups or sets of data in any order and of any data type into 1
message response. These custom packets are a type 03 read and are located
at points 1, 201 and 401 in the database.
Example: Read Custom Data Packet #1 at Point 0001 from Slave #2.
FUNCTION STARTING POINT # QUANTITY OF POINTS CRC CHECK

02 03 00 01 00 00 ‘nn’ ‘nn’
Dummy number
of points
FUNCTION BYTE DATA ………… DATA CRC CHECK

ADDRESS CODE COUNT HI LO ………… HI LO 16-BIT
02 03 ?? ?? ?? ………… ?? ?? ‘nn’ ‘nn’
Depends on the size of Depends on the number

packet configured and type of data points
included
21/25.72+ w 05/99 1-15

Modbusä
1.7. Peer-to-Peer on the Modbusä Link

Serial Port #2 (Modbus Port #1) can be configured to allow peer-to-peer
communications. In this mode any Omni flow computer can act as a Modbus
master and communicate with any other Modbus device on the communication
link (see technical Bulletin TB-980401 “Peer-to-Peer Basics”).
1.8. Half Duplex Wiring Configuration

Required
The physical wiring of a Modbus link is usually full duplex, although the Modbus
communication protocol is a half duplex protocol (i.e., both devices never
transmit at the same time). For peer-to-peer communications the physical link
must be wired for half duplex operation with all transmit and receive terminals
wired in parallel (see 7.4 in Volume 1). This allows all devices to hear all
transmissions; even their own.
1.9. Active Master

Control of the communication link is passed from the current master to the next
master in the sequence by broadcasting the ID number of the next master in
sequence. When that flow computer has completed its transaction list (see 7.4
in Volume 1) it will in turn hand over control to the next master in the sequence.
1.10. Error Recovery

Should the next master in the sequence fail to take control of the link the
current master will search for an active master. To ensure best performance
and fastest recovery in the event of an error, always number Modbus masters
consecutively starting from 01.
1-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2. User-Defined, Status and Command Data

(0001 - 2999)
2.1. Custom Data Packets or Modicon™ G51

Compatible Register Arrays
INFO - This data is accessed These three addresses specify reserved areas used to access user defined
using Modbus function code groups of data variables. Data can be accessed as read only blocks of data or
03 for reads and 16 for
writes. Boolean data bits are
the data is arranged as an array of adjacent 16-bit registers which can be read
packed 8 to a byte. or written independently, if the Modicon Compatible mode is selected when
setting up the serial port.
0001 Custom Data Packet / Array #1

Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3001-3040).
Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Index
3041-3056).
Maximum 250 bytes using Modbus RTU mode (for Packet/Array definition see Indices
3057-3096).
2.2. Archive Control Flags

Data to be added into the Text Archive RAM is flagged by embedding Boolean
Point 1000 or 2000 within the appropriate custom report immediately preceding
the data to be archived. You may enable or disable the archiving of data by
resetting or setting this variable.
1000 Archive Control Flag

Report data following flag will be archived but not printed.
2000 Archive Control Flag
Report data following flag is printed and archived.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-1

Chapter 2 User-Defined, Status and Command Data (0001 - 2999)
2.3. Status / Command Data
2.3.1. Reading and Writing the Physical Digital I/O

The current status of physical Digital I/O Points 01 through 12 (Omni 3000) or
‹ IMPORTANT ‹ 01 though 24 (Omni 6000) can be accessed by reading Modbus Indexes 1001
Never set a physical I/O point through 1024.
which has been assigned as
an input as this could cause All points which are to be written to exclusively via the Modbus must first have
a DC voltage to appear on the point assigned to Modbus control by entering zero (0) for 'Digital Point
the input terminals of that
point which may conflict with Assign' (see Volume 3). Assigning to '0' prevents the Omni application software
any voltage already present from overwriting the Modbus write.
on those terminals.
1001 Digital I/O Point #1

Application Revision
21/25.72+ - This database to
corresponds to Application 1024 Digital I/O Point #24
Revision 21/25.72+ for
Orifice/Differential Pressure
Liquid Flow Metering
Systems.
2.3.2. Programmable Booleans
INFO - Boolean data is Points 1025 through 1088 are updated every 100 msec with the evaluated
accessed using Modbus results of programmable Boolean statements. You may read from or write to
function codes 01 for reads, these variables, but anything that you write may be overwritten by the flow
05 for single point writes and computer depending upon the logic functions programmed into the logic
15 for multiple bit writes.
Boolean data is packed 8 statement.
points to a byte when
reading.
1025 Boolean Point #25
to
1088 Boolean Point #88
2.3.3. Programmable Accumulator Points

Points 1089 through 1099 are paired with Floating Point Variables 7089 through
7099. For example, numeric data placed in 7089 can be output as pulses by
assigning a Digital I/O Point to 1089.
1089 Programmable Accumulator #1

Used to pulse out data placed into 7089.
to
Used to pulse out data placed into 7099.
2-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.3.4. Meter Run Alarm and Status Points

Application Revision The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
21/25.72+ - This database example: Point 1105 is the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #1. Point 1405
corresponds to Application
would be the Meter Active Flag for Meter Run #4.
Systems. * 1n01 Pulses - Gross
* 1n02 Pulses - Net
Note: * 1n03 Pulses - Mass
* Used to assign * 1n04 Pulses - Net Standard Volume (NSV)
accumulator to the front
panel counters or digital
I/O points) 1n05 Meter Run Active Flag
Set when the differential pressure is greater than the cutoff value (7n51).
1n06 Spare
1n07 Any New Alarm – Meter Run ‘n’

Clears if acknowledged.
1n08 Batch End Acknowledge Flag

Toggles ON/OFF.
1n09 Spare
1n10 Batch Preset Reached

Batch total equasl or exceeds the batch preset.
1n11 Batch Preset Warning Flag
Batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at 5n38).
1n12 Batch End Acknowledge Flag
500 msec pulse.
1n13 Calculation Alarm

Usually temperature, pressure or density is outside of the range of the algorithm selected.
1n14 Override In Use - Density Pressure

Override in use for any reason.
1n15 Override In Use - Differential Pressure
1n16 Override In Use - Temperature
1n17 Override In Use - Pressure
1n18 Override In Use - Gravity/Density Transducer
1n19 Override In Use - Density Temperature
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-3

1n20 Gross Flow Rate - Low Low Alarm

INFO - Boolean data is 1n21 Gross Flow Rate - Low Alarm
accessed using Modbus
1n22 Gross Flow Rate - High Alarm
function codes 01 for reads,
05 for single point writes and 1n23 Gross Flow Rate - High High Alarm
Boolean data is packed 8
points to a byte when 1n24 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
reading.
1n25 Meter Temperature - Low Alarm
1n26 Meter Temperature - High Alarm
INFO - Transducer and flow 1n27 Meter Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
rate alarms remain set while
the alarm condition exists.
1n28 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm
Alarms - All alarms indicated 1n29 Meter Pressure - Low Alarm
the current alarm condition at 1n30 Meter Pressure - High Alarm
the time they are reset.
1n31 Meter Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n32 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n33 Gravity/Density - Low Alarm
1n34 Gravity/Density - High Alarm
1n35 Gravity/Density - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n36 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n37 Density Temperature - Low Alarm
1n38 Density Temperature - High Alarm
1n39 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n40 Differential Pressure - Low Range - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n41 Differential Pressure - Low Range - Low Alarm
1n42 Differential Pressure - High Range - High Alarm
1n43 Differential Pressure - High Range - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n44 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low Alarm

1n45 Density Pressure - Low Alarm
1n46 Density Pressure - High Alarm
1n47 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High Alarm
1n48 Spare
to
1n51 Spare
1n52 Differential Pressure - Low Range Selected

Refers to when stacked differential pressures are used.
1n53 Differential Pressure - High Range Selected
1n54 Any Meter Run Specific Alarm This Meter

Clears only if acknowledged and alarm condition is cleared.
2-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1n55 Meter Off-line Flag

Pulses for 500 msec when Meter Active (1n05) goes false.
21/25.72+ - This database 1n56 Batch In Progress Flag
corresponds to Application Set when flow occurs at start of batch. Reset at batch end command.
1n57 Batch Start Acknowledge
Pulses for 500 msec when 1727-1730 command is received.
Systems. 1n58 Meter Not Active / Batch Suspended
True when batch is in progress but Meter Active (1n05) is false.
INFO - The second digit of

the index number defines the
number of the meter run. 1n59 Spare
to
1n76 Spare
1n77 Correctable Totalizer Error Occurred

Primary totalizer checksum error secondary totalizer checksum OK.
1n78 Non-correctable Totalizer Error
Primary and secondary totalizers reset to zero because both checksums incorrect.
1n79 Differential Pressure in Use - Low Alarm

1n80 Differential Pressure in Use - High Alarm
2.3.5. Fisher Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable

Transmitter Alarm and Status Points
Notes:
* Signal 10% or more above * 1n83 Differential Pressure - Upper Range Limit Alarm
upper range limit
# 1n84 Differential Pressure - Lower Range Limit Alarm
# Signal 10% or more below
the lower range limit
* 1n85 Pressure - Upper Range Limit Alarm
# 1n86 Pressure - Lower Range Limit Alarm
1n87 Pressure - Sensor Failure Alarm
1n88 Pressure - Sensor Bridge - Open Circuit Flag
* 1n89 Temperature - Upper Range Limit Alarm

# 1n90 Temperature - Lower Range Limit Alarm
1n91 Temperature RTD Disconnected Flag
1n92 Sensor Temperature - Upper Limit Alarm

1n93 Sensor Temperature - Lower Limit Alarm
1n94 Critical Failure of Sensor Electronics
Note: See 2n00 area for
even more meter run alarms
1n95 Write Protect Enabled Flag
and status points.
1n96 Communication Failure Alarm
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-5

1n97 Spare
INFO - Boolean data is to
1n99 Spare
05 for single point writes and
1500 Spare
reading.
2.3.6. User Scratch Pad Boolean Points

There are two groups of user scratchpad flags which can be used to store the
results of Boolean statements or to group data to be transmitted or received
over a Modbus data link.
1501 Scratchpad - Point 01

to
1649 Scratchpad - Point 149
2.3.7. User Scratch Pad One-Shot Boolean Points

Many times it is necessary to send a command which momentarily turns on a
Boolean point. The following one-shot Boolean points simplify this action. They
remain activated for exactly 2 seconds after they have been written to.
1650 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 01

to
1699 Scratchpad One-Shot - Point 50
2-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

2.3.8. Command Boolean Points/Variables

Application Revision To activate a command simply write a '1' (1 = True) to that point. It is not
21/25.72+ - This database necessary to write a '0' (0 = False) after the command. The status of a
command may also be read or used as input in a Boolean or variable
Orifice/Differential Pressure statement.
Systems.
1700 Dummy
Used only to reserve a digital I/O point to be used as an input. Point 1700 can be
INFO - Unless indicated as assigned to as many I/O points as needed.
being ‘Level Sensitive’, most
commands are 'edge
triggered'. 1701 Spare
Hardware Interaction - 1702 End Batch - Station

Unreliable operation will End batch on all meter runs defined in station. It is only used with common batch stack.
result if a command which 1703 End Batch - Meter #1
has been assigned to a Points 1703-1706 individual end batch commands always work.
digital I/O point directly also
needs to be activated via a 1704 End Batch - Meter #2
Modbus write. This is 1705 End Batch - Meter #3
because the On/Off state of
the digital I/O point overwrites 1706 End Batch - Meter #4
the command point every 100
msec and most command
point actions are only
triggered every 500 msec. 1707 Station - ‘Change Product’ Strobe
Rising edge triggers batch end and change to product selected by 1743-1746.
INFO- Notice that all write

commands have indexes /
point addresses with a ‘7’ in 1708 Spare
rd
the 3 digit from the right.
to
1711 Spare
1712 Station Alarm Acknowledge

Acknowledges all flow computer alarms.
1713 Reset Power Failed Flag
See power fail Flag 1829.
1714 Spare
to
1718 Spare
1719 Request Local Snapshot Report

Printed on local printer connected to flow computer.
1720 Snapshot Report to Modbus Buffer
Move Snapshot Report to buffer located at 9402.
1721 Alarm Report to Modbus Buffer
Move Alarm Report to buffer located at 9402.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-7

# 1722 1st PID Permissive - Loop #1

Points 1722-1725 enable PID startup and shutdown ramping for the respective meter
INFO - Unless indicated as
(see 1752-1755). Level sensitive.
commands are 'edge # 1723 1st PID Permissive - Loop #2
triggered'. To activate a
# 1724 1st PID Permissive - Loop #3
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is not # 1725 1st PID Permissive - Loop #4
necessary to write a '0' or
'False' after the command is
given. The status of a
command may also be read
or used as input in a Boolean
1726 Spare
or variable statement.
Note: 1727 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #1

st nd
Initiates PID start up sequence by activating 1 and 2 PID Permissive (see 1n57 for
# These points are
acknowledge pulse). These commands are edge triggered, simply turn on.
defaulted to ‘active’ and
need not be manipulated 1728 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #2
unless the application
1729 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #3
requires it.
1730 Start Ramp-up PID - Loop #4
1731 Spare
1732 Alarm Acknowledge - Meter Run #1

Points 1732-1735 are meter run specific alarms only.
Note: * 1736 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #1

* These points also affect * 1737 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #2
station totalizing (see also
point 1761). Level
* 1738 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #3
sensitive. * 1739 Disable Flow Totalizing - Meter Run #4
1740 Spare
1741 Remote Up Arrow Key

Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1742 Remote Down Arrow Key
Duplicates the keypad function. Level sensitive.
1743 Product Select - Bit 0

Points 1743-1746 represent the product number to change to as offset binary; i.e., 0000 =
product #1. 1111=product #16 (see 1707, 1747-1750).
2-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1747 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #1

For points 1747-1750, rising edge triggers a batch end and a change to the product
specified by points 1743-1746.
21/25.72+ - This database
corresponds to Application 1748 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #2
1749 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #3
Liquid Flow Metering 1750 ‘Change Product’ Strobe - Meter #4
Systems.
1751 Freeze Analog Inputs

Used when calibrating analog inputs. Freezes ALL analogs. Level sensitive.
1752 2nd PID Permissive - Meter #1

Points 1752-1755 limit the PID ramp-down to the minimum output % setting (see 1722-
1725). Level sensitive.
1756 Orifice Plate Change - Meter #1

Points 1756-1759 freeze all flow rates for the meter while changing orifice plates. Level
sensitive.
1760 Leak Detection Freeze Command

Stores totalizers, temperatures, pressures and density variables to temporary storage (see
5n66 and 7634). This command is usually broadcast to all flow computers
simultaneously.
1761 Disable Flow Totalizing Station
This command has no effect on individual meter run totalizing (see also points 1736-
1739). Level sensitive.
1762 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #1

At local printer.
to
1769 Remote Print - Previous Batch Report #8
INFO- Notice that all write 1770 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #1
commands have indexes / At local printer.
point addresses with a ‘7’ in
rd to
1777 Remote Print - Previous Daily Report #8
Note: More ‘Command 1778 Spare

Boolean Points’ are located
to
at address 2701.
1785 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-9

1786 Remote Print - Alarm Report

At local printer.
INFO - Unless indicated as
commands are 'edge
1787 Spare
triggered'. To activate a
command simply write a '1'
or 'True' to that point. It is not
necessary to write a '0' or
1788 Shutdown PID - Loop #1
st
Points 1788-1791 start ramp-down to ‘top off’ valve setting by deactivating the 1 PID
'False' after the command is
permissive. These commands are edge triggered; simply turn on.
given. The status of a
command may also be read 1789 Shutdown PID - Loop #2
or used as input in a Boolean
or variable statement.
1792 Stop Flow PID - Loop #1
st nd
Points 1792-1795 deactivate the 1 and 2 PID permissive, causing the valve to ramp to
the ‘top off’ setting, and then immediately closes the valve. If the valve is already at the
‘top off’ setting, the valve immediately closes.
‹ CAUTION ‹ ‹ 1796 Raw Data Archive ‘Run’

Level sensitive.
Stored archive data may be
lost! See chapter on ‘Raw
Data Archive’ before ‹ 1797 Reconfigure Archive
Level sensitive.
manipulating these data
points. These functions are
duplicated using integers at
13920 and 13921.
1798 Spare
to
1800 Spare
2.3.9. Meter Station Alarm and Status Points

INFO - Boolean data is Data points not specifically connected to a particular meter run are grouped
accessed using Modbus here. These include flow computer general system alarms and metering group
alarms and status points.
points to a byte when * 1801 Positive - Gross Pulses
reading. * 1802 Positive - Net Pulses
* 1803 Positive - Mass Pulses
* 1804 Positive - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Pulses
Note:
* Used to assign * 1805 Negative - Gross Pulses
accumulators to the front Points 1805-1808 are used to output pulses when station flow rate is negative. Negative
panel electromechanical flow rate is usually the result of a station definition such as, for example, ‘1-2’, where
counters and digital I/O Meter #2 flow exceeds Meter #1 flow.
points.
* 1806 Negative - Net Pulses
* 1807 Negative - Mass Pulses
1808 Negative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Pulses
2-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1809 Mass Flow Rate - Low Low Alarm

Application Revision 1810 Mass Flow Rate - Low Alarm
1811 Mass Flow Rate - High Alarm
Revision 21/25.72+ for 1812 Mass Flow Rate - High High Alarm
Systems. 1813 Gravity Rate of Change Flag
Product interface detected by station densitometer. Set when rate of change of flowing
SG exceeds the setting in 7889.
Alarms - All alarms indicated 1814 Delayed Gravity Rate of Change
the current alarm condition at Point 1813 delayed by volume specified in 7890.
the time they are reset.
1815 Any System Alarm

Includes acknowledged alarms also.
1816 Any New System Alarm
Does not include acknowledged alarms.
1817 Batch End Acknowledge

Toggle state at batch end (see 1835).
1818 Batch Preset Warning Flag

Station batch total is within ‘X’ volume or mass units of the batch preset (‘X’ is stored at
5815).
1819 Batch Preset Reached Flag
Station batch total equal or exceeds the batch preset
1820 Station - Current Product ID Bit 0

Points 1820-1823 are read only. These are the offset binary representation of the current
running product for the station (0000=Product #1; 1111=Product #16).
Note: These are not command inputs (see points 1742-1746).
1824 Run Switching - Threshold Flag 1

Flags 1824-1826 activate/deactivate depending on the run switching threshold settings
and are based on current station flow rates (see points 7855-7860).
1827 Leak Detection Freeze Command was received

See point 1760.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-11

# 1828 Day Start Flag

True at specified day start hour (e.g.: 07:00:00).
INFO - Boolean data is
accessed using Modbus 1829 Power Fail Flag
function codes 01 for reads, True on power up after a power failure (see 1713 for reset).
1830 Print Buffer Full Flag
Reports may be lost if 32K spooling buffer overflows due to the printer being ‘off-line’ or
jammed with paper.
reading. # 1831 Hour Start Flag
# 1832 Week Start Flag
True at specified ‘day start’ hour Monday.
Notes:
# 1833 Month Start Flag
~ The system limits the
True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st day of month.
maximum number of
statement evaluations to # 1834 Year Start Flag
100 to protect against True at specified ‘day start’ hour on 1st January.
possible lockups due to
# 1835 Batch End Acknowledge
recursive loops. Any
Pulses at batch end (see 1817).
additional statement
evaluations are ignored. # 1836 Snapshot Printed
# These points pulse high Indicates local snapshot report printed.
for one 500 msec cycle 1837 EPROM Error Flag
time. Invalid checksum detected in EPROM memory.
1838 Peer-to-Peer Master Flag

Momentarily true when this computer is peer-to-peer master.
1839 Spare
~ 1840 Boolean Statement Alarm

Tried to execute more than 100 Boolean statements.
~ 1841 Variable Statement Alarm
Tried to execute more than 100 variable statements.
1842 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #1 - Communication Error

Points 1842-1857 refer to an error occurred while communicating with the slave in the
appropriate transaction. If a slave is involved in multiple transactions which fail, only the
first will be flagged.
to
1857 Peer-to-Peer - Transaction #16 - Communication Error
# 1858 Calendar Day Start Flag

True at: 00:00:00.
# 1859 Calendar Week Start Flag
True at: 00:00:00 Monday.
# 1860 Calendar Month Start Flag
True at: 00:00:00 1st day of month.
# 1861 Calendar Year Start Flag
st
True at: 00:00:00 Jan 1 .
1862 Station Density - Transducer Failed Low

1863 Station Density - Low Alarm
1864 Station Density - High Alarm
1865 Station Density - Transducer Failed High
2-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

1866 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed Low

Application Revision to
1869 Density Temperature - Transducer Failed High
Orifice/Differential Pressure 1870 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed Low
to
Systems.
1873 Density Pressure - Transducer Failed High
Note:
1874 Spare
* These flags are usually
used to conditionally print
appropriate information * 1875 Net Standard Volumes (NSV) Appearing on Report Flag
messages on the batch
and daily reports.
1876 Spare
1877 Spare
* 1878 Previous Batch - Station Alarm Flag

Set if any station alarm during the previous batch.
* 1879 Previous Batch - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag
Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous batch.
* 1880 Previous Day’s - Station Totalizer Roll-over Flag
Set if any station totalizer rolled during the previous day.
1881 Spare
1882 Spare
1883 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed Low

1884 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low Alarm
1885 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Alarm
1886 Auxiliary Input #1 - Transducer Failed High

to

to

to
Note: See 2600 area and

2800 area for more station
1899 Spare
to
2000 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-13

2.3.10. Meter Totalizer Roll-over Flags

Application Revision The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
21/25.72+ - This database (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has
Orifice/Differential Pressure rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report
Liquid Flow Metering Template’ will show how this is accomplished. The second digit of the index
Systems. number defines the number of the meter run. See also points at 2801 for station
versions of these flags.
Note: The ‘In Progress’ flags
are those which the flow
computer uses when printing 2n01 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
the reports on the connected 2n02 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
printer.
2n03 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the
report is being printed by 2n04 Batch In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
another device such as a
SCADA or MMI. This is
necessary because the flow 2n05 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
computer clears the ‘In
Progress’ data immediately
2n06 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
after it prints the local report. 2n07 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n08 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Rollover Flag
2n09 Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n10 Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n11 Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n12 Today’s In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover
Flag
2n13 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n14 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n15 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n16 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV)
Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n17 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n18 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n19 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n20 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n21 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n22 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n23 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n24 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Rollover Flag
2n25 Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2n26 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n27 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n28 Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
2n29 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

INFO - Boolean data is 2n30 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2n31 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
05 for single point writes and 2n32 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
15 for multiple bit writes. Rollover Flag
reading. 2n33 Spare
to
Note: See 1800 area and 2n36 Spare
2800 area for more station
2.3.11. Miscellaneous Meter Run Status Points
2n37 Product in Use - Binary Coded Decimal Bit 0

Points 2n37-2n40 are information only, read only, not commands (see 1743-1746).
2n41 Meter Hourly Archive Trigger Flag

This flag is set high by the archive trigger commands (points 2733-2736).
2.3.12. Miscellaneous Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable

Transmitter Alarm and Status Points
2n42 Differential Pressure - Invalid Status

Value is outside of acceptable limits.
Notes: * 2n43 Differential Pressure - Input/Output Mode Status
* These are critical alarms * 2n44 Differential Pressure - Signal Alarm
that adversely affect the
reliability of measurement.
These alarms cause the 2n45 Pressure - Invalid Status
flow computer to examine
the override code strategy
* 2n46 Pressure - Input/Output Mode Status
and apply an override, if * 2n47 Pressure - Signal Alarm
so configured.
2n48 Temperature - Invalid Status

* 2n49 Temperature - Input/Output Mode Status
* 2n50 Temperature - Signal Alarm
2n51 Body Sensor Fault - Over Temperature Alarm
* 2n52 Critical Failure of SMV Electronics
* 2n53 Communication Failure Alarm
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-15

2n54 Spare
2n99 Spare
Systems. 2500 Spare
to
2600 Spare
2.3.13. Miscellaneous Meter Station Alarm and Status

Points
2601 Override in Use - Auxiliary Input #1

2605 Spare
to
2608 Spare
2620 Calibration Data Checksum Error

Correctable as secondary copy was OK.
2621 System Initialized Flag
True after power up or system reset, clears when reset power fail command is set (1713).
2622 Day Light Savings Time
‘On’ means that spring adjustment was made. ‘Off’ means autumn adjustment was made.
2623 Archive Memory Alarm

0=Ok; 1=Fail.
2624 Spare
to
2700 Spare
2-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
2.3.14. Commands Which Cause Custom Data Packets

to be Transmitted Without a Poll
INFO - Boolean data is Activating any of the ‘edge triggered’ command points below causes the
accessed using Modbus appropriate ‘Custom Data Packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serial
port without the serial port being polled for data. This function can be useful
15 for multiple bit writes. when communicating via VSAT satellite systems where operating cost is
Boolean data is packed 8 directly proportional to RF bandwidth used.
reading.
2701 Data Packet #1 to Serial Port #1
INFO - To differentiate 2702 Data Packet #2 to Serial Port #1
between normal message
responses and unsolicited
transmissions, Modbus
function code 67 appears in
the transmitted message
rather than function code 03. 2705 Data Packet #2 to Serial Port #2
Note: Notice that all write
commands have indexes /
rd
the 3 digit from the right. 2708 Data Packet #2 to Serial Port #3

2.3.15. Commands Needed To Accomplish a Redundant

Flow Computer System
Accomplishing a redundant flow computer system requires two identically
configured flow computers to share input and output signals. In addition four
digital I/O points are cross connected to enable each flow computer to monitor
the other.
2713 Others - Watchdog Status

Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers watchdog (see 2863).
2714 Others - Master Status
Assigned to a digital I/O point monitoring other flow computers master status
(see 2864).
2715 Assume Master Status Command
Set to take mastership. Edge triggered.
2716 Assume Slave Status Command
Set to relinquish mastership. Edge triggered.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-17

2.3.16. Boolean Status Points Used for Meter Tube

Switching
Application Revision Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
21/25.72+ - This database switching function. The command input points below are used to interface to
motor-operated valve (MOV) limit switch signals and allow the user to take an
Orifice/Differential Pressure MOV ‘out of service’. See 2877 to 2896 for points needed to send MOV open
Liquid Flow Metering and close commands.
Systems.
2717 Meter #1- MOV - Open Status

INFO - To differentiate
Must be activated when the MOV is fully open.
between normal message
responses and unsolicited 2718 Meter #1 - MOV - Closed Status
transmissions, Modbus Must be activated when the MOV is fully closed.
function code 67 appears in
the transmitted message
2719 Meter #1 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Command / Status
rather than function code 03. Read/Write point used to remove an MOV from service. The flow computer also controls
this point. Level sensitive.
2720 Meter #2 - MOV - Open Status

2721 Meter #2 - MOV - Closed Status
2722 Meter #2 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status
How the MOV Limit 2723 Meter #3 - MOV - Open Status

Switches are Interpreted -
2717=On 2718=Off Open
2717=Off 2718=On Closed 2725 Meter #3 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status
2717=Off 2718=Off Travel
2717=On 2718=On Illegal
2726 Meter #4 - MOV - Open Status
2728 Meter #4 - MOV - ‘In Service’ Status
2729 Spare
to
2732 Spare
2.3.17. Archive Trigger Commands
2733 Archive Trigger Command - Meter #1

Points 2733-2736 are set high to start archive. The archive trigger commands will trigger
Point 2n41 ‘Meter Hourly Archive Flag’.
2737 Spare
to
2800 Spare
2-18 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
2.3.18. Station Totalizer Roll-over Flags

INFO - Boolean data is The following Boolean points are flags indicating that a totalizer has rolled-over
accessed using Modbus (i.e., reached maximum count and restarted from zero). These flags are used to
conditionally print characters (usually ‘**’) in front of the totalizer which has
15 for multiple bit writes. rolled on the appropriate report. Examination of an Omni ‘Custom Report
Boolean data is packed 8 Template’ will show how this is accomplished. See also points at 2n01 for meter
points to a byte when run versions of flags.
reading.
2801 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

Note: Notice that all write
commands have indexes / 2802 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
rd 2803 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2804 Batch In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover
Flag
INFO - Remember that the
station is defined as a group
of individual meter runs. 2805 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
2806 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
In Progress Flags - The ‘In 2807 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
Progress’ flags are the flags 2808 Batch In Progress - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
that the flow computer uses
when printing the reports on
Rollover Flag
the connected printer.
Use the ‘Previous’ flags if the 2809 Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag
report is being printed by
another device such as an 2810 Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
SCADA or MMI. This is 2811 Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
necessary because the flow
computer clears the ‘In 2812 Today’s In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover
Progress’ data immediately Flag
after it prints the local report.
2813 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2814 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2815 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2816 Today’s In Progress - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV)
Totalizer Rollover Flag
2817 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2818 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2819 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2820 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
2821 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2822 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2823 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2824 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Rollover Flag
2825 Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

2826 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2827 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
2828 Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer Rollover Flag
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-19

2829 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Gross Totalizer Rollover Flag

Application Revision 2830 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Net Totalizer Rollover Flag
2831 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Mass Totalizer Rollover Flag
Revision 21/25.72+ for 2832 Previous Day’s - Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Orifice/Differential Pressure Rollover Flag
Systems.
2833 Spare
to
2851 Spare
2.3.19. Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

INFO - Remember that the All totalizers within the flow computer are ‘long integer types’. This data type
station is defined as a group uses an ‘implied’ decimal position. The computer uses these flags internally to
of individual meter runs.
determine how to format all totalizers of the same type for printing purposes.
2852 Batch Report - Print 4 Decimal Places for Correction Factors

Note: It is unlikely that the 2855 Spare

user would have any use for
to
these variables.
2857 Spare
2858 Print 0 Decimal Place for Gross & Net Totalizer

2859 Print 1 Decimal Place for Gross & Net Totalizer
2860 Print 2 Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer
2861 Print 3 Decimal Places for Gross & Net Totalizer
2862 Spare
2.3.20. Status Booleans Relating to Redundant Flow

Computer Systems
2863 Watchdog Status Out

Normally high watchdog. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system (see
2713).
2864 Master Status
Indicates mastership. Monitored by other flow computer in a redundant system
(see 2714).
2-20 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
2.3.21. More Station Totalizer Decimal Resolution Flags

INFO - Boolean data is
2865 Print 0 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer
05 for single point writes and 2866 Print 1 Decimal Place for Mass Totalizer
2867 Print 2 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
points to a byte when 2868 Print 3 Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
reading.
2869 Spare
to
2876 Spare
2.3.22. Boolean Command Outputs and Status Points

Used For Meter Tube Switching
MOV Alarms: Any MOV Status inputs and outputs are required to achieve the automatic meter tube
alarm will cause the flow switching function. The command output points below are used to open and
computer to take the MOV
out of service (see 2719) and
close the motor-operated valve (MOV). Alarm points are also provided which
send a close MOV indicate MOV problems. See 2717 for points needed to interface to the MOV
command. limit switches.
2877 Meter #1 - Open MOV - Command Out

Activates to open MOV.
2878 Meter #1 - Close MOV - Command Out
Activates to close MOV.
2879 Meter #1 - MOV - Alarm Out
MOV limit switches are indicating an illegal valve position.
2880 Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Opening MOV
MOV took too long opening.
2881 Meter #1 - Time-out Alarm - Closing MOV
MOV took too long closing.

to

to

to
2897 Spare
to
3000 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 2-21

3. 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)
3.1. Custom Data Packet Definition Variables

corresponds to Application 3.1.1. Custom Data Packet #1
Orifice/Differential Pressure The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Liquid Flow Metering Custom Data Packet #1 which is accessed at database Index 0001 are listed
Systems. below.
INFO - These short integers 3001 Group 1 - Starting Index Point Number
are accessed using Modbus
function code 03 for reads, 3002 Group 1 - Number of Index Points
06 for single writes and 16 to
for multiple register writes.
3039 Group 20 - Starting Index Point Number
3040 Group 20 - Number of Index Points
INFO – These data packets
may be transmitted
automatically without being
polled or requested (see
points 2701-2712). 3.1.2. Custom Data Packet #2
The 16-bit integers needed to define the 8 groups of data that make up Custom
Data Packet #2 which is accessed at database Index 0201 are listed below.

to
3.1.3. Custom Data Packet #3

The 16-bit integers needed to define the 20 groups of data that make up
Custom Data Packet #3 which is accessed at database Index 0401 are listed
below.

to
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-1

Chapter 3 16-Bit Integer Data (3001 - 3999)
3.2. Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3097 Spare
3098 Number of Totalizer Digits
Totalizers roll at: 0=9 digits; 1=8 digits.
Systems.
3099 Select Batch Preset Unit

0=Net; 1=Gross; 2=Mass.
3100 Spare
3.3. Meter Run 16-Bit Integer Data

The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
example: 3101 is the ‘Temperature Override Code' for Meter Run # 1. The
same point for Meter Run # 4 would be 3401.
3n01 Override Code - Temperature

For points 3n01-3n05: 0=Never use; 1=Always use; 2=Use if transmitter fails; 3=If
transmitter fails use last hours average.
3n02 Override Code - Pressure
3n03 Override Code - Gravity/Density
3n04 Override Code - Density Temperature
3n05 Override Code - Density Pressure
3n06 Spare
3n07 Spare
3n08 Transmitter Device Type Select

0=Differential Pressure Sensor; 1=Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Transmitter;
2=Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitter
3n09 Override Code - Differential Pressure

3n10 Static Pressure - Location Select
0=Upstream; 1=Downstream.
3n11 Spare
3n12 Orifice Taps

For Revision 21 (US units): 0=Flange Taps; 1=Pipe Taps.
For Revision 25 (metric units): 0=Corner Taps; 1=D & D/2 Taps; 2=Flange Taps;
3=ISA 1932 Nozzle; 4=Long Radius Nozzle; 5=Venturi C=0.984; 6=Venturi C=0.995;
7=Venturi C=o.985; 8=Venturi Nozzle.
3n13 Spare
to
3n15 Spare
3-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3n16 BS&W Source

0=None; 1=Auxiliary Input #1; 2=Auxiliary Input #2; 3=Auxiliary Input #3; 4=Auxiliary Input
INFO - These short integers
#4; 5=Modbus.
function code 03 for reads, 3n17 Hour in Progress - Flow Time
06 for single writes and 16 500msec ticks (0-7200).
3n18 Last Hour’s - Flow Time
500msec ticks (0-7200).
3n19 PID Control Mode
Do not write if 3n20 is ‘1’. 1=Manual; 0=Auto.
3n20 Setpoint Mode
Read only. DO NOT WRITE! 1=Local; 0=Remote.
3n21 PID Loop Status
Read only. 1=Secondary; 0=Primary.
3n22 Spare
to
3n35 Spare
3n36 Today’s Flow - Hours

3n37 Today’s Flow - Minutes
3n38 Previous Day’s Flow - Hours
3n39 Previous Day’s Flow - Minutes
# 3n40 Current Net Flow Rate

Notes: * 3n41 Net Totalizer
# 2s complement numbers # 3n42 Current Gross Flow Rate
based on span entries
17176 through 17189. * 3n43 Gross Totalizer
Values expressed as # 3n44 Current Mass Flow Rate
percentages of span in
tenth percent increments;. * 3n45 Mass Totalizer
i.e., 1000 represents ~ 3n46 Current Meter Run Pressure
100.0%
~ 3n47 Current Meter Run Temperature
* Unsigned integer
totalizers cumulative ~ 3n48 Current Transducer Density/Gravity
based. They roll at 65536. # 3n49 Current Net Standard Volume (NSV) Flow Rate
~ 2s complement numbers
* 3n50 Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
based on the 4-20 mA
spans. Values are
expressed as percentages
3n51 Spare
of span in tenth percent
increments; i.e., 1000 3n52 Spare
equals 100.0 %.
3n53 Multivariable Serial Port Selection

3n54 Multivariable Address
3n55 Spare
to
3n99 Spare
3500 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-3

3.4. Scratchpad 16-Bit Integer Data

Application Revision Ninety-nine integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These registers
21/25.72+ - This database are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer
operations or similar operations.
Systems. 3501 Scratchpad - Short Integer #1
to
3599 Scratchpad - Short Integer #99
3600 Spare
3.5. User Display Definition Variables

The 16-bit integers needed to define the variables that appear in the eight User
Displays are listed below. Look in the 4601 area for string associated with
setting up User Displays.
3.5.1. User Display Number 1

3601 Database Index Number of 1st Variable
3602 Decimal Places for 1st Variable
3603 Database Index Number of 2nd Variable
3604 Decimal Places for 2nd Variable
3605 Database Index Number of 3rd Variable
3606 Decimal Places for 3rd Variable
3607 Database Index Number of 4th Variable
3608 Decimal Places for 4th Variable

th
3616 Decimal Places for 4 Variable
3-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99


INFO - These short integers 3617 Database Index Number of 1st Variable
function code 03 for reads,
06 for single writes and 16 3619 Database Index Number of 2nd Variable



th
3648 Decimal Places for 4 Variable
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-5


INFO - These short integers 3649 Database Index Number of 1st Variable
06 for single writes and 16 3651 Database Index Number of 2nd Variable

3665 Spare
to
3700 Spare
3-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.6. Data Used to Access the Raw Data

Archive Records
Application Revision See the chapter describing how to use the raw data archiving features of the
21/25.72+ - This database flow computer including how to manipulate the ‘pointers’ below.
Liquid Flow Metering 3701 Archive 701 - Maximum Records
Systems. Number of data records in archive file.
3702 Archive 701 - Current Record Number
Number of the last record updated.
3703 Archive 701 - Request Record Number
Write the number of the record you wish to read.
3704 Archive 702 - Maximum Records

Number of data records in archive file.




21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-7


are accessed using Modbus 3720 Archive 707 - Current Record Number
function code 03 for reads, Number of the last record updated.
06 for single writes and 16





3-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

3.7. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data

3737 Archive File System - Memory Allocation Status
0=OK; 1=Allocation Error.
Systems.
3738 Time Tag
MM/DD or DD/MM format.
3739 Time Tag
YY/HH format
3740 Time Tag
MM/SS format.
3741 New Archive Added Flags
A non-zero value indicates that a new record has been added; the user must clear after
read. Bit 0 to Bit 9 for files 701 to 710.
3742 Spare
to
3750 Spare
3751 Run Switching in Auto Mode

0=No; 1=Yes.
3752 Run Switching Timer
Seconds allowed for flow to settle during MOV operations.
3753 Honeywell Multivariable Sensor #1 – Detailed Status Bytes 1 & 2


to

to

to
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-9

3769 Number of Historical Alarms to Modbus Buffer

Used by OmniCom when reading the Historical Alarm Report. OmniCom first writes to
this variable the number of historical alarm events to be included on the report.
3770 Spare
Liquid Flow Metering to
Systems.
3799 Spare
Notes:
~ To avoid flushing the audit
trail, audit events other
than complete ‘downloads’
3.8. Meter Station 16-Bit Integer Data
to the flow computer are
usually not documented in
the ‘audit trail’ unless ~ 3800 Special Diagnostic Function
serial port passwords Used to enable rigorous ‘Audit Trail’ reporting of all serial port transactions (see side bar
have been enabled. If note).
pass-words are enabled,
the target address is
recorded for single point 3801 Running Product Number
writes. Rigorous auditing Common Batch Stack - Station.
of a serial port or group of # 3802 Current Net Flow Rate
serial ports can be
activated by placing the * 3803 Net Totalizer
appropriate hexadecimal # 3804 Current Gross Flow Rate
code in 3800 (S = Serial
Port): * 3805 Gross Totalizer
000A = Audit S1 # 3806 Current Mass Flow Rate
00A0 = Audit S2
* 3807 Mass Totalizer
0A00 = Audit S3
A000 = Audit S4 # 3808 Current Pressure
To monitor multiple ports; # 3809 Current Temperature
e.g.: # 3810 Current Gravity/Density
A0A0 = Audit S4 & S2
3811 Allen Bradley - CRC Error Counter
# 2s complement numbers
based on span entries 3812 Allen Bradley - Message ‘Type’ Error Counter
17176 through 17189.
Values expressed as
percentages of span in 3813 Algorithm Select - Product #1
tenth percent increments; Points 3813-3828 select the API, ASTM, NIST calculations that will be used when
i.e., 1000 represents selecting these products.
100.0% . No over range or 3814 Algorithm Select - Product #2
under range checking is
done. 3815 Algorithm Select - Product #3
* Unsigned integer 3816 Algorithm Select - Product #4
totalizers cumulative
based. They roll at 65536. 3817 Algorithm Select - Product #5
3818 Algorithm Select - Product #6
3-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
3829 Flow Average Factor

Number of 500 msec calculation cycles to average.
3830 Print Priority
0=Not sharing a printer; 1=Master; n=slaves 2-12.
3831 Number of Nulls after Carriage Return
Used to slow data to a printer if no hardware handshake.
3832 Print Interval in Minutes
Time interval between automatic snapshot reports.
3833 Automatic - Weekly Batch Select

0=None; 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3834 Automatic - Monthly Batch Select
st
0=None; 1=1 day of the month.
3835 Automatic - Hourly Batch Select
0=No; 1=Yes.
3836 Default Report Templates

0=Custom templates; 1=Default reports.
3837 Batch Stack Mode Select

0=Independent stacks; 1=Common stack.
3838 Clear Daily @ Batch End Select
0=24hr Totals; 1=Cleared at batch end.
3839 Spare
to
3841 Spare
3842 Select Date Type

Selects date format: 0=dd/mm/yy; 1=mm/dd/yy.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-11

3.9. Batch Stack Storage of Product

Numbers to Run
Application Revision The following 24 registers are treated as either one 24-position shift stack or, 4
21/25.72+ - This database separate 6-position shift stacks depending upon register 3837. Data in the
stack(s) is shifted automatically at the beginning of a new batch. A new
Orifice/Differential Pressure batch starts after a either a ‘station batch end’ (1702) or ‘meter batch end’ (1703
Liquid Flow Metering to 1706) command is received and meter pulses occur. Data on the top of a
Systems. stack is the ‘current running product’ for the batch in progress. This entry is
discarded (popped off) and replaced with the entry below on receipt of a ‘batch
end’. A ‘batch stack may be stopped from shifting by leaving the second entry
‘0’. Note that these entries are only part of the ‘batch stack’. Matching entries for
other data types such as long integers and strings can be found at 5819 and
4852. All three ‘data type’ stacks act as a single unit, they all synchronize and
shift together.
3.9.1. Meter #1 Batch Sequence
3843 Sequence #1 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -

Sequence #1
Sequence #2
Sequence #3
Sequence #4
Sequence #5
Sequence #6

Sequence #7
Sequence #8
Sequence #9
Sequence #10
Sequence #11
Sequence #12
3-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

06 for single writes and 16 Sequence #13
for multiple register writes. 3856 Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -
Sequence #14
Sequence #15
Sequence #16
Sequence #17
Sequence #18

Sequence #19
Product #20
Sequence #21
Sequence #22
Sequence #23
Sequence #24
21/25.72+ w 05/99 3-13

3.10. Flow Computer Time and Date Variables

Application Revision Time and date can be read and written here. See also 4847 and 4848.
3867 Current - Hour
0-23.
Systems. 3868 Current - Minute
0-59.
3869 Current - Second
0-59.
3870 Current - Month
1-12.
3871 Current - Day of Month
1-31.
3872 Current - Year
0-99; Year 2000=00.
3873 Current - Day of Week
Read only. 1=Monday; 7=Sunday.
3874 Disable Daily Report
0=print daily report; 1=no daily report.
3875 Number of Days since Beginning of Year
3.11. More Miscellaneous 16-Bit Integer Data
3876 Override Code - Density

3877 Override Code - Density Temperature
3878 Override Code - Density Pressure
3879 Spare
3880 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #1

to
3895 Density Factor - Select A/B - Product #16
3896 Spare
to
4000 Spare
3-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

4. 8-Character ASCII String Data

(4001 - 4999)
4.1. Meter Run ASCII String Data

INFO - These ASCII string The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
variables are accessed using example: 4114 is the 'Meter ID' for Meter Run #1. The same point for Meter
Modbus function codes 03
for all reads and 16 for all
Run #4 would be 4414. Each ASCII string is 8 characters occupying the
writes. equivalent of 4 short integer registers (see the side bar comments).
Note: The index number of 4n01 Running Batch - Start Date

each string refers to the
complete string which
4n02 Running Batch - Start Time
occupies the space of 4 # 4n03 Batch End - Date
registers. It must be
accessed as a complete unit.
# 4n04 Batch End - Time
You cannot read or write a 4n05 Running Product Name
partial string. Each point
counts as one point in the
4n06 Current - Calculation Mode
normal Omni Modbus mode. Algorithm set used, in string format.
4n07 Current - Batch ID
Characters 1-8.
Modiconä Compatible 4n08 Current - Batch ID
Mode - For the purpose of
Characters 9-16.
point count only, each string
counts as 4 registers. The
starting address of the string
still applies.
4n09 Spare
to
Note:
4n13 Spare
# Last batch end for this
meter run.
4n14 Meter - ID
4n15 Flow Meter Tag / Low Range Tag - Differential Pressure

4n16 Differential Pressure - High Range Tag
4n17 Transmitter Tag - Temperature

4n18 Transmitter Tag - Pressure
4n19 Transmitter Tag - Densitometer
4n20 Transmitter Tag - Density Temperature
4n21 Transmitter Tag - Density Pressure
4n22 Output Tag - PID Control
21/25.72+ w 05/99 4-1

Chapter 4 8-Character ASCII String Data (4001 - 4999)
4n23 Spare
4n99 Spare
4500 Spare
Systems.
4.2. Scratch Pad ASCII String Data

Storage for ninety-nine ASCII strings is provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store and group data that will be moved via peer-
to-peer operations or similar operations.
4501 Scratchpad - ASCII String #1

to
4599 Scratchpad - ASCII String #99
4.3. User Display Definition String Variables

The string variables which define the descriptor tags that appear in the eight
User Displays and the key press combinations which recall the displays are
listed below.
INFO - See 3601 area for
more data points needed to
4601 User Display #1 - Descriptor Tag - Line #1
setup the user displays.

to
4633 User Display #1 - Key Press Sequence

to
4640 User Display #8 - Key Press Sequence
4641 Spare
to
4706 Spare
4-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

4.4. String Variables Associated with the

Station Auxiliary Inputs
INFO - These ASCII string
variables are accessed using
4707 Auxiliary Tag - Input #1
for all reads and 16 for all to
writes.
4710 Auxiliary Tag - Input #4
Note: The index number of

each string refers to the
complete string which 4711 Spare
occupies the space of 4 to
accessed as a complete unit. 4800 Spare
You cannot read or write a
normal Omni Modbus mode.
4.5. Meter Station 8-Character ASCII String
Modiconä Compatible Data
starting address of the string 4801 Station - Batch Start Date
still applies. 4802 Station - Batch Start Time
4803 Station - Batch End Date
4804 Station - Batch End Time
4805 Station - Running Product Name
4806 Station - Current Calculation Mode
4807 Date of Last Database Change

Updated each time the Audit Trail is updated.
4808 Time of Last Database Change
4809 Reserved
4810 Esc Sequence to Print Condensed

Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14149 for Hex ASCII setup).
4811 Esc Sequence to Print Normal
Raw ASCII characters sent to printer (see 14150 for Hex ASCII setup).
4812 Daylight Savings Starts

Date format field (**/**/**).
4813 Daylight Savings Ends
Date format field (**/**/**).
4814 Density/Gravity Tag
4815 Station - ID
4816 Station – Density Temperature Tag

4817 Station – Density Pressure Tag
21/25.72+ w 05/99 4-3

4818 Print Interval Timer Start Time

Time format field (**:**:**).
21/25.72+ - This database 4819 Time to Print Daily Report
corresponds to Application Time format field (**:**:**).
Systems.
4820 Product #1 - Name
to
4835 Product #16 - Name
4836 Flow Computer ID
4837 Company Name

Characters 1-8.
4838 Company Name
Characters 9-16.
4839 Company Name
Characters 17-24.
4840 Company Name
Characters 25-32.
4841 Company Name
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
4842 Station Location

Characters 1-8.
Characters 9-16.
Characters 17-24.
Characters 25-32.
Characters 33-38. (Note: Last two characters are spares.)
Note:
* The flow computer time * 4847 Current Date
and date can be set by Point 3842 selects date format (see also 3870-3872).
writing to these ASCII
variables. Be sure to * 4848 Current Time
include the colons ( : ) in See also 3867-3869.
the time string and the 4849 Software Version Number
slashes ( / ) in the date Example: 21.72
string.
4850 Online Password / EPROM Checksum
Dual function point. Write password. Read provides EPROM Checksum.
4851 Spare
4-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
4.6. Meter Run Batch Identification Data

Modbus function codes 03 4.6.1. Meter #1 Batch ID
for all reads and 16 for all
writes.
Sequence #1
Note: The index number of
each string refers to the 4853 Batch ID
complete string which 4854 Sequence #2 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -
occupies the space of 4 Sequence #2
accessed as a complete unit. 4855 Batch ID
You cannot read or write a 4856 Sequence #3 - Individual Batch Stack or Common Batch Stack -
Sequence #3
normal Omni Modbus mode. 4857 Batch ID
Sequence #4
Modiconä Compatible
Mode - For the purpose of 4859 Batch ID
starting address of the string Sequence #5
still applies. 4861 Batch ID
Sequence #6
4863 Batch ID
4.6.2. Meter #2 Batch ID

Sequence #7
4865 Batch ID
to
Sequence #12
4875 Batch ID

Sequence #13
4877 Batch ID
to
Sequence #18
4887 Batch ID
21/25.72+ w 05/99 4-5


Revision 21/25.72+ for Sequence #19
Orifice/Differential Pressure 4889 Batch ID
Systems. to
Sequence #24
4899 Batch ID
4900 Spare
to
5000 Spare
4-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

5. 32-Bit Integer Data (5001 - 6999)
INFO - These 32-bit long 5001 Spare

integer variables are
to
function code 03 for reads, 5100 Spare
for multiple writes. Note that
the index number for each
variable refers to one
complete long integer which
occupies the space of two 5.1. Meter Run 32-Bit Integer Data
16-bit registers. It must be
accessed as a complete unit. The second digit of the index number defines the number of the meter run. For
You cannot read or write a example: 5105 is the 'Cumulative Gross Totalizer' for Meter Run # 1. The same
partial 32-bit integer. Each point for Meter Run # 4 would be 5405.
32-bit long integer counts as
one point in the normal Omni
Modbus mode.
* 5n01 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5n01-5n04 represent the total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in
progress. Results are moved to 5n50 area at the end of the batch.
Mode - For the purpose of * 5n02 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer
point count only, each 32-bit
integer counts as two
* 5n03 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer
registers. The starting * 5n04 Batch In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
address of the 32-bit integer
still applies.
* 5n05 Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5n05-5n08 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
Notes: * 5n06 Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer
* The increment for all
totalizers depends upon
* 5n07 Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer
the ‘totalizer resolution’ * 5n08 Cumulative In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
settings shown in the
‘Factor Setup’ menu of
OmniCom. They can only * 5n09 Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer
be changed via the Points 5n09-5n12 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today.
keypad entries made in These are moved to the 5n54 area at the start of a new day.
the ‘Pass-word
Maintenance’ menu after * 5n10 Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer
‘Resetting all Totalizers’. * 5n11 Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer
* 5n12 Today’s In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5n13 Spare
to
5n15 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-1

Chapter 6 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data (7001- 8999)
5n16 Batch Preset Remaining

Application Revision 5n17 Running Product Number
Revision 21/25.72+ for 5n18 Spare
Systems. 5n19 In Progress - Batch Report Number
Increments each batch start.
5n20 Spare
to
5n37 Spare
Notes: # 5n38 Batch Preset Warning

# These Variables are Barrels.
stored with 4 places after
the implied decimal point.
i.e. 10000 is interpreted # 5n39 Volume Correction Factor (VCF)
as 1.0000. # 5n40 Correction Factor for Effect of Pressure on Liquid (CPL)
# 5n41 Batch – Flow/Time Weighted Average - VCF
# 5n42 Batch - Flow/Time Weighted Average - CPL
# 5n43 Today’s - Flow/Time Weighted Average - VCF
# 5n44 Today’s - Flow/Time Weighted Average - CPL
5n45 Hour In Progress - Net Total for

Points 5n45-5n48 represent the total quantities for the current hour in progress. These
will be moved to 5n75 area at the start of the new hour.
5n46 Hour In Progress - Mass Totalizer
5n47 Hour In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5n48 Hour In Progress - Gross Totalizer
5n49 Spare
5n50 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n50-5n53 represent the total batch quantities for the previous batch.
5n51 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Totalizer
5n52 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass Totalizer
5n53 Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5n54 Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n54-5n57 are the total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day
start hour’.
5n55 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer
5n56 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer
5n57 Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

5n58 Batch In Progress - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5n58-5n61 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
INFO - These 32-bit long
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
accessed using Modbus 5n59 Batch In Progress - Opening Net Totalizer
5n60 Batch In Progress - Opening Mass Totalizer
for multiple writes. Note that 5n61 Batch In Progress - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
complete long integer which 5n62 Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer
occupies the space of two Points 5n62-5n65 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
16-bit registers. It must be variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5n63 Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer
partial 32-bit integer. Each 5n64 Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer
5n65 Today’s - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Modbus mode.
5n66 Cumulative - Gross Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
Points 5n66-5n69 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
point count only, each 32-bit 5n67 Cumulative - Net Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
5n68 Cumulative - Mass Total @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
registers. The starting
address of the 32-bit integer 5n69 Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Total @ Leak Detection
still applies. Freeze Command
5n70 Increment - Gross Totalizer

Points 5n70-5n73 contains the incremental integer counts that were added to the
totalizers for this current cycle (500msec).
5n71 Increment - Net Totalizer
5n72 Increment - Mass Totalizer
5n73 Increment - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5n74 Previous Hour’s - Gross Total

Points 5n74-5n77 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
moved here from 5n44 area at the end of hour.
5n75 Previous Hour’s - Net Total
5n76 Previous Hour’s - Mass Total
5n77 Previous Hour’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Total
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-3

5n78 Previous Batch - Opening Gross

Data from 5n58 area gets moved to 5n78-5n81 at the end of each batch.
21/25.72+ - This database 5n79 Previous Batch - Opening Net
5n80 Previous Batch - Opening Mass
Orifice/Differential Pressure 5n81 Previous Batch - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV)
Systems.
5n82 Previous Day’s - Opening Gross
Data from 5n62 area gets moved to 5n82-5n85 at the end/beginning of each day.
5n83 Previous Day’s - Opening Net
5n84 Previous Day’s - Opening Mass
5n85 Previous Day’s - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV)
5n86 Spare
to
5n99 Spare
5500 Spare
5.2. Scratch Pad 32-Bit Integer Data

Ninety-nine 32-bit integer registers are provided for user scratch pad. These
registers are typically used to store the results of variable statement
calculations, to group data that will be moved via peer-to-peer operations or
similar types of operations.
5501 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #1

to
5599 Scratchpad - 32-Bit Integer #99
5600 Spare
to
5800 Spare
5-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

5.3. Station 32-Bit Integer Data

* 5801 Batch In Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5801-5804 are total batch quantities measured so far for the batch in progress.
These are moved to 5850 area at the end of the batch.
for multiple writes. Note that * 5802 Batch In Progress - Net Totalizer
* 5803 Batch In Progress - Mass Totalizer
complete long integer which * 5804 Batch In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
occupies the space of two
accessed as a complete unit. * 5805 Cumulative In Progress - Gross Totalizer
You cannot read or write a Points 5805-5808 are non-resetable totalizers which are snapshot for opening readings.
partial 32-bit integer. Each
* 5806 Cumulative In Progress - Net Totalizer
one point in the normal Omni * 5807 Cumulative In Progress - Mass Totalizer
Modbus mode.
* 5808 Cumulative In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
* 5809 Today’s In Progress - Gross Totalizer
Points 5809-5812 are total daily quantities measured since the ‘day start hour’ today.
These are moved to the 5854 area at the start of a new day.
registers. The starting * 5810 Today’s In Progress - Net Totalizer
* 5811 Today’s In Progress - Mass Totalizer
still applies.
* 5812 Today’s In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
Note:
5813 Spare
* The increment for all
the ‘totalizer resolution’
5814 Line Pack Remaining
‘Factor Setup’ menu of 5815 Batch Preset Warning
OmniCom. They can only
5816 Batch Preset Remaining
be changed via the
keypad entries made in 5817 Running Product ID
the ‘Pass-word
Maintenance’ menu after
5818 Batch Number
‘Resetting all Totalizers’.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-5

5.4. Meter Run Batch Size Data

corresponds to Application 5.4.1. Meter #1 Batch Size
Liquid Flow Metering 5819 Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #1 - Batch
Systems. Size
5820 Batch Sequence #2 - Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence
#2 - Batch Size
#3 - Batch Size
#4 - Batch Size
#5 - Batch Size
#6 - Batch Size
5.4.2. Meter #2 Batch Size
5825 Current Batch Size or Common Batch Stack Sequence #7 - Batch

Size
to
#12 - Batch Size
Size
to
#18 - Batch Size
Size
to
#24 - Batch Size
5843 Spare
5-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
5.5. Miscellaneous 32-Bit Integer Data

5844 Station - In Progress - Gross Total for Hour
Points 5844-5847 represent the total station quantities for the current hour in progress.
These will be moved to 5n74 area at the start of the new hour.
for multiple writes. Note that 5845 Station - In Progress - Net Total for Hour
5846 Station - In Progress - Mass Total for Hour
complete long integer which 5847 Station - In Progress - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Total for Hour
accessed as a complete unit. 5848 Time in hhmmss format
You cannot read or write a Read (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
partial 32-bit integer. Each
5849 Date in yymmdd format
one point in the normal Omni Read (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27, 1997). The date format used here
Modbus mode. does not follow the US/European format selection.
5850 Previous Batch - Gross Totalizer

Points 5850-5853 are total batch quantities for the previous batch. These are moved here
from 5801 area at the end of a batch.
integer counts as two 5851 Previous Batch - Net Totalizer
registers. The starting 5852 Previous Batch - Mass Totalizer
still applies. 5853 Previous Batch - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5854 Previous Day’s - Gross Totalizer

Points 5854-5857 are total quantities for the previous day; ‘day start hour’ to ‘day start
hour’. These are moved here from 5809 area at the end of the day.
5855 Previous Day’s - Net Totalizer
5856 Previous Day’s - Mass Totalizer
5857 Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5858 Current Batch - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5858-5861 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at the start of the batch in progress.
These variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous batch.
5859 Current Batch - Opening Net Totalizer
5860 Current Batch - Opening Mass Totalizer
5861 Current Batch - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5862 Today’s - Opening Gross Totalizer

Points 5862-5865 are cumulative totalizers snapshot at day start hour for today. These
variables are also the closing totalizers for the previous day.
5863 Today’s - Opening Net Totalizer
5864 Today’s - Opening Mass Totalizer
5865 Today’s - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
5866 Cumulative - Gross Total @ Freeze

Points 5866-5869 are cumulative totalizers snapshot when the Leak Detection Freeze
Command (1760) is received (see also points 7634, 7644, 7654 & 7664).
5867 Cumulative - Net Total @ Freeze
5868 Cumulative - Mass Total @ Freeze
5869 Cumulative - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Total @ Freeze
21/25.72+ w 05/99 5-7

* 5870 Increment - Gross Totalizer

Points 5870-5873 contain the incremental integer counts that were added to the totalizers
for this current cycle.
accessed using Modbus * 5871 Increment - Net Totalizer
* 5872 Increment - Mass Totalizer
for multiple writes. Note that * 5873 Increment - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Totalizer
complete long integer which 5874 Previous Hour’s - Gross
occupies the space of two Points 5874-5877 represent the total quantities measured for the last hour. These are
16-bit registers. It must be moved here from 5844 area at the end of hour.
5875 Previous Hour’s - Net
partial 32-bit integer. Each 5876 Previous Hour’s - Mass
5877 Previous Hour’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV)
Modbus mode.
5878 Previous Batch - Opening Gross
Data from 5858 area is moved to points 5878-5881 at the end of each batch.
Mode - For the purpose of 5879 Previous Batch - Opening Net
point count only, each 32-bit 5880 Previous Batch - Opening Mass
registers. The starting 5881 Previous Batch - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV)
still applies.
5882 Previous Day’s - Opening Gross
Data from 5862 area gets moved to points 5882-5885 at the end/beginning of each day.
Application Revision 5883 Previous Day’s - Opening Net
corresponds to Application 5884 Previous Day’s - Opening Mass
Revision 21/25.72+ for 5885 Previous Day’s - Opening Net Standard Volume (NSV)
Systems.
5886 Spare
Note: to
* The increment for all 7000 Spare
the ‘totalizer resolution’
‘Factor Setup’ menu of
OmniCom. They can only
be changed via the
keypad entries made in
the ‘Pass-word
Maintenance’ menu after
‘Resetting all Totalizers’.
5-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

6. 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

(7001 - 8999)
6.1. Digital-to-Analog Outputs 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Application Revision Any analog output point which physically exists can be read via these point
21/25.72+ - This database numbers. Data returned is expressed as a percentage of the output value.
Revision 21/25.72+ for Only those points which physically exist and have been assigned to Modbus
Orifice/Differential Pressure control by assigning zero (0) at 'D/A Out Assign' (see Volume 3) should be
Systems. written to. Outputs which are not assigned to Modbus control will be overwritten
every 500 msec by the flow computer. Data written should be within the range
of -5.00 to 110.00.
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE
Floating Point variables are
accessed using Modbus 7001 Digital-to-Analog Output #1
function code 03 for all
reads, 06 for single writes or to
16 for single or multiple 7018 Digital-to-Analog Output #18
writes. Note that the index
number for each variable
refers to the complete
floating point variable which 7019 Spare
16- bit registers. It must be to
partial variable. Each floating
point variable counts as one
point in the normal Omni
Modbus mode.
6.2. User Variables 32-Bit IEEE Floating
Point Data
point count only, each IEEE Database points 7025 through 7088 have been assigned as user variables (see
float point counts as 2 Volume 3). The value contained in the variable depends on the associated
registers. The starting program statement which is evaluated every 500 msec. You may read these
address of the variable still variables at any time. You may also write to these variables but anything you
applies.
write may be overwritten by the flow computer depending on the evaluation of
the statement. Leave the statement blank or simply put a comment or prompt
into it to avoid having the flow computer overwrite it.
7025 User-Programmable Variable #1

to
7088 User-Programmable Variable #64
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-1

6.3. Programmable Accumulator 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Variables
Application Revision Points 7089 through 7099 are paired with Boolean Point Variables 1089 through
21/25.72+ - This database 1099. Numeric data placed in 7089, for example, can be output as pulses by
Revision 21/25.72+ for assigning a digital I/O point to 1089.
Systems. 7089 Programmable Accumulator #1
Data placed into 7089 is pulse out using 1089.
to
Data placed into 7099 is pulse out using 1099.
6.4. Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
INFO - The second digit of The second digit of the index number defines the meter run number. For
the index number defines the example: 7105 is the 'Temperature' variable for Meter Run #1. The same point
number of the meter run
number.
for Meter Run #4 would be 7405.
INFO - Calculated averages < 7n01 Flow Rate - Gross

3
can be either ‘flow weighted’ Barrels/hr or m /hr.
or ‘time weighted depending < 7n02 Flow Rate - Net
upon point number. 3
Barrels/hr or m /hr.
< 7n03 Flow Rate - Mass
Notes: Klbs/hr or ton/hr.
< Current live values which < 7n04 Flow Rate - Net Standard Volume (NSV)
3
are updated every Barrels/hr or m /hr.
500msec.
* Current values in use * 7n05 Temperature
now.
* 7n06 Pressure
* 7n07 Density in Use
Lb/CF
* 7n08 Flowing Transducer Density Before Factoring

Temperature and pressure corrected.
* 7n09 Flowing Transducer Density After Factoring
7n09=7n08 x 7n43.
* 7n10 Density Transducer Temperature

Corrects for transducer expansion effects.
* 7n11 Density Transducer Pressure
Corrects for transducer expansion effects.
6-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

* 7n12 API Flowing

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE * 7n13 API @ 60 ° F / API @ Reference Temperature
* 7n14 Specific Gravity Flowing
function code 03 for all * 7n15 Specific Gravity @ 60 ° F
reads, 06 for single writes or
* 7n16 Differential Pressure
16 for single or multiple
writes. Note that the index * 7n17 Orifice Coefficient
floating point variable which 7n18 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Temperature
16- bit registers. It must be
7n19 Batch In Progress - Average Meter Run Pressure
accessed as a complete unit. # 7n20 Batch In Progress - Average of Density in Use
partial variable. Each floating 7n21 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
point variable counts as one 7n22 Batch In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
Modbus mode. 7n23 Batch In Progress - Average API Flowing
7n24 Batch In Progress - Average API @ 60 ° F / API @ Reference
Temperature
Mode - For the purpose of 7n25 Batch In Progress - Average Flowing Specific Gravity
point count only, each IEEE 7n26 Batch In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 ° F / Density @
float point counts as 2 Reference Temperature
address of the variable still
applies. # 7n27 Fluid Expansion Factor (Y)
7n28 Velocity of Approach Factor (Ev)
Notes:
* Current values in use 7n29 Day In Progress - Average Temperature
now.
7n30 Day In Progress - Average Pressure
# For orifice metering, these
variables are the average # 7n31 Day In Progress - Average Density in Use
of the square rooted value
7n32 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Temperature
which is then squared
before storing. 7n33 Day In Progress - Average Density Transducer Pressure
7n34 Day In Progress - Average API Flowing
7n35 Day In Progress - Average API @ 60 ° F / API @ Reference Temperature
7n36 Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity Flowing
7n37 Day In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60 ° F / Density @
Reference Temperature
7n38 Day in Progress - Average Differential Pressure
7n39 Pipe Diameter

7n40 Orifice Diameter
7n41 Viscosity Override
7n42 Isentropic Exponent Override
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-3

7n43 Densitometer Factor in Use

7n44 Densitometer Factor B
7n45 Measured Orifice Diameter - @ Reference Temperature
Systems.
7n46 Orifice Plate - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
INFO - The second digit of 7n47 Orifice Plate - Reference Temperature
the index number defines the
number of the meter run
number. 7n48 Measured Meter Tube Diameter - @ Reference Temperature
7n49 Meter Tube - Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

7n50 Meter Tube - Reference Temperature
7n51 Differential Pressure - Low Cutoff

Inches of Water (kPa or millbar). 1n05 is set when DP above this.
7n52 Differential Pressure - Low Limit
7n53 Differential Pressure - High Limit
7n54 Differential Pressure - Override Value
7n55 Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA

7n56 Low Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA
7n57 High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 4mA

nd
2 DP when using stacked differential pressures.
7n58 High Range - Differential Pressure - @ 20mA
7n59 Differential Pressure - High Switch Over %

Use High DP if Low DP is greater than this %.
7n60 Differential Pressure - Low Switch Over %
Use Low DP if High DP is less than this %.
7n61 Meter Run Gross Flow Rate - Low Limit

7n62 Meter Run Gross Flow Rate - High Limit
7n63 Meter Temperature - Low Limit

7n64 Meter Temperature - High Limit
7n65 Meter Temperature - Override
7n66 Meter Temperature - @ 4mA
7n67 Meter Temperature - @ 20mA
7n68 Meter Pressure - Low Limit

to
7n72 Meter Pressure - @ 20mA
6-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

7n73 Gravity / Density Transducer - Low Limit

Indicated at either flowing or reference conditions, depending on which is selected.
Floating Point variables are to
7n77 Gravity / Density Transducer - @ 20mA
number for each variable 7n78 Density Transducer - Temperature - Low Limit
floating point variable which
to
occupies the space of two 7n82 Density Transducer - Temperature - @ 20mA
point variable counts as one 7n83 Density Transducer - Pressure - Low Limit
point in the normal Omni to
Modbus mode.
7n87 Density Transducer - Pressure - @ 20mA
7n88 Density Transducer - Correction Factor A
Used to correct densitometer.
point count only, each IEEE
float point counts as 2
* 7n89 Densitometer - Constant #1
K0/D0.
applies.
K1/T0.
Note: * 7n91 Densitometer - Constant #3
* Various factors used by K2/Tcoef.
various vendors of digital
densitometers.
K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
K20B/Kt3.
K21A/Pc.
K21B/Kp1.
Kr/KP2.
Kj/KP3.
7500 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-5

6.5. Scratch Pad 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
Application Revision Ninety-nine IEEE 32-bit floating point registers are provided for user scratch
21/25.72+ - This database pad. These registers are typically used to store and group data that will be
moved via peer-to-peer operations or similar uses.
Systems. 7501 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #1
to
Notes: 7599 Scratchpad - IEEE Float #99
+ Do not write to these
variables. They are
provided for read only
information. 7600 Spare
> Writing to these variables
will have no effect as the
flow computer overwrites
these values with either
the remote or local
primary Setpoint value
6.6. PID Control 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point
depending on the
operating mode of the
Data
control loop.
~ Only writes made while in + 7601 PID Control #1 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
the 'Remote' mode will be
meaningful. These > 7602 PID Control #1 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
variables are overwritten ~ 7603 PID Control #1 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
with the current value of
the primary controlled ^ 7604 PID Control #1 - Control Output Percent
variable when in all other < 7605 PID Control #1 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
modes.
^ Only writes made while in
the 'Manual' mode will be + 7606 PID Control #2 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value
meaningful. These
variables are overwritten
> 7607 PID Control #2 - Primary Setpoint Value in Use
by the flow computer in all ~ 7608 PID Control #2 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
other operating modes.
^ 7609 PID Control #2 - Control Output Percent
< Writes to these variables
are always accepted. < 7610 PID Control #2 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
+ 7611 PID Control #3 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value

~ 7613 PID Control #3 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
< 7615 PID Control #3 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
+ 7616 PID Control #4 - Local Primary Variable Setpoint Value

~ 7618 PID Control #4 - Remote Primary Setpoint Value
< 7620 PID Control #4 - Secondary Variable Setpoint
6-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

7621 Spare
INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE to
7623 Spare
6.7. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE
Floating Point Data
You cannot read or write a 7624 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #1
partial variable. Each floating Current live value, in PSIg or kPa.
point in the normal Omni 7625 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #2
Modbus mode. Current live value, in PSIg or kPa.
7626 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #3
Current live value, in PSIg or kPa.
7627 Equilibrium Pressure - Meter Run #4
Current live value, in PSIg or kPa.
7628 Spare
applies.
7629 Vapor Pressure @ 100 ° F - Meter Run #1
Current live value.
INFO - See 7n01 through
7n99 for more meter run 7630 Vapor Pressure @ 100 ° F - Meter Run #2
related data. Current live value.
Current live value.
Notes:
* These variables represent Current live value.
the incremental flow
which is accumulated
each 500 msec.
calculation cycle in float
format (also see points 7633 Spare
5n70 for integer format).
# Flowing variables are
snapshot and stored here
when the Leak Detection # 7634 Meter Run #1 - Temperature @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
Freeze command (1760) See 1760 command.
is received (also see
points 5n66).
# 7635 Meter Run #1 - Pressure @ Leak Detection Freeze Command
# 7636 Meter Run #1 - Density / Gravity @ Leak Detect Freeze Command
7637 Spare
to
7639 Spare
* 7640 Meter Run #1 - Gross Volume Increment

* 7641 Meter Run #1 - Net Increment Volume
* 7642 Meter Run #1 - Mass Increment
* 7643 Meter Run #1 - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Increment
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-7

# 7644 Meter Run #2 - Temperature @ Freeze Command

Application Revision # 7645 Meter Run #2 - Pressure @ Freeze Command
# 7646 Meter Run #2 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
Systems. 7647 Spare
to
INFO - See 7n01 through 7649 Spare
7n99 for more meter run
related data.

Notes:
* 7651 Meter Run #2 - Net Volume Increment
* These variables represent
the incremental flow * 7652 Meter Run #2 - Mass Increment
which is accumulated * 7653 Meter Run #2 - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Increment
each 500 msec.
calculation cycle in float
format (also see points # 7654 Meter Run #3 - Temperature @ Freeze Command
5n70 for integer format).
# Flowing variables are # 7655 Meter Run #3 - Pressure @ Freeze Command
snapshot and stored here # 7656 Meter Run #3 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
when the Leak Detection
Freeze command (1760)
is received (also see
points 5n66).
7657 Spare
to
7659 Spare

# 7664 Meter Run #4 - Temperature @ Freeze Command

# 7665 Meter Run #4 - Pressure @ Freeze Command
# 7666 Meter Run #4 - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
7667 Spare
to
7669 Spare

6-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

# 7674 Station - Temperature @ Freeze Command

Application Revision # 7675 Station - Pressure @ Freeze Command
# 7676 Station - Density / Gravity @ Freeze Command
Systems. 7677 Spare
to
INFO - See 7n01 through 7679 Spare
7n99 for more meter run
related data.
* 7680 Station - Gross Volume Increment

* 7681 Station - Net Volume Increment
* 7682 Station - Mass Volume Increment
* 7683 Station - Net Standard Volume (NSV) Volume Increment
7684 Spare
to
7699 Spare
6.8. Miscellaneous Variables 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
INFO - The data is only The percentage of span for each of the 24 process input channels is available
meaningful when the input as a floating point variable point.
channel is used as an analog
input or a Honeywell digital
transducer input. For pulse
type input channels see data 7701 Process Input - Channel # 1
points located at 15131 to
through 15154.
7724 Process Input - Channel # 24
7725 Spare
to
7782 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-9

7783 Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #1

INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE 7784 Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #2
function code 03 for all 7786 Sequence #2 Batch Size - Meter #4
writes. Note that the index 7787 Sequence #1 Batch Size - Meter #1
floating point variable which 7789 Sequence #1 Batch Size - Meter #3
partial variable. Each floating 7791 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #1
point variable counts as one 7792 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #2
Modbus mode. 7793 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #3
7794 Batch Preset Warning - Meter #4
7795 Batch Preset Warning - Station
registers. The starting 7796 Spare
to
applies.
7800 Spare
6-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

6.9. Meter Station 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point

Data
7801 Station - Gross Flow Rate
corresponds to Application 3
Barrels/hr or m /hr.
Orifice/Differential Pressure 7802 Station - Net Flow Rate
3
Liquid Flow Metering Barrels/hr or m /hr.
Systems.
7803 Station - Mass Flow Rate
Klbs/hr or ton/hr.
7804 Station – Net Standard Flow Rate
7805 Gravity/Density
7806 Density Temperature
7807 Density Pressure
7808 Spare
7809 Auxiliary Input #1

Points 7809-7812 represent miscellaneous live input signals provided for user-defined
functions.
7813 Time - hhmmss

Read only (e.g.: the number 103125 represents 10:31:25).
7814 Date - yymmdd
Read only (e.g.: the number 970527 represents May 27/ 97; the date format used here
does not follow the US/European format selection).
7815 Spare
to
7820 Spare
7821 Product #1 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient

7822 Product #1 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density


21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-11


INFO - These 32 Bit IEEE 7828 Product #4 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density
function code 03 for all 7829 Product #5 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
floating point variable which 7832 Product #6 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density
accessed as a complete unit. 7833 Product #7 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
partial variable. Each floating 7834 Product #7 - Specific Gravity Override / Reference Density
Modbus mode. 7835 Product #8 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Mode - For the purpose of 7837 Product #9 - API Override / Thermal Expansion Coefficient
applies.






7853 Gross Flow Rate - Low Limit

Indicates flow rate low limit in mass units.
7854 Gross Flow Rate - High Limit
Indicates flow rate high limit in mass units.
6-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

7855 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Decreasing Flow

See 1824.
21/25.72+ - This database 7856 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #1 - Increasing Flow
See 1825.
Liquid Flow Metering 7858 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #2 - Increasing Flow
Systems.
See 1826.
7860 Flow Threshold - Run Switch Flag #3 - Increasing Flow
7861 Station - Density Pressure - Low Limit

Points 7861-7865 are configuration settings used when the pressure is a live 4-20 mA.
7862 Station - Density Pressure - High Limit
7863 Station - Density Pressure - Override
7864 Station - Density Pressure - @ 4mA
7865 Station - Density Pressure - @ 20mA
7866 Station - Gravity/Density - Low Limit

Points 7866-7870 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20
mA.
7867 Station - Gravity/Density - High Limit
7868 Station - Gravity/Density - Override
7869 Station - Gravity/Density - @ 4mA
7870 Station - Gravity/Density - @ 20mA
7871 Station - Density Temperature - Low Limit

Points 7871-7875 are configuration settings used when the gravity/density is a live 4-20
mA.
7872 Station - Density Temperature - High Limit
7873 Station - Density Temperature - Override
7874 Station - Density Temperature - @ 4mA
7875 Station - Density Temperature - @ 20mA
7876 Station - Density Correction Factor
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-13

* 7877 Station - Densitometer - Constant #1

K0/D0.
Floating Point variables are * 7878 Station - Densitometer - Constant #2
accessed using Modbus K1/T0.
K2/Tcoef.
writes. Note that the index * 7880 Station - Densitometer - Constant #4
number for each variable K18/Tcal/Tc.
K19/Pcoef/Kt1.
16- bit registers. It must be * 7882 Station - Densitometer - Constant #6
accessed as a complete unit. K20A/Pcal/Kt2.
point variable counts as one K20B/Kt3.
point in the normal Omni * 7884 Station - Densitometer - Constant #8
Modbus mode. K21A/Pc.
K21B/KP1.
Mode - For the purpose of * 7886 Station - Densitometer - Constant #10
point count only, each IEEE Krr/KP2.
float point counts as 2 * 7887 Station - Densitometer - Constant #11
Kj/KP3.
applies.
# 7888 Cubic Feet to Barrel - Conversion Factor
Notes: # 7889 Gravity Rate of Change
* Various factors used by # 7890 Line Pack Delay
various vendors of digital # 7891 Local Atmospheric Pressure
densitometers.
# Miscellaneous conversion # 7892 Contract Base - Temperature
factors and constants. # 7893 Gram/cc to lb/ft3 - Conversion Factor
# 7894 Contract Base - Pressure
# 7895 Weight of Water @ 15° C
Applies only to Revision 25 (metric units). Also known as absolute density of water, it is
3
used to convert relative density (specific gravity) or API gravity units to density in Kg/m .
Gravity units are assumed to be based on water at 15°C and 101.325 kPaa.
7896 Spare
to
8500 Spare
6-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

6.10. Miscellaneous Meter Run 32-Bit IEEE

Floating Point Data
Application Revision The following data refers to Meter Run #1. The same data is available for all
21/25.72+ - This database meter runs at the following addresses:
Revision 21/25.72+ for o Meter Run #1 @ 8501 through 8599
Liquid Flow Metering o Meter Run #2 @ 8601 through 8699
Systems. o Meter Run #3 @ 8701 through 8799
o Meter Run #4 @ 8801 through 8899
Previous Batch Average -
Refers to data stored at the
time of the last Batch End
command. It will remain valid
until the next batch end. This 6.10.1. Previous Batch Average
is the data that should be
used by SCADA or MMIs to
build Monthly or Batch
Reports. 8501 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Temperature
8502 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Pressure
8503 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Density
8504 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Volume Correction Factor (VCF)
8505 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on
Liquid (CPL)
8506 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Differential Pressure
8507 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Specific Gravity
8508 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average SG @ 60 ° F / Density @
Reference Temperature
8509 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Density Temperature
8510 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Density Pressure
8511 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Density
8512 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Orifice Diameter
8513 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Pipe Diameter
8514 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Orifice Discharge Coefficient (Cd)
8515 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Velocity of Approach Factor
8516 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Fluid Expansion Factor (Y)
Square root (DP x Density).
8517 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Density Correction Factor
8518 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Unfactored Density
8519 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-15

6.10.2. Previous Hour’s Average

8520 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Temperature
function code 03 for all 8521 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Pressure
8522 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Density
writes. Note that the index 8523 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Specific Gravity @ 60° F / Density
number for each variable @ Reference Temperature
occupies the space of two 8524 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Differential Pressure
accessed as a complete unit. 8525 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Density
You cannot read or write a 8526 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average BS&W Percent
point in the normal Omni 8527 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Extension Factor
Modbus mode.
8528 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Extension Factor
8529 Meter #1 - Previous Hour’s - Average Combined Factor
Mode - For the purpose of 8530 Meter #1 - Previous Batch - Average Combined Factor
applies.
6.10.3. Previous Day’s Average
Previous Hour’s Average - 8531 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Temperature

Refers to data stored at the 8532 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Pressure
end of the last hour. It is valid
for one hour and is then 8533 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Density
overwritten. This is the data 8534 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Volume Correction Factor (VCF)
that should be used by
SCADA or MMIs which need 8535 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Correction Factor for Pressure on
hourly averages. Liquid (CPL)
8536 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Differential Pressure
Depends on setup.
Previous Day’s Average -
Refers to data stored at the 8537 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Specific Gravity
end of the contract day. It is 8538 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Specific Gravity @ 60° F / Density
valid for 24 hours and @ Reference Temperature
overwritten at the ‘day start
hour’. This is the data that 8539 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Density Temperature
should be used by SCADA or 8540 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Density Pressure
MMIs to build daily reports.
8541 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Density
8542 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Orifice Bore Diameter
8543 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Pipe Diameter
8544 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Orifice Coefficient of Discharge
(Cd)
8545 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Velocity of Approach Factor
8546 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Fluid Expansion Factor (Y)
Square root (DP x Density).
8547 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Density Correction Factor
8548 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Unfactored Density
6-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

8549 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Gross in Float Format

Barrels.
21/25.72+ - This database 8550 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Net in Float Format
corresponds to Application MSCF.
8551 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Mass in Float Format
Barrels.
Systems. 8552 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) in Float
Format
Barrels.
INFO - The indicated data
(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is 8553 Spare
available for all meter runs at
the following addresses:
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599 6.10.4. Statistical Moving Window Averages of
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Transducer Inputs
Meter Run #3:
8701 through 8799
8554 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure Low
Meter Run #4:
Range
8801 through 8899
8555 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Differential Pressure High
Range
Note: See 5n50 and 5850 8556 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Temperature
for matching totalizer data.
8557 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Pressure
8558 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density
8559 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density
Temperature
8560 Meter #1 - Moving Hour - Transducer Input - Average Density Pressure
6.10.5. Miscellaneous In Progress Averages
8561 Meter #1 - Batch In Progress - Average Density Correction Factor

8562 Meter #1 - Day In Progress - Average Density Correction Factor
8563 Meter #1 - Batch In Progress - Average Unfactored Density

8564 Meter #1 - Day In Progress - Average Unfactored Density
8565 Meter #1 - Viscosity in Use

8566 Meter #1 - Isentropic Exponent in Use
8567 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Extension Factor

8568 Meter #1 - Previous Day’s - Average Combined Factor
8569 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-17

6.10.6. More Miscellaneous In Progress Averages

8570 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Temperature
function code 03 for all 8571 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Pressure
8572 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Density
writes. Note that the index 8573 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Specific Gravity @ 60°°F /
number for each variable Density
occupies the space of two 8574 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Differential Pressure
accessed as a complete unit. 8575 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress - Average Density
You cannot read or write a 8576 Meter #1 - Hour In Progress – Average BS&W Percent
point in the normal Omni 8577 Spare
Modbus mode.
to
8582 Spare
point count only, each IEEE 8583 Meter #1 – Current Daily - Average BS&W Percent
registers. The starting 8584 Meter #1 – Current Batch - Average BS&W Percent
applies.
8585 Spare
6.10.7. Previous Batch Quantities

Previous Batch
Quantities - Refers to data
8586 Meter #1 - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Gross in Float Format
stored at the time of the last 3
Barrels or m .
‘Batch End’ command. It will
remain valid until the next 8587 Meter #1 - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net in Float Format
3
batch end. These variables Barrels or m .
are floating point duplicates
8588 Meter #1 - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Mass in Float Format
of integer data at 5n50 area.
Klbs or tons.
These points are for MMI or
SCADA retrieval, not for 8589 Meter #1 - Previous Batch ‘n’ - Net Standard Volume (NSV) in Float
Batch Recalculation. Format
3
Barrels or m .
Note: See 8501 area for

other Previous Batch data. 8590 Spare
to
8593 Spare
8594 Meter #1 - Current - Upstream Pressure

8595 Meter #1 - Differential Pressure - Low Range
8596 Meter #1 - Differential Pressure - High Range
8597 Meter #1 - Current - S&W Percent
8598 Meter #1 - Current - CSW
8599 Spare
8600 Spare
6-18 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
8601 Meter 2 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data

Systems. 8699 Spare
8700 Spare
INFO - The indicated data
(8501-8599) refers to Meter
Run #1. The same data is
available for all meter runs at 8701 Meter 3 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
the following addresses: to
Meter Run #1:
8501 through 8599
Meter Run #2:
8601 through 8699
Meter Run #3:
8799 Spare
8701 through 8799
Meter Run #4:
8800 Spare
8801 through 8899
Weighted Averages - ‘Time 8801 Meter 4 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
Weighted’ or ‘Flow Weighted’ to
averages can be selected on
a global basis (see point 8898 Meter 4 - Miscellaneous 32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
13394).
8899 Spare
to
8948 Spare
6.10.8. Station Previous Average Data
8949 Station - Previous Day’s - Gross in Float Format

8950 Station - Previous Day’s - Net in Float Format
8951 Station - Previous Day’s - Mass in Float Format
8952 Station - Previous Day’s - Net Standard Volume (NSV) in Float Format
8953 Spare
to
8985 Spare
8986 Station - Previous Batch - Gross in Float Format

8987 Station - Previous Batch - Net in Float Format
8988 Station - Previous Batch - Mass in Float Format
8989 Station - Previous Batch - Net Standard Volume (NSV) in Float Format
21/25.72+ w 05/99 6-19

8990 Spare
to
9000 Spare
6-20 21/25.72+ w 05/99

7. ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001 - 9499)
7.1. Custom Report Templates

Application Revision These are ASCII text files which serve as a format template for certain printed
21/25.72+ - This database reports.
Liquid Flow Metering 9001 Report Template - Snapshot / Interval
Systems. 9002 Report Template - Batch
9003 Report Template - Daily
INFO - These ASCII text
buffers are accessed using
9004 Spare
for reads and 66 for writes. to
The index number for each 9100 Spare
9000 type variable refers to
the complete text buffer
which may be as big as 8192
bytes. Data is transmitted or
received as multiple
transmissions of 128 byte 7.2. Previous Batch Reports
packets (see Chapter 6)
Copies of the last 8 Batch Reports are stored.
9101 Batch Report - Last

9102 Batch Report - 2nd Last
9103 Batch Report - 3rd Last
9104 Batch Report - 4th Last
th
9107 Batch Report - 7 Last
th
9108 Batch Report - 8 Last
9109 Spare
to
9300 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 7-1

Chapter 7 ASCII Text Data Buffers (9001- 9499)
7.3. Previous Daily Reports

INFO - These ASCII text Copies of the last 8 Daily Reports are stores
buffers are accessed using
for reads and 66 for writes. 9301 Previous Day’s Report - Last
The index number for each
9000 type variable refers to 9302 Previous Day’s Report - 2nd Last
the complete text buffer 9303 Previous Day’s Report - 3rd Last
which may be as big as 8192
bytes. Data is transmitted or 9304 Previous Day’s Report - 4th Last
received as multiple 9305 Previous Day’s Report - 5th Last
transmissions of 128 byte
packets. 9306 Previous Day’s Report - 6th Last
9307 Previous Day’s Report - 7th Last
9308 Previous Day’s Report - 8th Last
9309 Spare
to
9400 Spare
7.4. Last Snapshot Report
9401 Last Local Snapshot / Interval Report
7.5. Miscellaneous Report Buffer

The following buffer is used to retrieve miscellaneous reports. Report data is
loaded into this buffer depending on which bit is written to integer point 15129.
Reports which are retrieved using this buffer are:
o Current Snapshot Report
o Alarm Report
o Audit Trail Report
o Status Report
o Product File Report
Text Archive Data defined by integers 15127 and 15128 is also retrieved using
this buffer.
9402 Miscellaneous Report Buffer
9403 Spare
to
13000 Spare
7-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

8. Flow Computer Configuration Data

(13001 - 18999)
The following data is especially critical to the correct operation of the flow
‹ CAUTION! ‹ computer. Any modifications to this data while operating the flow computer
Flow computer configuration could cause unpredictable results which could cause measurement or control
data is especially critical to errors. Users are encouraged to consult with Omni before manipulating
the correct operation of the configuration data directly via a serial port or programmable variable
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data statements.
while operating the flow
computer could cause
unpredictable results which
could cause measurement or 8.1. Flow Computer Configuration
control errors. Users are
encouraged to consult with 16-Bit Integer Data
before manipulating
configuration data directly via
a serial port or programmable
8.1.1. Meter Run Configuration Data
variable statements.
13001 Spare
for multiple register writes. 13002 Meter Run #1 - Temperature I/O Point
13003 Meter Run #1 - Temperature Type
0=DIN RTD; 1=Amer RTD; 2=4-20mA/Honeywell.
13004 Meter Run #1 - Pressure I/O Point
corresponds to Application 13005 Meter Run #1 - Density I/O Point
Orifice/Differential Pressure 13006 Meter Run #1 - Density Type
Liquid Flow Metering 0=None; 1=4-20mA API linear; 2=4-20mA SG linear; 3=4-20mA density linear;
Systems. 4=Solartron pulse; 5=Sarasota pulse; 6=UGC pulse.
13007 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature I/O Point
13008 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Type
13009 Meter Run #1 - Density Press I/O Point
13010 Meter Run #1 - Density @ Reference Conditions
0=Flowing; 1=Reference.
13011 Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range I/O Point
13012 Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range I/O Point
13013 Spare
13014 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-1

Chapter 8 Flow Computer Configuration Data (13001- 18999)
13015 Meter Run #2 - Temperature I/O Point

to
‹ CAUTION! ‹ 13025 Meter Run #2 - Differential Pressure High Range I/O Point
Flow computer configuration
data is especially critical to
the correct operation of the
flow computer. Any
13026 Spare
modifications to this data
while operating the flow 13027 Spare
could cause measurement or
encouraged to consult with
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to
before manipulating
13039 Spare
13040 Spare
to
13052 Spare
to
13062 Spare
13063 Gravity Sample Time

Seconds.
13064 Station - Pressure - I/O Point
13065 Station - Density - I/O Point
13066 Station - Density - Type
0=None; 1=4-20mA API linear; 2=4-20mA SG linear; 3=4-20mA density linear;
4=Solartron pulse; 5=Sarasota pulse; 6=UGC pulse.
13067 Station - Density Temperature - I/O Point
13068 Station - Density Temperature - Type
13069 Spare
to
13073 Spare
8-2 21/25.72+ w 05/99

8.1.2. General Flow Computer Configuration

16-Bit Integer Data
corresponds to Application 13074 Flow Computer Type
Revision 21/25.72+ for 0=3000; 1=6000.
Orifice/Differential Pressure 13075 Number of A Combo Modules Installed
Systems. 13076 Number of B Combo Modules Installed
13077 Number of C Combo Modules Installed
13078 Number of Digital Modules Installed
13079 Number of Serial Modules Installed
13080 Number of E Combo Modules Installed
13081 Number of H Combo Modules Installed
Combination module used with Honeywellâ smart transmitters.
13082 Number of ED Combo Modules Installed
13083 Number of SV Combo Modules Installed
Serial multivariable combination module used with Rosemountâ 3095FB and other
13084 Number of HV Combo Modules Installed
Multivariable combination module used with Honeywellâ SMV3000 multivariable
transmitters.
8.1.3. Serial Port Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
13085 Serial Port #1 - Port Type

0=Printer; 1=Modbus.
13086 Serial Port - ID
Read only point which reports back the number of the port you are connected to.
13087 Serial Port #1 - Baud Rate
300-38400 bps.
13088 Serial Port #1 - Data Bits
7 or 8.
13089 Serial Port #1 - Stop Bits
1 bit or 2 bits.
13090 Serial Port #1 - Parity
0=None; 1=Odd; 2=Even.
13091 Serial Port #1 - Transmit Key Delay
0=0hms; 1=50 msec; 2=100 msec; 3=150 msec.
13092 Serial Port #1 - Modbus ID
If the port type selected above is Modbus: 0-247.
13093 Serial Port #1 - Protocol Type
If the port type selected above is Modbus: 0=Modbus RTU; 1= Modbus ASCII; 2=
Modbus RTU Modem.
13094 Serial Port #1 - Enable CRC Checking
If the port type selected above is Modbus: 0=No (CRC check disabled), 1=Yes (CRC
check enabled).
13095 Serial Port #1 - Modicon Compatible
If the port type selected above is Modbus: 0=No (Omni Mode); 1=Yes (Modicon 984
Mode).
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-3


‹ CAUTION! ‹ 13098 Serial Port #2 - Stop Bits
the correct operation of the 13100 Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay
flow computer. Any
13101 Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID
while operating the flow 13102 Serial Port #2 - Protocol Type
computer could cause 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
control errors. Users are 13104 Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible
encouraged to consult with 0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.
before manipulating
13105 Spare
to
13107 Spare
for multiple register writes. 13108 Serial Port #3 - Baud Rate
13112 Serial Port #3 - Transmit Delay
13113 Serial Port #3 - Modbus or Node ID
0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
13116 Serial Port #3 - Modiconä Compatible
13117 Spare
to
13119 Spare

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Allen-
Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.
0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley is selected as the protocol type, then:
0=CRC; 1=BCC error checking.
8-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99


‹ CAUTION! ‹
data is especially critical to 13099 Serial Port #2 - Parity
the correct operation of the 13100 Serial Port #2 - Transmit Key Delay
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 13101 Serial Port #2 - Modbus ID
while operating the flow 13102 Serial Port #2 - Protocol Type
computer could cause 0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
could cause measurement or 13103 Serial Port #2 - Enable CRC Checking
control errors. Users are 13104 Serial Port #2 - Modicon Compatible
0=Omni; 1=Modicon 984 compatible.
before manipulating
variable statements. 13105 Spare
to
INFO - These short integers 13107 Spare
for multiple register writes. 13108 Serial Port #3 - Baud Rate
0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing).
13116 ä Compatible
Serial Port #3 - Modiconä
13117 Spare
to
13119 Spare

0=Modbus RTU; 1=Modbus ASCII; 2=Modbus RTU Modem (Relaxed Timing); 3=Allen-
Bradley Full Duplex DF1; 4=Allen-Bradley Half Duplex.
0=Omni, 1=984 compatible. If Allen-Bradley is selected as the protocol type, then:
0=CRC; 1=BCC error checking.
8-4 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
8.1.4. Proportional Integral Derivative (PID)

Configuration 16-Bit Integer Data
corresponds to Application 13129 PID Loop #1 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint
Revision 21/25.72+ for 13130 PID Loop #1 - Primary Variable
Liquid Flow Metering 13131 PID Loop #1 - Secondary Variable
Systems. 13132 PID Loop #1 - Primary Action
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
13133 PID Loop #1 - Secondary Action
0=Forward; 1=Reverse.
13134 PID Loop #1 - Error Select
0=Low; 1=High.
13135 PID Loop #1 - Startup Mode
0=Last state; 1=Manual.
13136 PID Loop #2 - I/O Point Assignment - Remote Setpoint

to

to

to
13157 I/O Point Assignment - Auxiliary Input #1

21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-5

8.1.5. Programmable Logic Controller Configuration

16-Bit Integer Data
‹ CAUTION! ‹
Flow computer configuration 13161 PLC Group #1 - Starting Address
data is especially critical to Allen-Bradley PLC-2 Translation Tables.
the correct operation of the 13162 PLC Group #1 - Index 1
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 13163 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 1
while operating the flow 13164 PLC Group #1 - Index 2
unpredictable results which 13165 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 2
could cause measurement or 13166 PLC Group #1 - Index 3
encouraged to consult with 13167 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 3
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 13168 PLC Group #1 - Index 4
before manipulating
configuration data directly via 13169 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 4
a serial port or programmable 13170 PLC Group #1 - Index 5
13171 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 5
13172 PLC Group #1 - Index 6
are accessed using Modbus 13173 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 6
function code 03 for reads, 13174 PLC Group #1 - Index 7
for multiple register writes. 13175 PLC Group #1 - Number of Points 7
13194 PLC Group #2 - Starting Address

to
8-6 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

Application Revision 13228 PLC Group #3 - Index 1
to
Revision 21/25.72+ for 13258 PLC Group #3 - Index 16
Systems.

to

to
13286 Spare
to
13292 Spare
13293 Input Type - Auxiliary Input #1

For points 13293-13296: 0=DIN; 1=Amer; 2=4-20mA.
13297 Spare
to
13299 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-7

8.1.6. Peer-to-Peer Setup Entries 16-Bit Integer Data

‹ CAUTION! ‹
Flow computer configuration 13300 Current Master ID
data is especially critical to Real-time. Shows current peer-to-peer master.
the correct operation of the 13301 Reserved Register
flow computer. Any Debug only.
computer could cause 13302 Transaction #1 - Slave ID
could cause measurement or 13303 Transaction #1 - Read / Write
control errors. Users are 13304 Transaction #1 - Source Index
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 13305 Transaction #1 - Number of Points
before manipulating 13306 Transaction #1 - Destination Index
13307 Transaction #2 - Slave ID

INFO - These short integers to
function code 03 for reads, 13311 Transaction #2 - Destination Index

to
13316 Transaction #3 - Destination Index

to

to

to

to
8-8 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

Systems. 13342 Transaction #9 - Slave ID
to

to

to

to

to

to

to

to
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-9

13382 Next Master ID

A non zero entry here turns on peer-to-peer mode.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ 13383 Last Master ID In Sequence
Flow computer configuration 13384 Retry Timer
data is especially critical to Number of 50 msec ticks between retries; default=3.
flow computer. Any 13385 Activate Redundancy Mode
modifications to this data 0=single unit; 1=dual flow computer system.
unpredictable results which 13386 Number of Decimal Places for Gross or Net Totalizer
encouraged to consult with 13387 Spare
before manipulating
configuration data directly via 13388 Number of Decimal Places for Mass Totalizer
13389 Spare

are accessed using Modbus 13390 Number of Decimal Places for Factors on Batch Report
for multiple register writes. 13391 Spare
to
13393 Spare
13394 Select Averaging Method

0=Time weighted; 1=Flow weighted.
13395 Spare
13396 Override Code - Auxiliary Input #1

13400 Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure Low Range Damping Factor

13401 Meter Run #1 - Differential Pressure High Range Damping Factor
13402 Meter Run #1 - Temperature Damping Factor
13403 Meter Run #1 - Pressure Damping Factor
13404 Meter Run #1 - Density Temperature Damping Factor
13405 Meter Run #1 - Density Pressure Damping Factor

to

to
8-10 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

Systems. 13424 Station - Density Temperature Damping Factor
13425 Station - Density Pressure Damping Factor
13426 Spare
to
13432 Spare
13433 Auxiliary Input #1 - Damping Factor

13437 Spare
to
13449 Spare
13450 Insert Batch Stack - Meter #1

13454 Insert Batch Stack - Station
13455 Delete Batch Stack - Meter #1

13459 Delete Batch Stack - Station
13460 Remote Key Press

13461 Beep Counts
13462 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Valve Mode

Slave keeps copy of primary unit’s settings in points 13462-13469 in case it becomes
master.
13463 Redundancy - Master PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-11

13470 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Valve Mode

Application Revision 13471 Redundancy - Slave PID #1 - Setpoint Mode
Revision 21/25.72+ for 13473 Redundancy - Slave PID #2 - Setpoint Mode
Systems. 13475 Redundancy - Slave PID #3 - Setpoint Mode
13477 Redundancy - Slave PID #4 - Setpoint Mode
13478 Spare
to
13499 Spare
8.1.7. Raw Data Archive Files 16-Bit Integer Data

The following entries are used to define the record structure of each Raw Data
Archive file:
13500 Archive 701 #1 - Starting Index

13501 Archive 701 #1 - Number of Points
to
13531 Archive 701 #16 - Number of points
13532 Spare
to
13539 Spare

to
13572 Spare
to
13579 Spare

to
8-12 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
13612 Spare
to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
13619 Spare
the correct operation of the 13620 Archive 704 #1 - Starting Index
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 13621 Archive 704 #1 - Number of Points
while operating the flow to
unpredictable results which 13650 Archive 704 #16 - Starting Index
could cause measurement or 13651 Archive 704 #16 - Number of Points
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 13652 Spare
before manipulating
configuration data directly via to
13659 Spare

are accessed using Modbus 13661 Archive 705 #1 - Number of Points
function code 03 for reads, to
for multiple register writes. 13690 Archive 705 #16 - Starting Index
13692 Spare
to
13699 Spare

to
13732 Spare
to
13739 Spare

to
13772 Spare
to
13779 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-13


Application Revision 13781 Archive 708 #1 - Number of Points
to
Revision 21/25.72+ for 13810 Archive 708 #16 - Starting Index
Systems.
13812 Spare
INFO - These short integers to
are accessed using Modbus 13819 Spare
for multiple register writes. 13820 Archive 709 #1 - Starting Index
to
13852 Spare
to
13859 Spare

to
13892 Spare
to
13899 Spare
13900 Trigger Boolean - Archive 701

Points 13900-13909 contain the point numbers of the trigger points which cause the data
to be stored when the trigger goes from low to high.
8-14 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
13910 Spare
to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
13919 Spare
flow computer. Any
while operating the flow ‹ *13920 Archive Run ?
computer could cause 0=Stops archiving; 1=Starts archiving.
could cause measurement or ‹ *13921 Reconfigure Archive?
control errors. Users are 0=No configuration allowed; 1=Configuration changes allowed.
before manipulating
configuration data directly via 13922 Spare
variable statements. to
13929 Spare
06 for single writes and 16 13930 Archive 711 #1 Starting Index
for multiple register writes. Points 13930-13961 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Alarm
Archive.
13931 Archive 711 #1 Number of Points
‹* CAUTION! ‹* to
POTENTIAL FOR DATA

13960 Archive 711 #16 Starting Index
LOSS! Read Archive 13961 Archive 711 #16 Number of Points
documentation before
manipulating points 13920
and 13921.
Points 13962-13993 are dummy read-only points which show the structure of the Audit
Trail.
to
13994 Spare
to
14000 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-15

8.2. Flow Computer Configuration

16-Character ASCII String Data
corresponds to Application 14001 Boolean Statement #1025
Revision 21/25.72+ for to
Liquid Flow Metering 14048 Boolean Statement #1072
Systems.
14049 OmniCom - Download Serial Number & File Name

INFO - These ASCII string 14050 OmniCom - Download PC ID
for reads, and 16 for writes. 14051 Variable Statement #7025
Note that the index number
for each string refers to the to
complete string which 14098 Variable Statement #7072
occupies the space of eight
partial string. Each string
counts as one point in the 14100 Station Total and Flow Rate Definition
14101 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1025

to
Mode - For the purposes of
point count only, each string 14148 Comment String (Remarks) - Boolean Statement #1072
still applies.
14149 Printer Condense Mode String
Points 14149 & 14150 represent the hexadecimal ASCII version of what is actually sent to
the printer.
14150 Printer Uncondensed Mode String
14151 Comment String - Variable Statement #7025

to
14199 Spare
to
14200 Spare
14201 Boolean Statement #1073

to
14216 Boolean Statement #1088
8-16 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
14217 Spare
to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
14220 Spare
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 14221 Variable Statement #7073
unpredictable results which 14236 Variable Statement #7088
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 14237 Spare
before manipulating
14240 Spare

variables are accessed using 14241 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1073
Modbus function codes 03 to
for reads, and 16 for writes.
Note that the index number 14256 Comment String - Boolean Statement #1088
for each string refers to the
complete string which
occupies the space of eight
16-bit registers. It must be 14257 Spare
You cannot read or write a to
partial string. Each string 14260 Spare

Mode - For the purposes of to
still applies.
14277 Spare
to
14300 Spare
14301 Comment String - Assign - Digital-to-Analog Output #1

to
14321 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #1

to
14344 Comment String - Assign - Digital I/O Point #24
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-17

14345 Spare
14359 Spare
Systems. 14360 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Primary Variable
14361 Comment String - Assign - PID #1 - Secondary Variable
14362 Comment String - Assign - PID #2 - Primary Variable



14368 Spare
to
14379 Spare
14380 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter A

14381 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter B
14382 Comment String - Assign - Front Panel Counter C
14383 Spare

14390 Spare
to
15000 Spare
8-18 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

32-Bit Long Integer Data
15001 Assign - Digital-to-Analog Output #1
function code 03 for reads, to
for multiple writes.
Note that the index number
for each variable refers to
one complete long integer
which occupies the space of 15013 Digital Point #1 - Assignment
two 16-bit registers. It must 15014 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay On
be accessed as a complete 100 msec ticks.
unit. You cannot read or write
a partial 32-bit integer. Each 15015 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Delay Off
32-bit long integer counts as 100 msec ticks.
one point in the normal Omni 15016 Digital Point #1 - Timer - Pulse Width
Modbus mode.
10 msec ticks.
point count only, each 32-bit 15017 Digital Point #2 - Assignment
integer counts as two to
address of the 32-bit integer 15020 Digital Point #2 - Timer - Pulse Width
still applies.
15021 Digital Point #3 - Assignment

to
15024 Digital Point #3 - Timer - Pulse Width
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-19


to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 15029 Digital Point #5 - Assignment
unpredictable results which 15032 Digital Point #5 - Timer - Pulse Width
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 15033 Digital Point #6 - Assignment
before manipulating
21/25.72+ - This database 15037 Digital Point #7 - Assignment
corresponds to Application to
Orifice/Differential Pressure 15040 Digital Point #7 - Timer - Pulse Width
Systems.

to

to

to

to

to
8-20 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

INFO - These 32-bit long to
Note that the index number 15065 Digital Point #14 - Assignment
for each variable refers to to
which occupies the space of 15068 Digital Point #14 - Timer - Pulse Width
two 16-bit registers. It must
be accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or write
a partial 32-bit integer. Each 15069 Digital Point #15 - Assignment
one point in the normal Omni to
Modbus mode. 15072 Digital Point #15 - Timer - Pulse Width
point count only, each 32-bit 15073 Digital Point #16 - Assignment
integer counts as two to
address of the 32-bit integer 15076 Digital Point #16 - Timer - Pulse Width
still applies.

to

to

to

to

to
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-21


to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 15101 Digital Point #23 - Assignment
unpredictable results which 15104 Digital Point #23 - Timer - Pulse Width
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 15105 Digital Point #24 - Assignment
before manipulating
21/25.72+ - This database 15109 Assign - Front Panel Counter A
corresponds to Application 15110 Assign - Front Panel Counter B
Orifice/Differential Pressure 15111 Assign - Front Panel Counter C
Systems.
15112 Spare
to
15119 Spare
15120 Input / Output Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! Indicates which points are inputs (1) and which are outputs (0).
#1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23.
15121 Spare
15122 On/Off Status of Digital Points

Real-time, read-only! #1=Bit 0; #24=Bit 23: 0 =Off, 1=On.
15123 Spare
to
15125 Spare
8-22 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
15126 32-Bit Packed Status Word

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).
accessed using Modbus LSB
function code 03 for reads, B0 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B16 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
for multiple writes. B1 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B17 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
Note that the index number B2 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B18 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
for each variable refers to B3 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B19 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
one complete long integer B4 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B20 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
which occupies the space of
B5 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B21 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
two 16-bit registers. It must
be accessed as a complete B6 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B22 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
unit. You cannot read or write B7 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B23 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
a partial 32-bit integer. Each B8 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B24 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
one point in the normal Omni B9 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B25 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
Modbus mode. B10 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B26 Power Fail Flag
B11 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B27 End Batch #4
B12 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B28 End Batch #3
Mode - For the purpose of B13 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B29 End Batch #2
point count only, each 32-bit B14 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B30 End Batch #1
integer counts as two B15 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B31 End Batch Station
MSB
still applies.
15127 Text Archive Data - Number of Days to Retrieve
Exclusively for OmniCom use.
15128 Text Archive Data - Starting Date of Requested
Fix date format (YYDDMM).
15129 32-Bit Command Word #1

Exclusively for OmniCom use (see Bit Layout below).
LSB
B1 End Batch Station B17 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
B2 End Batch Meter #1 B18 Send Snapshot to Printer
Load Snapshot to Report Buffer
B3 End Batch Meter #2 B19
(9402)
Load Alarms to Miscellaneous
Report Buffer (9402)
Load Prod File to Miscellaneous
Load Status to Miscellaneous
B6 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B22
Load Audit Trail to Miscellaneous
B7 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð B23
B11 Alarm Acknowledge B27 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
B12 Reset Power Fail Flag B28 ïïïïïï N/A ðððððð
MSB
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-23

15130 32-Bit Command Word #2

See Bit Layout below.
‹ CAUTION! ‹
Flow computer configuration LSB
Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 1%
the correct operation of the B0 B16
Rate Rate
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #1 Valve @ 1%
B1 B17
while operating the flow Rate Rate
computer could cause Decrease PID #1 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%
unpredictable results which B2 B18
0.1% Rate Rate
control errors. Users are Increase PID #1 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #1 Valve @ 0.1%
B3 B19
encouraged to consult with Rate Rate
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. Decrease PID #2 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #2 Valve @ 1%
B4 B20
before manipulating Rate Rate
configuration data directly via Increase PID #2 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #2 Valve @ 1%
a serial port or programmable B5 B21
Rate Rate
Decrease PID #2 Setpoint @ Decrease PID #2 Valve @ 0.1%
B6 B22
0.1% Rate Rate
Application Revision Increase PID #2 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #2 Valve @ 0.1%
B7 B23
21/25.72+ - This database Rate Rate
corresponds to Application Decrease PID #3 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #3 Valve @ 1%
Revision 21/25.72+ for B8 B24
Rate Rate
Liquid Flow Metering Increase PID #3 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #3 Valve @ 1%
B9 B25
Systems. Rate Rate
B10 B26
0.1% Rate Rate
Increase PID #3 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #3 Valve @ 0.1%
B11 B27
Rate Rate
Decrease PID #4 Setpoint @ 1% Decrease PID #4 Valve @ 1%
B12 B28
Rate Rate
Increase PID #4 Setpoint @ 1% Increase PID #4 Valve @ 1%
B13 B29
Rate Rate
B14 B30
0.1% Rate Rate
Increase PID #4 Setpoint @ 0.1% Increase PID #4 Valve @ 0.1%
B15 B31
Rate Rate
MSB
15131 Raw Process Input - Input #1

Real-time, read-only! 1kHz~1mA.
to
15154 Raw Process Input - Input #24
15155 Spare
to
15169 Spare
8-24 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

INFO - These 32-bit long 15171 Assign - Digital-to-Analog Output #14
function code 03 for reads, 15173 Assign - Digital-to-Analog Output #16
Note that the index number 15175 Assign - Digital-to-Analog Output #18
for each variable refers to
which occupies the space of
two 16-bit registers. It must 15176 Spare
be accessed as a complete
unit. You cannot read or write to
a partial 32-bit integer. Each 15199 Spare
Modbus mode.
Archive Data File Size
Information Only Data!
still applies. * 15200 Size of Text - Archive File
* 15201 Size of Archive - File 701
Note: * 15202 Size of Archive - File 702
* Archive Data File Size - * 15203 Size of Archive - File 703
These variables contain * 15204 Size of Archive - File 704
the number of bytes each
archive file uses within * 15205 Size of Archive - File 705
memory. They are * 15206 Size of Archive - File 706
updated when the
archiving process is * 15207 Size of Archive - File 707
started and memory is * 15208 Size of Archive - File 708
allocated. The maximum
memory that can be * 15209 Size of Archive - File 709
allocated to this group of * 15210 Size of Archive - File 710
variables is a total of
229359 bytes.
15211 Spare
15212 Spare
15213 Archive File ‘n’ Failed

Indicates which archive file failed; e.g.: if archive files 1-4 occupy allocated memory, this
point will read 5 (n=1-10). (See points 2623, 15200-15210, and 15214.)
15214 Total Number of Archive Files Allocated
15215 Spare
to
17000 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-25


32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
INFO - These 32-bit IEEE 17001 Digital-to-Analog Output #1 - @ 4mA

Floating Point variables are Engineering units which equal to 0%.
17002 Digital-to-Analog Output #1 - @ 20mA
Engineering units which equal to 100%.
16 for single or multiple to
refers to the complete 17024 Digital-to-Analog Output #12 - @ 20mA
17025 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #1
partial variable. Each floating to
point in the normal Omni 17048 Pulses per Unit - Digital I/O #24
Modbus mode.
Modiconä Compatible 17049 Pulses per Unit - Counter A

17050 Pulses per Unit - Counter B
float point counts as 2 17051 Pulses per Unit - Counter C
applies. # 17052 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit
Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
# 17053 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - High Limit
Note: Setpoint download will be limited to this setting.
# Input expected is
# 17054 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 4mA
engineering units.
Sets the zero of the controller.
# 17055 PID #1 - Remote Setpoint - @ 20mA
Sets the maximum span of the controller.
17056 PID #1 - Primary Gain
17057 PID #1 - Primary Repeats/Minute
# 17058 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Zero
# 17059 PID #1 - Secondary Value - @ Full Scale
17060 PID #1 - Secondary Gain
17061 PID #1 - Secondary Repeats/Minute
17062 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Up Rate % - p/500 msec
Limits rate of valve movement at startup only.
# 17063 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint
17064 PID #1 - Maximum Ramp Down Rate % - p/500msec
Limits the rate of valve movement at shutdown only.
17065 PID #1 - Min Output % - To Ramp To
This valve open % is used to slow the flow rate and complete the delivery (i.e., top-off).
17066 PID #1 - Deadband %
No change in output if the % error is less than this
8-26 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
17067 PID #2 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit

to
‹ CAUTION! ‹
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 17082 PID #3 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit
unpredictable results which 17096 PID #3 - Deadband %
Omni Flow Computers, Inc. 17097 PID #4 - Remote Setpoint - Low Limit
before manipulating
21/25.72+ - This database 17112 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #1
corresponds to Application Read-only, Live Value.
Revision 21/25.72+ for to
Liquid Flow Metering 17123 Output in Percent - Digital to Analog #12
Systems. Read-only, Live Value.
17124 Spare
to
17135 Spare
17136 PID #1 - Primary Controlled Variable Value

17137 PID #1 - Secondary Controlled Variable Value
17138 PID #1 - Control Output %
17139 PID #1 - Primary Setpoint Value
17140 PID #1 - Secondary Setpoint Value
17141 Spare
to
17145 Spare

to
17151 Spare
to
17155 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-27


INFO - These 32-bit IEEE to
writes. Note that the index 17161 Spare
to
floating point variable which 17165 Spare
partial variable. Each floating 17166 PID #4 - Primary Controlled Variable Value
point variable counts as one to
Modbus mode. 17170 PID #4 - Secondary Setpoint Value
Mode - For the purpose of 17171 Spare
to
registers. The starting 17175 Spare
applies.
17176 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Gross Flow Rate

Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3140 & 3142.
17177 Meter #1 - Full Scale - Mass Flow Rate
Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3144.
17178 Spare
17179 Spare

17182 Spare
17183 Spare

17186 Spare
17187 Spare

17190 Spare
17191 Spare
8-28 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä
17192 Station - Full Scale - Gross

(Used to scale integer volume flow rate variables 3802 & 3804.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ 17193 Station - Full Scale - Mass
Flow computer configuration Used to scale integer mass flow rate variable 3806.
flow computer. Any
modifications to this data 17194 Spare
computer could cause to
unpredictable results which 17197 Spare
before manipulating 17198 Alarm Deadband %
configuration data directly via 0-5%. Global dead-band applied to all analog alarms. Variable must return this % out of
a serial port or programmable alarm for alarm to cancel.
Application Revision 17199 Spare

corresponds to Application to
Revision 21/25.72+ for 17202 Spare
Systems.
17203 F Factor - Product #1

to
17218 F Factor - Product #16
17219 Spare
to
17234 Spare
17235 Product #1 - Mole Fraction of Propylene

to
17250 Product #16 - Mole Fraction of Propylene
17251 Spare
to
17379 Spare
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-29

8.5. More Flow Computer Configuration

32-Bit IEEE Floating Point Data
INFO - These 32-bit IEEE
17380 Auxiliary Input #1 - Low limit
function code 03 for all 17381 Auxiliary Input #1 - High Limit
17382 Auxiliary Input #1 - Override Value
writes. Note that the index 17383 Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 4mA
17384 Auxiliary Input #1 - @ 20mA
accessed as a complete unit. 17385 Auxiliary Input #2 - Low limit
partial variable. Each floating to
point variable counts as one 17389 Auxiliary Input #2 - @ 20mA
Modbus mode.

Mode - For the purpose of to
applies.
to
17400 Spare
to
17479 Spare
17480 Run Switch - Threshold Low %

Differential pressure input percent less then this flags that a meter run should be closed.
17481 Run Switch - Threshold High %
Differential pressure input percent greater then this flags that a meter run should be
opened.
17482 Spare
to
17487 Spare
8-30 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Modbusä

Engineering units which equal to 0%.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ 17489 Digital-to-Analog Output #13 - @ 20mA
Flow computer configuration Engineering units which equal to 100%.
data is especially critical to to
flow computer. Any 17498 Digital-to-Analog Output #18 - @ 4mA
modifications to this data 17499 Digital-to-Analog Output #18 - @ 20mA
control errors. Users are 17500 Spare
encouraged to consult with to
before manipulating 18499 Spare
Systems.
21/25.72+ w 05/99 8-31

ð 18500 Reserved
Note: to
ð These addresses are ð 18999 Reserved
reserved for product
development.
ð 19000 Reserved
to
ð 19999 Reserved
ð 20000 Reserved
to
ð 29999 Reserved
ð 30000 Reserved
to
ð 39999 Reserved
ð 40000 Reserved
to
ð 49999 Reserved
8-32 21/25.72+ w 05/99

Volume 5
User Manual
Technical Bulletins
960701 Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software
960702 Communicating with Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
960704 Communicating with Honeywell ST3000 Smart Transmitters
970701 Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of Flow Computer
970702 Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at Temperatures Other than 15°C or 60°F
970801 Using Boolean Statements to Provide Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
970802 Omni Flow Computer Modbus Database: Overview
970803 Meter Factor Linearization
970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product Overrides or Live 4-20mA
Analyzer Inputs of Specific Gravity and Heating Value
970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
980201 Communicating with Honeywell TDC3000 Systems
980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics
980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
980501 Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
980502 Communicating with Honeywell SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
980503 Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
980504 Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
980801 Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbus Data Packets
980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
980803 Upgrading the Flow Computer Firmware
981101 Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature and Sealing of the Flow Computer
990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Effective May 1999

Date: 07 23 96 Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard TB # 960701
Overview of OmniComâ Configuration PC

Software
Contents
User Manual Reference - Scope .............................................................................................................. 2
This technical bulletin
complements the information Abstract........................................................................................................... 2
contained in Volume 3,
Configuring the Flow Computer.................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 “Flow Computer
Configuration”, and is Report Configurator ....................................................................................... 3
applicable to all firmware
revisions. Operations Utilities and Help......................................................................... 3
This bulletin was previously Dial-up Access................................................................................................ 3
published as an appendix to
user manuals of firmware Passwords Using OmniCom.......................................................................... 3
revisions Version .70 and
Local Keypad Access ................................................................................................4
earlier.
Changing Passwords at the Keypad ..........................................................................4
Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for each Modbus Port............5
OmniComâ Configuration Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniComâ ........................................5
PC Software - This powerful
software package allows you Disabling Modbus Port Passwords ............................................................................6
to setup, copy or modify, and Getting Started ............................................................................................... 6
save to disk entire
configurations for Omni flow Installation Requirements..........................................................................................6
computers. It also allows you Installation Procedure ...............................................................................................6
to create custom reports and Opening a File ..........................................................................................................7
displays. You can work
online, offline and remotely. View .........................................................................................................................7
Off-line......................................................................................................................7
On-line......................................................................................................................7
Reports.....................................................................................................................8
Utilities......................................................................................................................8
I/O Point Assignment List ................................................................................................................ 8
OmniComâ Setup ........................................................................................................................... 8
OmniComâ Application .................................................................................................................... 9
Archive Start/Stop Command .......................................................................................................... 9
Prover Commands......................................................................................................................... 10
Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................... 10
Omni Front Panel Emulator ........................................................................................................... 10
Help........................................................................................................................10
Registration of License and Software Support .........................................................11
TB-960701 w ALL REVS 1

Omni 6000 / Omni 3000 Flow Computers Technical Bulletin
Scope
OmniComâ Software is compatible with all firmware revisions of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers. It is installed in a personal computer from
which you can configure your flow computer.
Abstract
OmniCom is a simple-to-use yet sophisticated PC-based configuration program
that can be used to setup, copy or modify, and save to disk entire configurations
for Omni flow computers. You can also select custom report options and modify
report templates and Omni display screens that are resident within the program,
or create new ones. These can then be uploaded to the flow computer. Default
reports provide standard data and formats for most requirements.
Major application programming has already been developed by Omni and is
resident in EPROM. This is of particular importance in custody transfer
measurement contracts. They require that the relevant API, AGA, GPA or ISO
standards are fully implemented and not exposed to tampering.
The OmniCom program allows you to develop your own system requirements
by a simple process of menu selection and table completion. This replicates the
data entry tables which can be accessed through the front panel keypad of your
Omni Flow Computer.
Configuring the Flow Computer

For Further Help - If you Configuring the flow computer involves specifying what transducers are going to
require further help, call be used, their calibrated ranges and the physical I/O points being assigned.
Omni’s technical support at:
Other data needed by the flow computer relates to the flowing product to be
( +1-281-240-6161
measured, the type of calculations to be used, and communication and control
features.
You will usually configure the flow computer in the Off-line Mode and then
upload your data. You do not have to be connected to the flow computer at this
time. You will usually go to the Online Menu only when you need to
communicate directly with the flow computer. Any changes made are
immediately reflected in the flow computer.
2 TB-960701 w ALL REVS

TB-960701 ä Configuration PC Software
Overview of OmniComä
Report Configurator
One of OmniCom's indispensable features is the ability to reformat default
reports by using OmniCom's report templates. This is the ONLY feature not
available through the front panel keypad. Any variable defined in the Modbus
database, or programmed as a variable can be inserted into a report with
accompanying text. Reports can be created in languages other than English to
suit local needs.
Operations Utilities and Help

Accessing Help in Operational tools such as remotely proving meters, and reading hardware
OmniComâ - At the 'Using diagnostics are provided. Diagrams are also provided for communications cable
Help' feature, press [Enter]
hook-up. Application Programs and PC Setup for OmniCom can also be
and [F1] for editing
keystrokes. selected. As you work through the entries, you will find entry-sensitive Help that
explains the meaning of the particular entry. Whether at the flow computer
keypad or at a PC there is always assistance.
For Further Help - If you
require further help, call
( +1-281-240-6161 Dial-up Access
Omni Flow Computers encourages the installation of a telephone dial-up
modem as a ready means of providing installation and maintenance support for
customer and vendor alike. Serial communication passwords provide enhanced
security. Three levels of password pre-exist within Omni flow computers to
provide privileged or restricted access to critical configuration and calibration
data.
The OmniCom program allows you to upload/download data to and from the
flow computer in an on-line mode at a range of baud rates by direct-wire or by
telephone dial-up modem access. This is particularly useful when the flow
computer is in use. Occasionally, you will want to modify configuration or
calibration data, or just monitor activity. You can do all this without interfering
with pipeline or process operations or with communication links to host SCADA
or DCS systems.
Passwords Using OmniCom

Except when changing transducer high/low alarm limits, a password is usually
asked for when changing the configuration data within the computer.
The flow computer has independent password protection of the following:
INFO - For Firmware 1) Local Keypad access
Revisions 70+, Physical
Serial Port #1 is selectable 2) Modbus Port #1 (Physical serial Port #1)
as a Modbus RTU, Modbus 3) Modbus Port #2 (Physical serial Port #2)
RTU (modem), or printer
port. This serial port on 4) Modbus Port #3 (Physical serial Port #3)
previous revisions was only a 5) Modbus Port #4 (Physical serial Port #4)
printer port.

Local Keypad Access

Three password levels are provided:
a) Privileged Level - Allows complete access to all entries within the flow
computer including keypad passwords (b) and (c) below. The initial
privileged password for each Modbus port is selected via this password
level.
b) Level 1 - This level allows technician access to most entries within the
flow computer with the exception of I/O Points assignments,
programmable variables and Boolean statements and passwords other
than Keypad level 1.
c) Level 1A - Allows access to the following entries:
¨ Meter factors and K Factors
¨ Densitometer correction factors (pycnometer factor)
d) Level 2 - Allows access to the operator type entries. These entries
include:
¨ Transducer manual overrides
¨ Product gravity overrides
¨ Prover operations
¨ Batching operations
Changing Passwords at the Keypad

1) At the keypad press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
2) With the cursor blinking on 'Misc Configuration' press [Enter]
3) With the cursor blinking on 'Password Main?'
press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]
4) Enter the 'Privileged Level' Password (up to 6 characters) press [Enter]
5) The 'Level 1',Level 1A and 'Level 2' passwords can now be viewed and
changed if required.
INFO - Level B and Level C 6) Scroll down to access each of the Modbus serial port 'Level A'
passwords for each Modbus passwords. These are labeled 'Ser1Passwd', Ser2 Passwd', 'Ser3
port cannot be viewed or
changed from the keypad.
Passwd' and ‘Ser4 Passwd’ corresponding to the physical port numbering
for Modbus Ports 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.

Setting Up the Initial 'Level B' and 'Level C' Passwords for
each Modbus Port
7) Enter an initial 'Level A' Password for the appropriate physical serial port
at the keypad of the Omni Flow Computer as described above.
8) Connect a PC running OmniCom Software to the selected serial port of
the Omni Flow Computer. Open a file and 'Receive Omni Configuration
Data'.
9) A red pop-up screen will appear which notes that a password is required
to proceed. If any other screen appears at this point, check wiring and
communication settings, Modbusä ID, baud rate, etc.
10) Do not enter the 'Level A' password at this point. Keep pressed [Alt] as
you press [E] to edit the passwords. A second red pop-up screen will
appear asking for the 'current valid password'. A good practice would be
to use uppercase letters (activate [CapsLock] on the keyboard) because
when setting passwords from the flow computer’s keypad, they are
always entered in uppercase.
11) Enter the 'Level A' password that was selected for this serial port.
12) You are asked if you would like to change the 'Level A', 'Level B' and
'Level C' passwords. Select to change 'Level B' at this point. You will be
asked to enter a password. As you enter the password, asterisks will
show in place of the characters you typed. You will be asked to re-enter
the password to ensure that what you typed was correct.
13) To setup a ‘Level C’ password, repeat Steps 2 and 6 substituting ‘Level
C’ for ‘Level B’ at Step 6.
Maintaining the Modbus Port Password Using OmniComâ

After the initial passwords have been setup for each of the Modbus serial ports
as shown above, they may be changed at any time while logged on with
OmniCom.
1) While keeping pressed the [Alt] key, press [E] at any time and the pop-
up screen appears asking for a password. This screen can be forced to
appear by keeping pressed [Alt] as you press [P] while viewing any
editing screen; i.e., any screen with data fields that can be edited.
2) When asked, enter your current password. Password ‘Level B’ and
‘Level C’ users are allowed to change only their own password levels.
‘Level A’ password users can change levels A, B and C.

Disabling Modbus Port Passwords

INFO - Level B and Level C ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords should be disabled via OmniCom (see
passwords for each Modbus sidebar) before disabling the privileged ‘Level A’ password at the keypad.
(serial) port cannot be viewed
or changed from the keypad; 1) To disable each password proceed as though you are going to change or
i.e., you must use OmniCom set-up the password.
to view, change or delete
these password levels. 2) Press the [Delete] key six (6) times where the initial password was
entered followed by the [Enter] key (no asterisks will show).
3) When asked to re-enter the password, re-enter six [Delete] key presses
followed by the [Enter] key.
4) Repeat this procedure for both ‘Level B’ and ‘Level C’ passwords.
5) From the Omni flow computer keypad, delete the 'Level A' password for
the appropriate Modbus serial port (see Volume 3). To do this, move the
cursor to the serial Level A password to disable and press the [Clear]
key and then the [Enter] key.
Getting Started
‹ CAUTION! ‹
Terminate and Stay Resident
Installation Requirements
(TSR) programs such as
To properly run OmniCom, and have sufficient memory for report templates
SideKickä and Keyboard
Macro processors can affect and copies of the database, you will require the following:
the operation of high speed
communication programs ¨ IBM PC (or compatible)
such as OmniCom. They do ¨ MS DOS, V3.3 or later (excepting 4.01)
this by 'stealing' processor
cycles or turning off the ¨ 640Kb RAM
hardware interrupt system of
the personal computer.
¨ 20Mb Free Hard Disk Space with a minimum of one floppy disk drive,
These programs may have to 3½" 1.44 Mb
be disabled when you are in ¨ Monochrome or color monitor with EGA or VGA graphics capability
the 'On-line' Mode, if you
encounter difficulties ¨ One RS-232 serial port
communicating with the
Omni flow computer. ¨ One LPT port (optional)
¨ One RS-232 modem (optional at various supported baud rates)
Installing OmniCom
Revisions Previous to 70 -
Before you install earlier Installation Procedure
revisions of OmniCom
software, you must save your OmniCom is delivered on 1.44 Mb, 3½" diskettes in an archived format. To
existing phone directory install, do the following:
entries and setup. For
instructions and any other
assistance you may need, 1) Insert the diskette into your PC's corresponding floppy disk drive.
please contact our technical
support staff at the following 2) Type the respective drive letter followed by a colon (e.g.: A: or B).
phone number:
3) Type Install and press [Enter].
( +1-281-240-6161
The OmniCom installation program will guide you through the rest of the
installation.

Opening a File
Accessing Help in First open an existing Omni-supplied file. Each application and derived files
OmniComâ - At the 'Using come with their own set of templates. You can then 'SAVE AS' to create a new
file to commence your configuration. Each file that you create will occupy
keystrokes. approximately 60 Kbytes of disk space. This includes 36 Kbytes for the
configuration file and 6 Kbytes for each of the four custom report templates.
For Further Help - If you All menu selections are supported by entry-sensitive ‘Help’. No matter where
require further help, call you are, by pressing [F1] you can obtain an explanation of the requirements for
Omni’s technical support at: your entry selection.
( +1-281-240-6161
View
Files can be viewed separately or in parallel with a file that is currently being
edited. This allows you to compare various numeric entries in similar files. This
can be helpful if you are maintaining historical files that track changes you have
made. You may not be able to use the ‘View’ feature with certain variations of
flow computer configuration files because newer firmware include additional
entry fields not available in earlier revisions.
Off-line
You will usually begin in the Off-line Mode to configure your flow computer. It
naturally leads in to the 'Omni Configuration' Menu selections. Only when you
complete this section will you be able to activate the various 'Setup' options and
proceed to establish your calibration ranges and other related data. Before you
begin the configuration of I/O, be sure you know what number and type of
physical I/O has been installed in the flow computer. A mismatch between your
off-line configuration and physical hardware will not make a data upload to the
flow computer meaningful in key areas of your configuration data.
On-line
When you have completed building your configuration database, you are then
ready to upload data to your Omni flow computer. The OmniCom program uses
the Modbusä RTU binary protocol which mandates the use of 8 data bits. Be
sure that the serial I/O parameters in both devices have been properly setup
before attempting to communicate. Baud rate and parity settings are less critical
but must also be the same.
With a direct-connect to a PC, OmniCom will perform an auto baud rate search
and display an error if baud rates are incompatible (see 2.5.16. Serial
Input/Output Settings in Volume 3). Baud rates from 1.2 kbps to 38.4 kbps
are supported. When using a modem, the auto baud rate search is not
performed. In this case, the baud rate is that at which the modem is setup.
Some personal computers may not have the processing power to support the
higher baud rates. Note also that modems are capable of using a higher baud
rate at the RS-232 connector than they are communicating on the telephone
line. If the modems connect but the flow computer does not respond, try
adjusting the flow computer’s baud rate.

Reports
The 'Report' Menu allows you to retrieve snapshot and historical reports from
the flow computer or from your hard disk. These are pre-formatted default
reports that are included in the Omni application software. You can also
customize your own reports from standard templates. By using the on-screen
report editor, you can add or delete text and data character strings which
identify the variable in the computer's Modbusä database. [F1] for help
describes the control functions to enable you to format the report easily. Bring
up a report template and move the cursor onto the 'XXXX.XX' fields. Press
[Enter] and a pop-up menu defines the variable being used. Type or edit text
anywhere, move the cursor and keeping pressed [Shift] as you press [$]
enables you to enter or delete any database address from the report.
Utilities
The ‘Utilities’ Menu has several useful tools for setting up and maintaining
OmniCom. The utilities available are:
q I/O Point Assignment List q Prover/Batch End
q OmniCom Setup Commands
q OmniCom Application q Diagnostics
q Archive Maintenance q Omni Panel
I/O Point Assignment List

When the configuration of your flow computer is complete, you should review
your assignment of physical I/O by accessing the display under 'I/O Point
Assignment List'. An I/O mismatch can result in erroneous calibration ranges
and consequential errors in measurement and control of your metering system!
This utility shows a summary list that indicates what physical I/O points are
assigned to which variables. Point numbers with asterisks '*' next to them are
used for more than one variable. Check the list to ensure you have not assigned
a physical I/O point to more than one transducer type; e.g.: An I/O point cannot
be assigned to a temperature and pressure transmitter at the same time. The
flow computer will not allow this to happen in the ‘On-line’ mode, but OmniCom
does not check for this in the ‘Off-line’ mode.
OmniComâ Setup
This utility allows you to:
q Select the type of video monitor.
q Turn the sound effects on/off.
q Setup the modem command strings.

OmniComâ Application
Use this utility before you start to select the software version of OmniCom that
matches the firmware version number of your Omni flow computer. The
firmware versions are:
US VERSIONS M ETRIC VERSIONS
Turbine / Positive Displacement / Turbine / Positive Displacement /

Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
20 24
Systems (with K Factor Systems (with K Factor
Linearization) Linearization)
Orifice / Differential Pressure Orifice / Differential Pressure
21 25
Liquid Flow Metering Systems Liquid Flow Metering Systems
Turbine / Positive Displacement Turbine / Positive Displacement
22 Liquid Flow Metering Systems 26 Liquid Flow Metering Systems
(with Meter Factor Linearization) (with Meter Factor Linearization)
Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow Orifice / Turbine Gas Flow

23 27
Metering Systems Metering Systems
Archive Start/Stop Command
‹ WARNING! ‹ When this menu is entered, OmniCom tries to establish communications with
the flow computer using the comm parameter settings currently selected in the
Warning: The flow computer 'Start Comm' submenu of the 'Online' menu. It does this to establish the status
will not accept changes made
to the archive setup at the
of the 'Archive' flag and 'Archive Config Enable' flag. Check comm settings if all
time of a 'Transmit Omni items on the menu are inactive; i.e., OmniCom is unable to communicate with
Configuration' upload unless the target computer.
the archiving feature has
been turned off. Any changes made to the flow computers configuration which involves the
format of the data record, number of records in an archive file, or the total
number of archive files within the flow computer, will cause the memory used to
Accessing Help in store the archive data to be reinitialized. This would cause all data stored in
OmniComâ - At the 'Using
Help' feature, press [Enter] archive to be lost. Therefore, no changes to the target flow computers archive
and [F1] for editing configuration will be allowed unless automatic data archiving has been disabled
keystrokes. and the 'Archive Config Enable' flag is on.
For Further Help - If you

require further help, call
( +1-281-240-6161

Prover Commands
Proving features displayed here can only be viewed when communicating
directly with an Omni Flow Computer.
You may monitor or control the operation of a meter prover which is controlled
by a remote Omni flow computer. You must have already established
communications with the flow computer before making this selection. If you
have not established communications with a flow computer you will receive one
of the following error messages:
Byte count does not match expected - OmniCom is confused and thinks
your modem is connected to a flow computer. Try dialing out first.
No response from Omni - You are either not connected to anything or the
slave ID number of the flow computer you are trying to talk to does not
match OmniCom's setting.
Use the 'Shift' key with the appropriate 'Function' key to select the flowmeter
you wish to remote prove.
The 'Status Window' shows the event history and the 'Omni Display' echoes
data shown locally at the Omni flow computer.
Diagnostics
You must be connected and online with a flow computer for this selection to
work. The screen displays diagnostic information about the flow computer
such as number and type of I/O modules fitted, status of digital I/O, current
output percent of analog outputs and raw input signals coming into the flow
computer.
Omni Front Panel Emulator

When this feature is selected, an illustration of the Omni front panel is displayed
by which all the functions of an Omni Flow computer are emulated. Use the
mouse to click on simulated buttons to access real time displays and make
entries. OmniCom is actually displaying the same LCD display buffer
information and the mouse click are actually sending data into the same key
stroke buffer as the front panel keypad. Performance is much better at 9600
baud or higher. You must have setup the baud rate and other communication
settings in the 'Start Comm' menu before you can use Omni Panel.
Help
Accessing Help in You can further customize your Help screens by making use of an on-screen
OmniComâ - At the 'Using editor. Via this feature you can modify Help text by additions or deletions to suit
your own needs and operations. Windows can be resized and repositioned to
keystrokes. suit your own personal preference. This can be particularly useful as an
additional memory aid, if the Operations Manual is not available to you, or if
additional information is required for other users of this program.

Registration of License and Software Support

For Further Help - If you Remember to mail in the registration of your distribution diskette to Omni flow
require further help, call computers. OmniCom is provided with each Omni flow computer on a single-
user license basis. Any additional installations of this program will require re-
( +1-281-240-6161
registration by the user. This will ensure that you will have the opportunity to
receive free telephone support, and notice of program revisions and new add-
on programs for your installation.

ä
Communicating with Allen-Bradleyä
Programmable Logic Controllers
Contents
contained in the User
Protocol and Error Checking......................................................................... 2
Manuals, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions. PLC Supported ............................................................................................... 2
This bulletin was previously
published as an appendix to Flow Computer Database............................................................................... 2
user manuals of firmware 4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of Variable........................................2
revisions Version .70 and 3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the Application .................................3
earlier.
ä Accesses the Omni Flow Computer Database..... 3
How the Allen-Bradleyä
PLC-2 .......................................................................................................................3
Allen-Bradley
Communications - This PLC-3 .......................................................................................................................3
feature allows PLC-5 .......................................................................................................................3
communicating with Allen- Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files ....................................................................4
Bradleyä PLCs. However,
16-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
Omni Flow Computers is not
8-Character Strings ......................................................................................................................... 4
responsible for the operation,
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
connectivity or compatibility
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
of Allen-Bradley products,
Bit Integers ...................................................................................................................................... 4
and furthermore, we do not
16-Character Strings ....................................................................................................................... 4
warrant these products.
32-Bit Integers ................................................................................................................................. 4
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points ............................................................................................................. 4
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers allow
communications with Allen-Bradleyä Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
This technical bulletin refers to communication aspects specific to the Omni
Flow Computer and serves as information only. Please refer to the
manufacturer for any support or information on Allen-Bradley products.

Abstract
The Omni 6000 flow computer provides serial communications between the
flow computer and an Allen-Bradleyä Programmable Logic Controller (PLC),
usually via a KE or KF Communication Module connected to the Data Highway.
Data is transmitted serially at a maximum rate of 38.4 kbps using 8 data bits, 1
stop bit and no parity bit. Average speed of response to a message request is
approximately 75 msec.
Protocol and Error Checking

Both the DFI full duplex protocol and the half duplex protocol are supported.
CRC or BCC error checking can be utilized when using either full duplex or half
duplex.
PLC Supported
The Omni computer supports the following Allen-Bradleyä PLC types and
messages. Note that bit level operations are not supported.
PLC-2 Unprotected Block Reads and Writes
PLC-3 Word Range Reads and Writes
PLC-5 Typed Reads and Writes
SLC-502/3 Unprotected Typed Reads and Writes
Flow Computer Database

Serial Ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 in .71+ firmware revisions support
communications using superset of Modbusä Protocol. This is the native
communications language of the flow computer. Several thousand variables are
available within the Database. The primary numbering system used to identify
these variables is their 'index number'. The actual digits of the index number
indicate the type of variable and in many cases application area within the
computer.
4th and 5th Digit from the Right Identifies Type of

Variable
1??? Variable is a digital status or command bit
3??? Variable is a 16 bit signed integer
4??? Variable is a 8 character ASCII string
7??? Variable is a 32 bit IEEE floating point
14??? Variable is a 16 character ASCII string

TB-960702 ä Programmable Logic Controllers
Communicating with Allen-Bradleyä
3rd Digit from Right Identifies which Area within the

Application
?1?? Variable relates to Meter Run #1
?5?? Variable is scratchpad
?6?? Variable is PID related or scratchpad
?7?? Variable is a command write.
?8?? Variable is related to station functions
?9?? Variable is related to prover functions
ä Accesses the Omni

How the Allen-Bradleyä
Flow Computer Database
PLC-2
This family is usually limited as to the type of data and address range. Data is
always transferred as block reads and writes.
Five translation tables are provided where the user can specify what data within
the database will be concatenated into read or write groups. The starting
address of each data block is selectable.
Note: The PLC2 does not o Translation Tables #1 through #3 are used to set up block reads which
understand 32-bit integer or can contain status points packed 16 to a word, 16-bit or 32-bit integers
32-bit IEEE floating points
but can pass these variable
and IEEE floating points.
types to devices that do o Translation Table #4 is used for block writes of status and command bits
understand them. only. Data is packed 16 to a word.
o Translation Table #5 provides for block writes to any selected data.
PLC-3
This family can use the methods described above as well as 'word range reads
and writes' of any variable within the database (see PLC-5 list for starting
addresses).
PLC-5
This family utilizes 'typed reads and writes' of the complete Database. To
accommodate the PLC-5 'file system’ method of addressing, the Modbus index
numbers serve as the basis of the internal file system of the computers as it
appears to a PLC-5 device. Table below shows typical examples:

MODBUS INDICES VERSUS PLC-5 ADDRESSES

M ODBUS INDEX # PLC-5 ADDRESS ELEMENT SIZE COMMENT
1101 N11:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #1 Status Flags
1217 N12:17 1 Word (16 Flags) Meter #2 Status Flags
1701 N17:01 1 Word (16 Flags) Command Flags
3201 N32:01 1 Word (Integer) Meter #1 Data
3210 N32:10 1 Word (Integer) Offsets track
3901 N39:01 1 Word (integer) Prover Data
4101 B41:01 1 Byte (ASCII) 4 Words per Variable
4102 B41:02 1 Byte (ASCII) 1 Byte per element
5101 N51:01 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable
5102 N51:02 1 Word (Long Integer) 2 Words per variable
5103 N51:03 1 Word (Long Integer) Same again
7401 F74:01 2 Words (IEEE Float) 2 Words per variable
7405 F74:05 2 Words (IEEE Float) Offsets track
Valid Starting Addresses of PLC-5 Files
16-Bit Integers
N10:01 N11:01 N12:01 N13:01 N14:01 N15:01 N16:01 N17:01 N18:01 N19:01
N30:01 N31:01 N32:01 N33:01 N34:01 N35:01 N36:01 N37:01 N38:01 N39:01
8-Character Strings
B41:01 B42:01 B43:01 B44:01 B45:01 B46:01 B47:01 B48:01 B49:01
32-Bit Integers
N51:01 N52:01 N53:01 N54:01 N55:01 N58:01 N59:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F70:01 F71:01 F72:01 F73:01 F74:01 F75:01 F76:01 F77:01 F78:01 F79:01
Bit Integers
N130:01 N134:01
16-Character Strings
B140:01
32-Bit Integers
N150:01
32-Bit IEEE Floating Points

F170:01

Storing Archive Data within the Flow

Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 2 and
Raw Data Archiving........................................................................................ 2
Volume 3, and is applicable
to all firmware revisions 71+. Retrieving Data .........................................................................................................3
This bulletin was previously Raw Data Archive Point Addresses ...........................................................................4
published as an appendix to Archive Configuration Changes .................................................................................5
user manuals of firmware
Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag .................................................................................................. 6
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive ...................................................... 6
earlier.
Defining the Archive Records .......................................................................................................... 6
How The Available Memory Is Allocated....................................................................7
Data Archiving - The Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens ...................................................8
archiving feature allows you Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features ................................................................9
to store raw data, ASCII text
data and historical reports. Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log and Audit Event Log....... 10
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 711 ..................................10
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address 712. ..................................10
Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text Archive Feature .............. 11
Custom Report Templates ........................................................................... 12
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
archiving feature. This feature allows you to archive raw data, ASCII data and
historical reports.

Abstract
Definitions & Terminology The flow computer provides three distinct methods of storing data. These are as
follows:
Archive Address - A unique
Modbusä address used to
read a data record from an
1) Raw Data Archive Data records are defined and stored in raw binary
archive file. These addresses format in circular files of 'n' records per file. Ten
are in the 700 series; i.e., user configurable files are provided as well as an
701, 702, 703, etc. alarm file and audit trail file. This data can be
Archive Record - A retrieved using standard Modbusä Function Codes
structure containing a fixed
set of data variables which 3 and 6.
cannot exceed 250 bytes in
length. Data within the record
2) Text Archive Data ASCII data which is captured and saved whenever a
can be of any valid data type Snapshot, Daily, Batch End or Prove report is
in any order. printed. Data is stored chronologically. To retrieve
Archive Trigger Boolean - this data you must use OmniComä, OmniViewä or
The actual event which a custom Modbus driver which understands the
causes the flow computer to
capture and store a record proprietary Omni Modbus Function Codes 64 and
within the archive file. The 65.
trigger can be any Boolean
variable within the database 3) Historical Reports These are exact copies of data that was sent to the
including the result of a local printer in ASCII format. The flow computer
Boolean statement. stores the last eight copies of each of the following
Block Read - Modbusä reports: Daily, Batch End and Prove.
protocol block read requires
that Function Code 03 (read
multiple registers) be used to Method 3 is limited to storing the last eight reports and is therefore not
retrieve data. considered archive data. Therefore this chapter will be limited to describing how
Circular Archive File - A file Methods 1 and 2 are used to store archive data within the flow computer.
of ‘n’ records arranged as a
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent ‘n’
records; i.e., the oldest data
record is overwritten by each
Raw Data Archiving
new record as it is added.
A maximum of ten archive files can be user configured. Two additional
Current Record Pointer - A
16-bit read-only integer archive files, the alarm archive and audit trail archive are also included but are
register containing a number fixed in format and cannot be user configured.
between 0 and ‘n’,
representing the position of Each user configurable archive file consists of 'n' archive records, where 'n' is
the most recently added defined by the user. A record consists of a time and date stamp followed by a
record within the archive file. number of user defined variables of any valid data type as described by its
The pointer is adjusted after
each complete record is
archive record definition table. The amount of memory an archive consumes is
added. A value of 0 indicates calculated by multiplying the record size in bytes times the number of records in
that no data records have the archive. Associated with each archive file is an archive trigger Boolean.
been added since the last Data is captured and stored in each of the archive files whenever the
initialization of the archive
appropriate trigger occurs; e.g., at the end of a batch or beginning of the day,
memory.
etc. Three additional registers per archive file serve to indicate (a) maximum
(Continues…) number of records, (b) current record pointer and (c) requested record to read
pointer.

TB-960703 Storing Archive Data within the Flow Computer
Retrieving Data
Definitions & Terminology Data records are retrieved one record at a time by writing the number of the
record required, to the requested record pointer register. The data can then
(…Continued)
be accessed immediately by a block read of the archive address. Data must
be read as one complete block. Also, because the flow computer always
Maximum Records responds with a complete record, the 'number of registers' field of the Modbus
Register - A 16-bit read- poll request is ignored by the flow computer.
only integer adjacent to the
‘Current Record Pointer’ The following record retrieval method is simple and efficient; it works well
which contains the number
‘n’, indicating the maximum
assuming that there is only one host device retrieving data. The method
number of records within the assumes that the number of the last record retrieved is left in the requested
archive file. record pointer within the flow computer. This will not be the case when more
Requested Record Pointer than one host device will be retrieving data; in this case each host device must
- A 16-bit read/write integer know the number of the last record it retrieved.
used to select a specific
record within an archive file. 1) Read the maximum records register, current record pointer and
Time and Date Stamp - Six requested record pointer. These registers are adjacent to each other in
bytes of binary data
representing the date and
the flow computers database.
time that the archive record 2) A current record pointer value of 0 indicates that the archive file has
was stored. The byte order is been initialized (i.e. cleared to binary zeroes/ASCII Nulls) and no trigger
as follows:
event has occurred since initialization).
q Byte 1 = Month (1-12) or
Day (1-31) 3) Compare the contents (just read) of the current record pointer with the
q Byte 2 = Day (1-31) or requested record pointer.
Month (1-12)
4) If the records numbers are equal no additional records have been added
q Byte 3 = Year (0-99)
since the last read and no further action is needed.
q Byte 4 = Hour of Day (0-
23) 5) If the record numbers are not equal, increment the value of requested
q Byte 5 = Minute (0-59) record pointer.
q Byte 6 = Seconds (0-59) 6) If the resultant value is greater than the value obtained from the
q European Format maximum record pointer, roll-over has occurred and record number
Selected (dd/mm/yy)
one should be retrieved by writing '1' to the requested record pointer
Valid Data Types -
register. Otherwise write the incremented value to the requested record
q 32-bit IEEE floating point
data pointer register.
q 32-bit long integer data 7) After writing to the requested record pointer register in the flow
q 16-bit integer data computer, the selected archive record can be read immediately using
q 8-byte ASCII string data; Modbus function '3' (read multiple registers). Archive file addresses are in
byte packed Boolean
the 700 area of the flow computers database (i.e., archive file 1 = 701,
status data
archive file 2 = 702 etc.).
8) Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all records are read.
During the normal course of events, the host attempts to read the next record in
sequence based on the number of the last record it retrieved. An archive
record containing binary 0s indicates that the archive has been initialized since
the last read and that the host should restart by reading record number one
(assuming that the current record pointer is not 0).

Raw Data Archive Point Addresses
Archive #1 Record Access Address Read Only 0701

Access Record Date/Time Only Read Only 0751
Maximum # of Records Read Only 3701
Last Record Updated Pointer Read Only 3702
Record Req To Read Pointer Read/Write 3703


Record Req To Read Pointer4 Read/Write 3730
Alarm Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0711
Audit Archive Record Access Address Read Only 0712
Archive Configuration Changes

Archive configuration changes can be made via OmniCom or directly from the
key-pad of the flow computer. As the OmniCom program includes extensive
help screens which document this subject, this appendix will concentrate on
configuring the archive features via the keypad.
From the Display Mode press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]. The LCD screen
displays:
*** SETUP MENU ***

Time/Date Setup
Station Setup
Select 'Misc. Configuration' and press [Enter]. The following displays:
*** MISC SETUP ***

Password Maint?(Y) _
Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
Select 'Password Maint' and press [Enter]. Enter the privileged password
when prompted and scroll down the screen until the following is displayed:
PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Reconfig Archive ? Y
Archive Run?(Y/N) N
Reset All Totals ?

Setting the 'Reconfig Archive' Flag

Any configuration changes that are made to any of the archive files such as
changes to the size or number of records will force the flow computer to
reallocate and clear to zero the RAM memory used to store archive data. To
avoid accidental data loss, the flow computer requires that two entries are
manipulated correctly before changes to the archive configuration can be made.
The 'Reconfig Archive' flag must be set to 'Y’ and the Archive Run' flag must
be set to 'N'.
Possible Loss of Data when Starting and Stopping the Archive

To conserve archive storage, the user may on some occasions wish to set the
'Archive Run' flag to 'N' . This can be done at any time without loss of existing
data as long as the 'Reconfig Archive' flag is not set to 'Y'. If the 'Reconfig
Archive' flag is accidentally set to 'Y' no data will be lost until the 'Archive Run'
flag is set to 'Y' (this allows the user to retrieve data before it is lost).
Defining the Archive Records

After setting the 'Reconfig Archive' flag to 'Y' as described above, press the
[Prog] key once to return to the 'Misc Setup' menu. It will be possible to define
or change any archive file configuration by scrolling down the display until the
following screen is displayed:
*** MISC SETUP ***

Archive File "n" _
Enter a number between 1 and 10 to select a specific archive file to modify (1

for example). The following screen will display:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD

#1 Index 0
#1 Points 0
#2 Index 0
#2 Points 0
Begin entering the data that you require to be archived. The example below will
cause variables 7101, 7102, 7103, 5101, 5102 and 5103 to be archived.
INFO - The ‘Alarm’ and
‘Audit Trail’ archive files are ARCHIVE 701 RECORD
fixed format and cannot be #1 Index 7101
changed.
#1 Points 3
#2 Index 5101
#2 Points 3

A maximum of 16 groups of variables may be included in an archive record.

Data can be of any valid type. The record is limited to a total of 250 data bytes
remembering that the time and date stamp included in each record occupies 6
bytes. Scrolling down the screen displays the following:
ARCHIVE 701 RECORD

Max Records 0
Trig Boolean 0
Circular Archive File - A file Enter the maximum number of archive records to be contained within this
of ‘n’ records arranged as a circular archive file.
circular buffer which always
contains the most recent ‘n’ At the 'Trig Boolean' entry, enter the database address of the Boolean trigger
records; i.e., the oldest data
which will cause the flow computer to store the archive data record. For
record is overwritten by each
new record as it is added. example, entering 1831 (the 'hour start’ flag) would cause the flow computer to
store data at hourly intervals.
Once you have entered all the necessary data for all of the archive records
return to the following screen which is in the 'Password Maintenance' menu.
Reconfig Archive ? Y
Archive Run (Y/N) N
INFO - Redefining the Set 'Reconfig Archive' to 'N' and 'Archive Run' to 'Y'. At this point the flow
archive Boolean trigger does computer will reinitialize archive RAM memory and attempt to allocate memory
not cause the archive RAM
to be cleared.
as configured.
How The Available Memory Is Allocated

Approximately 250,000 bytes of memory are available for the storage of
archived data, this includes 'Raw Data' and 'ASCII Text Data'. Archive memory
is allocated dynamically, i.e. the memory required to satisfy the 'Raw Data
Archive' is allocated first, one archive file at a time. The memory remaining
after the Raw Data Archive files are setup is what is used by the Text Archive
described later.

Checking The Archive File Memory Status Screens

The 'Archive File Memory Status' screens display automatically whenever the
user attempts to re-start data archiving for the first time after reconfiguring the
archive structure. These screens can also be accessed at any time by pressing
'Setup' 'Status' 'Display' while in the display mode. A correctly configured
archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
INFO - The number of files
allocated changes depending ARCHIVE FILE STATUS
on how many archive files Archive Memory OK
have been configured
Files Allocated 3
An incorrectly configured archive structure is indicated by the following screen.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS

Archive Memory Error
Files Allocated 3
Archive memory errors are caused when RAM memory is insufficient for the
number and size of archive files configured. In this case the 'Start Archive'
command is ignored and the flow computer allocates memory to as many
archive files as possible. The number on the 'Files Allocated' line of the display
shows how many files were allocated before the memory ran out.
Scroll down the screen to see the actual number of bytes allocated to each
archive file. All remaining memory not allocated to the 'Raw Data Archive Files'
is allocated to the 'Text Archive' buffer. The display below is typical.
ARCHIVE FILE STATUS

709 ArcSize 10000
710 ArcSize 8192
TextArcSize 100256

Summary 0f Raw Data Archiving Features

o Ten independent archive files are available for user configuration.
o Two additional archive files, the 'alarm event log' and 'audit trail log' are
provided.
o Archive files consist of multiple records in a circular array.
o Mixed types of variable data can be stored in records of 250 bytes
maximum.
o Except for the 'alarm log' and 'audit trail log', content and maximum
number of records in an archive file are configurable.
o Data is read in block form one record at a time.
o Each archive has a unique address (701, 702, 703, etc.).
o Each archive has a set of integer registers used to indicate most current
record pointer, maximum number of records, and required record pointer.
o Data is captured and stored in an archive file whenever the appropriate
trigger event occurs.
o Multiple archive files can be controlled by the same trigger event.
o Empty archive records contain binary 0’s / ASCII Null characters.
o To avoid errors, host devices reading archive data should dynamically
determine the record pointer roll over value based on the number of
record integers read each time from the flow computer.
o Any configuration changes made to the archive setup such as redefinition
of any record or change in the number of records within any archive will
cause all data stored in the entire archive system to be reset. To prevent
accidental erasure of all archived data the user must first halt all
archiving by setting the ‘Archive Run/Halt Flag' to false (0), and setting
the 'Config Archive Flag' to true (1).

Raw Data Archive Definition: Alarm/Event Log

and Audit Event Log
Alarm/Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address

711
Note: Alarm types are:
0 = Log event, sound beeper Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)
and display in LCD any
edge change in bit Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)
identified by field #3.
Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Modbus Index # of alarm or event)
1 = Log event, sound beeper
and display in LCD rising Field #4 1 Byte (Alarm Type - see sidebar)
edge changes in bit
identified by field #3 Field #5 1 Byte (Boolean Value, 1 or 0 representing Alarm or
2 = Event log any edge OK)
change in bit identified
by field #3. No beeper or Field #6 IEEE Float (Value of transducer variable at the time of alarm
LCD display action. or event)
3 = Event log rising edge
changes in bit identified Field #7 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of event or alarm)
by field #3. No beeper or
LCD display action. Field #8 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the event or alarm)
Rising edge change means 0
to1 transition.
Audit Event Log Record Structure: Archive File Address
712.
Field #1 3-Byte Date (MM, DD, YY or DD, MM, YY)

Field #2 3-Byte Time (HH, MM, SS)
Field #3 16-Bit Integer (Event number, increments for each event, rolls
at 65535)
Field #4 16-Bit Integer (Modbus index of variable changed)
Note: Fields 5 and 6 are set Field #5 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value before change - old
to 0.0 when the variable type value)
changed is String. Fields 7
and 8 contain null characters Field #6 IEEE Float (Numeric variable value after change - new
when the variable type value)
changed is NOT a string.
When fields 7 and 8 contain Field #7 16-Char ASCII (String variable value before change - old value)
8 character strings the
remaining 8 characters are Field #8 16-Char ASCII (String variable value after change - new value)
padded with nulls.
Field #9 32-Bit Integer (Volume totalizer at time of change)
Field #10 32-Bit Integer (Mass totalizer at the time of the change)

Using The Custom Reports to Access the Text

Archive Feature
The actual data which will be archived in the 'Text Archive' buffer is identified
within the body of a 'User Custom Report Template'. This is done by enclosing
the data in question between braces '{}' and preceding the opening brace '{'
character with either Boolean 1000 (archive the data identified between the
braces) or Boolean 2000 (print and archive the data identified between the
braces). In the example 'Batch End' report shown below, the first half of the
report will be printed and stored in the 'Text Archive' while the second half of
the report will not print but will be stored in the 'Text Archive'.
X{ Company Name
The user has embedded a Batch Report
Boolean point address 2000
to indicate that the following Date : XX/XX/XX Time : XX:XX:XX Computer ID : XXXXXXX
data enclosed by the ‘{…}’
characters is to be printed Meter ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Product ID XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
and archived.
API Table Selected XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
When embedding the point, Batch Start Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX
set the width=1 Batch Start Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX
and number of decimal Batch End Date XX/XX/XX XX/XX/XX
places=0. Batch End Time XX:XX:XX XX:XX:XX
Batch Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Batch Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Batch Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX}
X{
Opening Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
The User has embedded a Opening Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Boolean point address 1000 Opening Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
to indicate that the following Closing Gross (IV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Closing Net (GSV) BBL XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
data enclosed by the ‘{…}’
Closing Mass LB XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
characters is to be archived Batch Flow Weighted Averages:
only and not printed. Gross Flow (IV) BBL/HR XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
When embedding the point, Temperature Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
set the width=1 Pressure PSIG XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
and number of decimal Flowing Density GM/CC XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
places=0. API @ 60 Deg.F XXXXXX.X XXXXX.X
VCF X.XXXX X.XXXX
CPL X.XXXX X.XXXX
Meter Factor X.XXXX X.XXXX
}
INFO - Data is archived only The template files shown below can be used to archive text data whenever the
when the report is processed report is processed.
for the first time. Reprinting a
stored report does not cause 1) 'FILENAME.TP1' Snapshot Report
any data to be stored in the
archive. 2) 'FILENAME.TP2' Batch Report
3) 'FILENAME.TP3' Daily Report
4) 'FILENAME.TP4' Prover Report

Custom Report Templates

A default selection of files with the extension 'TP?' are created automatically
when OmniCom is installed, They can be found in the 'OMNI2?' subdirectories.
For example the OMNI20 subdirectory contains the following template files:
REV20A.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products

REV20A.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products
REV20A.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products
REV20A.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Double Chronometry
REV20B.TP1 Interval Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP2 Batch Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP3 Daily Report Independent Products
REV20B.TP4 Prove Report Independent Products Normal Pipe Prover
REV20C.TP1 Interval Report Common Product
REV20C.TP2 Batch Report Common Product
REV20C.TP3 Daily Report Common Product
REV20C.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Double Chronometry
REV20D.TP1 Interval Report Common Product
REV20D.TP2 Batch Report Common Product
REV20D.TP3 Daily Report Common Product
REV20D.TP4 Prove Report Common Product Normal Pipe Prover
REV20E.TP4* Prove Report Master Meter Method
REV20M.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Normal Pipe Prover
REV20MC.TP4* Prove Report Mass Meter Proving Double Chronometry
REV20LC.TP4* Prove Report Double Chronometry Viscosity Linearization
REV20LP.TP4* Prove Report Pipe Prover Viscosity Linearization
Note: Templates can only be accessed if they exist; i.e., if you are currently working
* To avoid duplication and on 'FILENAME.OMI' opening the custom templates will just create an empty
conserve disk space file. You must first create a set of templates by copying the appropriate sample
these templates do not templates as follows:
have matching TP1, TP2
and TP3 templates.
Select TP1 though TP3
1) At the OmniCom File menu select 'Shell to DOS'.
from the appropriate set
2) Type the following to create a set of custom templates for a common
(A, B, C or D) above
depending on product system using a full sized pipe prover (assumes Rev. 20.xx
independent or common application):
product.
COPY OMNI20\REV20D.TP? OMNI20\filename.TP?
3) Type EXIT to return to OmniCom.
In the above example OMNI20 is the sub directory which contains all files
related to Application Revision 20. Likewise OMNI24 refers to Revision 24
applications.

Communicating with Honeywellää

ST3000/STT3000 Smart Transmitters
Contents
contained in the User Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview ................................................. 2
Manual, and is applicable to
all firmware revisions. Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
published as an appendix to
ä Handheld Communicator......................................... 3
Using the Honeywellä
user manuals of firmware Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3
earlier. Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 4
Auto Mode ................................................................................................................4
Communication with
Manual Operation .....................................................................................................4
Honeywellä ä Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä ä Transmitter from the Omni Front
ST3000/STT3000 Smart Panel ............................................................................................................... 4
Transmitters - This feature
allows you to communicate
with Honeywell Smart
Temperature and Pressure
Transmitters, via Omni’s H
type Process I/O Combo
Module and using
Honeywell’s DE Protocol. Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers have the
feature of communicating with Honeywellä ST3000 Smart Transmitters. This
feature uses Honeywell’s Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol and requires that an
H Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow computer.
Abstract
Using 'H' Combo I/O Modules, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate with
Honeywellä Smart Temperature and Pressure Transmitters using Honeywell’s
DE Protocol. Up to 4 transmitters can be connected to each 'H' Type Combo
Module, with loop power being provided by the combo module.

Digitally Enhanced (DE) Protocol Overview

Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital '0' = 20 mA and a digital
'1’ = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the '6-byte Broadcast
Mode'. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1 Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte
#6 below belongs)
Byte #6 Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the smart transmitters configuration database. A
transmitter database varies in size from about 90 bytes for a pressure
transmitter to 120 bytes for a temperature transmitter. It takes between 30 and
45 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.

TB-960704 ä ST3000 Smart Transmitters
Communicating with Honeywellä
ä Handheld
Using the Honeywellä
Communicator
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
1) Lower Range Value (LRV) or Zero
2) Transmitter Span or Upper Range Limit (URL)
3) Damping Factor
4) Tag Name
Any changes made to 1, 2 and 3 using the handheld communicator will be
overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not necessary to
calibrate the transmitter output using the handheld communicator. The digital
signal can be calibrated using the normal Omni analog input method described
in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the 'H' Combo module has a set of two LED indicators, one
green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.

Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.
Auto Mode
Connecting an analog mode Honeywell smart transmitter to the computer will
cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to the digital DE
mode, sending out a communication request to the Honeywell transmitter. A
switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will cause the green LED on
the H combo module to pulse steadily indicating that communications have
been established.
Manual Operation
For manual operation, do the following:
1. Disable communications between the Honeywell transmitter and the flow
computer by deleting all I/O point assignments within the flow computer
to that I/O point.
2. Using the Honeywell SFC, SCT or any Honeywell handheld
communicator, press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays
'Change to Analog?'
3. Answer (Yes) by pressing [Enter]. ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed. The
'H' Combo module’s green LED on that channel will stop pulsing.
4. Re-enter the I/O point to cause the Omni to send the communication
request command to the Honeywell and after three command sends the
green LED on the Honeywell module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
ä
Viewing the Status of the Honeywellä
Transmitter from the Omni Front Panel
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following displays:
H1-2 Transmitter
PV% - 25.00
Status IDLE
LRV .0
SPAN 150.0
Damp Sec. .00
Conformity bit 0
SW Revision 2.1
Serial # xxxxxxxx
Transmitter Type GP
URL 3000
ID/TAG PT202
SV .00

H1-2 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Combo Module (H1) and the
channel number on that module (Channel 2 in this case).
PV% : Process variable value in percentage of the transmitter’s

span. A -25.00 displayed on the Omni could mean that
the transmitter is not communicating (see Status
definition below).
Status : There are five status states.
1) OK : Communications between the flow

computer and smart Honeywell transmitter
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has been

assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer attempts to establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow

are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications between the flow

are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 seconds or so.

5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte

Broadcast Mode. Because the flow
computer will not tolerate this mode of
operation, this status display should only
be displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Broadcast
Mode.
LRV : Lower Range Value of the transmitter in engineering

units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius for
temperature transmitters, inches of water for differential
pressure transmitters, and pounds per square inch for
pressure transmitters.
Span : The Span of the transmitter in engineering units (the

Span is the difference between the lower and upper
ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are degrees
Celsius for temperature transmitters, inches of water for
differential pressure transmitters, and pounds per square
inch for pressure transmitters. The flow computer will
display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0%
or a span which would exceed the transmitter’s upper
range limit' (URL).
Damp Seconds : Damping Time of the transmitter output in seconds.
Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. This bit should always be 0 for smart
temperature transmitters.
Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart device.
Serial # : Serial Number of the smart transmitter.
Transmitter Type : Valid transmitter types are:
TT = Temperature Transmitter
DP = Differential Pressure Transmitter
GP = Gauge Pressure Transmitter

URL : Upper Range Limit of the transmitter in engineering

units. The transmitter will not accept configuration entries
which exceed this value.
ID/TAG : ASCII string used to identify the transmitter.
SV : Secondary Process Variable Value expressed in °C. This

represents sensor temperature for pressure transmitters,
and junction temperature for temperature transmitters.
The flow computer may or may not have a value in this
field, depending upon whether the SV is included in the
part of the transmitter’s database which is sent to the
Omni.

Stability Requirements: Final Calibration of

Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 1, and Instructions .................................................................................................... 1
is applicable to Revision
20.70/24.70+.
published with a different Scope
page layout.
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have calibration stability requirements.
Abstract
Because of the temperature sensitivity and bit resolutions of the A/D and D/A
converters, and the high accuracy requirements, it is important that the
following procedures are followed when calibrating flow computer I/O circuits.
Instructions
(1) Adjust the power supply to give 5.05-5.10 volts at backplane test points.
(2) All final calibrations must be performed using the matching set of combo
modules and power supply module (i.e. changing the power supply or
adjusting the voltage during the final calibration requires that a sample
calibration made up to that point be checked. If there is a noticeable
change, all calibrated points should be rechecked).
(3) Before calibrating, eliminate temperature gradient errors by closing the
box and allowing at least 20 minutes for temperature stabilization to
occur. Ensure that unit is not in a high air draft area (i.e. in the path of a
fan or AC duct) Make adjustments such as jumper repositioning quickly.
Wherever possible keep the unit closed to retain internal heat. Board
replacements will require that sufficient time be allowed to achieve
temperature stability.
(4) Observe temperature stability requirements of any equipment used in
the calibration process (i.e., current and voltage generators, digital
voltmeters etc.).
TB-970701 w ALL.70+ 1
Secondary Totalizers Provide Net Volume at

Temperatures Other than 15°°C or 60°°F
Contents
contained in Volumes 2, 3 Database Location of Second Set of Net Totalizer Data Points .................. 2
and 4, applicable to firmware
revisions 20/24.71+ and Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra Totalizers .............................. 2
21/25.71+.
published with a different
page layout.
Scope
All firmware Versions 20/24 and 21/25, Revisions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000
Flow Computers have secondary net totalizers for when more than one
reference temperature is required.
Abstract
Some times it is necessary to provide net totalizers at more than one reference
temperature.
Following are the Modbus data points that are used to provide secondary net
totalizers in the Omni. Secondary totalizers are calculated real time just like the
normal totalizers.
The secondary totalizers are activated by setting up floating point data point
7699 with the secondary reference temperature required. This data point is
initialized to 0 at a cold start up which effectively disables the extra totalizers
and their appearance on the Omni default reports (obviously, 0° cannot be used
as a second reference temperature).
You may set up 7699 with a simple variable statement. For example: 7699=#68
will provide a second set of net totalizers corrected to 68 degrees. You may also
initialize point 7699 via a one time Modbus write. If you choose to use the
statement method you may remove the statement immediately after you enter
it, but you should probably leave it to serve as a document trail.
Note that the Omni initializes point 7699 to 0.0 on a cold boot. A cold boot
occurs after a ‘Clear All Ram’ command is executed.
TB-970702 w ALL.70+ 1
Database Location of Second Set of Net

Totalizer Data Points
CURRENT PREVIOUS CURRENT PREVIOUS
BATCH BATCH DAILY DAY
Meter #1 5196 5198 5197 5199
Meter #2 5296 5298 5297 5299
Meter #3 5396 5398 5397 5399
Meter #4 5496 5498 5497 5499
Station 5896 5898 5897 5899
Keypad Entries Needed to Display the Extra

Totalizers
Secondary totalizers are viewed using the same key presses used to view the
normal net totalizers. For example: pressing [Meter] [n] [Net] or [Net] [Meter]
[n] will display meter ‘n’ net flow rates and totalizers followed by the secondary
net totalizers. Pressing [Meter] [n] [Batch] [Net] will display the batch net
totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer. Likewise, the Station
secondary totals are viewed using the same key presses that are used to view
the normal station net total. Pressing [Net] will display the station net totalizer
followed by the secondary net totalizer. Pressing [Batch] [Net] will display the
station batch net totalizer followed by the secondary batch net totalizer.
2 TB-970702 w ALL.70+
Using Boolean Statements to Provide

Custom Alarms in the Flow Computer
Contents
Scope .............................................................................................................. 1
Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
Example: ..................................................................................................................2
Scope
User Manual Reference - All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
This technical bulletin have the feature of customizing alarms with Boolean statements.
complements the information
all firmware revisions Version
.70+.
Abstract
This bulletin was previously The flow computer automatically records and logs many important alarm events
page layout.
and status changes. These events include transducer ‘Low Alarm and High
Alarm’ states and failure of any transducer connected to the flow computer
which is measurement related.
There are instances however where the flow computer user would like to
monitor other internal or external status events that may have nothing to do with
the measurement functions. These alarms may be the result of a digital I/O
point changing state, or the result of a Boolean logic statement or a variable
statement comparison.
Because of this requirement, the last 16 Boolean statements of the flow
computer serve the dual function of evaluating normal logic expressions, and
also providing user configurable alarm messages. The alarm message text to
be logged and displayed can be entered into the expression fields in any of
these last 16 Boolean statements. These statement numbers are, 1057 through
1072 for flow computers with 48 Boolean statements, and 1073 through 1088
for computers with 64 statements.
Each Boolean statement has an associated status point which is accessed using
the same address as the statement number (Modbus Point 1072 for instance).
The logic state of this status bit normally reflects the logical result of the
statement (1 or 0, true or false). When the statement is used to provide a
custom alarm message it functions in a different manner. To cause an alarm
message to be logged, simply turn on the status point associated with the
message.
TB-970801 w ALL.70+ 1
Example:
In this example, the user wishes to monitor a tank level switch that is connected
to Digital I/O Point #1. When the tank level is high, the level switch applies 24
volts to the digital I/O point.
Digital I/O Point #1 is first assigned to the Dummy Boolean 1700, this reserves
the Point as a digital Input . Modbus Point 1001 will simply follow the digital
level applied to the terminals of digital point #1. Had it been Digital Point #22,
Modbus Point 1022 would be affected.
1025: 1072=1001
Move logic value of Digital I/O #1 into Point 1072.
·
·
·
1072: High Level Alarm
Actual ‘alarm text’ which appears in alarm log.
Statement 1025 (above) is used to transfer the logic state of Digital I/O Point #1
to Point 1072, activating the user alarm whenever 24 volts is applied to the
input terminals by the ‘tank high level’ switch contacts.
2 TB-970801 w ALL.70+
ä Database:
Omni Flow Computer Modbusä
Overview
Contents
contained in Volume 4 ä Database Extents...................................... 4
“Modbus Database
Address and Index I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni Equipment....................... 12
Numbers”, applicable to all For Example:.................................................................................................................................. 12
firmware revisions .70+.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06 ............................................................12
published with a different Address Ranges - Future Expansion .......................................................................12
page layout.
Modbus Database -
Modbus function codes are
shown in hexadecimal
Scope
th
notation. The 4 digit (from All firmware revisions Versions 70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
the right) of the data point
address defines the data
are characterized by a Modbus database structured as described in this
type. technical bulletin.
TB-970802 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
The following are the data types within the database:
Digital Flag Bits : Also known as Boolean bits, status bits and
command bits. All data points of this type can
be read via Modbus function code 01 and
written to using function codes 05 and 0F .
Function codes 01 and 0F transfer byte
packed data that is sent in the byte order they
are prepared (not word order). Points are
packed eight to a byte, packing from least
significant to most significant Unused bit
positions within a byte are cleared on
transmission from the Omni and ignored by
the Omni when receiving.
Writing to status points is allowed but
normally is pointless as the status point will
be refreshed by the Omni every 500 ms.
Valid addresses for this type of data are:
1XXX i.e. 1101, 1705, 1921 etc.
16-bit Integer Registers : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function code 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte then LS
byte.
X3XXX i.e. 3121, 13133 etc.
8-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available on this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
4XXX i.e. 4101, 4502 etc.
32-bit Integer Registers : Formatted as two’s complement. All data

points of this type can be read via Modbus
function 03 and written to using function
codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: MS byte of MS
word, LS byte of MS word, MS byte of LS
word then LS byte of LS word.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X5XXX
i.e. 5101, 15205 etc.
2 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
TB-970802 ä Database: Overview
32-bit IEEE Floating Point : All data points of this type can be read via
Modbus function 03 and written to using
function codes 06 and 10.
Byte order transmitted is: Mantissa Sign
bit/Exponent byte, LS Exponent bit/MS
mantissa byte, middle significant mantissa
byte then LS mantissa byte.
Valid addresses for this data type are: X7XXX
i.e. 7210, 17006 etc.
16-character ASCII Strings : All data points of this type can be read via
function code 10 (note that function code 06
is not available for this data type).
Byte order transmitted is as you would type it.
14XXX i.e. 14001, 14022 etc.
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 3
ä Database
Extents
Data within the Omni Flow Computer data base is organized in logical groups.
Certain data written to the Omni requires special processing to occur in the
Omni before it is stored in the data base. Other data is grouped together
because it is related in function i.e. a collection of real-time data for a specific
process.
The list that follows shows the extent of each table or set of data points within
the data base. Because the sets of data are not connected, data from adjacent
sets cannot be read or written in the same poll.
ä Database Extents
APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
DATA POINT
DATA TYPE FUNCTION CODES COMMENTS
ADDRESS
(HEX)
Used to Read/Write
03 User-defined read only packet - Omni
native mode.
00001 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User-defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
00201 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
native mode.
00401 Mixed
03 (06) (10) User defined array - Modicon
compatible.
#1 User defined data archive record -
0701 Mixed 03
Firmware Revisions .70+.
0702 Mixed 03
0703 Mixed 03
0704 Mixed 03
0705 Mixed 03
0706 Mixed 03
0707 Mixed 03
0708 Mixed 03
0709 Mixed 03
#10 User defined data archive record
0710 Mixed 03
- Firmware Revisions .70+.
4 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
ä Database Extents (Continued)

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
DATA POINT FUNCTION CODES
DATA TYPE (HEX) COMMENTS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
Alarm/Event Log archive record -

0711 Mixed 03
Audit Log archive record - Firmware
0712 Mixed 03
Revision Versions .70+.
1001
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
1099
1101
to Status 01
1199
1201
to Status 01
1299
1301
to Status 01
1399
1401
to Status 01
1499
1501 Point 1600 is a dummy point
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF) included to concatenate tables 15XX
Command
1699 and 16XX.
1701
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
1799
1801
to Status 01
1899
1901
to Status 01
1999
1301
to Status 01
1399
2001 Reserved for Future Expansion -
to Status 01 currently will return error exception
2100 02 (illegal data address).
2101
to Status 01
2199
2201
to Status 01
2299
2301
to Status 01
2399
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 5

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
2401
to Status 01
2499
2701
Status &
to 01, (05), (OF)
Command
2799
2801
to Status 01
2899
3001
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3099
3101
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3199
3201
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3299
3301
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3399
3401
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3499
3501
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3599
3601
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3699
3701
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3799
3801
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3899
3901
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Register
3999
6 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)

8-character
to 03, (10) currently will return error exception
ASCII String
4101
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4199
4201
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4299
4301
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4399
4401
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4499
4501
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4599
4601
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4699
4701
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4799
4801
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4899
4901
8-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
4999
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10) currently will return error exception
2s Complement
5101
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5199
5201
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5299
5301
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5399
5401
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5499
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 7

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
5501
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5599
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
32-bit Integer
2s Complement
5801
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5899
5901
32-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
2s Complement
5999
6001
32-bit IEEE Applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 22/26.71+ only.
6099
6101
32-bit IEEE 32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point Revision 23.70+ only).
6199
6201
to 03, (06), (10)
6299
6301
to 03, (06), (10)
6399
6401 32-bit, 2s Complement (Firmware
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10) Revisions 23.70+ and 22/26.71+
Floating Point
6499 only).
6501
to 03, (06), (10)
6799
6801
to 03, (06), (10)
6899
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
7001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7099
7101
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7199
8 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
7201
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7299
7301
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7399
7401
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7499
7501
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7599
7601
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7699
7701
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7799
7801
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
7899
7901
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 20/24.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
8499
8501
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8599
8601
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8699
8701
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8799
8801
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
8899
8901
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 20.71+ and 22/26.71+ only.
8999
9001
ASCII Text Maximum of sixty-four 128-byte
to 41, (42)
Buffers buffers per data point .
9499
9500
Reserved for Future Expansion - currently will return error exception 02
to
(illegal data address).
13000
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 9

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
13001
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13299
13301
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13399
13401
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13499
13501
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13599
13601
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13699
13701
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13799
13801
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13899
13901
16-bit Integer
to 03, (06), (10)
Registers
13999
14001
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14099
14101
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14199
14201
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14299
14301
16-character
to 03, (10)
ASCII String
14399
14400
to
15000
15001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
15299
15300
to
17000
10 TB-970802 w ALL.70+

APPLICABLE
M ODBUS
ADDRESS
Used to
Read (Write)
17001
32-bit IEEE
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point
17399
17401
32-bit IEEE Not applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 22 & 26.
17499
17501
32-bit IEEE Not applicable to Firmware Revisions
to 03, (06), (10)
Floating Point 21/25 & 22/26.
17899
32-bit IEEE
Floating Point
18101
to 03, (06), (10)
18199
18200
to
49999
TB-970802 w ALL.71+ 11
I/O Driver Concerns When Interfacing to Omni

Equipment
Most but not all of the data is grouped in blocks of 100 or so data points. These
blocks in many cases are not connected.
Limit requests for contiguous data across different blocks by examining the third
digit from the right of the data point start and end addresses. If the digit is
different break up the poll request.
For Example:
An application requires data from points 7188, 7201 and 7210 to be read and
displayed on screen. An intelligent I/O driver may determine that it is more
efficient to read 23 data points starting with point 7188 and discard the unused
data. In this particular example the Omni will transmit the data for points 7188
through 7199 and blank data will be returned for data points 7200 through 7210
because the data requested is in two different blocks within the Omni. To obtain
the data correctly the I/O driver should determine that point 7188 and point
7201 are in different data blocks (because the third digit from the right changed
from a 1 to a 2) and send out two data requests; one request for point 7188 and
another for points 7201 through 7210.
Write Single Variable - Modbus Function 06

Omni software revisions 20.44 and greater implement this function on all 16-bit
and 32-bit data points. Revisions prior to 20.44 implement function 06 on 16-bit
integers only. To maintain compatibility with early Omni software revisions it
may be advisable to use function 10 to write to single data points as well as
multiple data points.
Address Ranges - Future Expansion

Some of the address ranges specified in this document encompass more data
than may be available on all applications at this time, Omni advises that for
future compatibility any software driver developed should be able to support
these address ranges.
12 TB-970802 w ALL.70+
Meter Factor Linearization
Contents
contained in Volume 2 and Meter Factor Linearization Function...........................................................................2
Volume 3, applicable to
Firmware Revision
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions.................................................3
22.70+/26.70+. This bulletin
was previously published
with a different page layout.
Scope
Firmware Revisions 22.70+ and 26.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Meter Factor Linearization. This feature applies
to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with Meter
Factor Linearization).
TB-970803 w 22/26.70+ 1
Abstract
Meter Factor Linearization Function

Flowmeter performance varies depending upon flow rate and fluid viscosity.
The flow computer can compensate for this variation in performance by
applying a meter factor which is determined by interpolation of a ‘base meter
factor curve’. The user develops this base meter factor curve by proving the
flowmeter at various flow rates and determining the meter factors for those flow
rates.
A base meter factor curve must be developed for each product or fluid
viscosity. The curve can consist of from one to twelve meter factor / flow rate
points.
The MF is continuously adjusted for Prove Base

flowrate during a delivery. The MF is Flowrate
‘flow weight’ averaged for the batch.
Meter Factor
The flow computer lifts or lowers MF’s are normalized to the

the MF curve based on the MF ‘Prove Base Flowrate’ for
obtained at the latest official validation / comparison and
flowmeter proving. historical archival purposes.
Flowrate
Fig. 1. Base Meter Factor Curve
2 TB-970803 w 22/26.70+
TB-970803 Meter Factor Linearization
Meter Factor Validation and Control Chart Functions

The second purpose of the base meter factor curve is also to act as a reference
against which any meter factors developed during subsequent provings of the
flowmeter can be compared. As an aid to this comparison the user specifies the
base proving flow rate. This value is the flow rate which is considered to be the
normal for the flowmeter concerned. For comparison purposes, each
subsequent meter factor is normalized to the base proving flow rate and must
pass two tests before it can be implemented. The first test checks that the
calculated meter factor is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
base curve.
The second test verifies that the meter factor when normalized to the base
proving flow rate is within some maximum percentage deviation from the
historical average of the last ‘n’ meter factors. Only normalized and
implemented meter factors are included in the historical average. The number
‘n’ can be one through 10.
Test 2 - Maximum Deviation Meter Factor at

Allowed From The Average Actual Flowrate
of The Last ‘n’ Meter Factors (Passes Test 1)
Historical Average of
Last ‘n’ Meter Factors
Base MF Curve
Test 1 - Maximum Deviation Meter Factor Normalized to

Allowed From Base Curve Prove Base Flowrate
(Fails Test 2)
Fig. 2. The Function of the Meter Factor Base Curve
TB-970803 w 22/26.71+ 3
Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and

Energy: Using Gas Chromatograph, Product
Overrides or Live 4-20mA Analyzer Inputs of
Specific Gravity and Heating Value
Contents
complements the information Abstract ........................................................................................................... 2
contained i nVolume 3 ,
Basic Calculation
s ......................................................................................... 2
applicable to Revision
23.71/27.71. Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the Calculation of Net Volume
This bulletin was previously and Energy ..................................................................................................... 2
page format. Density of Air at Base Condition ..............................................................................2
s
Gas Relative Density (SG .).......................................................................................3
Gas Heating Value (HV )............................................................................................3
Natural Gas Net Volume
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Neede .................................................................3
d
and Energy Calculation -
Natural gas net volume and No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Require ...........................................................
d 3
energy calculations apply to Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograp ..................................................
h 4
all gas flow computers, Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Dat ...................................................................
a 4
(firmware Revisions Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Lin .............................................................................
k 4
23/27.71) shipped after July Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or Carbon Dioxid .........................e 4
1997. These calculations are
considered using a gas
chromatograph, product
overrides, or live 4-20 mA
analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating
Scope
value (HV). Firmware Revisions 23.71+ and 27.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Calculation. This feature applies to Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems.
This bulletin covers natural gas net volume and energy calculations using a gas
chromatograph, product overrides, or live 4-20 mA analyzer inputs of specific
gravity (SG) and heating value HV).(
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+ 1
Abstract
Gas compositional data needed by the flow computer to calculate flowing
density, mass flow and energy flow of natural gas can be obtained from various
sources. The following describes how the flow computer should be configured
for each possible scenario.
Basic Calculations
The basic calculations are:
q Net Volume = Mass Flow / Density @ Base Conditions (1)
q Energy = Net Volume x Heating Value (2)
Density at Base Conditions can be obtained by one of the following methods:

q (GC Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (3)
q (Override Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (4)
q (Live 4-20mA Relative Density) x (Density of Air @ Base Conditions) (5)
q Calculated using Detailed Method of AGA 8 (6)
Heating Value is obtained using one of the following methods:

Heating Value Calculation - q GC Analysis HV (7)
The flow computer always
calculates Heating Value q Manual Override HV (8)
using one of the mentioned q Live 4-20mA HV (9)
standards, even if it is
instructed not to use it. q Calculated using AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
These calculated values are (component analysis required) (10)
stored in the data base and
can be used to compare
against the values obtained Component Analysis Data is obtained from one of the following sources:
from the GC or calorimeter.
7629=Mtr #1 calculated HV q Online Danalyzer or Applied Automation Gas Chromatograph (11)
7630=Mtr #2 calculated HV q Manual Overrides in the ‘Fluid Data Analysis’ menu (12)
7631=Mtr #3 calculated HV
7632=Mtr #4 calculated HV q Serial Communication Link (13)
q Live 4-20mA SG, HV, N2 and CO2
(AGA 8 gross calculation methods only) (14)
Critical Configuration Entries Which Affect the

Calculation of Net Volume and Energy
Density of Air at Base Conditions

This entry is in the ‘Factor Setup’ menu. Setting this entry to ‘0’ ensures that
‘gas density at base conditions’ is calculated using AGA 8. (method (6) previous
page). Entering the ‘density of air at base conditions’ assuming a valid ‘gas
relative density (SG)’ is available (see next paragraph) will override the AGA 8
calculation of ‘gas density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base
conditions’ is calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
2 TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
TB-970804 Calculation of Natural Gas Net Volume and Energy
Gas Relative Density (SG)

This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘SG’
for all AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation methods except for 1985 method #4. The data
in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten by a live 4-
20mA input of ‘SG’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘SG’ override if
a GC is providing ‘gas relative density (SG)’ and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to calculate ‘gas
density at base conditions’ using AGA 8. (method (6) previous page). Entering
the ‘gas relative density (SG)’ assuming a non zero ‘Density of Air @ Base
Conditions’ is entered (see above) will override the AGA 8 calculation of ‘gas
density at base conditions’. In this case ‘gas density at base conditions’ is
calculated using either method (3), (4) or (5) (previous page).
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas
relative density (SG)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.
Gas Heating Value (HV)

This entry is located in the ‘Fluid Analysis Data’ menu. One entry per active
product is required. It is mandatory that this field contain a valid value of ‘HV’
for AGA 8 ‘gross’ calculation method #1 and also AGA 8 1985 methods #2 and
#4. The data in this field can be manually entered or, automatically overwritten
by a live 4-20mA input of ‘HV’ if it exists. This entry also serves as the GC ‘HV’
override if a GC is providing ‘gas heating value (HV)’ and a GC failure occurs.
Entering a minus value in this field will force the flow computer to use a
‘calculated gas heating value (HV)’ calculated using either AGA 5, GPA 2172 or
ISO 6976 ( method (10) previous page). Entering a positive value into the ‘gas
heating value (HV)’ entry will override the AGA 5, GPA 2172 or ISO 6976
calculation of ‘gas heating value (HV)’.
When an AGA 8 detailed method is selected and a GC is used to provide ‘gas
heating value (HV)’, this entry field is ignored unless a GC failure occurs and
the ‘GC Fail Code’ entry is set to ‘Use Override on GC Failure’.
Key Analyzer Setup Menu Entries Needed

The following text discusses only those key entries that must be made to ensure
that the right values for component analysis are used in the calculation of Net
Volume and Energy Flow.
No Gas Chromatograph Used - Manual Overrides Required

Select ‘Always Use Fluid Data Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer
Setup’ menu. No other entries are needed.
TB-970804 w 23/27.71+ 3
Component Analysis Data Obtained From a Gas Chromatograph

Select either ‘Never Use Fluid Data Overrides’ or ‘On Fail Use Fluid Data
Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu to ensure that the
GC data is used in place of the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ overrides’.
Using the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. To ensure that the
heating value and relative density calculated by ‘GC’ are used in the
calculations, make sure that component numbers are assigned for the
‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu.
The number entered is not critical, simply use the next consecutive numbers
after all the other components are numbered.
Ignoring the ‘GC’ Heating Value and Relative Density. Entering ‘0’ for the
component number for ‘Heating Value’ and ‘Specific Gravity’ entries in the
‘Analyzer Setup’ menu causes the flow computer to ignore the heating value
and relative density sent by the GC and to use the override values entered
in the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis Data’ menu.
Using Manual Overrides for Component Analysis Data

Activate the ‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ entries by selecting ‘Always Use Fluid Data
Overrides’ for ‘GC Fail Code’ in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu. No other entries are
needed in the ‘Analyzer Setup’ menu.
Enter the compositional analysis data values into the appropriate fields in the
‘Fluid Data & Analysis’ menu.
Component Analysis Data via a Serial Data Link

Compositional analysis data values should be written into the appropriate
Modbus points normally containing the manual overrides in the ‘Fluid Data &
Analysis’ menu.
Using Live Inputs for Heating Value, Specific Gravity, Nitrogen or

Carbon Dioxide
In the ‘Station Configure’ menu, assign valid I/O points where 4-20mA and/or
Solartron 3096 gravitometer signals will be connected. Input valid scaling
factors in the ‘Station N2 / SG Setup’ menu.
Note that override data fields in ‘Product #1’ entries of the ‘Fluid Data &
Analysis Data’ menu are overwritten by live data values when 4-20mA inputs
are used for HV, SG, N2 or CO2.
4 TB-970804 w 23/27.71+
Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity

Checking
Contents
contained in Volumes 1, 3
Installation Practices...................................................................................... 2
and 4, and is applicable to
firmware revisions 20/24, How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity Checking .................................. 3
22/26 and 23/27 Versions
.71+, relating to helical Correcting Errors ........................................................................................... 3
turbine flowmeters. Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients.........................................................3
This bulletin was previously Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse.....................................................3
page layout. Total Failure of a Pulse Channel ...............................................................................4
Alarms and Displays ...................................................................................... 4
Pulse Fidelity Checking -
The dual pulse fidelity
checking feature allows you
to reduce flowmeter
measurement uncertainty Scope
caused by added or missing
pulses due to electrical Firmware Revisions 20/24, 22/26 and 23/27 Versions.70+ of Omni 6000/Omni
transients or equipment 3000 Flow Computers have the feature of Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking. This
failure.
feature applies to Turbine/Positive Displacement Liquid and Gas Flow Metering
Systems.
TB-970901 w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+ 1
Abstract
The object of dual pulse fidelity checking is to reduce flowmeter measurement
uncertainty caused by added or missing pulses due to electrical transients or
equipment failure. Correct totalizing of flow must be maintained whenever
possible. This is achieved by correct installation practices and by using turbine
or positive displacement flowmeters which provide two pulse train outputs. In
addition, an E Combo I/O Module must be installed and the correct
configuration settings entered in the Omni Flow Computer.
The two pulse trains are called the ‘A’ pulse and the ‘B’ pulse. In normal
operation, both signals are equal in frequency and count but are always
separated in phase or time. The API Manual of Petroleum Measurement
Standards (Chapter 5, Section 5) describes several levels of pulse fidelity
checking ranging from Level E to Level A. Level A is the most stringent
method, requiring automatic totalizer corrections whenever the pulse trains are
different for any reason.
For all practical purposes, Level A as described in the API document is
probably unachievable. The Omni Flow Computer implements a significantly
enhanced Level B pulse security method by not only continuous monitoring and
alarming of error conditions but also correcting for obvious error situations, such
as a total failure of a pulse train or by rejecting simultaneous transient pulses.
No attempt is made to correct for ambiguous errors, such as missing or added
pulses. These errors are detected, alarmed and quantified only.
Installation Practices
When using pulse fidelity checking, it is assumed that the user begins with and
maintains a perfect noise free installation. The user must ensure that each
pulse train input to the flow computer is a clean, low impedance signal which
will not be subject to extraneous noise or electromagnetic transients. Any
regular occurrence of these types of events must cause the equipment and/or
wiring to be suspect and investigated. Pulse fidelity check circuitry is not
intended to facilitate continued operation with a poor wiring installation which is
prone to noise or transient pickup.
2 TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
TB-970901 Dual Pulse Flowmeter Pulse Fidelity Checking
How the Flow Computer Performs Fidelity

Checking
Hardware on the E Combo I/O Module of the Omni Flow Computer continuously
monitors the phase and sequence of the two pulse trains. It also monitors the
frequency of the pulse trains. The flow computer determines the correct
sequence of flowmeter pulses based on the time interval between pulses rather
than the absolute phase difference. It does this by comparing the leading edges
of both pulse trains at a set clock interval of 16 microseconds. Maintaining a
minimum phase shift between the pulse trains (as indicated below) ensures that
related pulse edges of each channel are, in worst case, at least 5 clock samples
apart.
M AXIMUM PULSE M AXIMUM PHASE

INPUT FREQUENCY SHIFT REQUIRED
1.5 kHz 45 degrees

3.0 kHz 90 degrees
6.0 kHz 180 degrees
Correcting Errors
Missing or added pulses to either pulse train are considered ambiguous errors
and cannot be corrected. However, they are detected with a 100% certainty and
will be counted, eventually causing an alarm. Totalizing will continue using the
A Pulse Train.
Common Mode Electrical Noise and Transients

INFO - A certainty of 85% is Common mode electrical noise and transients occur at the same instant in time
a conservative specification. (during the same clock period) on each pulse channel. They are detected with a
Tests on production units
show that a 95% detection is
certainty of 85%*. The certainty can never be 100% because of the slight
a more typical proportion. differences in time (approximately 2 microseconds) that it takes each pulse to
This is due to the time skew travel through its associated input circuitry. These simultaneous pulses are not
between pulse channels used to totalize flow but are counted and will cause an alarm.
being closer to 1 msec than 2
msec.
Noise Pulse Coincident with an Actual Flow Pulse

It is possible that a common mode noise pulse can occur during the same
sample period as an actual flow pulse. In this case, the pulse would be
detected, alarmed and rejected for totalizing, causing a missing pulse.
Statistically though, worst case at 3 kHz pulse input frequency, the odds are
approximately 20:1 that the pulse should be rejected. To not reject the pulse
would mean accepting 20 times as many extra flow pulses. The 20:1 ratio is
based on the ratio of the periodic time of the flow pulses divided by the periodic
time of the sample period (e.g.: 333.3msec / 16msec approximately equals 21).
TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+ 3
Total Failure of a Pulse Channel

A total failure of either pulse train will be detected with a 100% certainty. The
flow computer will alarm this condition and continue totalizing with the
remaining pulse train as recommended in API MPMS (Chapter 5, Section 5).
Alarms and Displays

To avoid spurious nuisance alarms such as can occur when flow begins, pulse
fidelity checking is disabled until the incoming frequency exceeds a user preset
frequency. Any differences in the two pulse trains will then be accumulated and
used to trigger an alarm when a user preset value is exceeded. Error
accumulations can be displayed or printed at any time. They are reset only at
the start of a new batch. Alarms are time tagged and recorded in the historical
alarm log.
4 TB-970901w 20/24//22/26//23/27.70+
ä TDC3000
Systems
Contents
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO................................................ 2
all firmware revisions FTA Array Points ......................................................................................................3
Versions .71+. 32-Bit Long Integer Variables .......................................................................................................... 3
Configuring The Omni Flow Computer ......................................................................4
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup ...............................................4
Communication Options
with Honeywell TDC3000 Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet Data Within The Omni.......4
Systems - The Omni flow Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to Scratchpad Variables...........6
computer can communicate
with Honeywell TDC3000 Communication Method 2: Programmable Logic Gateway (PLCG) ............ 6
Systems via SIO modules in Selection of Communication Method............................................................ 8
combination with APM or
HPM modules. PLCG or
CLM modules communicate
directly with the Omni.
Scope
MVIP Testing - The Omni
flow computer has been All firmware revisions Version .71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers
tested by Honeywell Phoenix
have the capability of communicating with Honeywellä TDC3000 Systems. This
as part of their MVIP
certification program. is a new feature that requires specified communication modules.
Contact Honeywell at:
( (602) 313-5830
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 1
Abstract
This technical bulletin addresses the various serial communication options that
can be used to transfer data between Omni flow computers and Honeywell
TDC3000 systems. The hardware equipment used and the limitations of each
method are also discussed.
Three types of serial communication modules are available:
1) Serial I/O (SIO) module in combination with either an Advanced Process
Manager (APM) or High Performance Process Manager (HPM) module.
2) Programmable Logic Controller Gateway (PLCG)
3) Communication Link Module (CLM)
MVIP testing was performed using an Omni 6000 and Honeywell module types
(1) and (2) above. Due to the unavailability of equipment and time constraints,
tests were not performed using the CLM module. After MVIP testing it was the
opinion of the Honeywell engineer that communications with the more powerful
and flexible CLM module would pose no problem to the Omni. The nature of the
types of tasks performed by the CLM module usually mean that a certain
amount of custom I/O driver programming is the norm. This being the case, the
CLM is the most flexible but also most expensive connectivity option.
Communication Method 1: APM / HPM - SIO

Honeywell engineers state that with regard to serial communication there are no
differences between the APM-SIO connection and the HPM-SIO connection.
This document will target the APM system but all discussion will also apply to
the HPM system.
The APM is a I/O rack system used to get I/O signals into the DCS system. It is
comprised of a plug in APM processor module and various other serial I/O,
analog I/O and digital I/O plug in modules. The APM rack system can be
expanded by adding one or more additional racks. Assuming open slots are
available, up to 16 SIO modules can be connected to each APM system. Each
SIO module is connected to the target equipment via a Field Termination
Assembly (FTA). Each FTA has 2 serial ports with each port individually
configurable as either an RS232 port or 2 wire RS485 port. Port characteristics
are as follows:
q Modicon compatible Modbus RTU protocol
q Maximum baud rate of 19200 kbps
q Data bits 8
q Stop bits and parity selectable
2 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
TB-980201 ä TDC3000 Systems
FTA Array Points

Each FTA has a maximum amount of memory space allocated by the APM.
This memory is organized in 16 blocks called Array Points. In addition, each
HPM or APM is limited to 80 Array points in total that must be shared between
all the SIO modules in its rack system. Each Array Point can therefore hold 512
bits of data and can hold one type of data variable.
Each Array Point can therefore be configured as one of the following:
512 Coils or Status points.
32 16 bit Short Integer registers
16 IEEE Floating point variables
16 32 bit Long Integer variables (see below)
With a maximum of 16 array points available per FTA it can be seen that data
consolidation and grouping becomes very important. Typical TDC3000-Omni
systems will require a mixture of data types to be exchanged, this further
complicates the configuration process. The user must take care not to waste
valuable memory space by partially filling array points. Try to minimize the
types of variable (e.g.: if you only need to read a few short integers consider
converting them to long integers within the flow computer using variable
statements). The limited number of array points also impacts how many Omni
flow computers can be connected (multi dropped) to each FTA for example:
Most applications require long integer totalizers, IEEE floating point values and
also alarm statuses. This means that at least 3 array points will be needed per
Omni and that assumes that 16 IEEE floats, 16 totalizers and 512 alarms will be
sufficient to transfer all the data needed by the TDC3000 system (extremely
unlikely, as there could be up to 4 meter runs configured).
32-Bit Long Integer Variables

Long integer types are not supported directly by the TDC3000 system. They can
be read as 2 concatenated 16-bit short integers and combined within the
TDC3000 system. The Honeywell cannot write to Omni long integer types
because the Honeywell SIO Modbus protocol does not support Modbus function
code 16 (write multiple registers) for integer registers. The protocol does
however support writing to IEEE Floating point variables. Omni’s experience
has shown that there are very few instances where the TDC3000 system needs
to write long integers within the flow computer. Typical long integer data that
there has been a need to write in the past has been duplicated in IEEE floats as
shown below and on following page.
Long Integer IEEE Float
Meter #1 - Current MF in Use 5113 7796
Station Running Batch Size 5819 7787

Station Next Batch Size 5820 7783
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 3
Long Integer IEEE Float

Meter #1 - Next Batch Size 5820 7783
Meter #2 - Running Batch Size 5825 7788



Configuring The Omni Flow Computer

Setup the flow computer serial port settings to match the Honeywell FTA
settings and make sure to select ‘Modicon Compatible’.
In view of the Honeywell array point limitation it is important to group the data
as efficiently as possible within the Omni flow computer. Two options are
available:
1) Custom data packet arrays
2) Move data to flow computer scratchpad variables using Variable
Statements
Method 1 must be used if it will be necessary to both read and write into the
variables. Method 2 can only be used when it is only necessary to read data.
Data Grouping Option (a) Custom Data Packet Setup

The Omni flow computer has 3 custom data packet areas where data can be
grouped. These 3 data areas are addressed starting at Modbus addresses
0001, 0201 and 0401. Configure these data areas by completing the custom
packet setup menus in the flow computer.
When the Omni serial port is set as being ‘Modicon Compatible’ the custom
packet data is read / write accessible by the TDC3000 system. Unlike the FTA
arrays, the Omni does allow mixed data types within a custom data
packet/array. This means that multiple FTA array points can be associated with
one custom packet.
Modbus Function Codes Used to Access Custom Packet

Data Within The Omni
The Omni supports the following Modbus function codes to access custom
packet data:
Read Multiple Registers 03
Write Multiple Registers 16
Write Single Register 06
4 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
From the above it can be seen that Boolean variables must be handled
differently when grouped within a custom array. They cannot be accessed using
the normal Modbus function codes 01, 05 and 15. They can be read and written
but as byte packed bits within Registers not as Coils and Status bits. For this
reason it is recommended that writes to Boolean coils be accomplished by using
the normal Modbus function code 05 and writing directly to the database
Boolean point address.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ Here is an example showing a typical setup using the custom packet located at
address 0001:
Because Boolean data is byte
packed the user must ensure ADDRESS FTA ARRAY # USED
that the number of Booleans
included in the custom
Packet #01 Point # ………… 7101 0001 - 0016 1
packet are grouped in such a # of Points ………… 8 Total 16 Floats
way as to ensure that the Packet #02 Point # ………… 7201 0017 - 0032 1
packet always contains an # of Points ………… 8
even number of bytes (i.e. Packet #03 Point # ………… 7301 0033 - 0048 2
the function codes we are # of Points ………… 8 Total 16 Floats
using expect to be dealing Packet #04 Point # ………… 7401 0049 - 0064 2
with ‘registers’ and you can’t
# of Points ………… 8
have half a register).
Packet #05 Point # ………… 5101 0065 - 0072 3
Packet #06 Point # ………… 5201 0073 - 0080 3
# of Points ………… 4 Total 16 Long Int.
Packet #07 Point # ………… 5301 0081 - 0088 3
Packet #08 Point # ………… 5401 0089 - 0096 3
Packet #09 Point # ………… 3101 0097 - 0100 4
Packet #10 Point # ………… 3201 0101 - 0104 4
# of Points ………… 4 Total 16 Short
Int.
Packet #11 Point # ………… 3301 0105 - 0108 4
Packet #12 Point # ………… 3401 0109 - 0112 4
Packet #13 Point # ………… 1105 0113 - 0115 5
Packet #14 Point # ………… 1205 0116 - 0118 5 Total 24 Packed
# of Points ………… 48 Bytes
Packet #15 Point # ………… 1305 0119 - 0121 5
Packet #16 Point # ………… 1405 0122 - 0124 5
Packet #17 Point # ………… 0
# of Points ………… 0 These packets are available but
Packet #19 Point # ………… 0 are not used in this example.
The above shows a total of 32 floating points,16 long integers, 16 short integers
and 192 Boolean status bits packed in 24 bytes being mapped in 1 custom data
packet and 5 FTA arrays.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 5
Data Grouping Option (b) Variable Statement Moves to

Scratchpad Variables
Option (b) is limited to when data needs to be read but not written to. Non
contiguous data is moved into the flow computer scratchpad variables located
at:
Boolean Scratchpad Variables 1501 through 1699
Integer Scratchpad Variables 3501 through 3599
String Scratchpad Variables 4501 through 4599
Long Integer Scratchpad Variables 5501 through 5599
Floating Point Scratchpad Variables 7501 through 7599
User Boolean statements are used to group Boolean bits as follows:
Example:
1025: 1501=1105:1169 Move 64 bits to 1501 through 1564
1026: 1565=1205:1269 Move 64 bits to 1565 through 1628
User variable statements are used to move all of the remaining data types as
follows:
Example:
7025: 7501=7101:7103 Move 3 floats to 7501 through 7503
7026: 7504=7201:7203 Move 3 floats to 7504 through 7506
Communication Method 2: Programmable

Logic Gateway (PLCG)
The PLCG is meant to receive ‘register’ data from PLCs representing unscaled
analog values and 16-bit counters. Functionality is built into the PLCG which
allows the user to easily scale analog inputs of 0-9999 or 0-4095 into
engineering units. Alarm points can also be entered and monitored. This
philosophy is at odds with the Omni flow computer as the vast majority of the
variables within the flow computer are in engineering units requiring no scaling
or alarm checking in the PLCG. In addition most of the data is contained in
IEEE floating point format or 32-bit long integer values.
The Modbus protocol supported by the PLCG unlike the APM-SIO module does
not support reads or writes of IEEE floating point data. The protocol also does
not support multiple register writes which would be required to write data to a
flow computer long integer type.
The PLCG can however be configured to scale other nominal ranges such as 0-
999 of which there are some variables of this type within the flow computer as
shown below:
Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station
Current Gross Flow Rates 3142 3242 3342 3442 3804
Current Net Flow Rates 3140 3240 3340 3440 3802
Current Mass Flow Rates 3144 3244 3344 3444 3806
Current S&W Corrected Flow Rates 3149 3249 3349 3449
Current Temperature 3147 3247 3347 3447 3809
Current Pressure 3146 3246 3346 3446 3808
Current Analog Density 3148 3248 3348 3448 3810
6 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Counter inputs ranging from 0-65535 are treated more generically requiring no
scaling and are usually used for display purposes or are passed to an
Application Module (AM) for processing.
There are two options to monitor totalizing within the Omni flow computer:
1) Read long integer totalizers as two consecutive counter inputs and
combine in the Application Module (AM) as follows:
Totalizer = (high register * 65536) + low register
2) Read specially provided 16 bit integer non-resetable totalizers that roll at
65536 within the Omni data base shown below.
Mtr#1 Mtr#2 Mtr#3 Mtr#4 Station
Gross Totalizer 3143 3243 3343 3443 3805
Net Totalizer 3141 3241 3341 3441 3803
Mass Totalizer 3145 3245 3345 3445 3807
S&W Corrected Net Totalizer 3150 3250 3350 3450
The advantage of option (1) above is that any of the internal totalizers of the
flow computer can be read in this manner and the results displayed by the
TDC3000 system will match the flow computer displayed values. Option (2) is
limited to one set of non-resetable totals which are not normally displayed at the
flow computer and are of limited use.
Using ‘Variable Statements’ within the Omni flow computer makes it easy to
convert just about any variable within the flow computers data base into a 16-
bit register that can be ‘read’ by the PLCG as either a counter or an analog
(assuming the data will fit), the only problem being the availability of enough
variable statements (64 are provided).
Example 1: Variable read as counter for display only

7025: 3501=7105*#10 3501 contains M #1 temperature in tenths of
degrees
Example 2: Variable read as unscaled analog 0-4095 representing 50 to 150 °F

7026: 7105-#50 Adjust for 50 degree zero point
7027: 3502=7026*#40.95 100 degree span = 4095, move to scratch
integer 3502
Note that in Example 2 above, no attempt was made to limit the impact of over
or under range values passed to the PLCG. It is the authors understanding that
inputs outside of the expected range cause ‘bad process value’ alarms in the
PLCG.
TB-980201 w ALL.71+ 7
Selection of Communication Method

Analysis of the various methods available shows that communications via the
APM-SIO or HPM-SIO are most likely to provide the best solution, providing
reasonable access to the flow computer’s database and requiring no custom
driver programming in the TDC3000 system. Because of the awkward
philosophical fit between the PLCG and flow computer type devices, many of
the built in features of the PLCG (such as scaling and alarming) cannot be
used. For this reason the use of a PLCG is not recommended except for
instances where one already exists in a system and has an open port and an
APM or HPM is not available. The CLM module is potentially the most flexible
solution but the cost impact of any custom software driver development must
be determined. Omni does not know whether a compatible protocol driver
exists at this time, please contact Honeywell for more information in this regard.
8 TB-980201 w ALL.71+
Date: 02 23 98 Author(s): Kenneth D. Elliott / T.J. Tajani / R.L. Stallard TB # 980202
Recalculating a Previous Batch within the

Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volume 2, Calculations Performed ................................................................................. 2
Chapter 3 “Computer
Batching Operations”, Using the Flow Computer Keypad to Recalculate a Previous Batch
applicable to Revision Ticket .............................................................................................................. 3
20.71/24.71+.
Step 1.......................................................................................................................3
Step 2.......................................................................................................................3
Batch Recalculation - The Step 3.......................................................................................................................3
batch recalculation feature
allows you to adjust
Step 4.......................................................................................................................4
quantities of the previous 4 Step 5.......................................................................................................................4
batches at measurement
locations where SG60/API60
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus Database ........................... 5
and S&W values only Previous Batch Data that Is Writable .........................................................................6
become available after the
batch has been delivered.
Conclusion ..................................................................................................... 7
Scope
Firmware Revisions 20.71+ and 24.71+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow
Computers have the feature of Batch Recalculation. This feature applies to
Turbine/Positive Displacement/Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering Systems (with K
Factor Linearization.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 1
Abstract
The purpose of recalculating a previous batch is to make batch quantity
corrections based on SG60/API60 and Sediment and Water data becoming
available via sample analysis performed after a batch delivery is complete. At
measurement locations where SG60/API60 and S&W values are not available
online, sampler devices continuously extract a representative sample of fluid
during a batch. At the end of the batch the sample container is sent for lab
analysis. The data obtained from the analysis report can then be used to
recalculate the batch correction factors and therefore batch quantities. Historical
data from these analysis reports is also used to determine what values of
SG60/API60 should be used for real time calculation of future batches that are
known to have similar characteristic. These batches ultimately can also be
recalculated when their actual analysis is determined.
Calculations Performed
q The liquid correction factors Ctl and Cpl are first recalculated using the
sample analysis SG60/API60 and the batch flow weighted average
temperature and pressure calculated during the batch.
q Gross Standard Volume (GSV) is recalculated using the newly calculated
Ctl and Cpl.
q The Sediment and Water correction factor Csw is calculated using the
sample analysis S&W%.
q Net Standard Volume (NSV) is recalculated using the recalculated GSV
and Csw factor.
2 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
TB-980202 Recalculating a Previous Batch within the Flow Computer
Using the Flow Computer Keypad to

Recalculate a Previous Batch Ticket
‹ CAUTION! ‹
To ensure that previous Step 1
batch data is correctly
recalculated do not Press [Prog] [Batch] [Meter] [n] [Enter] (n = meter run number). The Omni
recalculate a batch close to LCD screen will display:
ending a current batch in
progress.
TIP - Note that only 4 lines METER #1 BATCH

can be displayed at one time.
Use the scroll up or down Print & Reset ?
arrows keys to display Select Prev# Batch 1
additional text. Enter API60 .0
Enter SG60 .0000
Enter %S&W .00
Recalculate&Print?
Step 2
Select which previous batch you wish to recalculate. The Omni stores the last 4
completed batches numbered as:
1 = last batch completed

to
4 = oldest batch completed.
¯] to scroll down to “Select Prev # Batch” and enter a number between

Press [¯
1 and 4, depending upon which batch is to be recalculated.
The flow computer moves the selected previous batch data to the ‘previous
batch’ data points within the database (see explanation later in this document)
Step 3
Enter Password when requested.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 3
Step 4
Scroll to either “Enter API60” or “Enter SG60”. Type in a valid value and press
[Enter].
Step 5
Scroll to “Recalculate & Print?”. Press [Y] and then [Enter].
At this time the flow computer will recalculate the batch data and send the
report to the printer and the ‘Historical Batch Report Buffer’ in RAM memory.
Batch report data can also be captured in ‘Raw Data Archive RAM’ using the
trigger Boolean 1n76. The default batch report shows the batch number as
XXXXXX-XX where the number ahead of the ‘-‘ is the batch number (5n90) and
the number after the ‘-‘ is the number of times that the batch has been
recalculated (3n52). Variable (3n52) is reset to ‘0’ at the end of a batch and
increments each time the batch is recalculated.
4 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
How the Flow Computer Manages the Modbus

Database
A pointer mechanism has been utilized which avoids having to have duplicate
data points for every batch report variable for each of the four previous batches.
Only one set of data points for previous batch data are mapped within the
Modbus database. A pointer register is used to determine which set of previous
batch data will be available by accessing the previous batch data points within
the Modbus database.
Using the batch gross totalizer variable as an example, we have:
Note: The second digit of the q Modbus address of Current Batch in Progress – Gross Totalizer is 5n01
index number (indicated as
“n”) defines which meter run q Modbus address of Previous Batch – Gross Totalizer is 5n50
you are working with (i.e., n q Modbus address of Pointer register to select which previous batch is
= 1, 2, 3 or 4).
mapped is 3n51
As the batch progresses, the gross totalizer (5n01) accumulates flow. At the end
of the batch the flow computer performs the following actions:
1) #3 previous batch data replaces #4 previous batch data
4) Current batch data replaces #1 previous batch data
5) Pointer register 3n51 is set to the value ‘1’ so that the Modbus database
addresses for previous batch will access data for the batch just ended.
This ensures that the batch report which prints immediately at the end of
a batch and gets it’s data from the Modbus database, includes the
correct information.
The following table (using the batch gross totalizer as an example) shows
typical data that would be read by accessing Modbus points 5n01 and 5n50.
The data read depends upon the value of pointer register 3n51.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 5
CURRENT 1ST PREV. 2ND PREV. 3RD PREV. 4TH PREV.

STEP DESCRIPTION BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH
5n01 5n50 5n50 5n50 5n50
Value contained in
Pointer register 1 2 3 4
3n51.
1 First batch running. 12340 0 0 0 0
2 First batch ended. 23450 12340 0 0 0
Second batch
3 34560 23450 12340 0 0
ended.
4 Third batch ended. 45670 34560 23450 12340 0
Fourth batch ended.

5 56780 45670 34560 23450 12340
Fifth batch ended

6 with sixth batch 6123 56780 45670 34560 23450
running.
Previous Batch Data that Is Writable

Except for the data listed below, all data points for previous batch transactions
are ‘read only’ for reasons of data integrity.
M ETER #1 M ETER #2 M ETER #3 M ETER #4 STATION

SG 60 or Reference
Density (Rev. 24.71)
8508 8608 8708 8808 8908
API 60 Gravity 8519 8619 8719 8819 8919

Sediment and Water
Percentage (BS&W)
8517 8617 8717 8817 8917
Command Boolean which
triggers the recalculation
2756 2757 2758 2759 1798
6 TB-980202 w 20/24.71+
Conclusion
Note: Setting these registers The flow computer retains data for the last four completed batches. Only one
via Variable Statements is set of this data can be accessed at a time. Pointer registers, 3151 Meter Run
not allowed and will not
produce the expected results
#1, 3251 Meter Run #2, 3351 Meter Run #3, 3451 Meter Run #4n and 3879 for
Meter Station are used to determine what set of batch data will be accessed.
API60/SG60 and S&W data can be adjusted and the batch recalculated by
writing a ‘1’ to points, 2756 for Meter Run #1, 2757 for Meter Run #2, 2758 for
Meter Run #3, 2759 for Meter Run #4 and 1798 for Meter Station.
TB-980202 w 20/24.71+ 7
Peer-to-Peer Basics
Contents
contained in User Manual, Determining Which Computer Will Be Master .............................................. 2
and is applicable to all
firmware revisions Version Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer Link ..................................... 3
.70+.
This is an updated edition
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master Systems................................. 3
that replaces previously Wiring Options ............................................................................................... 4
published bulletins under the
same title. RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ................................................................................4
See also the following: RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements ...................................................5
q TB-980402 - Using the RS-485 Wiring Requirements....................................................................................6
Peer-to-Peer Function in a
Setting up Transactions ................................................................................ 8
Redundant Flow
Computer Application What Modbus Function Codes Are Used...................................................... 8
q Volume 1 - 1.6.3. Serial
Communication Modules Special Considerations when ‘Modicon Compatible’ is Selected for Port
#2..................................................................................................................... 8
Peer-to-Peer
ä Coriolis Mass Meters ................... 9
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motionä
Communications - The The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device ........................................11
peer-to-peer communication
feature allows you to multi-
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions .................................................. 11
drop up to 32 flow computers
and other devices in RS-485
serial communications mode,
and up to 12 using RS-232-C
communications.
Scope
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy
Schemes - Redundancy All firmware revisions Version .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
schemes allows for have the Peer-to-Peer Communication feature.
uninterrupted measurement
and control functionality by
interconnecting two
configured flow computers.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
Communications between Omni flow computers is accomplished using the
peer-to-peer function. This function is available only on Serial Port #2 with data
being transmitted and received using Modbus RTU protocol. A data transaction
list within each flow computer defines each Read or Write operation to be
transacted for that computer. A maximum of 16 transactions per flow computer
are available. The transaction list must be contiguous (i.e., an empty
transaction will be treated as the end of list).
Two optional serial communication I/O modules are available with your flow
computer: the RS-232-C (compatible) Model #68-6005, and the RS-232-C/RS-
485 Model #68-6205. The older Model #68-6005 is only capable of RS-232
compatible serial communications. The newer Model #68-6205 is capable of
either RS-232 or RS-485 communications via a selection jumper. When
jumpered for RS-232, the characteristics and functionality of this module is
identical to that of the older RS-232-C module.
Determining Which Computer Will Be Master

Each flow computer wishing to communicate must temporarily become a
Modbus Master so that messages may be initiated and its transaction list
processed. This is accomplished when the current Modbus Master completes its
transaction list and broadcasts the Modbus address of the next computer to be
the master. The computer with the Modbus ID which matches the broadcast
then assumes mastership and proceeds to process its transaction list. A time-
out occurs whenever the next master in sequence does not take mastership and
the broadcast will be retried once. Should the computer still fail to respond, the
current master will attempt to pass mastership to the next computer in
sequence by incrementing the Modbus ID by one and re-broadcasting the new
Modbus ID. Each flow computer needing to process a transaction list (i.e., be a
master) requires the following three entries: (1) Next Master in Sequence; (2)
Last Master in Sequence; and (3) Retry Timer (50mS ticks).
These entries are in the Peer-to-Peer Setup menu and function as follows:
Entry 1 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the next flow computer master. A
non zero entry here is what actually turns on the peer-to-
peer function. Modbus ID’s for master devices in the link must
be assigned starting at 1, and for maximum efficiency not contain
any missing ID’s (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, Not 1, 3, 6, 10, for instance).
Entry 2 : This entry is the Modbus ID for the last flow computer master.
Any master failing to find the ‘next master’ will keep trying
Modbus ID’s until it reaches this ID, it will then start the search
again at Modbus ID 1.
Entry 3 : This entry is used to setup the communication retry rate. When
the peer-to-peer link is solely comprised of Omni flow computers
this entry should be set to 3 ticks (150 msec).
2 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
TB-980401 Peer-to-Peer Basics
Communication Settings for the Peer-to-Peer

Link
The following settings must be used:
q Modbus RTU Protocol
q 8 Data Bits
q 1 Stop Bit
q No Parity
While slower baud rates can be used, 38.4 kbps or 19.2 kbps will provide
maximum performance.
Foreign Modbus Devices and Single Master

Systems
INFO - It is important to note The peer-to-peer function is not limited to multiple Omni flow computers. Some
that in a peer-to-peer system, applications simply require a single flow computer master to communicate with
only the flow computers that
have a non-zero entry for
a variety of Modbus slave devices which may be flow computers, PLC’s etc. In
‘Next Master in Sequence’ these cases, the entries 1 and 2 above would be set to 1 in the master flow
are limited to using Serial computer only, signifying only one master is in the system. Entry 3 above would
Port #2, all of the other flow normally be set to 3 but may need to be increased depending upon the
computers are simply acting message response time of any foreign Modbus devices in the system.
as Modbus slaves and can
use any valid Modbus serial
port.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 3
Wiring Options
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring requirements using the RS-232-C
termination option. When multiple flow computers are used as peer-to-peer
masters, they are connected in two-wire, multi-drop mode.
INFO - The Omni Flow
Computer uses a proprietary
‘tristatable’
RS-232-Compatible serial
port, which unlike a normal
RS-232 port, can be multi- Omni #1 Omni #2 Omni #3 Omni #4
dropped, interconnecting up TB3 TB3 TB3 TB3
to 12 flow computers or other (TB2) (TB2) (TB2) (TB2)
serial devices.
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12
Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements using the

RS-232-C Termination Option
4 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows a typical installation where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC via an RS-232 to RS-485 converter module.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4 RS-232 to 485
5 5 Converter
(Disable Echo) PLC
6 6
R
7 7 R TX-A A S
8 8 S TX-B B 4
2 8
9 9 RX-A
3 5
10 10 2 RX-B
11 11
12 12
Fig. 2. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using a Standard RS-232 to RS-485 Converter Module
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 5
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

Multivariable Transmitting The diagram below shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485
Devices - In addition to the communications, where four flow computers are interconnected in a two-wire,
multi-drop mode.
have an MV Module to
communicate with
This serial module is
jumpered to IRQ 3 when
used in combination with an
MV Module. Without an MV Omni #1 Omni #2 Omni #3 Omni #4
Module, the jumper is placed TB3 TB3 TB3 TB3
at IRQ 2. The MV Module (TB2) (TB2) (TB2) (TB2)
can only be used with this
serial module (68-6205) and 1 1 1 1
is not compatible with the 2 2 2 2
Serial I/O Module # 68-6005.
For more information, see 3 3 3 3
Technical Bulletin # TB- 4 4 4 4
980303.
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
(B) (B) (B) (B)
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
(A) (A) (A) (A)
11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Non-terminated Non-terminated Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
6 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
The peer-to-peer communication link may also be used to transfer data to and
from any other Modbus slave device such as a PLC. The following diagram
shows a typical installation using RS-485 where two flow computers are
connected to a PLC in a two-wire, multi-drop mode.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
PLC
6 6
(B) (B) R
7 7 B
S
8 8 A 4
9 9 8
10 10 5
(A) (A)
11 11
12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Non-terminated
Fig. 4. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with PLC

using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-drop
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 7
Setting up Transactions
To process a transaction the flow computer requires the following data for each
transaction:
Modbus Broadcast Slave ID : The Modbus address of the target device.
Address ‘0’ - This address This can be any valid Modbus address
only applies to write
transactions.
including the broadcast address ‘0’.
Read or Write : Select the appropriate operation.
Source Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the source device. For a read
operation the slave is the source. For a write
operation the source is the Omni flow
computer master.
Number of Points : The number of consecutive data variables to
transfer between devices, starting at the
source point number or address.
Destination Point Number : Specifies the data base address of the
variable in the destination device. For a write
operation the slave is the destination. For a
read operation the destination is the Omni
flow computer master.
What Modbus Function Codes Are Used

The flow computer decides what Modbus function code will be used depending
upon the Omni flow computer data type specified in the transaction.
Transactions involving short or long integers or IEEE floats will use Modbus
function codes 03H for reads and 10H for writes. Boolean variables are packed 8
to a byte starting at LS bit and use function codes 01H for reads and 0FH for
writes.
Special Considerations when ‘Modicon

Compatible’ is Selected for Port #2
Some adjustments to the previous entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-to-
peer port.
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to

the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to

transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
8 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
ä
Using Peer-to-Peer with Micro Motionä
Coriolis Mass Meters
The Omni flow computer can be configured to accept mass or volume pulses
from a Micro Motion (MM) Coriolis Meter RFT transmitter as well as
communicate via Modbus to the device and obtain variables such as fluid
density and MM transducer alarm status.
The flow computer is equipped with special firmware code to make the interface
to the Micro Motion meter more useful and hopefully simpler. The
communication link between the Micro Motion meter and the flow computer is
via the peer-to-peer link. It is possible to have multiple Micro Motion meters
connected to multiple flow computers as shown below.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3 Micro
(TB2) (TB2) Motion
RFT #2
1 1 R
2 2 S
3 3 27 (Z22) 4
4 4 RS-232 to 485 26 (D22) 8
Converter 5
5 5
(Disable Echo)
6 6 R
R TX-A 27 (Z22)
7 7 S
8 8 S TX-B 26 (D22) 4
2 8
9 9 3 RX-A 5
10 10 2 RX-B
Micro
11 11 Motion
12 12 RFT #1
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27

correspond to the explosion-proof
field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 5. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT Transmitters using a RS-232 to RS-485 Converter
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 9
The following diagram shows a typical peer-to-peer installation using RS-485,

where two flow computers are connected to two Micro Motion RFT9739
transmitters via a proprietary RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module #68-6205.
Micro Motion Eliteâ â Model
RFT9739 Transmitter
Connectivity - Both field-
mount (explosion-proof) and
rack-mount models of the
RFT9739 transmitter have
the A and B channels
reversed to the industry Omni #1 Omni #2
standard applied to Omni Note: Termination resistors
TB3 TB3 may be required with some
flow computers; i.e., the flow
computer’s A channel
(TB2) (TB2) installations.
connects to Micro Motion’s B 1 1
channel. Omni has tested
this connectivity with the 2 2
Micro Motion RFT9739 Field- 3 3 Micro Micro
Mount Transmitter, but Motion Motion
connecting to the rack-mount 4 4 RFT9739 RFT9739
version has not yet been 5 5
tested. Information on this
#1 #2
connectivity has been 6 6
(B) (B)
provided by Micro Motion, 7 (B) 7 (B) 26 (D22) 26 (D22)
Inc. Please contact Micro
Motion for further 8 8
Y
information. 9 9 120W
10 10 (A) (A)
(A) (A)
11 11 27 (Z22) 27 (Z22)
12 12
Note: Termination Points 26 & 27
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire correspond to the explosion-proof
Terminated Non-terminated field-mount RFT9739; and (D22)
& (Z22) to the rack-mount version
of the model.
Fig. 6. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements with Micro

Motion RFT9739 Transmitters using the RS-485 Two-wire Multi-
drop.
10 TB-980401 w ALL.70+
The Micro Motion Meter is a Modicon Compatible Device

Some adjustments to the peer-to-peer entries are needed when communicating
with devices that require ‘Modicon Compatible’ to be selected for the peer-to-
peer port (Serial Port #2).
1) All data base point addresses (whether source or destination) referring to

the foreign Modicon compatible device, should be entered as one less
than the point address listed. This is needed because the Modicon device
automatically adds one to the address received over the data link and
subtracts one from the address before transmitting. References to data
base point addresses within the Omni flow computer master still use the
normal point address as shown in the Omni documentation.
2) The number of points entry becomes the number of 16 bit registers to

transfer, rather than the number of data variables.
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer Transactions

Note: Meter Run #1 Density The following peer-to-peer transaction reads the flowing density of the fluid
I/O point must be assigned to from the Micro Motion device (Modbus ID #2) and stores it in data base point
‘99’ and Serial Port #2 must
be assigned to be ‘Modicon
7108 (unfactored density, meter run #1).
Compatible’ for this to work
correctly. Note also that the Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2
MM Modicon documentation
manual lists the flowing Read/Write ? ...…..... R
density as point number Source Point # ...…..... 248
20249. This is common with
Modicon compatible devices. # of Points ...…..... 2
Where there is a 5 digit Destination Pnt # ...…..... 7108
address, drop the first digit
and subtract 1 from the point
address before using it in a The next transaction reads a 16-bit integer register from the MM meter which
transaction. contains packed alarm status bits. These are stored in a special register within
the flow computer which causes them to be time and date tagged, printed and
logged just as though they were flow computer alarms.
Transaction #2 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2

Read/Write ? ...…..... R
Source Point # ...…..... 0
# of Points ...…..... 1
Destination Pnt # ...…..... 3118
The examples above refer to Meter #1 transactions that the flow computer is
requesting. More transactions may be needed depending upon what data is
required and how many meter runs are being used.
TB-980401 w ALL.70+ 11
Date: 04 07 98 Author(s): Kenneth E. Elliott / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980402
Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a

Redundant Flow Computer Application
Contents
contained in User Manual, RS-232-C Wiring Requirements ..................................................................... 2
firmware revisions Versions RS-485 Wiring Requirements......................................................................... 3
.70+.
This is an updated edition of
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant Flow Computer Applications . 3
the bulletin previously Sensing Failures and Switching between Redundant Computers.............. 5
published under the same
title. Changing the Master / Slave Status via a Modbus Serial Port .................... 6
Redirecting the Control Signals .................................................................... 6
Peer-to-Peer Redundancy Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow Computers 7
Schemes - Redundancy
schemes allows for Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs.................................................................... 7
uninterrupted measurement
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary and Secondary Flow
and control functionality by
interconnecting two Computers ...................................................................................................... 7
configured flow computers.
Scope
All firmware revisions Versions .70+ of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers
have the Peer-to-Peer Communications feature, which is available only on
Serial Port #2. This features includes the capability of setting-up redundant flow
computer schemes.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 1
Abstract
Redundancy involves using two identically equipped flow computers and
connecting them in such a way to ensure uninterrupted measurement and
control functionality in the event of failure of one of the units. This requires that
all input and output signals are connected to both computers. During normal
operation, one computer is designated the primary and the other computer the
secondary or backup. To ensure synchronization between both devices,
important variables such as PID controller settings, control valve positions and
proving meter factors must be transmitted from the primary flow computer via
the peer-to-peer link to the secondary flow computer. Should a failure of the
primary flow computer occur, the secondary flow computer is automatically
promoted to primary and assumes all control and measurement functions. In
this case the data flow on the peer-to-peer link reverses automatically and the
new master begins to transmit critical data to the slave, assuming that it is
functioning. Peer-to-peer communication errors can occur during the switch
over and are normal. They are cleared by pressing the [Ack] key on the flow
computer keypad or writing to point 1712 (acknowledge station alarms). If the
other flow computer is non-operational, the peer-to-peer communication errors
cannot be cleared.
RS-232-C Wiring Requirements

The following diagram shows the wiring needed when flow computers are
applied in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the
proprietary RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005. They are connected
in a two-wire multi-drop mode.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Fig. 1. Omni 6000 (3000) Peer-to-Peer Wiring Requirements (RS-232-C

Serial Port)
2 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
TB-980402 Using the Peer-to-Peer Function in a Redundant Flow Computer Application
RS-485 Wiring Requirements

The diagram below shows the wiring needed when flow computers are applied
in a redundancy scheme via the peer-to-peer feature and using the proprietary
RS-232/485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205. They are connected in a multi-
drop mode using the RS-485 two-wire termination option.
Omni #1 Omni #2
TB3 TB3
(TB2) (TB2)
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
(B) (B)
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
(A) (A)
11 11
12 12
RS-485 Two-wire RS-485 Two-wire

Terminated Terminated

RS-485 Two-wire Termination Mode in a Redundant Flow
Computer Scheme
Setting Up the Peer-to-Peer for Redundant

Flow Computer Applications
The ‘Activate Redundancy Mode’ entry is found in the peer-to-peer setup menu.
Answering ‘Yes’ causes the ‘Next Master’ and ‘Last Master’ entries to disappear
from the menu. They no longer need to be entered as the two flow computers
now manage these two entries automatically. Any data needing to be
synchronized between the flow computers will need to be setup by the user as
transactions in the peer-to-peer menu.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 3
Two transactions are needed to handle redundant PID control:

Transactions #1 & #2 -
Both primary and secondary Transaction #1 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2
flow computers must have
these entries if they will be
Read/Write ? ...…..... W
used for PID control. Source Point # ...…..... 13462
q Transaction #1: Sends NO of Points ...…..... 8
the primary flow computer
PID control mode settings
(Auto/Manual,
Local/Remote) to the Transaction #2 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2
secondary flow computer.
q Transaction #2: Sends
the primary flow computer Source Point # ...…..... 7601
PID set points and valve NO of Points ...…..... 20
position values to the
More peer-to-peer transactions are needed if additional data needs to be

transferred, meter factors for example.
Flow computers containing firmware Revisions 22 or 26 handle meter factor
implementation differently than Revisions 20 or 24. These applications
maintain historical meter factor entries which are triggered and stored when the
meter factor is accepted and implemented at the end of a meter proving. As
only the primary flow computer will be doing the actual proving, three special
variables with associated firmware code have been added to the data base of
revisions 22 and 26. By writing to and reading from these variables via the
peer-to-peer link, the secondary flow computer can implement the meter factor
result obtained when the primary computer completes and accepts a prove
result.
The following two transactions are required:
Transactions #3 & #4
(Applicable to Firmware Transaction #3 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2
Versions 22 & 26 Only) -
Both primary and secondary
flow computers must have Source Point # ...…..... 5904
these entries. NO of Points ...…..... 2
q Transaction #3: Used to
send the prove meter
factor (5904) and the
number of the meter last Transaction #4 Target Slave ID ...…..... 2
proved (5905) to the
Read/Write ? ...…..... R
q Transaction #4: Source Point # ...…..... 5906
O
Confirms that the meter N of Points ...…..... 1
factor has been
implemented in the
secondary flow computer
by reading back a copy of
the number of the meter
run just proved (5906).
4 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Sensing Failures and Switching between

Redundant Computers
Setting Up Peer-to-Peer When ‘Activate Redundancy’ is selected in the peer-to-peer menu, data base
Transactions - For each variables are activated to provide a redundancy switching mechanism which is
transaction, the flow
computer requires the
accomplished by cross connecting 4 digital I/O points from each flow computer
following data (see TB# (primary and secondary).
980401, ‘Peer-to-Peer
Basics’): These database variables are:
q Target Slave ID: Modbus 2863 Watchdog status for this computer. Goes true 5 seconds after
database address of
target device.
initialization and remains true as long as the flow computer is
q Read/Write?: ‘Read’ (R) functioning correctly.
selects slave as source 2864 Mastership status for this flow computer. True whenever this flow
device and master as computer is the primary or master computer in the redundancy
destination device. ‘Write”
(W) selects master as scheme.
source device and slave 2713 Watchdog status input from the other flow computer. This flow
as destination device. computer will assume mastership if it sees this point go false.
q Source Point #:
Specifies database 2714 Mastership status input from the other flow computer. This flow
address (or first address computer will relinquish mastership if it sees this point go true.
in sequence) of data to
transfer from source to
destination device.
O
q N of Points: Total
number of consecutive
database addresses in
sequence to transfer.
q Destination Point #:
Specifies database Omni #1 Omni #2
address (or first address TB1 TB1
in sequence) in 1 1
destination device of data 2 2
received from source
3 3
device.
4 4
5 5
Redundancy Failover 6 6
Wiring - Any 4 digital I/O
7 7
points may be used to
provide a failover switching 8 8
Other Master Status (2714) Others Master Status (2714)
mechanism. Fig. III.8-3 is an 9 9
example that shows digital Master Status (2864) Master Status (2864)
10 10
I/O 9 through 12 being used Others Watchdog (2713) Others Watchdog (2713)
11 11
Watchdog Out (2863) Watchdog Out (2863)
12 12
TB11 TB11
+ +
- -
Fig. 3. Omni 6000 / 3000 Redundancy Failover Wiring
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 5
Changing the Master / Slave Status via a

Modbus Serial Port
Sometimes it may be necessary to force a swap of primary (master) and
secondary (slave) flow computers. For example, if both primary and secondary
flow computers are functioning correctly (i.e. watchdogs are OK) but the MMI
serial communication link to the primary flow computer was lost, it would be
necessary to make the secondary flow computer the primary. Two special data
base points are available to provide this function, they are:
2715 Be Master - writing a one to this point automatically promotes this
flow computer to master. This in turn causes the digital I/O point
which is assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go true.
Assuming the digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the
preceding figure, the other flow computer will automatically
relinquish mastership when this happens.
Note: The 2716 command 2716 Be Slave - writing a one to this point automatically demotes this flow
will not work if the other flow computer to slave. This in turn causes the digital I/O point which is
computer’s watchdog status assigned point 2864 ( Mastership Status ) to go false. Assuming the
is not active (i.e., the other
digital I/O are cross connected as shown in the preceding figure, the
computer must be
functioning correctly before other flow computer will automatically assume mastership when this
this flow computer can give happens.
up mastership).
Both the above commands are edge triggered needing only to be turned on,
they do not need to be turned off.
Redirecting the Control Signals

In the event of a primary/secondary flow computer swap, a method is needed to
redirect the appropriate 4-20 mA signals to control valves and other functions.
One way of doing this is to use a DC relay with type C contacts. Suitable relays
are available with multiple sets of contacts. The relay can be energized by the
digital output assigned to indicate ‘Mastership Status’ from one of the flow
computers.
6 TB-980402 w ALL.70+
Sharing Input Signals Between Primary and

Secondary Flow Computers
In a redundant system all input signals must be connected to both primary and
secondary flow computers. Voltage pulse signals such as flowmeters and
densitometer devices must be connected in parallel to the appropriate inputs of
both flow primary and secondary computers. Current pulse signals must first be
converted to voltage pulses by suitable input shunt resistor or source resistor.
As a general rule, follow the wiring recommendations shown for a normal single
flow computer installation (see Volume 1 of the User Manual) and then simply
wire the second flow computer terminals in parallel with the first computer.
Analog 4-20 mA signals should be converted to 1-5 volt signals by using a low
temperature coefficient precision 250 ohm resistor. For each signal, configure
the combo modules of both flow computers for 1-5 volt inputs and wire them in
parallel across an appropriate 250 ohm resistor mounted externally to the flow
computers.
Re-Calibration of Analog Inputs

Each flow computer input channel which is configured for 1 - 5 volt input signals
will need to be verified for accuracy. Re-calibration may be necessary
depending upon the accuracy of the 250 ohm resistor used and how well it
matches the internal 250 ohm resistor that was used when the input channel
was originally calibrated. The system wiring between the flow computer and the
250 ohm resistor can also slightly affect the input calibration.
Sharing Digital I/O Signals Between Primary

and Secondary Flow Computers
Digital I/O channels configured as status inputs should be simply wired in
parallel (ORed) with the other flow computer. Digital I/O channels configured as
outputs may possibly require relay isolation similar to that needed for analog
outputs described previously. Typical output signals that need to be relay
isolated are sampler pulse outputs. Prover control signals do not usually need
to be relay isolated as the secondary computer will never be attempting to
control the prover while it is the slave or secondary computer. The user will
need to determine which outputs need to be isolated based on whether it is
possible or likely that the slave computer would activate the output when not in
control.
TB-980402 w ALL.70+ 7
ä 3095FB Multivariable Sensor

Rosemountä
Interface Issues
Contents
contained in User Manual, Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility Issues When Using SV
applicable to Firmware
Revision 21.72+/25.72+ and Combo Modules ............................................................................................. 3
23/72.+/27.72+. Serial Communication Module Compatibility .............................................................3
Other Known System Incompatibilities ......................................................................3
Equipment Ordering Limitations ................................................................................3
Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the 3095FB Multivariable
Transmitters: Multi-drop versus Point-to-Point ........................................... 4
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations ...................................................................4
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations ..............................................................4
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo Module ....................................... 5
Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module ...........................................................6
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV RS-485 Ports ......................6
ä 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter.......... 8
Initial Setup of the Rosemountä
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow Computer .................................. 9
3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections ...............................................................10
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and Requirements ....................................10
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues ................................................................11
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped 3095FB Transmitter..........11
Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use the 3095FB Multi Variable
Transmitter ................................................................................................... 12
Configuring the Meter Run I/O.................................................................................12
Selecting the Device Type ............................................................................................................. 12
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port............................................................................................ 12
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB.............................................................................................. 12
What I/O Points are Used and Why .............................................................................................. 12
DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed.............................................14
Data Transferred between the 3095FB Transmitter and the Omni Flow
Computer ...................................................................................................... 14
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical Alarms ......................................15
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer.......................................15
Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow Computer Configurations......... 16
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 1

Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow Computer Front Panel .................... 16
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB Transmitters....................... 17
Wiring Issues ......................................................................................................... 17
Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus Address of the 3095FB ............. 18
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration ................................................. 19
Scope
Firmware Revisions 21.72+/25.72+ and 23.72+/27.72+ of Omni 6000/Omni
3000 Flow Computers are affected by the issues contained in this technical
bulletin. This Bulletin applies to Orifice/Differential Pressure Liquid Flow
Metering Systems and to Orifice Gas Flow Metering Systems.
Abstract
The Rosemount 3095FB Multivariable sensor assembly is used to measure
differential pressure (DP), static pressure (SP) and line temperature (T).
Application of the 3095FB is limited to flow computer revisions 21, 23, 25 and
27 which work with differential head devices such as orifice meters, nozzles and
venturi meters. Because the flow computer is limited to a maximum of four
meter runs it is also limited to a maximum of four 3095FB multivariable
transmitters.
Data is accessed from the 3095FB transmitter via a 2 wire RS-485 data link at
9600 baud using Modbus protocol. Technically, it would have been possible to
use one of the flow computer’s standard serial ports to communicate with the
3095FB but this would have caused several problems:
q Reduced the number of serial ports available for use with SCADA, PLCs
and OmniCom etc.
q Extra 'A’ type combo modules would have to be purchased simply to
provide analog outputs in a minimum system requiring just the
multivariables.
Omni chose to design a special ‘SV’ combo module which includes two 2 wire
RS-485 ports and six 4-20 mA analog outputs. With this module it becomes
possible to provide a powerful Omni 3000 system with the following specs:
q Four meter runs with Differential Pressure, Static Pressure and
Temperature inputs.
q Four communication ports for SCADA, PLC, Printer, OmniCom etc.
q Twelve Digital I/O for logic control
q Six digital to analog outputs.
This SV module is capable of connecting to one to four 3095FBs in various
multi-drop configurations. A second SV combo module can be utilized in
applications where point to point operation of more than two multivariable
transmitters is desirable.
2 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

TB-980501 ä 3095FB Multivariable Sensor Interface Issues
Rosemountä
Important Omni Flow Computer Compatibility

Issues When Using SV Combo Modules
The ‘SV’ combo modules are effectively serial I/O modules which have been
specially designed to communicate with various multivariable transmitters.
Changes have been made to the IRQ priorities to accommodate these ‘SV’
combo modules. These IRQ changes also involve the ‘Serial I/O Combo
Modules’ that are used to connect to printers, OmniCom, PLCs and SCADA
devices.
Serial Communication Module Compatibility

‘SV’ combo modules cannot be installed in flow computer systems containing
RS-232-C Serial I/O Combo modules model type 68-6005. The IRQ settings on
the 68-6005 serial combo module are not jumper selectable and are
incompatible with the 'SV’ combo modules. The flow computer will not be able
to initialize or boot up if this module is installed (this will be evident by a blank
LCD screen which flashes its backlighting on and off every 1.5 seconds).
The more recent 68-6205 serial module which is both RS-232-C and RS-485
compatible, has jumper selectable IRQ settings, these must be installed in the
‘IRQ 3’ position when an ‘SV’ combo module is present (see technical bulletin
TB-980503 for more details).
Other Known System Incompatibilities

At the time this bulletin was prepared, it was not possible to install both an ‘SV’
combo module and an ‘HV’ (Honeywell multivariable) combo module.
Equipment Ordering Limitations

Because of the compatibility issues raised in the above paragraphs, it is not
possible for the customer to retrofit existing flow computer installations with ‘SV’
combo modules. Any system which requires ‘SV’ combo modules, must be
purchased new from Omni, or the system must be returned to Omni to be
modified (contact a sales person at Omni for upgrade details and pricing).
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 3

Connectivity Issues When Connecting to the

3095FB Multivariable Transmitters: Multi-drop
versus Point-to-Point
The 3095 FB multivariable transmitter is a four wire device, two power wires
and two wires for the RS-485 serial communication link. It can be connected in
a ‘point-to-point’ or ‘multi-drop’ wiring configuration.
Advantages of Multi-drop Configurations

The advantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Possibly less wire may be needed to connect devices under certain
conditions. This may or may not be the case depending upon
equipment placement.
q One Omni SV Combo module can handle up to four 3095 FB
multivariable transmitters. An Omni 3000 can be used in place of an
Omni 6000 and handle four meter runs.
Disadvantages of Multi-drop Configurations

Disadvantages of multi-drop configurations are:
q Multiple Modbus IDs required. Each multi-dropped transmitter must
have a unique Modbus ID which matches the Modbus ID selected within
the flow computer for that meter run multivariable.
q Possibility of errors when replacing multivariable transmitters.
Because of the multiple Modbus addresses it is not possible to simply
take a transmitter off the shelf and install it in a multi-drop configuration.
This is because transmitters come from Rosemount with the Modbus
address defaulted to ‘1’ and there may already be a transmitter in the loop
using that address. Adding a second transmitter with the same address
as an existing transmitter would effectively cause a loss of signal on both
transmitters (existing and new). Depending upon where the transmitter is
in the wiring, ‘termination’ jumpers may or may not be required on the
replacement transmitter (see below).
q Transmitter interaction is possible. While not likely, a hardware failure
in one transmitter could compromise the integrity of the shared RS-485
link causing a loss of flow signals for all meter runs. Calibrating a
transmitter via a laptop computer requires the wiring to be disturbed, care
must be taken not to disconnect other transmitters in the same multi-drop
loop.
4 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
q RS-485 termination requirements more complex. RS-485

transmission wires must have only one beginning and one end (they
cannot be used in a ‘star’ configuration). Both ends of the wire must be
terminated, meaning only two devices in the loop need terminating. In a
point-to-point configuration, this simply means both the flow computer
and transmitter are terminated. In a multi-drop configuration, the user
must ensure that only the end devices have the termination jumpers in.
This means that some transmitters may have the terminating jumpers in
while others may have them out. Remember that the Omni may or may
not be at the end of the wire so it may or may not be one of the
terminated devices.
q Process variable update time may exceed the flow computers 500
msec cycle time. Critical measurement or control systems require that
the process variables be input to the flow computer as fast as possible for
best performance.
Jumper Settings for the Omni SV Combo

Module
The Multi Variable ‘SV’ Combo module contains several sets of jumpers which
must be installed correctly (see figure below).
Port 1 (3) Port 2 (4)

Tx/RTS Leds Red Tx/RTS Leds Red
Recv Led Grn Recv Led Grn
RTS GND
T T
SV RS-485 Termination Jumpers E E
R R SV Port 1 ( 3 )
Both Jmpers In = Port Terminated M M
Both Jmpers Out = Port Non-Terminated
Always RTS RTS GND

T T
E E
SV Address Jumper R R SV Port 2 ( 4 )
Jmp In = 1st SV Combo M M
Jmp Out = 2nd SV Combo
Port Numbers in ( ) are for 2nd SV Module

Always IRQ 2 BRD SEL
2 4 IRQ
Fig. 1. Omni Model 68-6203 Multivariable Interface Module - SV Combo

Module
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 5

Setting the Address of the SV Combo Module

The flow computer can accept up to two ‘SV’ Combo modules, each with a
unique address determined by the ‘BRD SEL’ jumper shown in Figure 1. With
this jumper fitted the flow computer will report that a ‘SV1’ module is installed
and SV ports 1 and 2 will be available. Without this jumper in the ‘BRD SEL’
position the flow computer will report that a ‘SV2’ module is installed and SV
ports 3 and 4 will be available. Note that a system can have a ‘SV2’ module
without a ‘SV1’ being installed, in this case only SV ports 3 and 4 would be
available.
Setting the Termination Jumpers for the Each of the SV

RS-485 Ports
Multivariable RS-485 communication circuits must have two ends only, a ‘star’
configuration with more than two ends or a ‘loop’ configuration with no
ends is not allowed. The devices at both ends of the circuit must be jumpered
to provide termination.
3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

MV MV MV MV
ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
This Device This Device
Must Be Must Be
Terminated Terminated
Fig. 2. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Terminated
Both jumpers marked ‘TERM’ must be installed to terminate a flow computer

‘SV’ port (see Fig. 1 previous page). Termination settings for the 3095FB are
shown later in this document.
3095 FB This Device 3095 FB

MV Must Be MV
ID #1 Terminated ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
This Device
Must Be
3095 FB 3095 FB
MV MV
Terminated
ID #2 ID #3
Fig. 3. Multi-drop Configuration with Flow Computer Non-terminated
6 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

MV MV MV MV
ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #4
Omni
Flow
Computer
Star Configuration Not Allowed!
Fig. 4. Unacceptable Configuration - Five Termination Points
All 4 MV Ports of 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB 3095 FB

Flow Computer MV MV MV MV
Must Be Terminated ID #1 ID #1 ID #1 ID #1
Omni
Flow
Computer
Using
Independent
MV Ports Modbus IDs of 3095FBs All Four 3095FB
Can Be The Same In This Transmitters
Point to Point Configuration Must Be Terminated
Fig. 5. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
In the point-to-point configuration each 3095FB transmitter is connected to an

independent ‘SV’ port of the flow computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is now
connected to only one 3095FB, each 3095FB can now use the default Modbus
address ‘1’, greatly simplifying transmitter replacement issues discussed later in
this document.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 7

ä 3095FB Multi
Initial Setup of the Rosemountä
Variable Transmitter
The 3095FB module has two sets of DIP switches and a jumper set which must
be setup according to the wiring configuration used to connect to the Omni Flow
Computer.
All ON = Terminated Security OFF to

All OFF = Un-Terminated allow configuration
OFF o o
AC TERMINATION
PULL DOWN (B)
o o
ON
o o
PULL UP (A)
SECURITY o o
o o
ON
1 2 3
S1 S2
ON
1 2
All ON For 9600 Baud
Fig. 6. Rosemountä 3095FB Multivariable Setup Switches and Jumpers
Place the security jumper in the ‘OFF’ position, this allows the Omni flow
computer to write to the 3095FB registers ensuring that the internal
configuration matches the flow computer. Both baud rate switches S1 and S2
must be set to 9600; i.e., in the ‘ON’ position. The termination switches should
be all ‘ON’ or all ‘OFF’ depending upon whether device termination is required.
8 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
Connecting the 3095FB to the Omni Flow

Computer
TERMINAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Port #1(3) RS 485 B wire

2 Port #1(3) RS 485 A wire
3 Port #2(4) RS 485 B wire
4 Port #2(4) RS 485 A wire
5 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs

6 Signal Return for 4-20mA Outputs
7 4-20mA Analog Output # 5
Fig. 7. Back Panel Termination Assignments - SV Combo Module
A
RS-485
B
+
PWR
-
Fig. 8. Rosemountä 3095FB Multivariable Wiring Terminals
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 9

3095FB Transmitter RS-485 Connections

Two terminals are provided marked A and B, these are connected to the A and
B terminals of other multi-dropped 3095FBs and to the Omni SV Combo
module terminals. These connections should be made using twisted pair
unshielded wire with a minimum gauge dependent upon the distance to be run.
Use 22 AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs less than 1000 ft. Use 20
AWG minimum, 18 AWG maximum for runs of 1000 to 4000 ft. Shielded
twisted pair cable can be used but may have an attenuating effect due to a
higher capacitance per foot thereby limiting the maximum wire run length to
less than 4000 ft.
3095FB Transmitter Power Connections and

Requirements
Terminals marked ‘+’ and ‘-‘ are provided to connect the 3095FB to a 7.5 VDC.
to 24 VDC. power supply. This power supply must be able to provide 10 mA per
installed 3095FB plus an additional 100 mA which is needed when any 3095FB
in the system is transmitting data to the flow computer. Ripple on this power
supply must be less than 2%. Wiring gauge should be selected as per the
previous paragraph and can be unshielded un-twisted pair, but for best
performance should be shielded and twisted.
4000 Ft. Maximum
Termination ON
Omni Flow Computer
No Stubs over 6 ft.
RS 485 Bus
A
MV Port #1
B
A
MV Port #2
B
A
MV Port #3
B A A A
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485
A B B B
MV Port #4
B + + +
PWR PWR PWR
- - -
7.5 VDC to 24 VDC

Termination OFF Termination OFF Termination ON
Power Supply
150 mA Minimum
+
-
Fig. 9. Connecting The Flow Computer to Multi-dropped 3095

Transmitters
10 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
Isolation and Transient Protection Issues

The design of the 3095FB transmitter does not provide any DC isolation
between the power connections and the RS-485 connections. Applying voltages
between the power wiring and RS-485 wiring greater than the allowable
common mode voltage of a RS-485 driver circuit could damage the 3095FB.
The Omni flow computer SV port is optically isolated and can handle common
mode voltages of +/- 250 VDC with respect to chassis ground.
Inductive base transient protectors including the Rosemount Model 470, can
adversely affect the output of the 3095FB. Do not use the Model 470 for
transient protection with the 3095FB. If transient protection is desired, install
the optional ‘Transient Protection Terminal Block’ described in Appendix B of
the Rosemount 3095FB Manual (pub. 00809-0100-4738).
Wiring Considerations When Replacing a Multi-dropped

3095FB Transmitter
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 11

Configuring the Omni Flow Computer to use

the 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter
Configuring the Meter Run I/O
Selecting the Device Type

The existing ‘Select Turbine Y/N’ entry in the ‘Config Meter Run’ menu has
been changed to ‘Select Device Type’. Valid selections at this point are:
0 = DP Sensor
1 = Turbine Meter
2 = 3095FB Multivariable
3 = SMV 3000 Multivariable
When ‘2’ is selected above the following entries appear:
Selecting the SV Combo Module Port

The number of ports available depends upon what SV Combo Modules are
fitted in the flow computer. Ports 1 and 2 are available when SV Combo Module
#1 is fitted, ports 3 and 4 when SV Combo Module #2 is present. It is possible to
have SV ports 3 and 4 without SV ports 1 and 2 assuming SV Combo Module
#2 is the only SV module fitted.
Select Modbus Address for 3095FB

In point-to-point mode (i.e., each SV port is connected to a single 3095FB) it is
recommended that you select Modbus ID ‘1’ at this point. This is the default ID
used by Rosemount when the 3095 is shipped. In multi-drop mode each
3095FB connected to a SV port must have it’s own address which can be
between 1 and 247.
What I/O Points are Used and Why

Even though the multivariable data is obtained serially and not via analog input
channels, the flow computer must have a storage structure in RAM to place the
data. Omni has chosen to treat the data as closely as possible to that obtained
by conventional means and use the same physical I/O RAM structure as is used
for analog inputs. The main difference being that with analog and pulse inputs
you would manually assign the I/O points to be used for each input. When using
the 3095FB multi variable, the flow computer automatically assigns three I/O
point assignments for the DP, temperature and pressure sensors within the
3095FB. The I/O point numbers are allocated in the order that the 3095FBs are
configured using the above three entries (it has nothing to do with SV port or SV
module numbers). The starting I/O point for the first 3095FB configured is the
first point immediately after the last I/O point used by any other A, B, E/D, E or
H combo modules in the system (see examples on facing page).
12 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
EXAMPLE 1 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 2A - 1B – 1SV
A1 Combo Module I/O Points 1-4

B1 Combo Module I/O Points 9 - 12
st
1 3095FB Configured Uses DP=13, T=14, P=15
nd
rd
4th 3095FB Configured Uses DP=22, T=23, P=24
Fig. 10. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 1
EXAMPLE 2 CONFIGURATION 6000 - 1A - 1E/D – 1SV

E/D1 Combo Module I/O Points 5-8
st
2nd 3095FB Configured Uses DP=12, T=13, P=14
rd
th
Fig. 11. I/O Points Used by SV Combo Modules - Example 2
Bi-directional Flow and 3095FB Transmitters

Sometimes it is necessary to use a process variable obtained from a 3095FB in
more than one meter run. For example, When measuring bi-directional flow it is
customary to configure one meter run within the Omni flow computer as
‘forward’ flow and a second meter run as ‘reverse’ flow. To do this, simply
configure both meter runs as ‘Device Type = 2 (3095FB Multi Variable)’, select
the same SV port and Modbus ID, the Omni flow computer will recognize that
both meter runs are using the same 3095FB device and allocate only one set of
I/O assignments.
Referencing 3095FB Variables Elsewhere in the Configuration

While the DP, temperature and pressure obtained from the 3095FB multi
variable are used to calculate flow, it may also be necessary to use either the
temperature and/or the pressure to correct a densitometer device mounted in
close proximity. To do this simply note the I/O point numbers automatically
assigned to the 3095FB when it was configured and reuse these point numbers
as needed.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 13

DP, Pressure and Temperature Setup Entries Needed

Once I/O points have been assigned to the 3095FB multi variable transmitter by
the flow computer the Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure setup
menus become active. Data entries in these menus are:
q Low Alarm Setpoint

q High Alarm Setpoint
q Override Value
q Override Code
0 = Never Use Override Value
1 = Always Use Override Value
2 = Use Override on a 3095FB Communication Failure or Critical Error
3 = Use Last Hour’s Average on a 3095FB Communication Failure or
Critical Error
q 4mA Value (read only)
q 20mA Value (read only)
q Damping Code
0 = 0.108 Seconds 5 = 3.456 Seconds
1 = 0.216 Seconds 6 = 6.912 Seconds
2 = 0.432 Seconds 7 = 13.824 Seconds
3 = 0.864 Seconds (Default) 8 = 27.648 Seconds
4 = 1.728 Seconds
All of these data entries are changeable when using analog transmitters but
when using the 3095FB multi variable transmitter the 4mA and 20mA scaling
values cannot be changed. The upper and lower range of the 3095FB sensors
are fixed by design. The Omni flow computer simply reads these values and
displays them in the 4mA and 20mA fields for information only.
While the 3095FB transmitter has internal alarm setpoints and alarm status
points, Omni has chosen to ignore the 3095FB integral alarming functions and
use the existing flow computer alarm setpoints and alarm status points. The
Low and High Alarm Setpoints of the flow computer therefore behave exactly as
they would with an analog transmitter. The 3095FB Critical Alarm states are
monitored continuously.
Data Transferred between the 3095FB

Transmitter and the Omni Flow Computer
In operation the Omni flow computer automatically sets up the 3095FB
transmitter to use the correct floating point format and units of measure needed
to match the flow computer’s configuration. The Omni continuously reads the
following data:
q Process Variables DP, Pressure and Temperature

q Individual Transmitter Sensor Ranges
q Critical Transmitter Alarms (Sensor failures etc)
q Transmitter Information (Body and Fill material etc)
q Manufacturers Code
q Transmitter Tags
14 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
Polling Intervals for Process Variables and Critical

Alarms
The message poll scheme comprises regular reads of the process variable
values and critical alarms every 200msec per 3095FB connected to a flow
computer SV port. This means that in a multi-drop system with four transmitters
the process variable update time will be 4 x 200msec or 800msec.
Critical 3095FB Alarms Monitored By The Flow Computer

Critical alarm points within the 3095FB are monitored and mapped into the
Omni flow computer Modbus database as follows:
Alarms Associated with the 3095FB Providing Data to Meter Run ‘n’
M ODBUS ACTION TAKEN IF ALARM IS ACTIVE
ALARM POINT DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS (SEE ALSO ‘FAILURE CODE SETTING’)
DP signal 10% above upper

1n83 DP transmitter failure flagged
range limit
DP signal 10% below lower
1n84 DP transmitter failure flagged
range limit
Pressure signal 10% above
1n85 Pressure transmitter failure flagged
upper range limit
Pressure signal 10% below
lower range limit
1n87 Pressure sensor is shorted Pressure transmitter failure flagged
Pressure sensor bridge is

open circuit
Temperature signal 10%
1n89 Temperature transmitter failure flagged
above upper range limit
Temperature signal 10%
below lower range limit
Temperature RTD is
disconnected
Sensor internal temperature DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n92
above upper range limit flagged
Sensor internal temperature DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n93
below upper range limit flagged
Critical 3095FB sensor DP, P and T, transmitter failures
1n94
electronics failure flagged
Security jumper of 3095FB is DP, P and T transmitter failures flagged
1n95
set to ‘Write Protect’ if write to 3095FB is attempted and fails.
Note: No Communications between DP, P and T, transmitter failures

^ 1n96
^ 1n96 is flow computer the Omni and 3095FB unit flagged
generated.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 15

Synchronizing the 3095FB and the Flow

Computer Configurations
To ensure that the flow computer correctly interprets the 3095FB data, the flow
computer continuously verifies that the configuration of the 3095FB transmitter
matches that required by the flow computer. Additional message polls verifying
this data are interleaved with the normal message polls used to retrieve the
process variables and alarms.
Notes: Numbers in ( ) are Critical 3095FB configuration data which is checked every 10 seconds are:
Modbus addresses within the
3095FB database q Floating Point Number Format ** (0132)
** The flow computer will
q Measurement Engineering Units of Measure ** (0060 - 0062)
attempt to correct the
database of the 3095FB q Minimum and Maximum Ranges of each Signal * (7407 - 7416)
transmitter if miss
matches are detected for q Transmitter Identification (Information Only) (0001 - 0011)
these variables. q Damping Factors ** (7421, 7424, 7427)
* The flow computer will q Transmitter ASCII Tags (3x8 characters) ** (0032 - 0047)
adjust its database to
agree with the 3095FB q Transmitter Information (Materials of Construction) (0017 - 0029)
database if miss matches
are detected for these
variables.
Viewing the 3095FB Data at the Flow
Computer Front Panel
Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure variables and averages are
viewed using the normal key press combinations as described in the Omni Flow
Computer User Manual.
A display list of 3095FB transmitter information can be displayed by pressing
‘Setup’ ‘n’ ‘Enter’. Data is organized by SV port number ‘n’ and in the order that
the transmitters were configured. The following information and diagnostic data
is displayed (example shows first transmitter on the #1 SV port as an example):
st
1 digit is the SV port
nd
number, 2 digit is the
Modbus Address of the SV Port 1 - 1
3095FB Manufactur Rosemount
Model 3095/Modbus
Out Board Rev 108.0
16 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
If you continue to scroll down, the following data will be displayed:
Sensor Mod Rev 142

Sensor Serial 839193
Xmtr Ser 19644
H/W Rev 3
Modbus Rev 5
Sensor Type GP
DP Range -250 to 250
SP Range 0-800 psi
PT Range-40 to 1200F
Isolator Mat’l 316SS
Fill Fluid Silicone
Flange Mtr’l 316SS
Flange Type Coplaner
Drain/Vent 316SS
O-Ring PTFE(Teflon)
Seal Type None
Seal Fill None
Seal Isolator None
NumberofSeals None
Installing, Replacing and Calibrating 3095FB

Transmitters
Wiring Issues
If downtime of other 3095FB transmitters in a multi-dropped system cannot be
tolerated, make sure to provide a suitable and safe means of disconnecting
power and signal from each individual 3095FB transmitter. Because of the
power requirements of the RS-485 the 3095FB cannot be made
‘intrinsically safe’. This means that proper safety procedures must be
followed before any covers are removed from any devices or junction
boxes located in hazardous areas. Refer to Rosemount 3095FB Manual
(publication 00809-0100-4738) for correct installation of the 3095FB
transmitter.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 17

Using the Omni Flow Computer to Set the Modbus

Address of the 3095FB
The 3095FB transmitter will normally be shipped with a default Modbus address
of ‘1’. While this is fine for a point to point installation, it will cause a problem if
two or more devices have the same Modbus ID in a multi-drop scheme. The
Modbus ID of a transmitter can be set using the ‘Configurator User Interface PC
Software’ available from Rosemount. It is anticipated though that some
situations may arise where a 3095FB transmitter must be installed or replaced
without this software being available. In this case the Omni flow computer can
be connected to a 3095FB in the point to point mode using any available SV
port and the Modbus ID changed to what is required in the flow computer
configuration.
‹ CAUTION! ‹ Proceed as follows:
This procedure involves 1. Setup the 3095FB as described previously in the section titled ‘Initial
‘broadcast’ transmitting a Setup of the Rosemount 3095FB Multi Variable Transmitter’.
Modbus address out of a SV
port. All devices connected to
this SV port will have their 2. Setup the 3095FB to be RS-485 terminated.
Modbus address set to the
ID broadcast. This would 3. Connect the transmitter to any open SV port (terminal A to A, B to B).
cause data collisions and a
complete loss of
The SV port should be jumpered for RS-485 termination. If this SV
communication when more channel is not an open channel, all 3095FB transmitters except the one
than one 3095FB transmitter needing the address change must be disconnected.
is connected. Be sure to
temporarily disconnect any
3095FB transmitters which
4. Apply power to the 3095FB transmitter.
addresses you do not want to
change. 5. At the flow computer front panel press the following keys:
[Alpha Shift] [Diag] The computer will enter the Diagnostic mode.
[Setup] [n] [Enter] Where ‘n’ is the SV port number that the 3095FB
is connected to.
6. The following warning screen may display ( SV port 1 is used as an

example) or the screen in (7) below will display.
SV Port # 1
This Port Currently
Configured For Use!
Continue (Y/N)?
This means that the flow computer has detected that this SV port is
currently configured to communicate with one or more transmitters. You
may or may not have selected the wrong SV port (see the cautions in
sidebar).
7. If you wish to continue with the address broadcast operation enter ‘Y’
and the following screen will display.
SV Port # 1
Change Xmtr Address
New Address _
Idle
18 TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+

Rosemountä
8. Scroll down to ‘New Address’ and enter the address required. Press
‘Enter’ and the following message will display.
Sending New Address
9. The flow computer will wait a short time and then attempt to
communicate with the 3095FB using the new address. If
communications are established the following message will be displayed
for a few seconds.
Address Changed
The following message will display for a second or two should the
transmission fail.
Failed to Change
Should this message appear check your wiring, switch and jumper
settings and repeat the procedure.
10. Disconnect and reinstall 3095FB to the appropriate SV port for normal
operation making sure to observe the termination requirements of only
two devices at the end of a loop being terminated.
Using a Laptop PC to Trim the 3095FB Calibration

The flow computer provides no way of calibrating or trimming the output of the
3095FB multi variable transmitter. To calibrate the transmitter use the
‘Configurator User Interface PC Software’ available from Rosemount. The user
must disconnect the 3095FB needing calibrating and connect it in point to point
mode with the Laptop or PC running the Rosemount Interface Software.
Remember to follow all correct safety procedures when removing
transmitter covers or junction boxes. Read the manufacture’s warnings
and recommendations as printed in the 3095FB manual. Be aware that
when removing a transmitter from a multi-drop installation, wiring may be
disturbed and disruption of the circuit may cause a loss of all measurement
signals due to loss of power, signal or RS-485 termination.
TB-980501 w 21/25.72+ & 23/27.72+ 19

ä SMV3000
Multivariable Transmitters
Contents
contained in the User DE Protocol Overview .................................................................................... 2
all firmware revisions .72+. Transmitter Database..................................................................................... 2
ä Handheld Communicator .................................................. 3
The Honeywellä
Communication with Combo Module LED Status Indicators.......................................................... 3
Honeywellä ä SMV3000
Smart Transmitters - This Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode............................................... 3
feature allows you to
communicate with Honeywell Viewing the Status of the Honeywell Transmitter from the Keypad............ 4
SMV3000 Smart ä Transmitter from the Keypad......... 5
Multivariable Transmitters
which provide Differential Obtaining More Detailed Status Information from the Keypad.................... 8
Pressure , Temperature and
Static Pressure, via Omni’s Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow Computer ................................... 12
HV type Process I/O Combo
HV Combo Module Address Jumpers ......................................................... 13
Modules and using
Honeywell’s DE Protocol. How the I/O Points are Assigned................................................................. 14
OmniCom Revision ...................................................................................... 15
Getting Tech Support -
Technical support is available
at:
( (281) 240-6161
Email should be sent via the Scope
WEB Page at:
www.omniflow.com All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers containing
or email to: firmware 21.72+, 23.72+, 27.72+ are able to communicate with Honeywellä
techsupport@omniflow.com SMV3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters. This feature uses Honeywell’s DE
Protocol and requires that an HV Combo I/O Module be installed in your flow
computer.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 1
Abstract
Using an ‘HV’ Combo I/O Module, the Omni Flow Computer can communicate
with up to 4 Honeywellä SMV3000 Smart Multivariable transmitters. These
transmitters provide Differential Pressure, Temperature and Pressure signals
using Honeywell’s DE Protocol. Only one ‘HV’ Type Combo Module can be
installed in the flow computer. Loop power is provided by the ‘HV’ combo
module.
DE Protocol Overview
Digital data is transmitted serially between the flow computer and Honeywell
Smart Transmitters by modulating the current in the two wire loop connecting
the devices. Power for the transmitter is also taken from this current loop. Data
is transmitted at 218.47 bits per second with a digital ‘0’ = 20 mA and a digital
‘1’ = 4 mA.
In normal operation, the Honeywell transmitter operates in the ‘6-byte Burst
Mode’. In this mode, the transmitter transmits the following data to the flow
computer every 366 msec:
Byte #1 Status Flags
Byte #2-#4 Process Variables % Span Value (3-byte floating point)
Byte #5 Database ID (indicates where in the transmitters database Byte #6
below belongs)
Byte #6 Database Data Value
Transmitter Database
By using the data contained in Bytes #5 and #6, the flow computer builds and
maintains an exact copy of the multivariable transmitters configuration
database. The transmitter database which is sent to the Omni flow computer is
about 132 bytes. Based on the burst rate of the transmitter it can take about 45
to 55 seconds to completely build a copy of the transmitter database within the
flow computer. The transmitter database is continuously compared against the
flow computer configuration settings for that transmitter. The flow computer
automatically corrects any differences between the databases by writing the
correct configuration data to the transmitter.
2 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
TB-980502 ä SMV3000 Multivariable Transmitters
ä Handheld Communicator
The Honeywellä
The flow computer is responsible for configuring the following entries within the
transmitter:
(1) Lower Range Value or Zero
(2) Transmitter Span or Max Range
(3) Damping Factor
(4) Tag Name
(5) DP, SP and Temperature conformance bits
Any changes made to 1, 2, 3 and 5 using the handheld communicator will be
overwritten by the flow computer. In the digital mode it is not absolutely
necessary to calibrate the transmitters outputs using the handheld
communicator. The user can however trim the transmitters output calibration
using the handheld communicator if he so desires without interference from the
flow computer (see Honeywell documentation for details of trimming corrects).
Whether the transmitter is trimmed with the handheld or not, the digital signals
should be final calibrated ‘end to end’ using the normal analog input method
described in Chapter 8 of Volume 1.
Combo Module LED Status Indicators

Each I/O channel of the ‘HV’ Combo module has a set of two LED indicators,
one green and one red. The green LED shows all communication activity taking
place on the channel (flow computer, transmitter and handheld communicator if
connected). The Red LED lights only when the flow computer is transmitting
data to the transmitter.
Normal digital operation is indicated by a regular pulsation of the green LED
(about 3 per second). The red LED will be seen to blink whenever a
configuration change is made in the flow computer which affects that particular
transmitter.
Switching Between Analog and Digital Mode.

Connecting an analog mode Honeywell multivariable transmitter to the
computer will cause the flow computer to automatically switch the transmitter to
the digital DE mode sending out a series of ‘Wake up commands’ to the
Honeywell transmitter. A switch over to the digital mode by the transmitter will
cause the green LED on the combo module to pulse steadily indicating that
communications have been established.
To disable the wake up command and initialize communications between the
Honeywell transmitter and the flow computer, delete all I/O point assignments
within the flow computer to that I/O point. Using the Honeywell handheld
communicator press [Shift] [A/D] and wait till the handheld displays ‘Change to
Analog?’ Answer by pressing [Enter] (Yes). ‘SFC Working’ will be displayed.
The green LED on the ‘HV’ Combo module on that channel will stop pulsing.
Re-entering the I/O point will cause the Omni to send the wake up command to
the Honeywell and after three command sends the green LED on the Honeywell
module will pulse at a steady 3Hz rate.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 3
Viewing the Status of the Honeywell

Transmitter from the Keypad
To verify the data being received from the smart transmitter, press [Input]
[Status] and [Enter] from the front panel. The following data displays:
HV-1 Transmitter
DB Status OK
Gstatus NON-CRITICAL
DP% 25.00
SP% 76.50
TT% 32.13
DP LRV 0.0
DP Span 400.0
DP Damp Secs. .16
DP Conformity bit 0
SP LRV 406.8
SP Span 27680.2
SP Damp Secs .16
SP Conformity bit 0
TT LRV .0
TT Span 100.0
TT Damp Secs .3
TT Conformity bit 0
SW Revision 2.1
Serial # xxxxxxxxxx
DP Range 400.0
SP Range 20760.5
TT Range 850.0
ID/TAG SMV-3000
Filter Hertz 60
SensorType RTD-PT100
4 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
ä
Transmitter from the Keypad
HV-1 Transmitter : Indicates the Honeywell Multivariable Combo Module
(HV) and the channel number on that module. As there
can be only one HV module installed, this number can
only be 1 through 4.
DB Status : There are five status states.
1) OK : Communications between the flow
are OK. The database within the
transmitter matches the flow computer.
2) Idle : This flow computer I/O point has been
assigned to a Honeywell transmitter but is
not receiving data from the transmitter.
Possible cause is a wiring problem such as
reversal of wiring. If you observe the
status LEDs you will note that the flow
computer attempts to establish
communications by sending a wake-up
command every 10 seconds or so.
3) Bad PV : Communications between the flow
are OK but the transmitter has determined
that a critical error has occurred within the
transmitter meaning the value of the
process variable cannot be trusted. The
flow computer will set the transducer
failure alarm and follow the fail code
strategy selected by the user for this
transducer.
4) DB Error : Communications between the flow
are OK but the flow Computer has
determined that the database within the
flow computer does not agree with the
database within the transmitter. If you
observe the status LEDs you will note that
the flow computer attempts to correct the
transmitters database by writing the
correct data to the transmitter once every
30-45 sec or so.
5) 4 Byte : The transmitter is operating in the 4-Byte
Burst Mode. Because the flow computer
will not tolerate this mode of operation,
this status display should only be
displayed momentarily as the flow
computer will automatically switch the
transmitter into the 6-Byte Burst Mode.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 5
Gstatus : Gross Status Flag value:

1) OK : No errors are reported by the SMV
transmitter.
2) Critical Critical error reported by the SMV
transmitter.
3) Non-Critical : An error of a non critical nature has
been reported by the SMV transmitter.
4) Reserved : Consult Honeywell if this status value is
returned.
DP% : Differential pressure variable value in percentage of the
transmitter span. A -25.00 could mean that the
transmitter is not communicating (see Status definition
previous).
SP% : Static pressure variable value in percentage of the
previous).
TT% : Temperature variable value in percentage of the
previous).
DP LRV : Lower Range Value of the DP variable in engineering
units. Engineering units are inches of water at 39
degrees Fahrenheit.
DP Span : The Span of the Differential pressure variable in
engineering units (the span is the difference between the
lower and upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering
units are inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The
flow computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to
enter a span of 0% or a span which would exceed the DP
sensor ‘range’ (described later).
DP Damp Secs : Damping Time of the DP transmitter output in seconds.
DP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Conformity Bit 0 = linear output; Conformity Bit 1 =
square root output. The flow computer requires linear
output and will automatically set this bit to 0 should it be
set to a 1.
SP LRV : Lower Range Value of the Static Pressure variable in
engineering units. Engineering units are inches of water
at 39 degrees Fahrenheit.
SP Span : The Span of the Static Pressure variable in engineering
units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
inches of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The flow
computer will display ‘DB Error’ if the user tries to enter a
span of 0% or a span which would exceed the static
pressure sensor ‘range’ (described later).
6 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
SP Damp Secs : Damping Time of the Static Pressure transmitter output

in seconds.
SP Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.
TT LRV : Lower Range Value of the temperature variable in
engineering units. Engineering units are degrees Celsius.
TT Span : The Span of the Temperature variable in engineering
units (the span is the difference between the lower and
upper ranges of the transmitter). Engineering units are
degrees Celsius. The flow computer will display ‘DB
Error’ if the user tries to enter a span of 0% or a span
which would exceed the temperature sensor ‘range’
(described later).
TT Damp Secs : Damping Time of the Temperature transmitter output in
seconds.
TT Conformity Bit : Meaningful only with differential pressure transmitters.

Software Revision : Current Software installed within the smart multivariable
device.
Serial # : Serial Number of the smart multivariable device.
DP Range : Maximum range of the DP sensor in inches of water at
39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will not accept
configuration entries which exceed this value.
SP Range : Maximum range of the Static Pressure sensor in inches
of water at 39 degrees Fahrenheit. The transmitter will
not accept configuration entries which exceed this value.
TT Range : Maximum range of the Temperature sensor in degrees
Celsius. The transmitter will not accept configuration
entries which exceed this value.
ID/TAG : ASCII string used to identify the SMV DP transmitter.
Filter Hertz : Frequency used to filter sensor signals to minimize AC
mains interference. Selections are 50 or 60 Hertz.
Sensor Type : Temperature sensor types are:
1) RTD-PT100
2) J type Thermocouple
3) K type Thermocouple
4) T type Thermocouple
5) E type Thermocouple
Note: Thermocouples can be internally or externally
compensated.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 7
Obtaining More Detailed Status Information

from the Keypad
Additional data based upon the ‘Primary’, ‘Secondary’ and ‘Tertiary’ ‘Detailed
Status’ bytes which are retrieved from the SMV data base is available by
pressing [Input] [Status] [Alarm] and [Enter]. The display will approximate the
following messages depending upon certain bits being ON in the appropriate
‘detailed status byte’. Some of these status bits also cause alarm status points
within the flow computer data base to be activated. When this happens, these
alarm events are time and date tagged and logged in the alarm log as any other
flow computer alarm.
OMNI
HONEYWELL
ALARM
DETAILED STATUS T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED
POINT(S)
BYTE-BIT
ACTIVATED
Meter Body Fault: Communication 2n44 CR
1-0 between sensor board and SMV main board 2n47 CR
electronics is suspect. 2n50 CR
Characterization PROM Fault or Checksum 2n44 CR
1-1
Error 2n47 CR
Suspect Input: Possibly Meter Body or 2n44 CR
1-2
Electronics Failure 2n47 CR
1-3 DAC Compensation: Fault Detected 2n52 CR
1-4 NVM Fault: Non Volatile Memory Error 2n52 CR

Detected
1-5 RAM Fault: RAM Memory Error Detected 2n52 CR
1-6 ROM Fault: ROM Memory Error Detected 2n52 CR
1-7 2n44 CR
PAC Fault Detected
2n47 CR
2-0 MB OverTemp: Meter Body Sensor Over 2n51 NC
Temperature
2-1 DP Zero Correction Value is Outside of 2n42 NC
Acceptable Limits
2-2 DP Span Correction Value is Outside of 2n42 NC
Acceptable Limits
Status 2-3 (Consult with Honeywell for
2-3 ¾
meaning)
2-4 MB Overload or : (Always with next 2n47 CR
message)
NC = None Critical Alarm. CR = Critical Alarm Override Action Considered.
Note: The ‘n’ in the Modbus address refers to the number of the meter run.
8 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HONEYWELL OMNI
DETAILED STATUS T EXT IN ‘BOLD’ DISPLAYED ALARM
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
2-5 Meter Body Fault: Pressure input is twice 2n47 CR
the URL
DP Cal Corr Default: ‘Reset Corrects’
2-6 command issued or ‘Calibrate and Power 2n42 NC
Cycle’ performed
2-7 DAC Tempco Data Bad: Analog mode only. ¾
2n44 CR
Invalid Database: Some error detected in
3-0 2n47 CR
the SMVs configuration. All PVs are suspect.
2n50 CR
3-1 Suspect SP Input: Static pressure input 2n47 CR
suspect
3-2 ¾
meaning)
3-3 ¾
meaning)
3-4 DP Term Out of Range ¾
V-T Term Out of Rng: Viscosity
3-5 ¾
temperature term out of range
D-T Term Out of Rng: Density temperature
3-6 ¾
term out of range
Ind Var Out of Range: Independent
3.7 ¾
variable out of range
4-0 ¾
meaning)
4-1 Excess Zero Corr SP: Excess zero 2n45 NC
correction for static pressure
4-2 Excess Span Corr SP: Excess span 2n45 NC
correction for static pressure
SP is Absolute: Static pressure sensor is
4-3 ¾
absolute
SP is Gauge: Static pressure sensor is
4-4 ¾
gauge
4-5 ¾
meaning)
4-6 SP Corrects Reset: Static pressure 2n45 NC
corrections reset
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 9
HONEYWELL OMNI
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
4-7 ¾
meaning)
5-0 ¾
meaning)
5-1 ¾
meaning)
5-2 ¾
meaning)
5-3 ¾
meaning)
5-4 DP in Input Mode 2n43 CR
5-5 SP in Input Mode 2n46 CR
5-6 Temp in Input Mode 2n49 CR
5-7 PV4 in Input Mode ¾
6-0 2 Wire RTD Used ¾
6-3 2 Wire TC Used ¾
6-4 DP in Output Mode 2n43 CR
6-5 SP in Output Mode 2n46 CR
6-6 Temp in Output Mode 2n49 CR
6-7 PV4 in Output Mode ¾
7-0 Temp A/D Fault : Temperature A to D 2n50 CR
failure
7-1 Temp Char Fault: Temperature 2n50 CR

characterization fault
7-2 Temp Input Suspect: Temperature input 2n50 CR
signal is suspect
7-3 ¾
meaning)
7-4 Temp NVM Fault: Temperature non-volatile 2n50 CR
memory fault detected
7-5 ¾
meaning)
10 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HONEYWELL OMNI
BYTE-BIT POINT(S)
ACTIVATED
7-6 ¾
meaning)
7-7 ¾
meaning)
Delta Temperature : (FUTURE - Consult
8-0 ¾
with Honeywell for meaning)
8-1 Excess Zero Cor Temp 2n48 NC
8-2 Excess Span Cor Temp 2n48 NC
8-3 Temp Input Open : Open circuit 2n50 CR

temperature sensor
8-4 Temp Over Range : Process temperature is 2n50 CR
over range
Redun Backup Temp : (FUTURE - Consult
8-5 ¾
with Honeywell for meaning)
8-6 Temp Corrects Active 2n48 NC
8-7 Temp Sensor Mismatch 2n50 CR
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 11
Transducer Alarms Logged by the Flow

Computer
The following alarm points are automatically updated with data contained in the
‘detailed status’ bytes within the flow computers copy of the SMVs data base
(see the previous table). These alarms are time and date tagged and logged by
the flow computer whenever the respective bit changes state. Other than the
logging function, non critical alarms cause no other action to occur. Critical
alarms are alarms which are considered to adversely impact the credibility of
the measurement reading, these alarms cause the flow computer to examine
the ‘Override Code’ strategy and apply an override if so configured.
ADDRESS OF ALARM T ITLE ALARM T YPE

ALARM POINT
2n42 Meter ‘n’ DP: Invalid Corrects or Corrects NC
Reset
2n43 Meter ‘n’ DP is in the Input or Output Mode CR
2n44 Meter ‘n’ DP Signal is Suspect CR
Meter ‘n’ Pressure: Invalid Corrects or Corrects
2n45 NC
Reset
Meter ‘n’ Pressure is in the Input or Output
2n46 CR
Mode
2n47 Meter ‘n’ Pressure Signal is Suspect CR
Meter ‘n’ Temperature - Invalid Corrects or
2n48 NC
Corrects Reset
Meter ‘n’ Temperature is in the Input or Output
2n49 CR
Mode
2n50 Meter ‘n’ Temperature Signal is Suspect CR
2n51 Meter ‘n’ Body Fault - Over Temperature NC
2n52 Meter ‘n’ Critical Failure of SMV Electronics CR
2n53 Meter ‘n’ SMV Not Communicating CR
12 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
HV Combo Module Address Jumpers

The HV Combo Module actually uses the same physical PCB module as a
regular H type combo module, except it uses a different address jumper setting.
Module Address
Jumpers
In ‘*’ Position
Green LED
Indicates Any
Activity
* * *
Red LED Indicates

OMNI is
Transmitting
SMV Channel #1
SMV Channel #2
Transmitter Loop
Status LEDs
SMV Channel #3
SMV Channel #4
Figure 1. Setting the Address Jumpers of the HV Combo Module
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 13
How the I/O Points are Assigned

When the flow computer detects that an ‘HV’ combo module is installed it
automatically allocates 12 of its 24 process inputs to the ‘HV’ module. The
presence or absence of combo modules is checked after a RESET ALL RAM or
after a CHECK I/O MODULES command is executed.
Although the ‘HV’ combo has only 4 physical Honeywell DE ports, each SMV-
3000 provides 3 variables for a total I/O requirement of 4 x 3 = 12. As the total
process input count of the flow computer is limited to 24 it is obvious that if an
‘HV’ combo module is fitted there can only be 3 other combo modules of type A,
B, E/D, E or H. The ‘HV’ combo module is always the last module in the list,
and the I/O assignments reflect this fact (see the following example).
Example 1: Omni 6000 - 2A - H1 – HV ( Flow computer contains - 2 ‘A’

combos, 1 ‘H’ combo, and an ‘HV’ combo).
The 1st ‘A’ combo is allocated: Input points 1, 2, 3 & 4

Output points 1&2
The 2nd ‘A’ combo is allocated: Input points 5, 6, 7 & 8

Output points 3&4
The ‘H’ combo is allocated: Input points 9, 10, 11 & 12

Output points 5&6
The ‘HV’ combo is allocated: Input points 13, 14, 15 & 16 Diff. Pressure
17, 18, 19 & 20 Temperature
21, 22, 23 & 24 Pressure
Output points 7&8
While the example shown above employs 4 combo modules in total, it uses all
24 process input assignments, this means that 2 physical I/O module slots will
be unusable on the backplane.
To configure an ‘HV’ combo module it is only necessary to configure the
Diff-Pressure I/O points in the Meter Run Config menu, the I/O points for
the temperature and pressure variables are automatically assigned by the flow
computer and cannot be changed by the user.
14 TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+
Using the above example the following table identifies the I/O point
assignments that will occur.
Technical support is available
at: DIFFERENTIAL
( (281) 240-6161
T EMPERATURE PRESSURE
PRESSURE
Email should be sent via the
WEB Page at: METER RUN # 1 13 17 21
www.omniflow.com
METER RUN # 2 14 18 22
or email to:
techsupport@omniflow.com 19 23
METER RUN # 3 15
METER RUN # 4 16 20 24
Numbers in bold are entered by the user. Numbers in italics are assigned
automatically by the flow computer and cannot be changed.
OmniCom Revision
OmniCom revision ??.72 or later is required to support the SMV-3000
multivariable transmitter.
TB-980502 w 21/23/27.72+ 15
Serial I/O Modules: Installation Options
Contents
contained in Volume 1, and Features and Specifications .......................................................................... 2
is applicable to all firmware
revisions. Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model #68-6005 ......................... 3
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-A .............................. 4
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model #68-6205-B .............................. 6
RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options ............................................ 8
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have serial communications capabilities
via proprietary serial I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers can come equipped with serial I/O modules that
communicate with RS-232-Compatible or RS-485 devices. Omni manufactures
three models of serial modules:
q Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6005

q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-A
q RS-232-C/RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model # 68-6205-B
Each serial module has 2 ports. Omni 6000 flow computers can have up to two
serial modules installed for a maximum of 4 ports. Omni 3000 flow computers
typically use one serial module providing 2 ports. Each serial communication
port is individually optically isolated for maximum common-mode and noise
rejection. Jumpers are provided for selection of module address and serial port
communication standards. Communication parameters such as protocol type,
baud rate, stop bits and parity settings are software selectable.

Features and Specifications

Proprietary serial modules and multi-bus serial I/O interface specifications are:
Omni Serial I/O Modules

M ODEL # TYPE BASIC COMMUNICATION FEATURES
q Dual channel serial communications
providing two RS-232-Compatible
Dual Channel RS-232- ports.
68-6005
Compatible q Communications protocol, baud rate,
stop bits and parity settings are
software selectable.
q Port #1 is factory-set as RS-232-
Compatible mode (jumper blocks are
soldered in place).
q Port #2 is factory set to RS-485
mode.
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 q RS-485 communications are jumper-
68-6205-A selectable as:
(Non-selectable Ports)
¨ 2-wire terminated or non-
terminated
terminated
q Communications protocol, baud rate,
q Both Ports #1 and #2 are jumper-
selectable as either RS-232-C or RS-
485 modes.
q RS-485 communications are jumper-
RS-232-Compatible / RS-485 selectable as:
68-6205-B ¨ 2-wire terminated or non-
(Selectable Ports)
terminated
terminated
q Communications protocol, baud rate,
INFO - Up to 12 flow
computers and/or other
Omni Multi-bus Serial I/O Interface
RS-232-COMPATIBLE RS-485
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-
Compatible serial port. DATA OUTPUT VOLTAGE ±7.5 volts (typical) 5 volts (differential driver)
Thirty-two devices may be
connected when using the LOAD IMPEDANCE 1.5 k ohm 120 ohm
RS-485 mode.
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 10 mA (limited) 20 mA
Typically, one serial I/O
module is used on the Omni INPUT LOW THRESHOLD -3.0 volts 0.8 volts (differential input)
3000, providing two ports. A
maximum of two serial INPUT HIGH THRESHOLD +3.0 volts 5.0 volts (differential input)
modules can be installed in
BAUD RATES 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, & 38.4 k bps (software selectable)
the Omni 6000, providing
four ports. COMMON M ODE VOLTAGE ±250 Volts to chassis ground
LEDS channel inputs/outputs & handshaking signals

TB-980503 Serial I/O Module: Installation Options
Dual Channel RS-232-C Serial I/O Module

Model #68-6005
INFO - Up to 12 flow Dual channel serial communication modules can be installed providing two RS-
computers and/or other 232-Compatible ports. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels, the tristate
output design allows multiple flow computers to share one RS-232 device. This
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C serial module is the oldest model manufactured by Omni.
serial port.
module is used on the Omni
maximum of two serial
four ports.
Address Selection
Jumpers
Jumper Settings - For
information on setting the
jumpers of serial I/O modules Address S1 (1)
refer to 1.6.3. “Serial
1 Selected for Serial
Communication Modules”
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of Ports 1 & 2
the User Manual.
Address S2 (0)
Selected for Serial
0
Ports 3 & 4
RTS Out
Chan. B
TX Out
RTS Out
Chan. A
TX Out
LED Indicators
RX In
Chan. A
RDY In
RX In
Chan. B
RDY In
Fig. 1. Dual RS-232 Serial I/O Module Model Showing Selection Jumper
and Indicator LEDs

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-A
INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-A (manufactured 1997) has two communication
computers and/or other ports. The first serial port (Ports #1 and #3 if two 68-6205 modules are installed)
is factory set in the RS-232-C mode (jumpers are soldered into place and
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C cannot be moved). The second serial port (Ports #2 and #4) is configurable for
serial port. Up to 32 devices RS-485 communications only. Although the first serial port provides RS-232-C
may be connected when signal levels, the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share
using the RS-485 mode. one serial link.
Refer to technical bulletin
TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer
Basics” for more information.
Typically, one serial I/O Address Selection
module is used on the Omni Jumpers
the Omni 6000, providing Address S1 Selected Address S2 Selected
four ports. for Serial Ports 1 & 2 for Serial Ports 3 & 4

jumpers of serial I/O modules IRQ Select Jumper
refer to 1.6.3. “Serial
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of IRQ 2 Selected
the User Manual. For serial (If using an SV
port jumper settings see also Module, select
Fig. 6 in this bulletin. IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205 REV: A
Port #2 (#4) Jumpers Port #1 (#3) Jumpers

(RS-485 Options Only) (Hard-wired to RS-232-C Only)
Fig. 2. RS-232/485 Module #68-6205-A Showing Selection Jumpers and

Indicator LEDs

The first serial port jumpers are factory hard-wired for RS-232-C mode. This
port is non-selectable and cannot be changed by the user. The second serial
port jumpers are factory preset in the RS-485 two-wire, terminated positions.
This port is user-selectable for RS-485 two-wire/four-wire terminated/non-
terminated jumper positions (see Fig. 6). Back panel wiring is shown below.
Micro Motionä ä RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
Motionä RFT 9739 devices
connected to the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11). Omni 6000
TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer
(Omni 3000)
Basics” for more information. Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
1 TX
2 TERM
First 3 RX RS-232-C
Serial
Port 4 GND Hard-wired
5 RTS
6 RDY
7 B TX-B
8 ¾ ¾
Second 9 ¾ RX-A
Serial N/A
Port 10 GND GND
11 A TX-A
12 ¾ RX-B
Fig. 3. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-A

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial I/O Module Model

#68-6205-B
INFO - Up to 12 flow Serial I/O Module # 68-6205-B is the latest serial module manufactured by
computers and/or other Omni (1998). It is capable of handling two communication ports. Each serial
port is jumper-selectable for either RS-232-Compatible or RS-485
Omni’s proprietary RS-232-C communications. Although providing RS-232-C signal levels when in this mode,
serial port. Up to 32 devices the tristate output design allows multiple flow computers to share one serial link.
may be connected when In addition to the RS-232 mode, jumper selections have been provided on each
using the RS-485 mode. port to allow selection of RS-485 format. With this option, a total of two RS-485
TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer ports are available on this model.
module is used on the Omni Address Selection
Jumpers
four ports. Address S1 Selected Address S2 Selected
for Serial Ports 1 & 2 for Serial Ports 3 & 4

jumpers of serial I/O modules
refer to 1.6.3. “Serial IRQ Select Jumper
in Volume 1, Chapter 1 of
the User Manual. For serial IRQ 2 Selected
port jumper settings see also (If using an SV
Fig. 6 in this bulletin. Module, select
IRQ 3)
LED Indicators
68-6205 REV: B
Port #2 (#4)Jumpers Port #1 (#3) Jumpers
Fig. 4. RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B Showing Selection Jumpers

and Indicator LEDs

Jumpers for both serial ports are user-selectable to RS-232-C or RS-485

formats (see Fig. 6). The RS-485 options are either 2-wire or 4-wire mode; each
mode can be set as terminated or non-terminated connections. Back panel
wiring is shown below.
Micro Motionä ä RFT 9739
Devices - Users of Micro
Motionä RFT 9739 devices
connected to the peer-to-peer
port (Port #2) of the Omni,
networks should be
positioned for 2-wire RS-485
and that Terminal A from the
RFT 9739 should be wired to
Omni Terminal B (7), and B
from the RFT must be wired
to Omni Terminal A (11).
Refer to technical bulletin Omni 6000
TB980401 “Peer-to-Peer (Omni 3000)
Terminal RS-485 RS-485
RS-232-C
1 TX B TX-B
2 TERM ¾ ¾
First 3 RX ¾ RX-A
Serial
Port 4 GND GND GND
5 RTS A TX-A
6 RDY ¾ RX-B
7 TX B TX-B
8 TERM ¾ ¾
Second 9 RX ¾ RX-A
Serial
Port 10 GND GND GND
11 RTS A TX-A
12 RDY ¾ RX-B
Fig. 5. Back Panel Wiring of the RS-232-C/RS-485 Module #68-6205-B

RS-232-C / RS-485 Serial Port Jumper Options

Serial Port I/O Software The RS-232-C/RS-485 serial port has been designed so that RS-232 or RS-485
Settings - Each serial port is communications standards can be selected by placement of 16-pin resistor
configurable via OmniComâ
networks into the correct blocks. The following diagrams show the locations of
software or the Omni front
panel. Detailed information blocks JB1, JB2, JB3 for the first serial port (Model #68-6205-B only), and JB4,
on how to configure these JB5, JB6 for the second serial port (Models #68-6205-A and #68-6205-B) for
and other flow computer each format. Serial I/O Module #68-6205-A only has the RS-485 options
settings is available in available for the second serial port, and the first port is hard-wired to the RS-
Volume 3, Chapter 2 of the
User Manual and in 232-C position and cannot be changed by the user.
OmniCom Help.
RS-232
JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
RS-485 RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-485
TERMINATED

RS-232/485
NON-TERMINATED
RS-485
RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE RS-232 RS-232/485 4-WIRE
TERMINATED
Terminated/Non-
terminated RS-485 - The
RS-485 devices located at
each extreme end of an RS-
485 run should be
terminated. Note that the RS-485 4-WIRE TERMINATED RS-485 4-WIRE NON-TERMINATED
device located at an extreme JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6 JB1 or JB4 JB2 or JB5 JB3 or JB6
end may or may not be an
Omni Flow Computer. RS-232/485
RS-485 2-WIRE NON-TERMINATED RS-485 2-WIRE
RS-232 RS-485
RS-232 TERMINATED
Fig. 6. Layout of Jumper Blocks Showing RS-232/485 Formats

Multivariable Flow Transmitter Interfaces:

Connectivity and Data Transfer Issues
Contents
contained in the User Improving Accuracy and Performance.......................................................... 2
Manual, applicable to all
revision .72+. Multiple Sensors and Parameters..............................................................................2
Scan Interval.............................................................................................................2
Time Lag ..................................................................................................................2
Multivariable Flow
Transmitters - These are a Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data ................................................... 3
special type of smart digital
instrumentation device that Serial Data Communications ......................................................................... 4
incorporates multiple The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave ....................................................4
sensors. The sensors are
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo Master......................................4
controlled by
microprocessors. The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master............................................4
Point-to-Point Configurations ....................................................................................5
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link ................................................6
Direct Pulse Train........................................................................................... 7
Scope
This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .72+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
Abstract
The term ‘multivariable flow transmitter’ denominates a class of smart digital
instrumentation devices. This class of device incorporates multiple sensors
controlled by either one or more microprocessors. Coriolis and ultrasonic liquid
and gas flowmeters are examples of current multivariable transmitter
technology. These devices use some form of serial data communication link to
transfer data to and from the Omni flow computer, requiring an ‘SV’
multivariable communication combo module. In addition, the devices provide
an output pulse train which is proportional to the flow (either mass or volume).
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 1
Improving Accuracy and Performance

Obtaining high accuracy is the primary goal of instrumentation designers. The
inclusion of one or more microprocessors gives the instrument designer the
ability to improve the performance of a device, by taking advantage of the fact
that the measurement sensor is far more repeatable than it is accurate. For
example, given the same set of operating conditions, the sensor is able to
reproduce its results in an extremely predictable manner within the range of its
sensors. At a different set of operating conditions, the sensor results may be
different but still extremely predictable.
Some considerations for improving measurement accuracy and instrument
performance are the use of multiple secondary sensors and parameters, and
the device’s scan interval and the time lag it produces to calculate results from
a sensor measurement.
Multiple Sensors and Parameters

The microprocessor allows the manufacture to characterize and correct the
measurement sensor results by monitoring its electronic ambient conditions and
sensor operating conditions. This is done using secondary sensors or
calculating parameters such as temperature, pressure and density. The net
result is greatly improved accuracy of the measurement output, and the
availability of other measured or calculated parameters, which can be used by
tertiary devices such as flow computers. The flow computer uses these
parameters as values for input variables in ‘equations of state’ and to diagnose
the condition of the transmitter.
Scan Interval
All microprocessor controlled multivariable flowmeter devices operate on some
scan interval; i.e., input parameters are measured on a scan interval (fixed or
variable). The measured parameters are then input into a calculation sequence
which produces a resultant flow rate, (either mass / unit time or volume / unit
time).
Time Lag
Note that sensor measurements must be taken before a result can be
calculated. The calculated flow rate represents that which existed for the
previous scan interval; i.e., there is a time lag from when the measurement is
taken to when the flow rate is calculated. Fast scan intervals are typically used
to minimize any uncertainty that may be introduced by this time lag.
2 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
TB-980504 MV Flow Transmitter Interfaces: Serial Connectivity vs. Direct Pulse Trains
Transferring Flow Rate and Totalizer Data

Multivariable flowmeters provide useful and important diagnostic data and
alarms which can be of great benefit to the user. This data could be processed
and used to warn the user of impending failures or operational problems before
they have had a major impact on the uncertainty of the measurement result.
There is no question that the integrity of the measurement is greatly enhanced
by providing this data to the flow computer and allowing the flow computer to
log and alarm any abnormalities detected.
Various multivariable flowmeter devices update their database with the most
recently calculated volume or mass flow rate. The Omni flow computer, which is
operating on a 500 msec calculation cycle, uses the last flow rate received from
the flowmeter to calculate the incremental flow quantity for the current
calculation cycle.
INFO - At the time that this Most flowmeter devices also provide internal totalizers. Using these totalizers
bulletin was being prepared, can be difficult unless they are provided in a numeric format which increments
certain manufacturers were
making firmware adjustments
and rolls over predictably. Floating point variables for example normally keep
to their products to provide increasing in value and do not roll over to zero at any point. This causes a
high resolution totalizers problem because as the totalizer increases in size, a point is reached when the
suitable for use by the Omni bit resolution of the mantissa portion of the number is exceeded, and the
flow computer. totalizer begins to increment using larger and larger steps. The flow computer
could compare the totalizer values received between successive serial
transmissions, but because of the totalizer roll over and resolution problems,
and the inability to synchronize the reading of successive totalizer readings with
the calculation cycle of the flow computer, it is better to use the instantaneous
flow rate value obtained via a direct connection to calculate and totalize the
flow in the flow computer. This has significance because it forms the basis for
the totalizer integration within the transmitter.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 3
Serial Data Communications

Each time the device performs its measurement scan and calculation process,
it typically updates the values of calculated variables, measured parameters
and alarm points in its database. Some flowmeter devices act as ‘serial
communication slaves’, allowing the database to be asynchronously read and,
in some cases, modified. Other devices act as ‘serial communication pseudo
masters’ and simply transmit certain database points on a regular time interval,
while acting as a slave and accepting commands and configuration changes. At
least one device ¾the Krohne Ultrasonic flowmeter¾ can be both ‘full
communication master’ and ‘communication slave’.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Slave

In this mode the flowmeter device transmits data as requested by the flow
computer communication master. When asked for data, the flowmeter will
transmit the most recently calculated data or block of data. In normal operation,
the flow computer requests flow and diagnostic data on a regular interval and
intersperses any other data transmissions (e.g., configuration data or
commands) between these regular flow update polls. Sometimes due to heavy
communications traffic, communication glitches or transmission retries, flow
update polls can be time-skewed or missed altogether.
The Flowmeter Device as a Communication Pseudo

Master
In this mode a fixed block of data is transmitted over and over on a regular
interval without requiring a response, (e.g., Instromet ultrasonic gas flowmeter
transmits a information data block every second). Any command or
configuration data that is needed to be sent to the flowmeter transmitter must
be interspersed between these regular data block transmissions. It is the job of
the flow computer acting as communication master to ensure that configuration
changes do not collide with information data block transmissions. Sometimes
due to flow computer task loading, communication glitches or transmission
retries, flow data blocks can be time-skewed.
The Flowmeter Device as a Full Communication Master

The Krohne ultrasonic flowmeter can be configured to act as a Modbus master.
In this mode the flowmeter can be configured to realize transactions of up to 20
predefined data blocks, which can be writes of data to a flow computer or reads
of data from a flow computer. Each transaction requires a response from the
slave flow computer. Update cycle time can be excessive if too many blocks
with too much data are transferred and, as with the other serial communication
methods, glitches and transmission retries can delay or time-skew the data
received.
4 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Point-to-Point Configurations
Point-to-point configurations (Fig. 1), with both the flow computer and
transmitter terminated, is the only acceptable wiring configuration.. Each
flowmeter transmitter is connected to an independent ‘SV’ port of the flow
computer. Because each ‘SV’ port is connected to only one flowmeter
transmitter, each transmitter can now use a default communication address of
‘1’, greatly simplifying flow transmitter replacement issues. Data transfers are
much faster then in a multi-drop mode and the likelihood of transmitter
interaction is greatly minimized.
All 4 MV Ports of Multivariable Multivariable Multivariable Multivariable

Flow Computer Device Device Device Device
must be Terminated ID #1 ID #2 ID #3 ID #1
Omni Flow
Computer
(Using
Independent
SV Ports)
Modbus IDs of Multivariable All Four Multivariable
Devices can be the same in this Devices must be
Point-to-Point Configuration Terminated
Fig. 1. Point-to-Point Wiring Configuration
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 5
Advantages and Disadvantages of a Serial Data Link

The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q Saving of two wires needed to transmit the pulse signal
q No need to setup the multivariable flowmeter to output a pulse signal
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer using data obtained
via a serial data link are:
q High level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., the average metering technician is
unlikely to be familiar with serial communication protocols, or able to
operate a serial data protocol analyzer needed to interpret the data
messages received from the flowmeter.
q A cyclic or rapid change in flow rate at the flowmeter may not be
captured correctly because of the relatively slow scan rate of the serial
transmission link.
q The flow rate update rate cannot be guaranteed to be regular in some
cases due to communication glitches requiring communication retries and
time-outs. Other factors which affect this are intermittent configuration
and calibration transactions which may occur on the serial link. (these
concerns are multiplied in a multi-dropped wiring system).
6 TB-980504 w ALL.72+
Direct Pulse Train

From the calculated flow rate obtained from each measurement scan, the
device calculates and outputs a pulse train of a certain frequency via a digital
output. Each pulse will represent an exact amount of incremental flow. In some
cases, a second digital output can be used to provide an exact copy of the
pulse train except that it will be out of phase with the original pulse. These two
pulse trains approximate the type of pulse output that is received from a dual
pickoff turbine meter and as such can satisfy many of the ‘Pulse Fidelity’
checking requirements expressed in API MPMS, Chapter 5.5. The flow
computer counts each and every pulse output by the flowmeter device and
applies a flowmeter K-Factor as it would for any other pulse producing
flowmeter. K-factors can be either in pulses per mass unit or pulses per volume
unit. Changes in flow rate are immediately reflected in the pulse output and
registered by the flow computer, within the cycle update limitations of both
devices.
The advantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via a direct pulse
train are:
q Flowmeter response time is as fast as the measurement and calculation
scan period; e.g., a sudden increase or loss of flow would be detected
within one calculation cycle.
q Individual device scan cycles have no impact on uncertainty. Signal
aliasing is not a problem.
q Easy to implement ‘Dual Pulse Fidelity Checking’ using a second out of
phase pulse using existing flow computer technology.
q Low level of instrumentation and technical expertise needed to maintain
and debug an installation; e.g., a metering technician with simple digital
counter is all that is required to verify proper operation.
q Ability to prove the device using conventional pipe provers and compact
provers (applying double chronometry pulse interpolation methods).
Disadvantages of totalizing the flow in the flow computer via direct pulse train
are:
q Two extra wires are needed to transmit the pulse signal.
q Need to configure (scale) the digital I/O point pulse train frequency.
TB-980504 w ALL.72+ 7
Date: 07 22 98 Author(s): T.J. Tajani / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980701
Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
Contents
This technical bulletin is
applicable to Revisions Abstract........................................................................................................... 1
24.72+, 26.72+ and 27.72+ Procedure to Start and End Maintenance Mode........................................... 2
for metric units only.
Displaying the Maintenance Totals ............................................................... 3
Totalizer Maintenance
Totalizers ........................................................................................................ 3
Mode - This mode allows the Status.............................................................................................................. 3
operator to verify meter run
calculations by measuring Maintenance Mode Command ....................................................................... 4
meter run flow rate (gross,
net, mass, or energy) without Modbus Database Points Associated with the Totalizer Maintenance
impacting the custody Mode ............................................................................................................... 4
transfer totals.
Scope
The Maintenance Mode feature applies to the following application revisions:
q 24.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement / Coriolis Liquid Flow Metering
Systems with K Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 26.72+ Turbine / Positive Displacement Liquid Flow Metering Systems
with Meter Factor Linearization (metric units only)
q 27.72+ Orifice/Turbine Gas Flow Metering Systems (metric units only)
Abstract
The purpose of maintenance mode function is to allow operators to verify meter
run calculations. This function measures meter run flow rate (gross, net, mass,
and energy) without impacting the overall operation of the custody transfer
totals.
When in the maintenance mode, the flow measured by the target meter run will
not be accumulated in the meter run and/or station totalizers used for normal
operation. Furthermore, any D/A outputs configured to output flow rate will not
be impacted. While the specific meter is in the maintenance mode, the meter
will display zero flow in all the non-maintenance mode displays.
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+ 1
Procedure to Start and End Maintenance

Mode
The maintenance mode function requires a technician Level '1' password.
Following is the required procedure to Start and End the Maintenance Mode:
(1) Enter a positive value for ‘low flow cutoff’ or ‘active frequency’ (see
“Meter Run Setup” in Chapter 3 of the User Manual). A positive entry
must be made to ensure that the meter active flag operates correctly at
zero flow.
(2) Shutdown the meter (flow rate = Zero).
(3) In the display mode, press [Alpha Shift] [Prog] [Meter] [n] [Enter]. The
Omni LCD screen will display:
METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode N
Reset Maint Totals
Toggle Maint Mode _
Maintenance Mode (4) Press [ââ] (down arrow key) to place the cursor at ‘Toggle Maint Mode’
Active/Inactive - If there is a and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter]. Depending on the maintenance
‘Y’ next to ‘Maintenance
Mode’ in the display (see mode status, the Omni will toggle the mode. If the maintenance mode is
right), then the mode is active, then this step will end or “turn off” the mode; and vice versa.
active. The maintenance
mode is inactive when an ‘N’ You will be prompted for the password. The LCD screen will display:
is displayed.
METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode N
Reset Maint Totals
Password _
Configuration Settings - (5) Type the Level 1 password and press [Enter]. The Omni LCD screen
The maintenance mode uses will display a screen similar to the following:
current flow computer
configuration settings; i.e.,
additional configuration
entries are not required METER #1 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Mode Y
Reset Maint Totals
INFO - When the Toggle Maint Mode _
maintenance mode starts
after selecting the type of
measurement (gross, net,
mass or energy), the flow (6) To end (deactivate) the totalizer maintenance mode, repeat steps (2)
rate and totalized flow are through (5).
zero.
2 TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
TB-980701 Using the Totalizer Maintenance Mode
Displaying the Maintenance Totals

INFO -Pressing [Gross] In the display mode, select the displays you want by entering the corresponding
[Enter] in the maintenance keypress sequence:
mode will display the station
and meter flow for this mode. q For Gross Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Gross].
q For Net Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Net].
q For Mass Flow Maintenance Totals, press [Meter] [n] [Mass].
q For Energy Flow Maintenance Totals (gas applications only ¾Revision
27.72+), press [Meter] [n] [Energy].
The Omni LCD screen will display:
MaintenanceMode am3h
Current Flow Rate Meter Tag 0.000
MaintenanceMode am3
Totalized Value Meter Tag 0.000
Totalizers
Meter Run Database In the totalizer maintenance mode, the flow computer will realize all normal
Registers - The “n” in the calculations and accumulate resulting flow quantities into special maintenance
database point number
represents the meter run
totalizers. The special totalizer registers reset to zero upon entry to
number (n = 1, 2, 3 or 4). maintenance mode or can be manually reset while in the maintenance mode.
This reset will not affect the regular meter run totalizers. In this mode, the LCD
screen will display meter run current flow rate and accumulated flow rate for the
maintenance mode. Following are the Modbus database registers assigned as
special maintenance mode totalizers:
5n92 Gross Maintenance Total
5n93 Net Maintenance Total
5n94 Mass Maintenance Total
5n95 Energy (NSV) Maintenance Total
Status
The following status points are provided in the Omni flow computer’s Modbus
database to indicate when a meter run is in the totalizer maintenance mode:
1197 Meter Run #1 - Maintenance Mode Status
TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+ 3
Maintenance Mode Command

The maintenance mode function can be activated/deactivated remotely,
providing that the flow rate is zero and the meter run is inactive (1n05 = 0). The
meter run totalizer maintenance mode is activated by setting one or all the
following Modbus database points to '1'; the mode will be ended by writing '0' to
these same database points.
2737 Meter Run #1 - Toggle Maintenance Mode Command
Modbus Database Points Associated with the

Totalizer Maintenance Mode
The following table comprises the database registers for the maintenance mode
function:
MODBUS DATABASE POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAINTENANCE MODE

Database Point Number
Database Point Description Meter #1 Meter #2 Meter #3 Meter #4
Meter Run Maintenance Mode Status 1197 1297 1397 1497

Gross Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5192 5292 5392 5492
Net Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5193 5293 5393 5493
Mass Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5194 5294 5394 5494
Energy (NSV) Maintenance Mode Totalizers 5195 5295 5395 5495
Maintenance Mode Command 2737 2738 2739 2740
4 TB-980701 w 24/26/27.72+
Date: 08 17 98 Author(s): Robert L. Stallard TB # 980801
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom

Modbusä ä Data Packets
Contents
contained in the User ä Data Packets.................................................................... 2
Custom Modbusä
Manual, specifically Volume
3, Chapter 4 “Modbusä ä Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Protocol Implementation”, Packets ........................................................................................................... 2
revisions .71+. User-customized Modbus Driver................................................................................2
Compatible Serial Communications ..........................................................................3
Unsolicited Transmissions
Modbusää Protocol Implementation of Omni Proprietary Function
- These type of Code 67: Transmit Read Unsolicited Custom Data Packet.......................... 3
transmissions are used for
Omni flow computers to
Configuring Your Flow Computer for Unsolicited Transmissions of
transmit custom data packets Custom Data Packets ..................................................................................... 4
via an RS-232-C serial port Example ...................................................................................................................4
without a poll. This feature is
especially useful when
communicating via VSAT
satellite systems. Modbus
protocol Function Code 67
has been assigned to this Scope
function exclusively for Omni
flow computers. This technical bulletin applies to all firmware revisions versions .71+ of Omni
6000/Omni 3000 Flow Computers.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+ 1
Abstract
Unsolicited transmissions are used to transmit a ‘Custom Modbus Data Packet’
from a selected flow computer RS-232-C serial port without it being polled for
data by the receiving device. Modbus protocol Function Code 67 was assigned
for this feature, which allows the receiving device to discriminate between a
transmission without a poll (unsolicited) and a normal Modbus read.
This function, among other uses, was designed for communicating via VSAT
satellite systems where operating cost is directly proportional to RF bandwidth
used. In communications via satellite, polled transmissions are much more
costly than unsolicited transmissions. Typically, the device requesting data
(master) would poll the flow computer to transmit the data to it through a
satellite link. This would require a signal from the master device to the flow
computer and yet another from the flow computer back to the requesting
device. Whereas with unsolicited transmissions, the flow computer can be
configured to transmit Modbus custom data packets at specified time intervals,
when a certain event occurs, or by some other transmission triggering cause,
without the master device having to poll the flow computer for such data. In this
manner, only one signal is transmitted via satellite; i.e., from the flow computer
to the master device.
ä Data Packets
Custom Modbusä
Custom Modbusä ä Data Custom Modbus Data Packets are provided to reduce the number of polls
Packets - Many point needed to read multiple variables which may be in different areas of the
numbers were left unused
database. Groups of consecutive database points of any type of data can be
when numbering the
variables within the database. joined together into one packet by entering each data group’s starting database
This allows for future growth index number. The number of data bytes in a custom packet which will be used
and different application data. for unsolicited transmissions cannot exceed 248 in RTU mode or 496 in ASCII
Without custom data mode.
packets many polls would be
required to retrieve data
distributed throughout the
database. The custom data
packets allows you to
Prerequisites for Using Unsolicited
concatenate or join different
groups or sets of data in any
Transmissions of Custom Data Packets
order and of any data type
into 1 message response. Before you can configure your flow computer to realize unsolicited
These custom packets are transmissions of custom Modbus data packets, you must have the following:
located at points 0001, 0201
and 0401 in the database. q User-customized Modbus driver for receiving device
For more information refer to q Compatible serial communications capability
2.5.18 and 4.6 in Volume 3,
and 1.1, 1.3.14 and 2.1 in
Volume 4 of the User
Manual. User-customized Modbus Driver
Various communication master devices can be connected to the Omni flow
computer via Modbus serial link including, but not limited to, front-end
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) system devices. In order for
these devices to be able to identify and read unsolicited transmissions of Omni
flow computer custom data packets, the user must develop a custom driver
capable of identifying the Modbus protocol Function Code 67; which is an Omni
proprietary function. The custom driver must then be installed in the SCADA or
other receiving device and verified for adequate performance.
2 TB-980801 w ALL.71+
TB-980801 ä Data Packets
Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Modbusä
Compatible Serial Communications

Both the Omni flow computer and the receiving device must be equipped with
appropriate RS-232 compatible or RS-485 serial ports configured for Modbus
protocol implementation. The Omni flow computer has several hardware and
software options for RS-232 or RS-485 compatible serial data links (refer to the
User Manual for details).
Modbusä ä Protocol Implementation of Omni

Proprietary Function Code 67: Transmit
Unsolicited Custom Data Packet
A typical unsolicited transmission Modbus protocol message format using
Function Code 67 is as follows:
Modbus Protocol Message Format using Function Code 67

CUSTOM
DEVICE FUNCTION BYTE CRC ERROR
PACKET DATA
ADDRESS CODE 67 COUNT CHECK BYTES
ADDRESS
XX 43HEX XX XXXXHEX DD DD ... DD DD CRC CRC
Device Address : The address that identifies the Omni flow

computer that is transmitting unsolicited
data.
Function Code 67 : Represented in hexadecimal value as 43.
Byte Count : The number of bytes of the data field
(maximum of 248 bytes in RTU mode or
496 bytes in ASCII mode).
Custom Packet Address : The flow computer database address of the
custom Modbus data packet, represented in
hexadecimal value:
Custom Modbus Data Packet Addresses
Hexadecimal Equivalents
PACKET PACKET HEXADECIMAL
NUMBER ADDRESS EQUIVALENT
#1 0001 0001
#2 0201 00C9
#3 0401 0191
Data : The actual flow computer data transmitted

without a poll to the receiving device.
CRC Error Check Bytes : Used to check the message for errors.
For more information on Modbus protocol implementation, see Chapter 4 in

Volume 3 of the User Manual.
TB-980801 w ALL.71+ 3
Configuring Your Flow Computer for

Unsolicited Transmissions of Custom Data
Packets
User-programmable To activate unsolicited transmissions you must enable any of the following
Boolean Statements and ‘edge triggered’ command points below which causes the appropriate custom
Variables - For more
information, see Volume 4
Modbus data packet’ to be transmitted out of the selected serial port without the
for addresses of Boolean serial port being polled for data:
statements and user-
programmable variables, and
Chapter 2 in Volume 3 on Flow Computer Modbus Database Points for
configuring Boolean Unsolicited Transmissions
statements and user-
programmable variables. ADDRESS UNSOLICITED TRANSMISSION TYPE
2701 Custom Data Packet #1 via Serial Port #1
Example
The following user-programmable variables are an example of programming a
timer for every 15 seconds which triggers the unsolicited transmission of a
custom Modbus data packet.
7025: 7026 ) 7026 = # -15

7026: 7026 + # 0.5
The following Boolean statement is an example of an unsolicited transmission

where every 15 seconds the data contained in Custom Modbus Data Packet #3
will be transmitted without a poll via the flow computer’s Serial Port #2 to the
receiving device:
1025: 2706 = 7026
4 TB-980801 w ALL.71+
Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
Contents
complements the information Abstract ........................................................................................................... 1
contained i nVolume 1 , and Installation Options and Jumper Settings .................................................... 2
is applicable to all firmware
revisions. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-601 1..........................................................................2
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-621 1..........................................................................3
Scope
All Omni 6000/3000 Flow Computers have digital I/O capabilities via proprietary
digital I/O modules.
Abstract
Omni flow computers have digital I/O module options with user-selectable
jumpers for module address, sequence and interrupt request (IRQ). Omni
manufactures two models of digital modules:
q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6011

q Digital I/O Module Model #68-6211
Each digital module has 12 digital points. Each digital point can be individually
configured as either an input or an output, via the front panel keypad or a serial
port using OmniComâ configuration PC software.
TB-980802 w ALL.71+ 1
Installation Options and Jumper Settings

Only 1 digital I/O module can be installed in the Omni 3000 and a maximum of
2 installed in the Omni 6000. This provides a total of 12 digital I/O points for the
Omni 3000 and a total of 24 digital I/O for the Omni 6000.
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011

I/O Point LEDs - Each digital Inputs and outputs are provided for control of prover functions, remote
I/O point has 2 LEDs (green totalizing, sampler operation, tube control, injection pump control, and other
and dual red/green) which
indicate its status. When the
miscellaneous functions. Each digital I/O module provides a total of 12 digital
single green LED is glowing, I/O points. Each point can be configured independently as an input or output.
the digital I/O point is active. Points are individually fused and include LEDs indicating that the point is active
The dual red/green LED and if the fuse is blown. The digital I/O module normally occupies I/O Slots 1
indicates a blown fuse, red and 2 on the Omni 6000 backplane, and I/O Slot 1 on Omni 3000. User-
indicating a source current
and green a sinking current. selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 1 (below):
JP1 In = Dig. 1 Rising Edge Trigger

Interrupt Request (IRQ) JP2 In = Dig. 1 Falling Edge Trigger
Select Jumpers for JP3 In = Dig. 2 Rising Edge Trigger
Pipe Prover Detector JP4 In = Dig. 2 Falling Edge Trigger
NOTE: If “D2” remove all jumpers
Module Address
Jumper
Select D1 Select D2
Green LED On
Point Active
I/O Point
#01
F3 F2 F1
Dual (Red/Green)
Fuse Blown LED
F6 F5 F4
F9 F8 F7 Red On = Sourcing
Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
Individual Fuses F12 F11 F10
for Each I/O Point
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 1. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6011 - Jumper Settings
2 TB-980802 w ALL.71+
TB-980802 Digital I/O Modules: Installation Options
Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211

Digital Module # 68-6211 has the same features as the Model # 68-6011, plus
the following:
❑ Surface-mounted circuitry
❑ Individual resetable fuses for each digital I/O point
❑ Redesigned user-selectable jumpers for IRQ polarity, channel assign, and
module address selection using 1 or 2 digital I/ O modules.
User-selectable jumper settings are shown in Figure 2 (below). When using a
second digital I/O (D2) module, no jumper is required on JP1 and JP2.
Interrupt Request (IRQ) Neither Jumper is Required for D2 Module

Select Jumpers for
Pipe Prover Detector Assign IRQ to Assign IRQ to
(Non-Double Chronometry) I/O Point #1 I/O Point #2
JP2 JP2
JP1 In = Rising Edge Trigger
JP1 Out = Falling Edge Trigger
JP1 JP2
JP4
JP5
Green LED On
Point Active
Module Address
Jumper I/O Point
I/O Point
#01 #01
F3 F2 F1
Dual (Red/Green)
ADDRESS JP4 JP5 Fuse Blown LED
D1 Out Out F6 F5 F4
D2 In Out
Red On = Sourcing
F9 F8 F7 Current
Green On = Sinking
Current
Individual Resetable F12 F11 F10
Fuses for Each I/O Point
#12
#12
Digital I/O Point

LED Indicators
Figure 2. Digital I/O Module Model # 68-6211 - Jumper Settings
TB-980802 ! All.71+ 3
Date: 08 27 98 Author(s): Richard Dojs / Isaac Perez / Robert L. Stallard TB # 980803
Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware
Contents
contained in Volume 1, Safety Considerations.................................................................................... 2
applicable to all firmware
revisions. This technical Instructions .................................................................................................... 3
bulletin replaces and
invalidates TB-980301 Installing New OmniComâ PC Configuration Software..............................................3
“Upgrading EPROM Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and EPROM Chips ..........................4
Chips”.
Resetting RAM..........................................................................................................5
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules (Check I/O Modules) ...........6
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for Totalizers .................................7
Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56 Firmware .................................................... 8
After Replacing CPU
Module or EPROMs and Downloading the Configuration File from OmniComâ to the Flow Computer .............9
Before Downloading Returning the Old EPROMs ....................................................................................10
Configuration File - You
must perform the ‘Check I/O Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................................. 10
Modules’ procedure (see Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM......................................10
page 6 in this bulletin) and
calibrate your analog I/Os
Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad is Locked..........................11
before downloading the “Cannot Open File” Message is Displayed when Trying to Transmit the Saved Report
configuration file to the Templates to the Omni............................................................................................11
upgraded flow computer. Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports .........................................................11
Also, you must reset RAM as
expressed in this technical Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence ...................................................................11
bulletin before downloading OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer.......................................12
the configuration file. These
procedures must be
performed whether or not a
corresponding message is
displayed on the front panel
LCD screen of the flow
Scope
computer. Failure to do so This technical bulletin is applicable to all firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni
may void the warranty and
cause future problems and
3000 Flow Computers. The information contained in this technical bulletin is
unpredictable results with targeted to qualified professionals only.
your flow computer.
TB-980803 w All Revs 1

Abstract
DANGER! Upgrading Omni flow computer firmware allows users to incorporate new
features and increase the capabilities of their flow metering system application.
An upgrade may also be necessary for system conformance to API standards
and Year 2000 (Y2K) requirements.
To upgrade your flow computer firmware you will need to perform certain critical
steps, such as:
Electrical Shock Hazard!
q Install new version of OmniComâ Configuration PC Software.
Dangerous AC voltages are
present on the power supply q Save flow computer configuration file and report templates.
module and ribbon cable
when the unit is AC powered. q Replace Central Processor Module or EPROM chips.
To avoid electrical shock
which could be fatal, It is q Reset RAM.
imperative that you remove all
power before opening and q Set the number of digits and decimal places for totalizers and factors.
disassembling the flow
computer and take any other q Download and adjust flow computer configuration file and report
necessary precautions. templates.
Only qualified technicians
should work on any internal
circuitry. Omni Flow
Computers, Inc. is not Safety Considerations
responsible for personal
injuries or accidents that may Before removing any circuit boards from the flow computer, the following must
occur when working on flow be observed:
computer circuitry.
q Personal Safety : Although most of the internal circuits are powered

‹ CAUTION! ‹ by relatively low voltages, dangerous AC voltages
Static electricity can damage are present on the power supply module and ribbon
flow computer circuitry. Take cable when the unit is AC powered. For this reason
approved static device it is important to remove all power before
handling precautions when disassembling the computer.
working on the flow
computer.
q Static Electricity : Static electricity can be generated simply by moving
around on certain surfaces or wearing certain types
of clothing. The flow computer’s printed circuits can
be damaged by this static electricity. Take approved
static device handling precautions when working on
the flow computer.
2 TB-980803 w All Revs

TB-980803 Upgrading Flow Computer Firmware
Instructions
Before removing the Central Processor Module (CPU) or old EPROMs, you
must install the new version of OmniComâ Configuration PC Software supplied
with your new CPU or EPROMs and use this new version to retrieve the
configuration file from the flow computer.
Installing New OmniComâ PC Configuration Software

Using OmniComâ Help -
Context sensitive help is (1) With the old EPROMs still in the flow computer, install the new
available by pressing the [F1] OmniCom to your PC from the diskette shipped with the CPU or
key on your PC keyboard EPROMs. The diskette label provides installation instructions.
when running OmniCom.
(2) Create a new file from within the newly installed version of OmniCom
by opening ‘File/New’ and entering the file name.
(3) When prompted for the EPROM version number of the file to create,
select the version number that corresponds to the NEW EPROMs you
will be installing.
(4) Upload the configuration file from the OLD set of EPROMs installed in
the flow computer by opening ‘Online/Start Comm’ and selecting
‘Receive Omni Configuration Data’.
(5) Subsequently, receive ALL the report templates by selecting ‘Receive

Report Templates’ within the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu. As a
precautionary measure, this should be done regardless of whether or
not default report templates are being used.
(6) Print the configuration file from OmniCom by opening ‘File/Print’ and
selecting your print option (‘Yes’ or ‘No’).
(7) Verify all settings indicated in the configuration file printout and make
any necessary adjustments to these settings that are appropriate for
your particular application.
(8) Close OmniCom by selecting ‘Exit’ from the ‘Print’ menu. You will be
prompted on whether to save the configuration file and each of the
report templates. Answer ‘Yes’ to all.

Replacing the Central Processor Module (CPU) and

EPROM Chips
‹ CAUTION! ‹ (9) If you are replacing ONLY the EPROM chips and NOT the CPU
When removing the CPU module, reset all RAM in the Omni via the front panel keypad. If you
Module, take extreme care will be replacing the entire CPU module, DO NOT reset the RAM.
not to bend or fold the
membrane keypad ribbon To reset RAM from the front panel keypad, press [Prog] [Setup]
cable too sharply, or the
metallic traces could be
[Enter] [Enter] [Enter], then type in your privileged password as
damaged. prompted. Scroll down by pressing the [â â] key to the ‘Reset All Ram?’
prompt and answer [Y] to answer ‘yes’. Answer ‘Yes’ or ‘OK’ to any
Location of EPROM Chips- warnings. (Go to Step 14 for detailed instruction on resetting Ram.)
The location of the EPROM
chips on the CPU Module is
shown in Fig. 1. The (10) Remove power from the Omni flow computer and remove the CPU
EPROMs are the two large module.
32-pin Integrated Circuits
(ICs or “chips”) with labels
marked U3 and U4. Note the (11) Make note of the new EPROM version and checksum indicated in the
position of the orientation label placed on the EPROM chips. You will need this information later.
notches at one end of each
EPROM.
(12) Either replace the old CPU module with a new CPU that has the new
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ set of EPROMs, or simply replace the old set of EPROMs with the new
set.
Replacing EPROM Chips -
Ensure that all pins plug into
there respective holes and (13) After replacing or reinstalling the CPU module, apply power to the Omni
that none are bent. flow computer. Make a note of what your LCD screen displays when
powering up. If you receive a display indicating loss of calibration data,
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ you will need to calibrate your analog I/Os after completing the EPROM
After Replacing CPU
upgrade. (Refer to Volume 1 “System Architecture and Installation”
Module or EPROMs and of the User Manual for more information.)
Before Downloading
must perform the ‘Check I/O
Modules’ procedure (see
page 6 in this bulletin) and Math
Central Program Program Archive
calibrate your analog I/Os Processor
Processor EPROM RAM RAM
before downloading the
configuration file to the
upgraded flow computer.
Also, you must reset RAM as
expressed in this technical
bulletin before downloading
procedures must be
Backup
performed whether or not a Batttery
displayed on the front panel
LCD screen of the flow
computer. Failure to do so
may void the warranty and EPROM Size
cause future problems and 1 OR 4 Meg Bit System Watchdog
unpredictable results with Select 4 Meg J3 In = Enabled
your flow computer. As Shown J3 Out = Disabled
J1 J2 (Always Enabled)
J3
Figure 1. Layout of Central Processor Module Showing Location of

EPROM ICs and Jumpers J1, J2 and J3.

Resetting RAM
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ (14) You will need to reset RAM before and after replacing EPROM chips. If
After Replacing CPU you will be replacing the entire CPU module, reset RAM only AFTER
Module or EPROMs and replacing the CPU. DO NOT reset the RAM before replacing. When
Before Downloading
power is applied to the flow computer after replacing EPROM chips, the
must perform the ‘Check I/O following screen is displayed:
Modules’ procedure (see
page 6 in this bulletin) and
calibrate your analog I/Os RAM Data Invalid
before downloading the Reconfigure System
configuration file to the Using “OMNI” as
upgraded flow computer.
Also, you must reset RAM as Initial Password
Enter the key press sequence [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]
procedures must be and the following screen is displayed:
displayed on the front panel PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
LCD screen of the flow Privileged _
computer. Failure to do so Level 1
cause future problems and Level 1A
unpredictable results with
your flow computer.
Different screens will be displayed each time you press enter before
you reach the above screen.
Program Mode - Pressing
the [Prog] key will activate
the Program Mode. While in (15) At the ‘Privileged’ prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
this mode, the Program LED use ‘OMNI’ as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
above the keypad is lit red. [M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
To exit the Program Mode,
press the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
LED goes off. Privileged OMNI
Level 1 _
Level 1A
(16) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Reset All Ram?’
and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for ‘Yes’.
Archive Run?(Y/N)
Reset All Totals
Reset All Ram ? Y
The display will briefly go blank, the backlight will go off and come back
on. The following screen may then reappear:
RAM Data Invalid

Reconfigure System
Using “OMNI” as
Initial Password

(17) Press [Status] and a screen similar to the following will be displayed:
Module S-Ware H-Ware

B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
D-1 Y Y
â] key to the end to display the

(18) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â
Revision Number and EPROM Checksum.

S-1 Y Y
Revision No. 021.72
EPROM Checksum 2408
Verify that these match with what you previously noted in Step 11. If
they do not match and there is an EPROM Checksum alarm, stop at
this point and contact Omni technical support.
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹
After Replacing CPU
Verifying and Updating Information of Installed Modules
Module or EPROMs and (Check I/O Modules)
Before Downloading
must perform the ‘Check I/O (19) If the EPROM Revision number and Checksum are correct, verify if
Modules’ procedure and both the ‘S-Ware’ (Software) and ‘H-Ware’ (Hardware) columns read ‘Y’
calibrate your analog I/Os (Yes) for all the installed modules before proceeding any further. Scroll
before downloading the
configuration file to the
up and down the screen in the previous step by using the [â â] / [á
á]
upgraded flow computer. arrow keys to view installed modules. If both columns read ‘Y’, go to
Also, you must reset RAM as Step 25. If not, proceed to the following step (20).
the configuration file. These Module S-Ware H-Ware
procedures must be B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
displayed on the front panel D-1 Y N
LCD screen of the flow S-1 N Y
computer. Failure to do so Revision No. 021.72
cause future problems and EPROM Checksum 2408
unpredictable results with
your flow computer.

(20) If one or more of the installed modules reads ‘N’ (No) under the ‘S-
the [Prog] key will activate Ware’ (Software) and/or ‘H-Ware’ (Hardware) columns, press [Prog]
the Program Mode. While in [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] and the following is displayed:
this mode, the Program LED
above the keypad is lit red.
To exit the Program Mode, *** MISC. SETUP ***
press the [Prog] key Password Maint?(Y) _
repeatedly until the Program
LED goes off. Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)

â] key to ‘Check Modules?’.

(21) Move the cursor down by pressing the [â
*** MISC. SETUP ***

Password Maint?(Y)
Check Modules ?(Y) _
Config Station?(Y)
(22) Press [Enter] and a screen similar to the following is displayed:

B-1 Y Y
E-1 Y Y
D-1 Y N
(23) Scroll down by pressing repeatedly the [â â] key to ‘Update S-Ware?’

and press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] to enter ‘Y’ for ‘Yes’.

D-1 Y N
S-1 N Y
Update S_Ware ? Y
You will be prompted to enter your password. Also enter ‘Y’ to answer
‘OK’ if cautioned that updating the software will cause the I/O
configurations to be cleared.
(24) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.
Setting the Number of Digits and Decimal Places for

Totalizers
(25) In newer versions of EPROMs, you are given an option to set the
number of digits for cumulative totalizer rollover (8 or 9 digits) and the
number of decimal places for volume and mass totalizers. Set these
options via keypad ONLY by pressing [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter]. The following screen is displayed:
Privileged _
Level 1
Level 1A

(26) At the ‘Privileged’ prompt, enter the following key press sequence to
use ‘OMNI’ as the privileged password: [Alpha Shift] [Alpha Shift] [O]
[M] [N] [I] [Enter]. The cursor will move down to the next entry.
Setting the Number of
Digits for Totalizers - PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Totalizers within the flow Privileged OMNI
computer can be rolled at 8
or 9 significant digits. To set Level 1 _
totalizer rollover to 9 digits, Level 1A
press [0] [Enter]. To set
totalizer rollover to 8 digits,
press [1] [Enter].
â] key to ‘Reset All Totals?’.
Setting Volume and Mass
Totalizer Resolution - PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
Gross and net volume and Reconfig Archive ? Y
mass totalizer values can be Archive Run?(Y/N) N
expressed with up to 3
decimal places. To set the Reset All Totals ? _
number of decimal places for
totalizer resolution, press the
corresponding number key
([0], [1], [2] or [3] decimal (28) Press [Alpha Shift] [Y] [Enter] for ‘Yes’ and a screen similar to the
places, where 0=Klbs, following is displayed:
1=100lbs, 2=10lbs, 3=lbs).
Then press the [Enter] key.
All firmware revisions, except All Totals Now Reset
for Version 20.56, provide Totalizer Resolution
Mass in pounds. # Digits, 0=9, 1=8 0
DecPlacesGross&Net 0
Help for Number of Digits DecimalPlaces Mass 3
and Decimal Place
Settings - You can view the
Help in OmniCom under Enter the respective values you want for each and every totalizer
“Factor Setup & Sys resolution setting and press the [Enter] key after each entry (see
Constants” by highlighting
sidebar).
each of the fields. Then use
F1 for a detailed explanation It is strongly recommended that you set these resolutions NOW
of each of your choices.
However, DO NOT set these because you will not be able to change these settings after configuring
options via OmniCom. your flow computer or during flow operations without resetting to zero
Context-sensitive help is also all your totalizers.
available via the Omni front
panel keypad by pressing the
[Help] key (same as the Special Instructions If Upgrading from Revision 20.56
[Enter] key) rapidly twice Firmware
while the cursor is at the
entry you want to set. Version 20.56 EPROMs provide Mass in hundreds of pounds. If you
want to continue receiving your Mass in hundreds of pounds, press [1]
[Enter] at the ‘DecimalPlaces Mass’ entry.
(29) Exit the Program Mode when you are done by pressing the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program LED above the keypad goes out. This
returns you to the Display Mode.

Downloading the Configuration File from OmniComâ to

the Flow Computer
the [Prog] key will activate (30) In the Display Mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] to display
the Program Mode. While in the ‘Misc. Setup’ menu.
this mode, the Program LED
above the keypad is lit red.
To exit the Program Mode, *** MISC. SETUP ***
press the [Prog] key
repeatedly until the Program
Password Maint?(Y) _
LED goes off. Check Modules ?(Y)
Config Station?(Y)
â] key to ‘Serial I/O “n”’.

*** MISC. SETUP ***

User Display ? “n”
Config Digital“n”
Serial I/O “n” _
Enter the number of the flow computer serial port to which your
OmniCom PC is connected and press [Enter]. A screen similar to the
following will display:
SERIAL PORT #2
Baud Rate 38400
Number of Data Bit 8
Number of Stop Bit 1
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹ (32) Scroll down to ‘Modbus ID’ and then to ‘Modbus Type’ and enter the
It is recommended that you corresponding settings indicated in the OmniCom configuration file you
select ‘Modbus RTU printed earlier. Remember to press [Enter] after typing each setting.
(modem)’ protocol for the
‘Modbus Type’ in Step 32 if
it is available in your new SERIAL PORT #2
EPROM version. If you
decide to use this protocol,
TX Key Delay 1
ensure that you make this Modbus ID 1
same change in your Modbus Type 2
OmniCom configuration file
under ‘Config Serial I/O’
before proceeding to
download the configuration (33) Run OmniCom and open the configuration file you saved earlier which
file to the Omni pertains to this flow computer. Open the File Menu and select ‘Print’.
Print the file to a printer on your PC to have an updated printout of the
flow computer configuration.
(34) Open ‘Offline/Omni Configuration/Config Serial I/O’ and ensure that

the ‘Modbus Type’ is set correctly to match what you selected in Step
32.

(35) Open ‘Online/Start Comm’. Check the Modbus ID, Comm Port, Baud
Rate, and Comm Media settings to ensure that these are correct. If you
set the port in Step 32 to ‘Modbus RTU (modem)’ protocol, ensure that
‘Comm Media’ is set to Modem.
(35) Transmit Omni Configuration Data.
(36) Transmit Omni Report Templates.
(37) Calibrate your analog I/Os if you are required to do so. For more
information on calibrating analog I/O, see Volume 1, Chapter 8 of the
User Manual.
Returning the Old EPROMs

You are now done. Remember to use the Business Reply Label supplied with
your new EPROMs. If you have not yet completed your EPROM Upgrade Form,
please do so now and return along with the old EPROMs to Omni Flow
Computers, Inc.
Troubleshooting Tips
Omni Display Does Not Come On After Resetting All RAM

Tech Support - If you If the Omni Display does not come on after resetting all RAM, proceed as
encounter any other follows:
difficulties, please contact
our technical staff.
(1) Disconnect all power to the Omni.
Phone: (281) 240-6161
Fax: (281) 240-6162 (2) Remove CPU Module and also remove the System Watchdog Jumper
E-mail: J3 (See Figure 1) on the CPU.
techsupport@omniflow.com
(3) Reinstall CPU Module with Jumper J3 removed.
(4) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be on.
‹ IMPORTANT! ‹
(5) Power down again the flow computer and remove CPU Board.
Replacing RAM and
EPROM Chips - Ensure that (6) Replace Jumper J3 and then reinstall the CPU Module.
all pins plug into there
respective holes and that (7) Once again, apply power to the flow computer.
none are bent.
The Omni display should now be normal. However, if problem persists, try
unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.

Omni Front Panel Display is Blinking and/or the Keypad

is Locked
This problem may be solved by unplugging and reconnecting the RAM chips
into the CPU board as follows:
(2) Remove CPU Module.
(3) Unplug and reconnect RAM chips to the CPU board
(4) Reinstall the CPU Module.
(5) Power up the Omni and reset all RAM again. Display should be normal.
“Cannot Open File” Message is Displayed when Trying to

Transmit the Saved Report Templates to the Omni
Sometimes, when trying to transmit the saved report templates to the flow
computer, OmniCom will display a message indicating that it cannot open the
file. Simply go to the OmniCom pull-down Report menu and open each of the
reports individually, make the necessary changes and resave the reports. The
change can simply represent change to the same thing it was before.
Subsequently, save the template (usually ALT-S). Exit OmniCom and then
restart OmniCom. Open the file and try transmitting the templates to the Omni
again.
Incorrect Data in Printed Customized Reports

When upgrading EPROMs and using customized reports, the data in the printed
report may not be correct because some of the database registers may have
changed, moved or redefined in the new version with respect to the old version.
If you see that the printed data is not what you expected, then you should open
the report template files to check if you are retrieving the data from the correct
registers for the new EPROM version. Also verify with OmniCom that “Use
Default Report Template’ under ‘Printer Setup’ is set to ‘No’.
Unable to Complete a Prove Sequence

Sometimes you are unable to get through a prove sequence after an EPROM
upgrade. Open up the deviation percentages in the Prover Setup to establish
an initial prove sequence. Once a prove sequence has been established, you
can tighten up the deviation percentages to what you had set before the
EPROM upgrade.

OmniCom Unable to Communicate to the Flow Computer

Sometimes you are unable to communicate to an Omni after replacing the
EPROMs. This may be caused by the following:
q The OmniCom Start Comm/Comm Media setting differs from the Omni
flow computer Modbus Type setting in the serial port setup. In the newest
versions of EPROMs when the flow computer is powered-up, the
EPROMs default to Modbus RTU (modem) for Serial Port # 2. The
Modbus RTU (modem) protocol is the preferred protocol; therefore, make
this change in your OmniCom configuration file AND also set the ‘Comm
Media’ to ‘Modem’ in the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu.
q The new EPROMs default to Modbus ID 1 on power-up. Ensure that your
Modbus ID matches in both the ‘Online/Start Comm’ menu and in the
serial port setup in the Omni. Also ensure the OmniCom configuration
file, Omni serial port, and OmniCom ‘Start Comm’ screen are all set to
the same Modbus ID.

Using the Audit Trail (Event Logger) Feature

and Sealing of the Flow Computer
Contents
contained in Volumes 2 & 3 Activating the Audit Trail Feature ................................................................. 2
of the User Manual,
applicable to all firmware Password Protecting Serial Port Access ....................................................................3
revisions. Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports ................................................................4
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report................................................. 5
Audit Trail Feature - This Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad ..............................................5
feature is an event logger that Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom .........................................5
records the last 150 changes
made to the flow computer Sealing the Flow Computer ........................................................................... 6
database. A fixed format Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout) ..................................................................6
report provides an audit trail
of these changes. This report Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option .................................................................7
comprises time and date Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch ..................................................................7
stamped changes made to Housing Sealing........................................................................................................8
the flow computer database,
either via the local keypad or
via password protected serial
port access.
Scope
All firmware revisions of Omni 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers have the Audit
Trail feature. The information contained in this technical bulletin is for
intermediate users.

Abstract
All Omni flow computer firmware revisions include the “Audit Trail” feature. In
current revisions, this security feature consists of an archive file that stores 150
records of the most recent changes made to the flow computer database. The
flow computer always logs changes made to the database via the Omni front
panel keypad. It can also log changes made remotely via a Modbus port, using
OmniComâ PC Configuration Software for instance, if passwords have been
activated on the serial port.
Each record consists of a unique event number, time and date tag, the
database index number of the affected variable, and the new and old value of
that variable. The value of gross and net totals at the moment of the event are
also stored in the record. Furthermore, the firmware can log events that involve
a group of consecutive database addresses. In this case, only the starting index
number and the number of consecutive index points appear in the audit trail.
The records comprise the Audit Trail Report which, when printed, lists the latest
150 records in time sequence starting with the most recent. You can view this
report in OmniCom and print it either with OmniCom or the front panel keypad.
The Audit Trail Report has a fixed format and is not customizable by the user.
Activating the Audit Trail Feature

The Omni flow computer will automatically log all changes made to the
configuration settings via the front panel keypad. However, to avoid flushing the
audit trail, the firmware does not log configuration changes made via serial
ports other then complete download events, unless rigorous auditing is enabled.
In order for the flow computer to log configuration changes made through a
serial port, whether remotely (via modem) or via direct connection, the
corresponding serial port must be password protected or enabled for rigorous
auditing.
With passwords activated, the firmware will fully log the target database
address’ old and new value only when single point writes occur. When blocks of
data are written, only the starting database index and total number of
consecutive points written to will be recorded in the audit trail log.
Enabling rigorous auditing does not require serial port passwords to be used.
The flow computer will archive all serial port transactions that represent
configuration changes.

TB-981101 Using the Audit Trail Feature (Event Logger) and Sealing the Flow Computer
Password Protecting Serial Port Access

Entering a Serial Port The flow computer will automatically log any single point writes to a specific
Password -
database address made via a password protected serial port. Assigning serial
Initially, you can only assign
serial port passwords via the port passwords for the first time can only be done via the front panel keypad of
Omni front panel keypad. the flow computer.
Choose up to 8
alphanumerical characters To assign passwords and restrict access to serial ports via the Omni front panel
for the password. Enter the
selected password at the
keypad, proceed as follows:
corresponding serial port
entry under the ‘Password
Maintenance’ submenu: (1) Using the flow computer’s front panel keypad and in the normal display
q ‘Ser1 Passwd’ for Serial mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter] [Enter]. This will display the
Port #1
q ‘Ser2 Passwd’ for Serial
‘Password Maintenance’ submenu of the ‘Miscellaneous
Port #2 Configuration’ menu.
Port #3
Port #4 Priveledged _
Note: If Serial Port #1 has a Level 1
printer connected to it, you Level 1A
need not assign a password
to this port. Ports #3 and #4
are available only if your flow
computer has a second serial
I/O module installed.
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the desired ‘Sern Passwd’ prompt
and enter a password of your choice. The “n” in ‘Sern’ represents the
serial port number (e.g., the display shows Ser2 for Serial Port #2 ¾see
sidebar).
Ser1 Passwd
Lockout SW Active? N
Ser2 Passwd _
(3) Press [Enter] once you have keyed-in your password for the selected
serial port. The flow computer will prompt you to enter the privileged
password for the flow computer to validate the new serial port password.
If you have not yet assigned a privileged password, either use “OMNI”
as the default or scroll up and assign the password now. If you do the
latter, repeat the procedure for assigning the serial port password.
Once assigned, you have the option of changing the serial port passwords via
OmniCom PC configuration software. To do this, while on any field edit screen,
press [Ctrl] [Alt] [P] on your PC keyboard and follow the online instructions.
You will need to enter the current valid password before you can change it.

Enabling Rigorous Auditing of Serial Ports

Rigorous auditing is normally used only as a diagnostic tool to track down
unexpected changes made to the flow computer database. It allows you to log
all transactions of one or more non-password protected serial ports. Actually,
the only way to log all changes to the Omni database done through serial ports
is by enabling rigorous auditing.
To enable rigorous auditing you must define a user-programmable variable

statement. This statement places the decimal value of the serial port’s
hexadecimal code into the database address the corresponds to the special
diagnostic function (Index # 3800).
To enable rigorous auditing to one or more serial ports, do the following:
(1) From the table below, select the hexadecimal codes of the serial ports to
which you want to apply rigorous auditing. Then determine the decimal
equivalent of the selected hexadecimal codes (indicated in the table).
(2) Formulate a variable statement that writes the desired decimal value to
Database Point # 3800 (Special Diagnostic Function) using the following
logic:
Address 3800 is EQUAL (=)to the CONSTANT (#) decimal value
Or simply select the respective variable statement from among those

provided in the table.
VARIABLE STATEMENTS FOR E N A B L I N G R I G O R O U S AU D I T I N G

TO SERIAL PORTS
Serial Port(s) # Hexadecimal Decimal Variable
1 2 3 4 Code Equivalent Statement
Œ 000A 10 3800=#10
• 00A0 160 3800=#160
Ž 0A00 2560 3800=#2560
• A000 40960 3800=#40960
Œ • 00AA 170 3800=#170
Œ Ž 0A0A 2570 3800=#2570
Œ • A00A 40970 3800=#40970
• Ž 0AA0 2720 3800=#2720
• • A0A0 41120 3800=#41120
Ž • AA00 43520 3800=#43520
Œ • Ž 0AAA 2730 3800=#2730
Œ • • A0AA 41130 3800=#41130
Œ Ž • AA0A 43530 3800=#43530
• Ž • AAA0 43680 3800=#43680
Œ • Ž • AAAA 43690 3800=#43690

(3) Either via OmniCom or the front panel keypad, open the ‘Program
Variable’ submenu under the ‘Miscellaneous Configuration’ menu,
Verifying the Audit Trail select an available (empty) variable point, and key-in the variable
Feature - To verify that the statement. Press [Enter] when done to enable the rigorous auditing
audit trail feature and feature. In OmniCom, remember to download the variable statement to
rigorous auditing are active,
the flow computer when done if working offline.
make any necessary flow
computer configuration
changes and view or print the
Audit Trail Report (as
indicated in this technical
bulletin). If the changes you
made appear on the report,
Printing and Viewing the Audit Trail Report
the audit trail feature is
working fine. You can print the Audit Trail Report from either the flow computer’s front panel
keypad or from OmniCom. However, you can view this report only from
OmniCom.
Printing the Audit Trail Report via Front Panel Keypad

To print the Audit Trail Report from the flow computer’s keypad, do as follows:
(1) In the display mode, press [Prog] [Print] [Enter] to display the ‘Print
Report Menu’.
(2) Scroll down to place the cursor at the ‘Audit Trail ? (Y)’ prompt and type
the number ‘150’, indicating the total number of records to print. It is not
necessary to print all 150 records, unless you want to.
(3) Press [Enter] and the report will print.
Viewing and Printing the Audit Trail Report via OmniCom

To print the Audit Trail Report from OmniCom, do the following:
(1) With OmniCom running, select ‘Audit Trail Report’ under the ‘Report’
menu and press [Enter].
(2) Select ‘Load from Omni’ in the popup box and press [Enter]. OmniCom
will prompt you for a password to continue. It will allow you to change
the password if you want (for loading the Audit Trail report via OmniCom
only). In any case you will need to enter the password you assigned for
rigorous auditing.
(3) Type the password and press [Enter]. OmniCom will proceed to load the
audit trail data and display the Audit Trail Report.
(4) If you want to print the report, press [Alt] [P] and follow the online
instructions.
(5) Exit OmniCom when done.

Sealing the Flow Computer

TIP - You can set the In addition to the audit trail, Omni flow computers provide sealing features for
download disabling and serial
port lockout switches in one
added security. These security features prevent access to the circuitry and
session while in the tampering of configuration settings, protecting data and system integrity.
‘Password Maintenance’
setup. You can set these The key sealing features are:
features only via the front
panel keypad or using the
Omni Panel Emulator q Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)
provided in OmniCom. The
recommended order for q Serial Port Lockout Switches
applying the sealing features
is as follows:
q Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch
(1) Disable download to the q Housing Sealing
flow computer
(2) Select the serial port
lockout switch option
(3) Activate the program
inhibit switch Download Disabling (OmniCom Lockout)
(4) Seal the flow computer
housing enclosure Omni flow computer firmware allows you to block all complete downloads from
OmniCom to the flow computer. This feature protects against accidental
downloads that could occur due to incorrect logon. Once a flow computer is
configured, the correct way to log on is to ‘Receive’ the configuration in
OmniCom.
You can set this feature only via the front panel keypad. To set the download
disabling feature, proceed as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access ‘Password Maintenance’ setup.
(2) At the ‘Privileged’ Password prompt, type-in the corresponding

password and press [Enter]. The download disabling setting will not
appear if you do not enter the privileged password.
(3) Scroll down to the ‘Disable Download?’ prompt. The LCD screen
displays as shown below.
Lockout SW Active? N
Model #? 0=3K,1=6K 1
Disable Download? N
(4) Press [Y] [Enter] to disable or [N] [Enter] to enable OmniCom

downloading of the configuration data to the Omni flow computer.
If desired, you can proceed to set the serial port lockout switches while in the
‘Password Maintenance’ setup. The following section describes this feature.

Serial Port Lockout Switch Enable Option

The flow computer’s configuration provides a lockout switch option for each
serial port. You can activate or deactivate the serial port lockout switch option
only via the front panel keypad, as follows:
(1) In the normal display mode, press [Prog] [Setup] [Enter] [Enter]
[Enter] to access ‘Password Maintenance’ settings.
(2) Scroll down to the ‘Lockout SW Active?’ setting that corresponds to the
selected serial port. Press [Y] [Enter] to activate or [N] [Enter] to
deactivate the lockout switch for each serial port to which you want to
set this feature.
(3) Press the [Prog] several times to exit the Program Mode and return to
the Display Mode.
Program Inhibit (Keypad Lockout) Switch

Preventing Access to the The Program Inhibit Switch allows you to lock access to the Program and
Program Inhibit Switch -
To prevent unauthorized
Diagnostic/Calibration Modes via the front panel keypad. This prevents
activating or deactivating of configuration settings from being changed. Attempting to enter a configuration
the program inhibit switch, submenu will have no effect when the switch is in the inhibit position, and
seal the flow computer “PROGRAM LOCKOUT” will display on the bottom line of the LCD screen.
housing as indicated in this
technical bulletin.
Nonetheless, you can still enter key presses to only view data in the normal
Activating the program inhibit
Display Mode.
switch with firmware
revisions prior to .72 blocked Figure 1 (on following page) shows the location of the program inhibit switch;
all configuration changes. which is behind the front panel. To access and activate or deactivate, do the
This was subsequently
modified to allow
following:
configuration changes to
password level 2 operational (1) Hold the front panel from the bottom, gently lift it upwards to disengage
parameters such as PID the latching bezel, and withdraw the flow computer a couple of inches
setpoints, batch end
from its housing case.
commands, and prove
commands.
(2) Locate the red Program Inhibit Switch. It will be on the bottom right
(when facing the front panel) behind the front panel (see Figure 1).
(3) Using your right hand (recommended), place the switch to the downward
position to lock the keypad or place it to the upward position to unlock
the keypad.
(4) Reinsert the flow computer into its housing, making sure that the bezel
latches in place.
You can test the program inhibit switch by pressing the [Prog] [Setup] [Enter]
keys on the front panel keypad. This will take you to the Setup Menu in the
Program Mode. Place the cursor on any of the submenus listed and press
[Enter]. If the “Program Lockout” message flashes on the bottom line of the
LCD screen, the program inhibit switch is active.

‹ CAUTION! ‹
you must first disengage by
from the case.
Figure 1. The Program Inhibit Switch
Housing Sealing
You can lock or seal the inner enclosure of the flow computer within the outer
enclosure, blocking access to the 'Program Inhibit Switch' and to the circuitry.
To seal the flow computer, insert an instrument sealing wire through the holes
provided on the top-right and towards the back of the enclosures. Before
placing the sealing wire, make sure that the integral latching mechanism is in
place aligning the holes of both enclosures (inner and outer).

Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic

Ultrasonic Gas Flowmeters
Contents
User Manual Reference - Scope....................................................................................................................1
complements the Abstract ................................................................................................................1
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation .......................................................2
information contained in the
User Manual, applicable to
Revision 23.73/27.73+. Omni Flow Computer Logic ...............................................................................2
Wiring Installation ...............................................................................................4
Communicating with
Instromet Q-Sonic Flow Computer Configuration ...........................................................................4
Ultrasonic Gas Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings.......................................................... 5
Flowmeters - The Meter Run Setup Entries ............................................................................................... 5
Instromet Q-Sonic
ultrasonic flowmeter Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index Numbers .............................6
measures gas flow with
acoustic pulse reflection Flow Computer User Displays .........................................................................10
paths by using the Absolute SV Module Serial Communications Port ..................................................................... 10
Digital Time Travel (ADTT) Meter Run Data ........................................................................................................... 11
method. This device
communicates with Omni
flow computers via Omni’s
‘SV’ process I/O combo
module using a proprietary
protocol. To use the scaled Scope
pulse output of the
Instromet flowmeter, the This technical bulletin applies to firmware revisions 23.73+ and 27.73+ of Omni
flow computer must either 6000/Omni 3000 flow computers, for gas flow metering systems.
have an ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘E’
combo module installed.
Abstract
Omni Technical support is The Q-Sonic ultrasonic flowmeter determines the linear gas velocity through the
available at: meter tube by using multiple acoustic pulse reflection paths. The Q-Sonic
Phone: (281) 240-6161 analyzes these paths employing the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT)
Fax: (281) 240-6162 measurement method. The Omni flow computer totalizes either the flowmeter
Technical information is pulse input signal or the profile corrected gas velocity data, received from the Q-
available on our website at: Sonic, to calculate the actual flow rate of gas. The Omni compensates
www.omniflow.com temperature expansion effects on the flowmeter tube by equaling the flow to the
or send email to: profile corrected gas velocity multiplied by the temperature compensated tube
techsupport@omniflow.com
area. If required, it can also directly use the non-compensated flow rate value
transmitted by the ultrasonic meter as the actual flow rate.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 1
Q-Sonic Flowmeter Theory of Operation

Instromet’s ultrasonic gas flow metering technology incorporates multiple pairs
of transducers into a smart digital inferential instrumentation device. The device
is installed into a gas pipeline system to measure fluid flow. Each pair of
transducers emits ultrasonic (acoustic) pulses that travel bi-directionally, in either
a single (axial or diagonal) or double (swirl) reflection path, to and from each
transducer in the pair.
The flowmeters apply the Absolute Digital Time Travel (ADTT) method of
ultrasonic pulse analysis, which is based on the fact that pulses travel (between
a transducer pair) faster downstream with the flow than upstream against the
flow. The gas flow velocity is determined from this upstream/downstream travel
time differential of the ultrasonic pulses within the multiple reflection paths. When
there is no gas flow in the pipeline, the upstream and downstream travel times
are the same; i.e., the time differential is zero.
The Q-Sonic flowmeter employs 3 or 5 transducer pairs with a minimum of one
axial path and two swirl paths. This configuration allows for unique combinations
of reflection paths to best take into account the different effects of gas flow
profile variations, including swirl in the pipeline. The gas velocity can be
determined for bi-directional (forward or reverse) fluid flow.
Omni Flow Computer Logic

The Omni flow computer can determine the actual flow rate from either data
received serially from the Q-Sonic flowmeter or from a live pulse frequency
signal input, if one has been connected and assigned.
Totalization will be based on the flow pulse frequency input when the flow
transmitted by the Q-Sonic is in the correct direction (forward/reverse) and the
pulse frequency is within limits. This live signal will also be used in the event of a
communications failure between the Q-Sonic and the Omni. However, In order
for the Omni to use the pulse frequency signal, it must be wired to the Q-Sonic
and an I/O point assigned in the flow computer configuration.
The flow computer will temperature compensate the meter tube area and
calculate flow rate based on the profile corrected velocity of the gas transmitted
serially by the flowmeter. If the calculated flow rate is not within reasonable
limits, the Omni will directly use the transmitted flow rate as the actual flow rate.
2 TB-990101 23/27.73+
TB-990101 Communicating with Instromet Q-Sonic Ultrasonic Flowmeters
Start
No Q.Sonic
Comm unications
OK?
Yes
Set Q.Sonic Clear Q.Sonic

Comm unication Comm unication
Failed Alarm Failed Alarm
Is
Transm itted
No Flow Rate in
the Correct
Direction?
Yes
No Are Pulse I/O Are Pulse I/O No Clear Pulse Signal

Assigned? Assigned? Suspect Alarm
Yes Yes
Is the
Flow Based on No Set Pulse Signal
Pulses within Suspect Alarm
Limits?
Yes
Is the
No Flow Based on
Gas Velocity
Clear Pulse Signal within Limits?
Suspect Alarm
Yes
Disable Clear Flow Set Flow Clear Flow

Totalizing Delta Alarm Delta Alarm Delta Alarm
Calculate Actual Flow Calculate Actual Flow Calculate Actual Flow

Set Run as
Based on Pulse Based on Gas Velocity Based on Transm itted
Inactive
Input Signal & Temp Comp Area Flow Rate
End
Figure 1. Flow computer logic flow diagram for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 3
Wiring Installation
Serial Data Figure 2 shows the typical wiring required for connecting a Q-Sonic flowmeter to
Communications - The the Omni flow computer. A 2-wire RS-485 interface can be wired to either port
serial interface between
(terminals 1 and 2 for port 1, or 3 and 4 for port 2) of the flow computer terminal
these devices is 2-wire RS-
485 mode utilizing a block that corresponds to the SV combo module. You can install up to two SV
proprietary protocol. modules in the Omni flow computer, which will give you an availability of 4 SV
RS-485 ports. Although not required, it is recommended that the flowmeter
frequency pulse signals also be wired to the Omni’s input channel #3 (forward
Setting Up and Wiring to direction) and input channel # 4 (reverse direction) of an ‘A’ combo module.
Omni Combo Modules - In
order to communicate with
Input channel #3 corresponds to terminals 5 and 6, and input channel #4 to
Q-Sonic ultrasonic terminals 7 and 8 of the back panel terminal block respective to the combo
flowmeters, the Omni flow module. The actual terminal block numbers depend upon which backplane
computer must be equipped connector or slot the module is plugged. The ‘E’ combo module can also be
with at least one SV combo
module (Model 68-6203).
used in this configuration with slight variations in wiring connections (see
For instructions on jumper Volume I, Chapter 2-12).
settings and other process
I/O combination module
setup information, please
refer to Volume 1, Chapter
2 of the Omni User Manual
Figure 2. Example of wiring a Q-Sonic flowmeter to the Omni flow computer’s

RS-485 port #1 of an SV module with the recommended bi-directional
(forward/reverse) pulse output to input channels #3 and 4 of an ‘A’ combo
module.
Flow Computer Configuration

The flow configuration settings that are specific to the Q-Sonic flowmeter are
entered in the miscellaneous configuration meter run menu and the meter run
setup menu. You must enter the miscellaneous configuration meter run settings
first and then proceed to the meter run setup entries. These configuration
settings can be entered either via the Omni flow computer’s front panel keypad
or using OmniCom configuration PC software (see Chapter 2 ‘Flow Computer
Configuration’ in Volume 3 of the Omni User Manual, and the technical bulletin
TB-960701 ‘Overview of OmniCom Configuration PC Software’).
4 TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
Miscellaneous Configuration Meter Run Settings

The following miscellaneous configuration meter run settings correspond to the
Q-Sonic ultrasonic gas flowmeter:
" Select Flowmeter Device Type  Enter [4] for each meter run that you want
to select the Instromet Q-Sonic flowmeter as the device type.
" Select SV Module Port  The Omni flow computer can accept two SV combo
modules. With one SV module you have two SV ports available, and with two SV
modules four ports are available. For each ultrasonic meter run, enter the SV port
number (1 to 4) to which the RS-485 serial interface input from the Q-Sonic
flowmeter is wired to the flow computer.
" Select Flow Direction  Q-Sonic flowmeters allow for bi-directional fluid flow
measurement. You can setup the flow computer to totalize either forward or
reverse flow on any meter run with an ultrasonic flowmeter.
" Assign Flow Pulse Frequency I/O Point  Flowmeter pulse signals can
only be assigned to Input Channels #3 and #4 of A and E combo modules, and
input channel #3 of a B combo module. Enter the input channel number, which
will be used to input the ultrasonic flowmeter pulse signal.
Meter Run Setup Entries

The following meter run setup entries are available for the Q-Sonic ultrasonic
gas flowmeter:
 Enter the diameter of the ultrasonic flowmeter tube, in inches
" Tube Diameter
(firmware 23) or millimeters (firmware 27). This diameter is subsequently
corrected for expansion due to temperature, and used together with the 'corrected
gas velocity' through the meter to calculate flow rate.
 Enter the temperature, as degrees
" Tube Reference Temperature
Fahrenheit (firmware 23) or degrees Celsius (firmware 27), at which the ultrasonic
meter tube was measured.
 The ultrasonic meter tube will expand and
" Tube Expansion Coefficient
contract with temperature. The flow computer requires the linear coefficient of
thermal expansion for the meter tube material in order to correct the meter tube
area.
US Customary Units Metric Units

-100 to 300 °F = 6.20 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.12 x e
-6 -5
Mild Carbon Steel Plate
-100 to 300 °F = 9.25 x e -73.3 to 148.9 °C = 1.67 x e
-6 -5
304/316 Stainless Steel
 The actual user-

" Q-Sonic Maximum Flow Rate Deviation Percent
entered flow used by the flow computer to totalize depends upon several factors:
(1) If a pulse signal is available the flow computer will use it for calculations as
long as the calculated flow rate is within this 'flow rate deviation percentage'
of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
(2) If a pulse signal is not available or failed, the flow computer will use the
'corrected linear gas velocity' transmitted by the Q-Sonic and calculate flow
based on the 'temperature compensated area' of the meter tube. The flow
rate calculated by this method must also be within this 'flow rate deviation
percentage' of the flow transmitted serially by the Q-Sonic.
Summarizing, the flow computer first tries to use the pulse signal, then the
transmitted gas velocity value and finally the transmitted flow rate.
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+ 5
" Minimum Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Ratio  The flow computer
calculates the AGC ratio for each ultrasonic path in both path directions. An alarm
will occur if the AGC ration of any path drops below this ratio. Reasonable entries
are 1.5 to 2.
Difference Between ‘Gas " Minimum Percent Sample Ratio  This entry checks the ratio of good
Velocity’ and ‘Velocity of received data pulses verses total transmitted pulses for each ultrasonic path in
Sound’ - The ‘gas velocity’ both directions. A ratio below this setting will cause an alarm. Reasonable entries
through the meter tube is are 50% to 70%.
directly proportional to the
actual flow rate of the gas in " Velocity of Sound (VOS) in Gas Deviation Percent  In some
the pipeline. The ‘velocity of configurations, the flow computer can verify that the average VOS calculated for
sound’ (VOS) refers to the all paths agrees with the VOS of each individual path. This entry is the maximum
amount of time it takes a percent that any one path VOS varies from the average VOS of all the paths.
transmitted acoustic pulse
to travel through the gas
" Gas Velocity Low Cutoff  Some gas movement can occur even when an
ultrasonic paths. The VOS ultrasonic meter is blocked-in. This is caused by convection currents within the
will vary depending upon meter tube. Enter a minimum gas velocity, in feet per second (Revision 23) or
gas quality and flowing meters per second (Revision 27), below which you do not want to totalize.
conditions. Consult with Instromet to determine this value.
Flow Computer Database Addresses and Index

Numbers
The following tables list the Modbus database addresses within the Omni have
been assigned to the Q-Sonic ultrasonic metering feature. These tables are
categorized per data type.
Meter Run Alarm Status Points  Real Time Data

Database Address Database Address
Description for Meter Run Number Description for Meter Run Number
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Loss of communication 2154 2254 2354 2454 Path 1 - sample error alarm 2167 2267 2367 2467
Loss of pulse impulse 2155 2255 2355 2455 Path 2 - sample error alarm 2168 2268 2368 2468
Flow rate delta alarm 2156 2256 2356 2456 Path 3 - sample error alarm 2169 2269 2369 2469
Path 1a - AGC ratio alarm 2157 2257 2357 2457 Path 4 - sample error alarm 2170 2270 2370 2470
Path 1b - AGC ratio alarm 2158 2258 2358 2458 Path 5 - sample error alarm 2171 2271 2371 2471
Path 2a - AGC ratio alarm 2159 2259 2359 2459 Overall sample error alarm 2172 2272 2372 2472
Path 2b - AGC ratio alarm 2160 2260 2360 2460 Path 1 - gas VOS alarm 2173 2273 2373 2473
Path 3a - AGC ratio alarm 2161 2261 2361 2461 Path 2 - gas VOS alarm 2174 2274 2374 2474
Path 4a - AGC ratio alarm 2163 2263 2363 2463 Path 4 - gas VOS alarm 2176 2276 2376 2476
Path 5a - AGC ratio alarm 2165 2265 2365 2465 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Path 5b - AGC ratio alarm 2166 2266 2366 2466 VOS # Velocity of Sound
6 TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+
16-bit Integer Registers  Real Time Data

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455 Path 1a - AGC level 3180 3280 3380 3480
Path 1 - performance (%)* 3158 3258 3358 3458 Path 1b - AGC level 3181 3281 3381 3481
Path 2 - performance (%)* 3159 3259 3359 3459 Path 2a - AGC level 3182 3282 3382 3482
Path 4 - performance (%)* 3161 3261 3361 3461 Path 3a - AGC level 3184 3284 3384 3484
Path 1a - AGC ratio* 3163 3263 3363 3463 Path 4a - AGC level 3186 3286 3386 3486
Path 1b - AGC ratio* 3164 3264 3364 3464 Path 4b - AGC level 3187 3287 3387 3487
Path 2a - AGC ratio* 3165 3265 3365 3465 Path 5a - AGC level 3188 3288 3388 3488
Path 2b - AGC ratio* 3166 3266 3366 3466 Path 5b - AGC level 3189 3289 3389 3489
Path 3a - AGC ratio* 3167 3267 3367 3467 Path 1a - AGC limit 3190 3290 3390 3490
Path 3b - AGC ratio* 3168 3268 3368 3468 Path 1b - AGC limit 3191 3291 3391 3491
Number of paths 3173 3273 3373 3473 Path 4a - AGC limit 3196 3296 3396 3496
Number of samples taken 3174 3274 3374 3474 Path 4b - AGC limit 3197 3297 3397 3497
Path 1 - valid sample 3175 3275 3375 3475 Path 5a - AGC limit 3198 3298 3398 3498
Path 2 - valid sample 3176 3276 3376 3476 Path 5b - AGC limit 3199 3299 3399 3499
Path 3 - valid sample 3177 3277 3377 3477
Path 4 - valid sample 3178 3278 3378 3478 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Path 5 - valid sample 3179 3279 3379 3479
* Integer with two inferred decimal places.
32-bit IEEE Floating Points  Real Time Data
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Maximum flow deviation (%) 17513 17613 17713 17813 Path 1 - velocity of sound 17527 17627 17727 17827
Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) 17514 17614 17714 17814 Path 2 - velocity of sound 17528 17628 17728 17828
Minimum sample ratio (%) 17515 17615 17715 17815 Path 3 - velocity of sound 17529 17629 17729 17829
Max. VOS deviation (%) 17516 17616 17716 17816 Path 4 - velocity of sound 17530 17630 17730 17830
Gas velocity low cutoff 17517 17617 17717 17817 Path 5 - velocity of sound 17531 17631 17731 17831
Avg. path performance (%) 17520 17620 17720 17820 Path 1 - gas velocity 17532 17632 17732 17832
Velocity of sound (VOS) 17521 17621 17721 17821 Path 2 - gas velocity 17533 17633 17733 17833
Gas velocity 17522 17622 17722 17822 Path 3 - gas velocity 17534 17634 17734 17834
Pressure 17523 17623 17723 17823 Path 4 - gas velocity 17535 17635 17735 17835
Temperature 17524 17624 17724 17824 Path 5 - gas velocity 17536 17636 17736 17836
Gas flow rate 17525 17625 17725 17825 Notes: AGC # Automatic Gain Control
Net flow rate 17526 17626 17726 17826 VOS # Velocity of Sound
TB-990101 ! 23/27.73+ 7
32-bit IEEE Floating Points 32-bit IEEE Floating Points

Previous Hour’s Average Data Previous Day’s Average Data
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Number of samples taken 17537 17637 17737 17837 Number of samples taken 17568 17668 17768 17868
Path 1 - valid sample 17538 17638 17738 17838 Path 1 - valid sample 17569 17669 17769 17869
Path 1a - AGC level 17543 17643 17743 17843 Path 1a - AGC level 17574 17674 17774 17874
Path 1b - AGC level 17544 17644 17744 17844 Path 1b - AGC level 17575 17675 17775 17875
Path 1a - AGC limit 17553 17663 17773 17883 Path 1a - AGC limit 17584 17684 17784 17884
Path 1b - AGC limit 17554 17664 17774 17884 Path 1b - AGC limit 17585 17685 17785 17885
Path 1 - gas velocity 17563 17663 17763 17863 Path 1 - gas velocity 17594 17694 17794 17894
Notes: AGC Automatic Gain Control
8 TB-990101 23/27.73+
Flow Computer Configuration Data  Miscellaneous Meter Run Configuration

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Flowmeter device type 3108 3208 3308 3408 Flow direction (0=frwd,1=rvrs) 3155 3255 3355 3455
SV module port # 3153 3253 3353 3453 Flow pulse freq. I/O point # 13001 13014 13027 13040
Flow Computer Configuration Data  Meter Run Setup

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Tube diameter 7145 7245 7345 7445 Minimum AGC ratio (1 to 10) 17514 17614 17714 17814
Tube coefficient 7146 7246 7346 7446 Minimum sample ratio (%) 17515 17615 17715 17815
Tube reference temperature 7147 7247 7347 7447 Max. VOS deviation (%) 17516 17616 17716 17816
Maximum flow deviation (%) 17513 17613 17713 17813 Gas velocity low cutoff 17517 17617 17717 17817
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 9
Flow Computer User Displays

SV Module Serial Communications Port
You can view live data received via RS-485 communications on the flow
computer front panel LCD display only if a SV port is used to input the RS-485
interface from the Q-Sonic flowmeter. To view this data, press [Setup] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where “ n” equals the SV port
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:

!"#
" !"# $
" !"# $
" !"# %
&'()*+#,#"
-&'()*+#,#" .//
&)0()*+#,#" .
-&)0()*+#,#" $$
&'()*+#,#" $./
-&'()*+#,#" /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /
&)0()*+ /
-&)0()*+ /
&'()*+ /
-&'()*+ /

1 2
3 #" 2.
# 4 $2$$$56$
7#*28 $2$$$56$
9 2/.
9 $2$$$56$
-":

1 2

1 2/

1 2.
3#" 2
3#" 2
3#" 2
10 TB-990101 23/27.73+
Meter Run Data

To view the meter run data on the flow computer LCD display, press [Meter] [n]
[Display] on the Omni front panel keypad (where “ n” equals the meter run
number, 1 to 4, you want to display) when in the Display Mode. The following
data will display:
;55

# #< 2
2.
3 #" 2
="' 2/
# '"
# < 2
# < 2
# < 2
2
- 2/
2.
- 2%
2
- 2.
TB-990101 23/27.73+ 11
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) warrants all equipment
manufactured by it to be free from defects in workmanship and materials, provided that such
equipment was properly selected for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused.
Equipment which is returned, transportation prepaid, to Omni’s assembly plant within three (3)
years after date of shipment, and is found after inspection by Omni Flow Computers, Inc. to be
defective in workmanship or materials, will be repaired or replaced, at the sole option of Omni
Flow Computers, Inc., free-of-charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation, prepay
and add. Warranties on third-party manufactured devices supplied by Omni Flow or incorporated
by Omni Flow in the manufacture of equipment bearing an Omni label shall be extended by the
original device manufacturer.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the equipment has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
NO OTHER WARRANTIES. Omni Flow disclaims any and all warranties, either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantibility, fitness for a particular
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein. No agreement varying
or extending the foregoing warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in
writing, signed by a duly authorized officer.
LOSS OR DAMAGE. Omni Flow shall by liable only for loss or damage caused directly by its sole
negligence. Liability of Omni Flow for any claim of any kind for any loss or damage arising out of,
or connected with this warranty; or from the performance or breach hereof shall in no case exceed
the price allocated to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the claim. The liability of
Omni Flow shall terminate three (3) years after the shipment of the equipment from Omni Flow.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any incidental or consequential damages whatsoever (including, without
limitation, loss of business profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information,
or other pecuniary loss, or claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages)
arising out of the use or inability to use Omni Flow equipment or devices manufactured by third
party manufacturers.
Copyright  1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
No part of this manual may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval
system, without prior written consent of Omni Flow Computers, Inc., Stafford, Texas, USA. Making copies of any part of
this manual for any purpose other than your own personal use is a violation of United States copyright laws and
international treaty provisions.
Omni Flow Computers, Inc., pursuant to a policy of product development and improvement, may make any necessary
changes to this document without notice.
Omni 3000 and Omni 6000 are trademarks of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
OmniCom is a registered trademark of Omni Flow Computers, Inc.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.,
you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNI FLOW COMPUTERS SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of Omni Flow software programs (the ‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the
accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE is owned by Omni Flow and is protected by United States
copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like
any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a book or recording on magnetic media).
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, duplicate, decompile, or
disassemble the SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media in the form of disks or erasable
programmable memory circuits (“ EPROMs” ). If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade and transferred by
Omni Flow over a modem connection to magnetic media, or a single hard disk, then you may use
the SOFTWARE for the sole purpose of permanent transfer to EPROM’s. You may not retain a
copy for backup or archival purposes.
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s
production facility.
Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE and accompanying hardware. No agreement varying or extending the foregoing
warranties or limitations will be binding upon Omni Flow unless in writing, signed by a duly
authorized officer.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow shall not be liable in any
circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business profits or
revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or claims of
customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability to use
the SOFTWARE.
(SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS)
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and Omni Flow Computers, Inc. By the
installation and use of this product you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement.
OMNICOM SOFTWARE LICENSE

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Omni Flow Computers, Inc. (“ Omni Flow” ) grants to you the right to
use one copy of the OmniCom software program and accompanying written materials (the
‘SOFTWARE’) provided with the accompanying equipment manufactured by Omni Flow.
2. COPYRIGHT. The SOFTWARE and accompanying written materials is owned by Omni Flow
or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty
provisions. Therefore, you must treat the SOFTWARE like any other copyrighted material (e.g.: a
book or recording on magnetic media) except that in the sole instance of SOFTWARE provided
on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media disks, you may (a) make one copy of the SOFTWARE solely for
backup or archival purposes, or (b) transfer the SOFTWARE to a single hard disk provided you
keep the original solely for backup or archival purposes.
3. OTHER RESTRICTIONS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE provided on magnetic media. You may transfer the SOFTWARE and accompanying
written materials on a permanent basis provided you maintain no copies, and the recipient agrees
to the terms of this Agreement.
4. DUAL MEDIA SOFTWARE. If the SOFTWARE is provided on 5¼” or 3½” magnetic media
disks, then you may use the disks appropriate for your single-user computer. You may not use the
other disks on another computer or loan or transfer them to another user except as part of the
permanent transfer (as provided above) of all SOFTWARE and written materials
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY. Omni Flow warrants that the SOFTWARE will perform substantially in
accordance with the accompanying written materials provided with the purchase of an Omni
manufactured product for a period of three (3) years from the date of shipment from Omni’s
production facility.
Omni Flow’s entire liability shall be, at Omni Flow’s sole option, (a) remedy any defect and provide
you, at no charge, with replacement magnetic media or (b) download an upgrade via a dial-up
modem connection between Omni Flow and the end user, provided that equipment specified by
Omni Flow for that purpose is used.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the SOFTWARE has resulted from accident, abuse or
misapplication.
purpose, and any other warranties which extend beyond the terms herein, with respect to the
SOFTWARE, the accompanying written materials and hardware.
NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Omni Flow or its suppliers shall not be liable
in any circumstance for any damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, loss of business
profits or revenue, business interruption, loss of business information, or other pecuniary loss, or
claims of customers of the purchaser for any and such damages) arising out of the use or inability
to use the SOFTWARE.

Basic Operation Configuration and Advanced Operation Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Basic Operation Configuration and Advanced Operation Modbus Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Guide

Volume 2B Basic Operation

Volume 4B Modbus Database

Effective May 1999

World-wide Web Site:

Getting User Support

About the Flow Computer Applications

About the User Manual

xii ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Volume 1. System Architecture and Installation

Volume 2. Basic Operation

ALL.71+ ! 05/99 xiii

 Database Addresses and Index Numbers

Volume 5. Technical Bulletins

Conventions Used in this Manual

xiv ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Figure Captions Figure captions are numbered in sequence as they

Page Numbers Page numbering restarts at the beginning of every

Application Revision and The contents of Volume 1 and Volume 5 are

Copyright Information and Modifications Policy

Warranty, Licenses and Product Registration

Copyright 1991-1999 by Omni Flow Computers, Inc.

xvi ALL.71+ ! 05/99

Effective May 1999

1. Overview of Hardware and Software Features..................................................... 1-1

2. Process Input/Output Combination Module Setup ............................................. 2-1

3. Mounting and Power Options ................................................................................ 3-1

ALL.71+ w 05/99 iii

4. Connecting to Flowmeters..................................................................................... 4-1

5. Connecting to Transducers and Transmitters ..................................................... 5-1

6. Connecting Analog Outputs and Miscellaneous I/O Including Provers............. 6-1

7. Connecting to Serial Devices................................................................................. 7-1

8. Diagnostic and Calibration Features .................................................................... 8-1

9. Flow Computer Specifications .............................................................................. 9-1

ALL.71+ w 05/99 vii

Fig. 4-1. Connecting to a Turbine Pre-amp (A or B Combo Modules) ...............................................4-1

viii ALL.71+ w 05/99

1. Overview of Hardware and Software

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-1

1.2. Operator’s Panel

1.2.2. Electromechanical Totalizers

1.2.3. Diagnostic and Program LEDs

1.2.4. Active Alarm LED

1.2.5. Alpha Shift LED

1-2 ALL.71+ w 05/99

DIAGNOSTIC LED LCD DISPLAY

OPERATOR KEYPAD Temp Press Density D.P. Orifice Meter

Fig. 1-1. Features of the Operator Front Panel

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-3

1.3. Passive Backplane Mother Board

Fig. 1-2. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 3000

1-4 ALL.71+ w 05/99

Fig. 1-3. Passive Backplane Motherboard Omni 6000

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-5

1.4. Back Panel Terminal Module

1.4.1. Back Panel Terminations

Back Panel Fuses - All DC

1-6 ALL.71+ w 05/99

1.4.2. Extended Back Panel

Extended Back Panel

ALL.71+ w 05/99 1-7

1.5. Central Processor Module

Fig. 1-6. Central Processor Module - Jumper Settings